SpaceClaim2012 SP1 UsersGuide

SpaceClaim 2012
User’s Guide
SpaceClaim 2012 User’s Guide
Contents
Copyright Information ...................................................................................................................................... 1

Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 3
User's Guide ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Welcome window ............................................................................................................................................................................ 3
Tutorials............................................................................................................................................................... 4
Text tutorials ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
Self-paced training tutorials ........................................................................................................................................................ 4
Bracket and knob assembly tutorial ......................................................................................................................................... 5
Converting a solid to a sheet metal part tutorial............................................................................................................. 34
SpaceClaim objects ..........................................................................................................................................40
The SpaceClaim interface ...............................................................................................................................41
Structure tree ................................................................................................................................................................................. 43
Selection panel .............................................................................................................................................................................. 45
Working with layers ..................................................................................................................................................................... 50
Working with groups .................................................................................................................................................................. 52
Customizing a view ...................................................................................................................................................................... 55
Status bar ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 58
Options panel ................................................................................................................................................................................ 58
Properties ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 59
Keyboard shortcuts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 63
Using a multitouch screen ........................................................................................................................................................ 65
Mouse and touch gestures ....................................................................................................................................................... 73
Using the radial menu ................................................................................................................................................................ 73
Selecting ............................................................................................................................................................74
Selecting by drawing a box ...................................................................................................................................................... 80
Selecting by drawing a polygon ............................................................................................................................................. 83
Selecting by drawing a freeform shape (lasso)................................................................................................................. 85
Selecting by painting .................................................................................................................................................................. 87
Selecting using boundary ......................................................................................................................................................... 88
Using Clip with Plane .................................................................................................................................................................. 90
Using clip with volume ............................................................................................................................................................... 93
Changing your display ....................................................................................................................................95
Showing and hiding objects .................................................................................................................................................... 95
Locking and unlocking objects ............................................................................................................................................... 96
Orienting designs .............................................................................................................................................96
Spinning your design .................................................................................................................................................................. 97
Panning your design ................................................................................................................................................................... 99
Zooming in and out..................................................................................................................................................................... 99
Rotating your design ................................................................................................................................................................ 100
The Home view ............................................................................................................................................................................ 101
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
www.SpaceClaim.com Page i
Display a head-on view of the sketch view ...................................................................................................................... 101

Selecting a view........................................................................................................................................................................... 102
Snapping to a view .................................................................................................................................................................... 102
Applying a graphics style ............................................................................................................................ 104
Displaying edges ........................................................................................................................................................................ 105
Applying colors ........................................................................................................................................................................... 106
Changing object transparency .............................................................................................................................................. 108
Line styles ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 110
Painting display properties from one object to another ............................................................................................ 110
Applying a rendering style...................................................................................................................................................... 111
Displaying your design in multiple windows ................................................................................................................... 113
Splitting the workspace window .......................................................................................................................................... 114
Switching between windows in the workspace .............................................................................................................. 114
Maximizing the Design window ........................................................................................................................................... 115
Displaying workspace tools .................................................................................................................................................... 115
Sketch grid styles ........................................................................................................................................................................ 116
Displaying lightweight components ................................................................................................................................... 117
Working with SpaceClaim documents ....................................................................................................... 119
Creating, opening, and saving documents ...................................................................................................................... 119
Importing and exporting ......................................................................................................................................................... 121
Copying and pasting from other applications ................................................................................................................ 135
Printing drawing sheets and designs ................................................................................................................................. 135
Journals and logs ........................................................................................................................................................................ 137
SpaceClaim file format ............................................................................................................................................................. 139
Designing ....................................................................................................................................................... 143
Design modes .............................................................................................................................................................................. 144
Editing in cross-section ............................................................................................................................................................ 145
Cutting, copying, and pasting ............................................................................................................................................... 147
Dimensions ................................................................................................................................................................................... 149
Detaching ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 152
Undo and redo ............................................................................................................................................................................ 152
Checking Geometry ................................................................................................................................................................... 153
Working with sketch curves in 3D ....................................................................................................................................... 154
Sketching ........................................................................................................................................................ 155
Editing a sketch ........................................................................................................................................................................... 160
Copying a sketch ........................................................................................................................................................................ 163
The sketch plane ......................................................................................................................................................................... 163
Moving the sketch grid ............................................................................................................................................................ 165
Layout curves ............................................................................................................................................................................... 166
Moving in two dimensions ..................................................................................................................................................... 167
Dimensional sketching ............................................................................................................................................................. 168
Points ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 169
Lines ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 170
Tangent lines ................................................................................................................................................................................ 171
Construction lines....................................................................................................................................................................... 173
Rectangles ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 173
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
www.SpaceClaim.com Page ii
Circles .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 175

Ellipses ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 178
Tangent arcs ................................................................................................................................................................................. 178
Swept arcs ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 180
Three-point arcs .......................................................................................................................................................................... 180
Polygons......................................................................................................................................................................................... 181
Splines ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 183
Splitting curves ............................................................................................................................................................................ 188
Trimming lines ............................................................................................................................................................................. 188
Creating corners.......................................................................................................................................................................... 188
Creating rounded corners ....................................................................................................................................................... 190
Offsetting curves......................................................................................................................................................................... 192
Projecting onto the sketch grid ............................................................................................................................................ 193
Bending .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 194
Scaling sketches .......................................................................................................................................................................... 195
Scaling sketches with Pull ....................................................................................................................................................... 197
Editing ............................................................................................................................................................. 198
Editing with annotation dimensions ................................................................................................................................... 199
Mathematical expressions....................................................................................................................................................... 202
Pulling ............................................................................................................................................................. 204
Offsetting or extruding faces ................................................................................................................................................. 215
Extending or extruding surface edges ............................................................................................................................... 217
Rounding edges .......................................................................................................................................................................... 220
Rounding between faces and surfaces .............................................................................................................................. 226
Chamfering edges ...................................................................................................................................................................... 228
Extruding edges .......................................................................................................................................................................... 232
Pivoting edges ............................................................................................................................................................................. 233
Revolving faces ............................................................................................................................................................................ 235
Revolving edges .......................................................................................................................................................................... 237
Revolving helices ........................................................................................................................................................................ 240
Sweeping ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 242
Sweeping with multiple trajectories .................................................................................................................................... 245
Sweeping with an axis .............................................................................................................................................................. 248
Drafting faces ............................................................................................................................................................................... 249
Blending ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 253
Blending between faces ........................................................................................................................................................... 254
Blending between edges ......................................................................................................................................................... 257
Blending between points ........................................................................................................................................................ 260
Creating slots ............................................................................................................................................................................... 260
Scaling solids and surfaces ..................................................................................................................................................... 265
Copying edges and faces ........................................................................................................................................................ 267
Pulling with the Select tool ..................................................................................................................................................... 269
Pivoting with the Select tool .................................................................................................................................................. 270
Using Measure to drive Pull ................................................................................................................................................... 270
Moving............................................................................................................................................................ 271
The Move handle ........................................................................................................................................................................ 278
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
www.SpaceClaim.com Page iii
Moving symmetrically .............................................................................................................................................................. 280

Creating a pattern ...................................................................................................................................................................... 282
Exploding an assembly ............................................................................................................................................................. 291
Pivoting and pulling a solid .................................................................................................................................................... 292
Moving with the Select tool ................................................................................................................................................... 293
Moving with the Fulcrum tool guide .................................................................................................................................. 294
Moving protrusions and depressions ................................................................................................................................. 295
Using Measure to drive move ............................................................................................................................................... 296
Fill .................................................................................................................................................................... 299
Removing rounds ....................................................................................................................................................................... 314
Replacing faces............................................................................................................................................................................ 319
Tweaking a face ........................................................................................................................................................................... 322
Tweak face editing methods .................................................................................................................................................. 324
Add a control curve ................................................................................................................................................................... 325
Tweak face display options..................................................................................................................................................... 326
Inserting ......................................................................................................................................................... 326
Inserting another design ......................................................................................................................................................... 327
Downloading TraceParts.......................................................................................................................................................... 328
Inserting an image ..................................................................................................................................................................... 329
Inserting a video ......................................................................................................................................................................... 332
Inserting a plane ......................................................................................................................................................................... 334
To insert a plane ......................................................................................................................................................................... 334
Inserting an axis .......................................................................................................................................................................... 336
Inserting an origin ...................................................................................................................................................................... 338
Inserting a standard hole ........................................................................................................................................................ 340
Creating a cylinder ..................................................................................................................................................................... 346
Creating a sphere ....................................................................................................................................................................... 348
Shelling a solid ............................................................................................................................................................................ 350
Creating an offset relationship .............................................................................................................................................. 351
Inserting a face curve ................................................................................................................................................................ 352
Creating mirror relationships ................................................................................................................................................. 354
Mirroring a solid, surface, or face ........................................................................................................................................ 356
Setup a mirror relationship between two faces ............................................................................................................. 357
Remove a mirror face or plane ............................................................................................................................................. 358
Find similar faces on the other side of a mirror ............................................................................................................. 358
Inserting temporary points, axes, and planes ................................................................................................................. 358
Linear patterns ............................................................................................................................................................................. 363
Circular patterns .......................................................................................................................................................................... 368
Fill patterns ................................................................................................................................................................................... 372
Intersecting ................................................................................................................................................................................... 376
Combining and splitting .............................................................................................................................. 377
Merging solids and surfaces .................................................................................................................................................. 380
Merging solids ............................................................................................................................................................................. 381
Merging surface protrusions.................................................................................................................................................. 381
Merging surfaces ........................................................................................................................................................................ 382
Capping a surface with a plane............................................................................................................................................. 384
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
www.SpaceClaim.com Page iv
Splitting bodies and surfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 384

Splitting a solid with a surface, plane, or another solid .............................................................................................. 386
Using the Split Body tool ........................................................................................................................................................ 387
Splitting a face ............................................................................................................................................................................. 389
Splitting a surface ....................................................................................................................................................................... 393
Removing material from a solid ........................................................................................................................................... 393
Projecting to a solid .................................................................................................................................................................. 394
Working with components .......................................................................................................................... 397
Internal, external, and independent components ......................................................................................................... 399
Lightweight components ........................................................................................................................................................ 402
Assigning assembly conditions ................................................................................................................... 403
Aligning objects .......................................................................................................................................................................... 404
Anchoring components ........................................................................................................................................................... 407
Creating gear conditions ......................................................................................................................................................... 408
Orienting objects ........................................................................................................................................................................ 409
Locking the orientation and position of components ................................................................................................. 411
Making objects tangent ........................................................................................................................................................... 411
Moving parts in an assembly ................................................................................................................................................. 413
Detailing ......................................................................................................................................................... 413
Annotation ..................................................................................................................................................... 414
Creating notes ............................................................................................................................................................................. 415
Creating circular notes ............................................................................................................................................................. 420
Formatting note text ................................................................................................................................................................. 421
Creating note leaders ............................................................................................................................................................... 422
Creating dimension annotations .......................................................................................................................................... 425
Dimension between virtual points ....................................................................................................................................... 432
Creating geometric tolerance annotations ...................................................................................................................... 436
Datum and surface finish symbols ...................................................................................................................................... 437
Datum targets .............................................................................................................................................................................. 438
Surface finish symbols .............................................................................................................................................................. 442
Center marks and lines ............................................................................................................................................................. 443
Threads ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 444
Bill of Materials (BOM) ............................................................................................................................................................. 446
Tables .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 450
Hole tables .................................................................................................................................................................................... 451
Balloons .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 456
Bolt circles ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 457
Adding hyperlinks to annotations ....................................................................................................................................... 458
Drawing sheets .............................................................................................................................................. 459
Setting up a drawing sheet .................................................................................................................................................... 462
Formatting a drawing sheet ................................................................................................................................................... 462
Editing on a drawing sheet ..................................................................................................................................................... 463
Working with drawing sheet views ..................................................................................................................................... 464
General views ............................................................................................................................................................................... 465
Projected views............................................................................................................................................................................ 467
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
www.SpaceClaim.com Page v
Cross-section views ................................................................................................................................................................... 469

Offset cross-sections ................................................................................................................................................................. 473
Aligned cross-sections ............................................................................................................................................................. 474
Detail views ................................................................................................................................................................................... 476
Displaying a modular grid ...................................................................................................................................................... 477
3D markup ..................................................................................................................................................... 479
Creating 3D markup slides ..................................................................................................................................................... 481
Displaying changed dimensions........................................................................................................................................... 482
Coloring changed faces ........................................................................................................................................................... 482
Custom symbols ............................................................................................................................................ 483
Creating a custom symbol ...................................................................................................................................................... 484
Using custom symbols ............................................................................................................................................................. 486
Measuring and analyzing............................................................................................................................. 489
Checking clearance .................................................................................................................................................................... 489
Displaying interference ............................................................................................................................................................ 490
Measuring ...................................................................................................................................................... 491
Quick measurements ................................................................................................................................................................ 492
Displaying mass .......................................................................................................................................................................... 492
Displaying measurements ....................................................................................................................................................... 493
Measure a projected area ....................................................................................................................................................... 496
Analyzing quality .......................................................................................................................................... 496
Displaying normal direction ................................................................................................................................................... 497
Displaying curvature.................................................................................................................................................................. 499
Displaying draft angles ............................................................................................................................................................ 500
Display a face (UV) grid ............................................................................................................................................................ 503
Displaying a dihedral graph ................................................................................................................................................... 504
Displaying stripes ....................................................................................................................................................................... 505
Repairing problems ...................................................................................................................................... 506
Navigate through the issues .................................................................................................................................................. 507
Stitch adjacent faces.................................................................................................................................................................. 508
Repair gaps ................................................................................................................................................................................... 509
Find and correct missing faces .............................................................................................................................................. 510
Repair split edges ....................................................................................................................................................................... 513
Repair inexact edges ................................................................................................................................................................. 514
Extra edges .................................................................................................................................................................................... 515
Duplicates ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 516
Merge faces .................................................................................................................................................................................. 517
Simplify a design ........................................................................................................................................................................ 518
Remove small faces ................................................................................................................................................................... 519
Adjust tangency .......................................................................................................................................................................... 521
Curve gaps .................................................................................................................................................................................... 522
Small curves .................................................................................................................................................................................. 523
Duplicate curves .......................................................................................................................................................................... 524
Fit curves ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 525
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
www.SpaceClaim.com Page vi
Preparing designs for analysis .................................................................................................................... 525

Extracting volume ....................................................................................................................................................................... 526
Creating midsurface faces ....................................................................................................................................................... 528
Defining weld points ................................................................................................................................................................. 532
Creating enclosures ................................................................................................................................................................... 535
Splitting by plane ....................................................................................................................................................................... 537
Extend adjacent faces ............................................................................................................................................................... 539
Imprinting ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 541
Show contact ................................................................................................................................................................................ 542
Using the Rounds tool to remove rounds ........................................................................................................................ 543
Remove faces ............................................................................................................................................................................... 547
Remove interference ................................................................................................................................................................. 547
Beams .............................................................................................................................................................. 548
Creating a beam.......................................................................................................................................................................... 552
Extracting a beam from a solid ............................................................................................................................................. 552
Beam properties .......................................................................................................................................................................... 553
Changing beam profiles .......................................................................................................................................................... 555
Changing beam orientation ................................................................................................................................................... 556
Moving beams ............................................................................................................................................................................. 558
Changing beam display style ................................................................................................................................................. 558
Creating a new beam profile ................................................................................................................................................. 559
Working with sheet metal ........................................................................................................................... 560
Creating and editing sheet metal ........................................................................................................................................ 560
Converting a design to sheet metal .................................................................................................................................... 561
Identifying sheet metal ............................................................................................................................................................ 563
Changing sheet metal part properties ............................................................................................................................... 566
Correcting a sheet metal component ................................................................................................................................ 568
Sketching sheet metal parts ................................................................................................................................................... 569
Lines (Sheet Metal) .................................................................................................................................................................... 572
Tangent lines (Sheet Metal) ................................................................................................................................................... 573
Rectangles (Sheet Metal) ......................................................................................................................................................... 573
Three-point rectangles (Sheet Metal) ................................................................................................................................ 574
To sketch a three-point rectangle in sheet metal ......................................................................................................... 574
Polygons (Sheet Metal) ............................................................................................................................................................ 575
Circles (Sheet Metal).................................................................................................................................................................. 576
Three-point circles (Sheet Metal) ......................................................................................................................................... 577
Three-point arcs (Sheet Metal) ............................................................................................................................................. 578
Sweep arcs (Sheet Metal) ........................................................................................................................................................ 578
Tangent arcs (Sheet Metal) ..................................................................................................................................................... 579
Ellipses (Sheet Metal) ................................................................................................................................................................ 579
Splines (Sheet Metal) ................................................................................................................................................................ 580
Selecting sheet metal objects ................................................................................................................................................ 581
Pulling sheet metal parts ......................................................................................................................................................... 581
Moving sheet metal objects ................................................................................................................................................... 588
Rotating sheet metal walls ...................................................................................................................................................... 589
Modifying sheet metal parts .................................................................................................................................................. 592
Changing junction types.......................................................................................................................................................... 592
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
www.SpaceClaim.com Page vii
Creating and changing edge reliefs .................................................................................................................................... 595

Creating and changing corner reliefs ................................................................................................................................. 596
Creating and changing notches ........................................................................................................................................... 599
Creating and changing hems ................................................................................................................................................ 600
Making watertight corners ..................................................................................................................................................... 603
Creating a partial flange junction ........................................................................................................................................ 604
Adding sheet metal forms ...................................................................................................................................................... 605
Adding a cross break ................................................................................................................................................................ 610
Splitting a sheet metal face .................................................................................................................................................... 610
Adding a sheet metal bead .................................................................................................................................................... 612
Bending a sheet metal wall .................................................................................................................................................... 613
Adding a sheet metal marker ................................................................................................................................................ 619
Creating a double wall ............................................................................................................................................................. 620
Creating a sheet metal gusset ............................................................................................................................................... 621
Creating a tab .............................................................................................................................................................................. 622
Creating a hinge.......................................................................................................................................................................... 624
Adding engraved or cut-out text in sheet metal ........................................................................................................... 625
Creating a lightweight pattern .............................................................................................................................................. 627
Unfolding sheet metal components ................................................................................................................................... 628
Calculating unfolded lengths ................................................................................................................................................. 633
Bend allowances ......................................................................................................................................................................... 634
Using a bend deduction table ............................................................................................................................................... 635
Customizing SpaceClaim .............................................................................................................................. 640
Popular options ........................................................................................................................................................................... 641
Setting general detailing options ........................................................................................................................................ 644
Drawing sheet size and format options ............................................................................................................................ 647
Modular grid options ................................................................................................................................................................ 647
File Import and export options ............................................................................................................................................. 648
Appearance options .................................................................................................................................................................. 654
Snap options ................................................................................................................................................................................ 655
Units options ................................................................................................................................................................................ 658
Support file options ................................................................................................................................................................... 660
Sheet metal options .................................................................................................................................................................. 661
Advanced options ...................................................................................................................................................................... 663
Navigation options .................................................................................................................................................................... 670
License options ............................................................................................................................................................................ 671
Multitouch options .................................................................................................................................................................... 673
Configuring windows ................................................................................................................................................................ 674
Customizing the Welcome window .................................................................................................................................... 675
SpaceClaim add-ins....................................................................................................................................... 678
SpaceClaim API............................................................................................................................................................................ 678
ANSYS add-in ................................................................................................................................................ 679
ANSYS demos and tutorials ................................................................................................................................................... 680
Spot welds tutorial ..................................................................................................................................................................... 680
Midsurface tutorial ..................................................................................................................................................................... 691
Shared topology tutorial ......................................................................................................................................................... 703
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
www.SpaceClaim.com Page viii
Using groups and dimensions in ANSYS tutorial .......................................................................................................... 710

SpaceClaim parts and properties in ANSYS .............................................................................................. 717
Using groups to drive changes in ANSYS ......................................................................................................................... 719
Using named selections in ANSYS ....................................................................................................................................... 719
Shared topology in ANSYS ..................................................................................................................................................... 720
ANSYS Workbench settings ................................................................................................................................................... 722
Working in ANSYS 12 and 12.1 .................................................................................................................. 724
Configuring SpaceClaim and ANSYS 12 and 12.1 ......................................................................................................... 724
Connecting to ANSYS 12 and 12.1 ...................................................................................................................................... 725
Updating data with ANSYS 12 and 12.1 ............................................................................................................................ 725
Working with ANSYS 11 .............................................................................................................................. 726
Configuring SpaceClaim and ANSYS 11 ............................................................................................................................ 726
Connecting to ANSYS 11 ......................................................................................................................................................... 727
Updating data with ANSYS 11............................................................................................................................................... 727
Working with ANSYS 13 .............................................................................................................................. 728
Configuring SpaceClaim and ANSYS 13 ............................................................................................................................ 728
Connecting to ANSYS 13 ......................................................................................................................................................... 728
Updating data with ANSYS 13............................................................................................................................................... 729
Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 730
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
www.SpaceClaim.com Page ix
Copyright Information
Protected by US Patents 7,639,267, 7,733,340, 7,830,377, 7,969,435 and 8,207,990
Copyright © 2012 SpaceClaim Corporation. All Rights Reserved. SpaceClaim is a registered trademark of SpaceClaim Corporation.
Portions of this software Copyright © 2010 Acresso Software Inc. FlexLM and FLEXNET are trademarks of Acresso Software Inc.
Portions of this software Copyright © 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All Rights Reserved. Adobe and Acrobat are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries
ANSYS Workbench and GAMBIT and all other ANSYS, Inc. product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its
subsidiaries in the United States or other countries.
Contains BCLS (Bound-Constrained Least Squares) Copyright (C) 2006 Michael P. Friedlander, Department of Computer Science, University of
British Columbia, Canada, provided under a LGPL 3 license which is included in the SpaceClaim installation directory (lgpl-3.0.txt). Derivative
BCLS source code available upon request.
Contains SharpZipLib Copyright © 2009 C#Code
Anti-Grain Geometry Version 2.4 Copyright © 2002-2005 Maxim Shemanarev (McSeem).
Some SpaceClaim products may contain Autodesk® RealDWG by Autodesk, Inc., Copyright © 1998-2010 Autodesk, Inc. All rights
reserved. Autodesk, AutoCAD, and Autodesk Inventor are registered trademarks and RealDWG is a trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
CATIA is a registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes.
Portions of this software Copyright © 2010 Google. SketchUp is a trademark of Google.
Portions of this software Copyright © 1999-2006 Intel Corporation. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0. You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Contains DotNetBar licensed from devcomponents.com.
KeyShot is a trademark of Luxion ApS.
MatWeb is a trademark of Automation Creations, Inc.
2008 Microsoft ® Office System User Interface is licensed from Microsoft Corporation. Direct3D, DirectX, Microsoft PowerPoint, Excel,
Windows, Windows Vista and the Windows Vista Start button are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Portions of this software Copyright © 2005 Novell, Inc. (http://www.novell.com)
Pro/ENGINEER and PTC are registered trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation.
Persistence of Vision Raytracer and POV-Ray are trademarks of Persistence of Vision Raytracer Pty. Ltd.
Portions of this software Copyright © 1993-2009 Robert McNeel & Associates. All Rights Reserved. openNURBS is a trademark of Robert
McNeel & Associates. Rhinoceros is a registered trademark of Robert McNeel & Associates.
Portions of this software Copyright © 2005-2007, Sergey Bochkanov (ALGLIB project). *
Portions of this software are owned by Siemens PLM © 1986-2011. All Rights Reserved. Parasolid and Unigraphics are registered trademarks
and JT is a trademark of Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software, Inc.
SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation.
Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp. © 1986-2011. All Rights Reserved. ACIS and SAT are registered trademarks of Spatial Corp.
Contains Teigha for .dwg files licensed from the Open Design Alliance. Teigha is a trademark of the Open Design Alliance.
Development tools and related technology provided under license from 3Dconnexion. © 1992 – 2008 3Dconnexion. All rights reserved.
TraceParts is owned by TraceParts S.A. TraceParts is a registered trademark of TraceParts S.A.
Contains a modified version of source available from Unicode, Inc., copyright © 1991-2008 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under
the Terms of Use in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Portions of this software Copyright © 1992-2008 The University of Tennessee. All rights reserved. [1]
Portions of this software Copyright © XHEO INC. All Rights Reserved. DeployLX is a trademark of XHEO INC.
All other trademarks, trade names or company names referenced in SpaceClaim software, documentation and promotional materials are used
for identification only and are the property of their respective owners.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
www.SpaceClaim.com Page 1
*Additional notice for LAPACK and ALGLIB Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
-Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer listed in this
license in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-Neither the name of the copyright holders nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Introduction
SpaceClaim 2012 is the leader in 3D Direct Modeling solutions for rapid concept design and geometry
manipulation.
SpaceClaim is intended for use by those who need to focus on core competencies while benefiting from
working in 3D. With SpaceClaim, engineers can collaborate in the design and manufacture of mechanical
products across a broad range of industries. The software provides a highly flexible design environment
coupled with a modern user experience, and meets manufacturers' requirements for excellence in
engineering-driven product development that is both fast and cost-effective.
The Online Help (F1), Video Help (F3), tutorials, and training materials are provided to help you become
productive with SpaceClaim as quickly as possible. Before beginning your own work, review the Getting
Started section and step through the tutorials provided in the online help.
User's Guide
This User's Guide begins with a focus on the basic tools and on simple concepts. SpaceClaim is all about
adding and manipulating the faces of a design model, primarily through pull and move operations. If
there is a face, you can pull on it. If you need a new face, draw an edge or copy an existing one. Design
clutter is minimized wherever possible. This guide communicates these simple, but powerful concepts so
that you can extrapolate them to your real-world designs. This guide also provides useful shortcuts to use
as you progress, as well as animations of tools in action to help you understand their function.
SpaceClaim is different, and we encourage you to open your mind and enter into a world where you can
focus on the design, not the software. SpaceClaim appreciates your feedback, so let us know where we
have succeeded and what we can do better. Thanks for your purchase and we look forward to working
with you!
Welcome window
When you start SpaceClaim, a Welcome to SpaceClaim window displays. From this window, you can view
SpaceClaim Release Notes, Online Help and other Help documents, view videos and tutorials, and open
sample designs. SpaceClaim updates the welcome content each time the window is displayed.
When you finish with the Welcome window, click Close or press the Esc key.
You can hide the Welcome window by unchecking the Show at startup checkbox. To redisplay the
Welcome window, check the Show welcome screen box on the SpaceClaim Popular options page.
The layout and contents of the Welcome window can be customized by editing a single XML file. You can
add or remove buttons, edit the icon for a button, control the layout of buttons, and determine the action
executed when a button is pressed. For more information, see Customizing the Welcome window.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Tutorials
Tutorials and demos are available on the SpaceClaim web site. Step-by-step tutorials are also available in
this Help file. Working through each of the tutorials will allow you to quickly grasp the basics of using
SpaceClaim. We strongly recommend that newcomers to 3D design run through the tutorials. You will
gain competency with the functionality featured and the experience will help you master the remaining
features more easily.
Text tutorials
The following tutorials are available in the Online Help:
In this tutorial, you will
 Create a bracket using SpaceClaim's

sketching and 3D editing tools.
 Create an assembly by importing
and modifying a knob to fit into your
bracket.
Bracket and knob  Create a drawing sheet to detail your
design.
 Create and shell a simple solid.

 Use the selection filter and power
selection.
 Add corner reliefs to a sheet metal
part.
 Convert edges to sheet metal bends
and junctions.
 Create rips in the part so it can be
unfolded.
Sheet Metal  Unfold a sheet metal part.
Self-paced training tutorials
Self-paced, animated training tutorials are available on MySpaceClaim.com, a personalized web portal for
easy access to everything SpaceClaim. On MySpaceClaim.com, you can:
 Gain access through a unique user name and password

 Directly download SpaceClaim software, including purchased new products, updates, and upgrades
 Learn from self-paced training tutorials
 Submit a new idea
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To access MySpaceClaim.com, select the Login link at the top of the SpaceClaim.com home page.
Bracket and knob assembly tutorial
In this tutorial, you will:
 Create a bracket using SpaceClaim's sketching and 3D editing tools

 Create an assembly by importing and modifying a knob to fit into your bracket
 Create a drawing sheet to detail your design
This tutorial illustrates many of the tools and their capabilities by showing just one method of creating
geometry. In SpaceClaim, there are several other ways to create identical geometry.
Please note that as you move back and forth between windows, you may need to click in the SpaceClaim
window to activate it.
The tutorial should take about an hour to complete.
Create a new design document
1. Select New > New Design from the Application menu to create a new design.
A blank design containing the sketch grid is displayed in a new Design window. The mode is set
to Sketch, since that is usually the first step to create a new design.
The following figure shows some of the interface elements referred to in this tutorial.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Select Save from the Application menu to name and save your design.
The name of your design appears as the top-level component in the Structure tree.
Spin, pan, and zoom
1. Experiment with the various methods for orienting the view:

Use the middle mouse button. (Drag the middle mouse button to spin, Shift+drag to pan, and
Ctrl+drag it to zoom based on cursor position.)
 Use the Spin, Pan, and Zoom tools in the Orient ribbon group.
 Use the Spin, Pan, and Zoom tools at the bottom right of the SpaceClaim window.
 Use a Spaceball (optional).
2. Click Home in the Orient ribbon group or press the H key to restore the original view.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Set your design preferences
1. Click SpaceClaim Options in the Application menu .

2. Click Units.
3. Select Imperial from the Type drop-down.
Inches appear in the Length drop-down, the minor grid spacing changes from .1mm to 1/8 in,
and the minor grid lines per major changes from 10 to 8. This means that you can dimension in
inches, and that the sketch grid lines are now spaced 1/8 inch apart, and the darker grid lines
appear every inch.
4. Select Decimal from the Decimal/fraction drop-down.

5. Click OK.
Create the bottom of the bracket
1. Sketch a rectangle that will become the bottom piece of the bracket.
2. Click the Rectangle tool in the Sketch ribbon group on the Design tab.
The grid indicates that you are in Sketch mode.
Note that pressing the K key is a shortcut for quickly returning to Sketch mode.
3. Click to set the first corner of the rectangle. (Start at the upper left.)
As you move your mouse, a preview of the rectangle is drawn, and dimension fields
appear.
4. Type 1.125, then press Tab and dimension the second side by typing 4.281.
5. Press Enter to complete the rectangle.
If you make a mistake, click a dimension to edit it, or click the Select tool in the Edit
ribbon group and double-click the rectangle to select it. Then press Delete to delete the
rectangle and redraw it. You can also use Ctrl+Z and Ctrl+Y to undo and redo steps.
2. Pull the rectangle into 3D to create the bottom of the bracket.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Switch to 3D mode by clicking the 3D mode tool in the Mode ribbon group.
You can also use the D key to quickly enter 3D mode.
The Pull tool in the Edit ribbon group is activated, your sketched rectangle now
appears as a rectangular surface, and the surface appears in the Structure tree.
1. Click on the rectangular surface to select it.
The faint yellow cursor arrows show you the directions in which you can pull the
rectangle.
2. Drag to begin adding thickness to the rectangle.
You can drag with your cursor anywhere in the Design window—you do not have to drag
on the Pull arrow itself. We recommend that you move your mouse off to the side when
pulling to make it easier to see your changes.
3. Type .483 and press Enter.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The surface in the Structure tree becomes a solid. (Pulling a curve creates a surface, while
pulling a surface creates a solid.)
2. Press Ctrl+S or select Save from the Application menu to save your design.
Create the back of the bracket
1. Extrude an edge to form a surface.

1. Click the back edge of the solid with the Pull tool to select it.
The edge is highlighted and edge options appear in the Options panel and mini-toolbar.
Move your mouse closer to the mini-toolbar to make it more opaque.
If you moved the model in the Design window, click the Home button in the Orient
group on the Design tab. You can also press H. This orients the model to its default view
and sizes it to fit inside the Design window, as shown in the images.
2. Select the extrude edge option in the Options panel.
(You can hover over any option to display a tooltip that explains the option.)
The Pull arrows change to indicate the two default directions in which you can extrude
the edge.
3. Drag the edge upward to begin creating a surface.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. While dragging, press and release the spacebar to display a dimension field.
You can press the spacebar to edit a dimension whenever a dimension is displayed.
5. Type 1.4.
6. Press Enter to complete the surface.
This surface now appears in the structure tree, below the solid.
2. Pull the surface into a solid.

1. Click the surface you just created and drag toward the front of the solid as shown below.
2. Enter .483 to match the thickness of your first solid.

3. Press Enter to finish pulling and create the surface.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
In the Structure tree, the surface disappears and this new solid is automatically merged
with the first.
3. Save your work.
Round the corners
1. Round the inside corner of the bracket.

1. Click the edge on the inside corner of the bracket with the Pull tool.
2. Select the Round Edge pull option in the mini-toolbar and the Options panel.
3. Drag in the direction of the arrow to round the edge.
4. While dragging, press and release the spacebar to display a dimension field.
5. Type .2 and press Enter.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Round the outside corner of the bracket.

1. Turn the bracket so you can see the bottom by clicking the Spin tool in the Orient
ribbon group and dragging to spin your design.
Another way to spin is to mouse over an edge in your design, then press Alt and drag
with the middle mouse button to spin your design around that edge.(Release the Alt key
after you start spinning the model.) Spinning in this way lets you keep the current tool
active.
2. Repeat the previous steps to create a 0.4" round on the outer edge, as shown below.
3. Click Home in the Orient ribbon group to return the design to trimetric view.
3. Save your work.
Taper the end of the bracket (Part 1)
1. Sketch a dimensioned point on the top face of the long arm of the bracket, as shown in the
figure.
1. Click the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group and select the top face of the bottom
piece of the bracket.
Note that pressing the Esc key several times returns you to the Select tool.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Click the Point tool in the Sketch ribbon group.
You are now in Sketch mode. The sketch grid appears and the Sketch mode tool is
active in the Mode ribbon group. Because you entered Sketch mode with a face selected,
SpaceClaim assumes you want to sketch on that face, and orients the sketch grid along
that face.
3. Click Plan View in the Orient ribbon or the mini-toolbar to view the sketch grid head-
on.
4. Place the cursor over the bottom right vertex of the face (as shown below) and press and
release Shift, then move your mouse toward the back of the bracket along the right edge
without pressing any mouse button. A dimension field appears.
This method (often called "Shift+touch" dimensioning) allows any object in any tool to
dimension from that referenced object.
5. Press and release the spacebar to dimension the point’s distance from the vertex (1.5"
along the edge).
Press Tab if you need to switch dimension fields.
6. Press Enter to create the point.
If the point was created at the wrong place, you can press Ctrl+Z or click in the Quick
Access toolbar (on the left side of the SpaceClaim title bar) to try again.
2. Draw an angled line.

1. Click the Line tool in the Sketch ribbon group.
You can use the L key as a shortcut to the Line tool.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Click the point you created in the previous step (a small green ball appears when the
cursor is over the point) and then move the cursor to create a line similar to the image
(edges will highlight when the cursor is over them to indicate coincidence).
Two dimensions appear, one for the line's length and one for the angle formed between
the sketch grid and the line.
3. Press and release the spacebar to dimension the line. Using the Tab key, switch to the
angle dimension and type 103 to change the angle of the line.
4. Press the Esc key to end line creation.
You can also right-click and select Finish Line.
3. Remove material from the bracket.

1. Go to Home view and press P to enter the Pull tool.
You are now back in 3D mode. The 3D mode tool is active in the Mode ribbon group.
2. Click the triangular region created by the line and the edge of the bracket.
Note that the line effectively splits the original surface into two surfaces.
3. Drag downward until all the material is removed.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Note that as you pull, the Pull tool assumes that you want to remove material, and the
cursor changes to indicate that the pull is subtractive. If you pull in the opposite
direction, material will be added.
4. Save your work.
Taper the end of the bracket (Part 2)
1. Copy the existing edge to use as a pivot axis.

1. Use the Views drop-down menu to select the Isometric view, then rotate the model to
view the other side (see figure).
2. Select the bottom left edge of the bracket, as shown below.
3. In the Options panel or the mini-toolbar, select the Copy Edge option.
Two arrows appear to indicate the directions the edge can be copied along existing
surfaces. You can Tab between the directions.
4. Drag the edge along the surface 1.5".
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Revolve the face to match the angled face on the other side of the bracket.
1. Select the newly created surface between the new line and the end of the bracket.
2. Click the Revolve tool guide (located on the right side of the Design window).
3. Click the line created in the previous step.
The line is highlighted in blue and the Pull arrow changes to show that pulling will revolve
the selected face.
4. Drag to begin revolving the face. While dragging, press and release the spacebar to
dimension the revolve.
5. Enter -13 and press Enter to finish the revolve.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Save your work.
Round the tapered end
1. Clear your previous selections by clicking in white space in the Design window.
This method ensures that you stay within the same tool (Pull in this example).
2. Select one of the edges at the end of the bracket and Ctrl+click the other edge to add it to your
selection.
3. Click the Round option in the Options panel or the mini-toolbar.

4. Create a full round on the end of the bracket:
1. Drag in the direction of the arrow until both edges are slightly rounded.
2. Slowly pull the mouse back as if you were removing the round.
3. Keep going until the end is fully rounded.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Save your work.
Create a hole
1. Create a circle at the end of the bracket.

1. Click Circle in the Sketch group and then click the top surface of the long arm of the
bracket.
2. Click Plan View in the Orient group to view the sketch grid head-on.
You cursor will snap to the center of the arc created by the full round, and it is marked
with a cross.
3. Click the center of the arc and move the cursor to begin sketching a circle, then use the
spacebar to dimension the diameter to 0.3".
2. Pull the circle to create a hole in the end of the bracket.
1. Click the Pull tool in the Edit ribbon group and go to Home view.
2. Select the circular region and drag downward until all the material is removed.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Drag with the middle mouse button to spin the bracket so you can see through the hole.
3. Save your work.
Create a second hole
1. Copy the existing hole.

1. Select the cylindrical inner surface of the hole.
2. Click the Move tool from the Edit ribbon group.

3. While holding down the Ctrl key, select and drag the arrow (vector) in the Move handle.
The hole is copied along the arm of the bracket. You can see previews of the hole as long
as the geometry is valid.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Stop dragging anywhere to complete the copy.

2. Position the hole accurately.
1. Click on the same arrow or vector in the Move handle.
2. In the small toolbar that appears, click the Ruler Dimension tool.
A dimension will appear and snap to geometry as you hover over various entities.
3. Select the point created earlier or either of the edges that are coincident with it.
The dimension freezes and waits for a new value to be entered.
4. Enter a value of zero to align the axis of the hole with these edges.
You can also offset selected geometry from a reference by entering a value using the
same method.
3. Increase the size of the hole.

1. Press P to select the Pull tool and select the cylindrical surface of the hole.
2. Drag in the opposite direction of the arrow to increase the size of the hole to a dimension
of your choice.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Use Ctrl+Z to undo the previous operation and return the hole to its original size. If you
go too far, use Ctrl+Y to redo steps.
4. Save your work.
Create a pattern of holes
1. Create a pattern with the Move tool.

1. Press M to select the Move tool.
2. Check the Create Patterns option in the Options panel.
3. Zoom into your design by selecting Zoom Extents from the Zoom tool menu to make
the next step easier.
4. Click the inner cylindrical surface of the hole that you just created.
5. Press and hold the Ctrl key while dragging the Move handle along the long axis of the
bracket a distance of 1.7".
You can release the Ctrl key after you begin dragging.
A pattern count parameter is displayed, along with the dimension from the original hole
to the copied hole.
2. Edit the pattern.

1. Use the Tab key to highlight the count entry and enter a value of 4.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Four identical, equidistant holes appear on the bracket surface. These holes are now part
of a pattern. The dimension between each hole in the pattern is now displayed as well as
the other parameters.
2. Select the Pull tool and select an axis of one of your holes.
3. Drag to change the holes to slots.
Notice that changes made to one hole affect all the others in the pattern.
4. Press Ctrl+Z to undo your change.

3. Save your work.
Chamfer the top edge
1. Chamfer the top edge using the Pull tool.
1. Click the Pull tool in the Edit ribbon group.

2. Double-click one of the top edges to select the edge loop.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Note that double-clicking the same edge multiple times shows you each edge loop set
the edge is part of. If the wrong edge loop is selected, double-click to select an alternate
loop.
3. Select the chamfer edge option in the Options panel or the mini-toolbar.
4. Drag in the direction of the arrow to begin chamfering the edge.
Note that chamfers are 45 degrees by default, but you can change the distance of each
side.
5. While dragging, use the spacebar to enter a value of 0.1" for the chamfer’s setback.
6. Press Enter to finish pulling and create the chamfered edges.
2. Save your work.
Import the knob
1. Get the knob model.

1. Select SpaceClaim Options from the Application menu .
2. Click Resources.
3. Click Get Models to display the SpaceClaim Model Library on the SpaceClaim web site.
4. Find the TutorialKnob.scdoc file and click Download.
5. Press Cancel to close the SpaceClaim Options dialog box.
2. Insert the knob component.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Click Home to orient your bracket.
2. Click the Insert tool in the Insert ribbon group to display the Open Design window.
3. Navigate to and select TutorialKnob.scdoc and click Open.
The knob appears in the Design window inside the outline of an orange box with the
Move tool active to move it to a better position.
3. Move the knob so its small end is pointing at the back of the bracket.
1. Drag on one of the Move handle arrows (vectors) to separate the solids and make them
easier to work with.
2. Drag on the curved Move handle arrows (vectors) to approximately point the small end of
the handle towards the back of the bracket.
4. Create and activate a component for the bracket.

1. In the Structure panel, right-click the bracket (named Solid) select Move to New
Component.
A new component, Component1, appears in the structure tree and it contains the
bracket solid.
Its name is highlighted so you can rename it immediately after it is created.
2. Rename the new component to Bracket.

3. In the Structure panel, right-click Design1 and select Activate Component.
The active component is displayed in bold in the Structure panel.

Activating components allows you to select whether you are operating in the contact of
the assembly, sub-assembly, or part.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Save your work.
Modify the knob
1. Activate the knob as a component, preparing to work on it by itself.

1. In the Structure tree, mouse over the TutorialKnob component.
An orange box appears around the knob.
2. Right-click and select Activate Component.
The knob component appears in bold to indicate that it is active.
2. Create a pattern of grooves with the Move tool.

1. Turn the knob so you can see the whole groove by clicking the Spin tool in the Orient
To make this easier, zoom into your design by selecting Zoom Box In from the Zoom
tool menu in the Orient group.
2. Click Select in the Edit group on the Design tab.

3. Hold Ctrl and select both surfaces of the groove (the elongated surface and the flat
surface at the end, as shown below).
It is often easier to pre-select objects before you start the Move tool, because the Move
handle can obscure faces.
4. Click Move in the Edit group on the Design tab.

5. Click the Anchor tool guide (on the right of the Design window), then click on the axis in
the center of the knob.
This anchors the Move tool so the pattern will rotate around the axis of the part.
6. Select the Create Patterns check box in the Options panel.
7. Press Ctrl and drag the blue rotation arrow slowly.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
SpaceClaim gives you its best idea of what you would like for a pattern. It snaps at 45°. If
you kept going it would snap to a 60° pattern.
3. Remove unwanted space with the Fill tool in the Edit ribbon.
1. Rotate the knob so you can see the rounded corner under the head of the knob.
2. Click on the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group then click on the rounded corner.
3. Click Fill in the Edit group on the Design tab.
The rounded corner becomes flat.
4. Save your work.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Fit the knob to the bracket
1. Measure the small cylinder on the end of the knob.

1. Zoom out of your design by selecting Zoom Out from the Zoom tool menu.
2. Click Measure in the Inspect group on the Measure tab.

3. Select the small cylinder.
You will see measurements including the circle diameter (0.375 in).
Click on other parts of the model to see their dimensions.
2. Change the display and move the bracket so you can see what you're doing.
1. Right-click Bracket in the Structure tree and select Activate Component from the drop-
down menu.
An orange box appears around the Bracket.
2. Rotate the bracket so you can see its back.
3. Click the back of the bracket then click Sketch Mode in the Mode group. The grid
appears on the back of the bracket.
4. Click the Display tab.
5. In the Grid group, select Clip Scene Above Grid. The knob temporarily disappears.
You may also want to select Fade Scene Under Grid. This will fade the bracket and make
it easier to see the sketch profiles you draw.
6. Return to the Design tab and select Back from the Trimetric tool menu in the Orient
ribbon. The back of the bracket now faces you.
3. Create a hole in the back of the bracket so you can insert the knob into it.
1. Click Construction Line in the Sketch group.
2. Move the cursor over the top line on the back. The cursor snaps to the center of the line.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Click to start the construction line. Be careful to click on the top of the back and not on
the top of the chamfer.
4. Drag to draw a construction line to the bottom of the surface.
The line snaps to the center of the bottom edge. Press Esc to exit the tool.
5. Click Circle in the Sketch group and position the mouse at the top of the construction
line. (Do not press a mouse button.)
6. Press and release the Shift key to dimension from another point, then move the mouse
slowly in the direction you want to place the circle.
7. In the dimension box, type the value where you want to locate the circle center (.742). If
you need to, press Tab to switch dimension fields.
8. Press Enter. The cursor is moved to center of the hole.
9. Move the mouse slowly and a second dimension box appears into which you can type the
diameter of the circle (.376). Press Enter. Press Esc to exit the tool.
10. Click Pull in the Edit group (the view returns to 3-D) and then click on the center of
the circle so the direction arrows are over the circle.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You may need to hide the knob so you can see the bracket. Deselect the check box next
to the TutorialKnob component to hide it.
11. Select the Up To tool guide on the right side of the Design window. Move the mouse to
the side of the model and roll the middle button to select the hidden surface. When it is
highlighted, click. The circle goes to the surface and becomes a hole.
4. Create an assembly.
1. Click the check box next to the TutorialKnob component in the Structure tree to make it
reappear in the display.
2. Drag with the middle mouse button to spin the model so the knob is on the right and the
bracket is on the left.
3. Click Select in the Edit group (or press S), select the surface of the small cylinder on
the end of the knob, then hold Ctrl and select the inside surface of the hole.
4. Click Align in the Assembly group.

The knob moves so the axis of its end is aligned with the axis of the hole.
5. Select the flat surface of the knob just behind the small cylinder.
6. Move the mouse to the side of the bracket, turn the scroll wheel to highlight the back of
the bracket. Hold Ctrl and select the back of the bracket.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Click Tangent in the Assembly group.

The knob slips through the hole in the bracket.
The surfaces that move are those of the model you pick first.
8. Spin the assembly around to see that you assembled the bracket and the knob.
5. Save your work.
Create a drawing sheet for your design
1. Turn off the display of the knob by unchecking it in the Structure tree.
1. Click the Application Menu and select New > Drawing Sheet.
A new window appears with a drawing sheet that includes top, front, and right-side views
of your model. You can modify views, create and format annotation, format the drawing
sheet, and create markup slides.
2. Click the Design tab, click the Select tool, and move the parts of the model so they are closer
together.
3. Make the sheet smaller.
1. Click on the Detailing tab above the ribbon.
2. Click on the Format tool in the Sheet Setup group.
3. Select A Portrait size. The bracket drawing sheet moves to the center of the window in
portrait form.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. You can toggle between the model and the drawing sheet by using the tabs below the
Design window.
4. Save your work.
Annotate the design
1. Enter the width of the bracket back.

1. To make this easier, zoom into the bracket components by clicking on the Design tab
above the ribbon and selecting Zoom In from the Zoom menu in the Orient ribbon. If
necessary, shift-drag to center the view.
2. Click on the Detailing tab again, and then click on the Dimension tool in the Annotation
ribbon.
3. Click on the left edge of the wall of the bracket (bottom left of drawing) then click on its
right edge. Do not use the Ctrl key.
A dimension box displays the width of the wall.
4. Move the mouse up (no buttons should be pressed) until the dimension box is located
where you want it, then click.
2. Enter the width of the bracket base.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Click on the top edge of the bracket base (bottom right of drawing) then click on its
bottom edge. Do not use the Ctrl key.
A dimension box displays the width of the base.
2. Move the mouse over (no buttons should be pressed) until the dimension box is located
where you want it, then click.
Notice the dimension is the same that you used to create the bracket.
3. Enter the height of the bracket back.

1. Click on the bottom edge bracket base (bottom right of drawing) then click on the top
edge of its back. Do not use the Ctrl key.
A dimension box displays the height of its back.
2. Click and move the mouse (no buttons should be pressed) until the dimension box is
located where you want it then click again.
4. Enter dimensions for the top view of the bracket (top of drawing).
1. Click on the edge of the hole at the end of the bracket.
Move the mouse (no buttons should be pressed) until the diameter of the hole is located
where you want it, then click. You may need to click on the arrow to move it to the edge
of the circle.
2. Click on the top of the back of the bracket.
Move the mouse (no buttons should be pressed) to the bottom of the rounded edge.
When you move the mouse, many dimensions appear, including the tangent point of the
bottom edge. Click and move the dimension until you have placed it where you want it.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Notice the dimension is 4.281, which is what you entered to create the solid.
3.
5. Create a note.
1. Click on the Note tool in the Annotation ribbon.
Click where you want the note to be on the drawing and begin to type your note. Press
Esc to exit the tool.
2. Click on the Note Leader tool in the Annotation ribbon.
Mouse over the note to see where you can attach the leader. Click on one of the
attachment points and drag. When the leader reaches where you want it to end, release
the mouse and press Esc to exit the tool.
3. Create a Material Finish Symbol.
Select the Material Removal Required tool from the Surface Finish list in the Annotation
ribbon. Click a face in the design to place a leader, then click in an empty area to place
the surface finish symbol. You can enter text or symbols.
4. Change the design from the drawing.
You can see the solid models in the drawing by pressing the middle mouse button and
spinning the drawing.
6. Save your work.
Modify the design from the drawing sheet
1. Change the design from the drawing.

1. Change the size of the .3 diameter hole at the bottom of the bracket.
2. Turn the drawing so you can see inside the hole by clicking the Spin tool in the Orient
3. Click on the Design tab above the ribbon.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.Enlarge the view by selecting Zoom Box In from the Zoom menu in the Orient ribbon
and drawing a box around the hole.
5. Select the Pull tool in the Edit ribbon group then select the inside diameter of the hole.
Press and release the spacebar and enter a radius of .2.
6. Zoom out. The dimension has been changed to .4 on the drawing.
2. Two views of the changed drawing.
1. To see the drawing view, right-click and select View > Flat View.
2. To view the whole drawing, right-click and select View > Home.
Converting a solid to a sheet metal part tutorial
Introduction
Sometimes it is easier to start with a solid and convert it to create a sheet metal part. This tutorial will
guide you through the process and teach you how to use some of SpaceClaim's powerful tools to make
your work easier, whether you're working with sheet metal parts or solids.
 Create and shell a simple solid.

 Use the selection filter and power selection.
 Add corner reliefs to a sheet metal part.
 Convert edges to sheet metal bends and junctions.
 Create rips in the part so it can be unfolded.
 Unfold a sheet metal part.
Create a simple solid
1. Select New > New Design from the Application menu to create a new design.
2. Draw a rectangle.
1. Click the Rectangle tool in the Sketch group on the Design tab.
2. Click a point on the grid to set the upper left corner of the rectangle.
3. Move the mouse down and to the right to start drawing the rectangle.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Type 40 for the first dimension (or 1.5 if you have your units set to Imperial).
5. Press the Tab key and type 35 for the second dimension (or 1.3 if you have your units set
to Imperial).
6. Press Enter to finish drawing the rectangle.

3. Pull the rectangle into a solid.
1. Click Pull in the Edit group on the Design tab.

2. Select the rectangle and pull it up to 20 mm (or .75 inches). To type a dimension like you
did when you drew the rectangle, start the pull and release the mouse, then type the
dimension.
4. Now is a good time to save your design.

1. Click the Application menu and click Save, or just click Save in the Quick access
toolbar near the top left corner of the SpaceClaim window.
2. Browse to the folder where you want to save the file.
3. Type a file name and click Save.
Add an opening
Copy the top edge of the block to create the edge for the opening:

2. Double-click a top edge of the rectangle.
3. This will select four contiguous edges. You can double-click again to cycle through the possible
selections. Keep double-clicking until the top four edges are selected, as shown in the sequence
below.
4. Select the Copy Edge option in the mini-toolbar or the Options panel. This option is shown in the
mini-toolbar here:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Drag the edge about 7 mm (or .3 inches) toward the center of the top.
This creates a copy of the edge that is offset from the original edge by the amount that you drag
or type.
Shell the solid
1. Click Shell in the Insert group on the Design tab.

2. Click the face you created by copying the edge.
3. Change the shell thickness:
 If you are working in Metric units, change the thickness to 1mm and press Enter.
 If you are working in Imperial units, change the thickness to .04 and press Enter.
The solid will be shelled and the face you selected will be removed.
Convert the solid to a sheet metal part
1. Click Convert in the Import group on the Sheet Metal tab.
The Select Bodies tool guide will be active by default.
2. Select the body you created.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Walls, bends, and junctions (only default-sized junctions you created as sheet metal, not imported
junctions) are automatically detected and identified by color: Green shows one side, cyan the
other side, junctions are purple, and partial bends are yellow.
You will only see the color coding for walls because you didn't create any other elements in your
design.
3. Click Select or press S to exit the Convert tool.
The body is displayed in Azure (blue) if it was successfully converted, as shown in the sequence
below.
Split the top face to add rips
You must split the top face so the part can be unfolded.
1. Click Split in the Create section on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Click the Select Two Cutter Points tool guide on the right side of the Design window.
3. Select the two corners shown here:
The face is split between the two points and corner reliefs are automatically added.
4. Repeat these steps for each corner, so your part looks like this:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Add vertical junctions
Like splitting the top face, you must also add bends and junctions to unfold and manufacture the sheet
metal part.
Start by adding junctions on the vertical edges:
1. Select one vertical edge.

2. Click the Selection tab in the panel with the Structure tree.
This tab is the power selection tool, and it helps you find similar geometry in your design. See
Power selection for more information.
3. Click Edges with same length.
All of the vertical edges will be selected.
4. Click Junction in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab.

5. Select No Overlap from the Junction drop-down list.
Reliefs are automatically created on corners that don't have reliefs, as shown below.
Add bends on the remaining hard edges
1. Draw a box around the entire part to select it.

2. Click Hard sheet metal edges in the Selection panel.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
All edges that don't have a junction type set are selected. In this example, all horizontal edges on
the outside of the part are selected. We need bends on all of these edges so we can unfold the
part.
3. Click Junction in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab again.
4. Select Bend from the Junction drop-down list.
Your part now has junctions and bends, and it is ready to be unfolded:
Unfold the sheet metal part
1. Select a face of the sheet metal component that has at least one bend junction.
The selected face sets the orientation of the unfolded design.
2. Click Unfold in the Flat group on the Sheet Metal tab.
Your unfolded part should look similar to this:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
SpaceClaim objects
The SpaceClaim interface describes objects slightly differently than other modeling software you might be
familiar with.
Document
A SpaceClaim .scdoc may contain any combination of design versions, associated drawing sheets, and 3D
markup slides.
Design
A design is a 2D or 3D model, which contains at least one top-level component.
Component
A component consists of any number of objects, such as solids and surfaces. You can think of a
component as a "part." A component can also contain any number of sub-components. You can think of a
hierarchy of components and subcomponents as an "assembly."
Object
An object is anything recognizable by SpaceClaim tools. For example, 3D objects include vertices, edges,
faces, surfaces, solids, layouts, planes, axes, and origins. 2D objects include points and lines.
Examples of some object types are shown below:
Vertex Edge Face
Surface Solid
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Plane Axis Origin
Body
In SpaceClaim, a body is a solid or surface.
Assembly constraints
Components are aligned using assembly constraints. See Assigning assembly conditions.
Curve
An imported Curve file.
The SpaceClaim interface
SpaceClaim’s graphical user interface (GUI) was designed to conform (within reason) to Microsoft Vista
standards and contains the toolbars, buttons, and windows associated with a Vista-compliant graphical
application. As a result, only those features of the GUI that relate to performing SpaceClaim-specific tasks
are explained in this guide. We assume, for example, that you are familiar with standard Windows
conventions, such as dragging a window’s title bar to move the window, or clicking the close button to
close the window.
To take advantage of the full range of SpaceClaim features, we recommend using SpaceClaim with a scroll
wheel mouse or with a 3D Connexion SpaceBall or SpaceNavigator. However, SpaceClaim is also fully
operational with a laptop's touchpad and integrated mouse buttons. You can use the nub as a scroll
wheel, and configure the laptop so that pressing both buttons simultaneously behaves the same as
pressing a middle mouse button.
This image shows the major interface elements in the SpaceClaim application:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Application menu: Contains file-related commands and options to customize SpaceClaim.

 Quick Access toolbar: Can be customized so that it contains the file-related shortcuts you use most
often.
 Ribbon: Contains all the tools and modes you need to design, detail, and display models, drawing
sheets, and 3D markups.
 Active tool: The active tool is highlighted in orange.
 Design window: Displays your model. If you are in sketch or section modes, it also contains the sketch
grid to show the 2D plane on which you are working. The tool guides for the selected tool appear on
the right side of the Design window. The cursor also changes to indicate the selected tool guide. The
mini-toolbar places commonly used options and actions close to the cursor.
 Mini-toolbar: Contains frequently used options for the current tool.
 Tool guides: Help step you through using the tool and change the way the tool behaves.
 Status bar: The status bar displays messages and progress information about your actions on the
current design.
Panels
The panels initially appear along the left side of the application window. You can dock and detach these
panels.
 Structure panel: Contains the Structure tree, which shows you each of the objects in your design. You
can quickly show or hide any object using the checkbox next to the object's name. You can expand or
collapse the nodes of the tree, rename objects, create, modify, replace, and delete objects, as well as
work with components.
 Layers panel: The Layers panel allows you to group objects and set their visual characteristics, such as
visibility and color.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Selection panel: The Selection panel lets you select other objects related to the one currently selected.
 Groups panel: The Groups panel stores groups of selected objects. Selection, Alt+selection, and move
anchoring, axis, and ruler dimension information is all stored with the group.
 Views panel: The Views panel stores standard and custom views, and lets you assign shortcut keys to
custom views.
 Options panel: The Options panel allows you to modify the functions of the SpaceClaim tools. For
example, when you use the Pull tool, selecting an edge and then selecting the Chamfer Edge option
creates a chamfer instead of a round when you pull the edge.
 Properties panel: The Properties panel displays details about the selected object. You can change the
property values to change the object.
Structure tree
The Structure panel contains the Structure tree, which shows you each of the objects in your design.
Objects are displayed in the order in which they were created, or in the order in which they were
imported. The figure below shows all the object types that can be displayed in the Structure tree.
You can use the Structure tree to find objects, select objects, set object visibility, expand or collapse the
nodes of the tree, rename objects, create, modify, move, replace, and delete objects, as well as work with
components using the Structure tree.
You can uncheck the box next to an object to hide it in the Design window.
Some objects, such as sketch curves and 3D curves, are automatically placed in Curves groups in the
Structure tree. You can rename a curve, but not the curve group. You can move the Curves group, but
you cannot move a curve out of the group. Deleting the group deletes all the curves in the group.
You can set the visibility of a Curves group or an individual curve in the group, even if the Curve group
is within a dependent copy of a component.
To find objects
To find an object in the Design window, hover over an object in the Structure tree to highlight it in the
Design window. Hovering over a hidden object displays it temporarily in the Design window.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To find an object in the Structure tree:

 Hover your mouse over an object in the Design window to highlight it in the Structure tree. (Its
component is highlighted if it is not expanded.)
 Right-click an object in the Design window and select Locate in Structure Tree to highlight the object
in the Structure tree.
When Pattern is selected in the Structure tree, the selection list updates to display the number of patterns
included in the design.
To move objects
Drag an object or component to change its position in the Structure tree.
Right-click an object and select Move to New Component to create a component within the active
component and move the object into it. If the object has a custom name, the new component will have
the same name.
Ctrl+right-click multiple objects, then right-click and select Move Each to New Components to create a
new component for each object within the active component and move the objects into the components.
If the object has a custom name, the new component will have the same name.
You can move the view of a component from one drawing sheet to another by dragging the view in the
Structure panel.
An annotation plane cannot be moved to a subcomponent after you add dimensions because the
references would be lost.
Offset, mirror, and shell relationships stay with a solid when it is moved to another component, unless
the relationship would link two components when it is moved.
To set the visibility of objects using the Structure tree

 Check the box next to the object in the Structure tree to set the visibility of the object to the layer
visibility.
 Uncheck the box next to the object to hide it in the Design window and display its icon in gray in the
Structure tree, like Component2 in the figure above. You cannot work with hidden objects in the
Design window.
 Right-click an object in the Structure tree and select Always Visible from the context menu.
See Showing and hiding objects for more information about setting visibility.
To expand or collapse components

The top-level object displayed in the Structure tree (called Design1 in the image above) is a component.
To expand components:
 Click or press + on the number pad to expand a component. You can also right-click the component
and select Expand.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Right-click any component (including the top-level component) and select Expand All or press * on
the number pad to expand the component and all its subcomponents.
 To see hidden objects in a Curves group, click More curves. This is only visible when the group
contains many curves.
To collapse a component, click or press - on the number pad.
To rename objects
Right-click an object in the Structure tree and select Rename or press F2 to rename the selected object.
You can also click the object, pause, then click again to rename it.
The top level component is automatically named when you first save your design, but you can rename it.
To convert a solid to surfaces
1. Right-click the solid in the Structure tree.

2. Select Detach all.
All faces on the solid will be detached from each other and will become surfaces.
To lock and unlock objects

Locking a solid or surface prevents any changes from being made to it.
Right-click the object and select Lock from the context menu to lock the object. If you right-clicked a
component, all the objects in the component that can be locked are locked.
Select Lock again to unlock the object.
Selection panel
Use the Selection panel to select objects in the same part that are similar or related to the object currently
selected. The results list is based on the geometry you select for the search. For example, we searched
based on the round face highlighted in the image below. See the examples below to see what happens
when you click on each of the search results.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To select objects similar to the currently selected object
1. Select any 3D object.

2. Click the Selection tab to display the Selection panel.
The Selection tab is initially located at the bottom of the Structure panel.
3. (Optional) Select the All bodies option to search all bodies in the active component.
The following selection categories can be selected on more than one body:
 Edges: Same length, Same length with same orientation, Equal or smaller radius hole.
 Faces: Equal rounds, Equal or smaller rounds, Equal or smaller chamfer, Equal or smaller hole,
Same area, Same place, Equal radius cylinder.
4. (Optional) Select a category from the drop-down list to show only those objects with the selected
relationship.
Select All Types to display all the geometry related to your selection.
Selection categories
Category Description Example Selection types

Coaxial Objects with the Coaxial hole
faces same axis
Coaxial protrusion
Coaxial cylinder
Coaxial surfaces
Edges Edges that are like Edges with same length
the currently
selected edge Edges with same length and same
orientation
Edges with same length in same

face
Surface edge loop
Hard sheet metal edges
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Features Groups of faces Protrusion

that form
protrusions, Depression
depressions, inner
faces, or that Inner faces
enclose other faces
Enclosed by
Offset Faces that have an All offset baseline faces
faces offset relationship
defined All offset faces
Faces with same offset
All coincident faces

Patterns Pattern members, Pattern member
entire patterns, or
recognized patterns Recognized pattern
All pattern members
If the pattern does not have a

pattern relationship in
SpaceClaim, you must hold Alt
and select the face that
contains the pattern members
in order to select a recognized
pattern.
Rounds Rounds and Equal radius rounds
chamfers
Equal or smaller radius rounds
Equal or smaller-sized chamfers
Same size Faces that have the Equal radius cylinder

same radius or area
Equal radius hole
Equal radius protrusion
Faces with the same area
Holes equal to or smaller than
Surface holes equal to or smaller

than
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Bodies Bodies based on This power selection All bodies with volume <=, =, or
volume compared category is especially useful >= the volume of the currently
with the currently when you need to find and selected body
selected body. delete multiple, small items
in a design, such as
fasteners.
5. (Optional) If you turn off Automatically calculate power selection results in the Advanced
options, then you must click to search for related objects in your design. Otherwise, the search
results are automatically displayed.
Related objects are displayed in the main area of the panel. Mouse over the objects in the list to
highlight those objects in the Design window.
6. (Optional) Click on a blue link to change that parameter in the search.

7. Click any number of the related objects in the list to add them to the current selection.
You can Ctrl+click to select multiple objects.
To find all the edge loops of a surface
1. Select a surface that contains one edge loop.

2. Select Surface Edge Loop in the category list.
This option is useful when edge loops appear on top of each other in the Design window.
To select and create recognized patterns
1. Select a protrusion or depression that is a member of the pattern.

2. Hold Alt and select the planar face that contains the potential pattern.
You must select this face in order to recognize a pattern.
3. Select Recognized Pattern from the Related list.

4. Right-click the potential pattern and select Create Pattern from the context menu to convert the
selected protrusions or depressions into a pattern.
5. (Optional) Select a face of a pattern member to display the count and dimensions for editing.
To select faces that surround an internal void
1. Click a face of the solid with internal faces.

2. Select Inner Faces from the category list.
To find all faces within the range of areas between two faces
1. Select two faces.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Click in the Selection panel.
The search results display all faces in your design with an area between the two faces you
selected.
To select all same color faces
1. Open a model with different colors on multiple faces of the model.

2. Select a face of a particular color
3. Click on the Selection panel tab in the Structure Tree
4. Click on the Faces with same color option under the Same color folder in the Selection panel
5. All the faces with the same color as the originally selected face will be selected.
Examples
We selected the round face highlighted above.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The faces highlighted above are selected when you click All rounds are equal to or smaller than
4.34mm.
The faces highlighted above are selected when you click Depression.
The faces highlighted above are selected when you click Surface edge loop.
Working with layers
Layers can be thought of as a grouping mechanism based on visual characteristics. Visual characteristics
include visibility, color and line style. Layers are managed in the Layers panel and accessed and
modified with the Layer tool in the Display tab Style group.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The default layer color for new documents can be set in the Appearance section of SpaceClaim Options.
Layers are especially useful when you want to hide annotation planes.
Sheet metal parts have a set of default layers when the part is in an unfolded state. They are:
 Dimension
 Bend Lines Up
 Bend Lines Down
 Bend Dimensions
 Forms
To create a layer
Right-click in the Layers panel and select New.
This layer becomes the activate layer. Any objects created are automatically placed on this layer.
To place an object on a layer
1. Select one or more objects to assign to the layer.

2. Right click on a layer to open the context sensitive menu.
3. Choose Assign to layer.
To rename a layer
Right-click the layer in the Layers panel and select Rename or click the layer name and slowly drag to the
right.
Layer0 cannot be renamed.
To delete a layer
Right-click the layer in the Layers panel and select Delete.
Layer0 cannot be deleted.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To delete empty layers
Right-click in the Layers panel and select Remove Empty Layers.
To activate a layer
1. Right click on a layer to open the context sensitive menu.

2. Choose Make Active.
3. New objects created are assigned to the active layer.
To set layer visibility
1. Select a layer in the Layers panel.

2. Click to show the objects on the layer. Click to hide them.
If an object is located on a layer with the visibility turned off, and the object in the Structure tree
is set to show visibility by layer, the object is not visible in the Design window, and cannot be
acted on by the design tools. Layer visibility can be overridden in the Structure tree.
You cannot hide the active layer.
Use Hide Others on an inactive layer to make it active and hide the other layers.
You can make a hidden layer active which automatically makes it visible.
To set the visibility of layout lines and imported, DWG and DXF lines
Select Solid or Hidden from the layer's line drop-down in the Layers panel.
To modify the layer color
1. Select a layer in the Layers panel.

2. Select a color from the drop-down.
You can also specify a custom color by selecting Custom Color and using the Color window.
You can override the layer color for solids, surfaces, faces, or curves. See Applying colors to design
elements.
Working with groups
You can create a group from any set of selected objects. Selection, Alt+selection, section plane location,
move anchoring, axis, and ruler dimension information is all stored with the group. You can use groups in
combination with the SpaceClaim API to change these parameters, or use them as a way to indicate to
others your design intentions about which sort of changes you expect them to make to your design.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Scope
Groups can be saved for the root part or for its children. To change the scope at which groups are
displayed, select Root Part or Active Part in the drop-down list near the top of the Groups panel. This
allows you to see groups that are in children components without opening the component in another
window.
If an external part has groups defined in it, you can right-click the component and select Import
Component Groups to copy the groups to the current root part. This means you can open the
component in its own window to change the groups there as well. Because the groups reflect geometry,
they will change the geometry in original model where they were defined; but you're not changing the
definition of the groups. If you redefine the copied group, the original group will not get redefined.
Driving dimensions
When you select an object with a dimension property and create a group, a driving dimension is usually
created. These groups are added to the Driving Dimensions folder. Driving dimensions include offset
distance (faces with an offset relationship), round radius, and ruler dimensions. You can change the
dimension in the groups panel, and the geometry will change. These saved groups can be used for API-
driven modification and can be sent to ANSYS.
You can also get more information and examples in the following topics:
 Creating a driving dimension with Pull (offset)

 Creating a driving dimension with Move (translation or rotation)
 Creating a driving dimension with the Select tool (round radius and distance between offset faces)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Named selections
If no driving dimension is available, a named selection is created. This allows you to save selection sets to
easily recall them.
A round group is also created each time you fill a round and is saved in the Filled Rounds folder. You can
reattach a group of rounds as long as some portion of the original edges (or faces that bordered the
edges) still exists in your design.
Drag a group in the Groups panel to change its position in the list. Group order is important because they
are changed from top to bottom when the change is initiated in an external application.
To create a group
1. Select any set of 3D objects.

2. Click Create Group in the Groups panel or press Ctrl+G.
The group appears in the list. Mouse over the group to highlight the objects in the group and
click the group to select them. Properties and other information, such as the selected axis for the
last Move rotation, are saved with the group.
To create a coaxial group
1. Select two coaxial cylindrical faces on a solid.
The cylindrical faces must be on the same solid.
2. Right-click and select Create Coaxial Group.
The group is added in the Face Groups folder in the Groups panel. A relationship is created
between the cylindrical faces, so the faces remain coaxial when you change the faces. If you move
one of the faces, the other will move with it.
To edit a driving dimension
1. Select the driving dimension from the Groups Panel. The current value should appear next to the
Type.
2. Click the value. A dimension box should appear.
3. Type the new value for the dimension and press Enter.
The driving dimension is updated in the Design window. You can follow these steps to change
round radii, offset distance, and ruler dimensions.
To reattach a round
1. Right-click one or more round group in the Groups panel.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Select Reattach Round from the context menu.
To rename a named group
1. Right-click the group in the Groups panel.

2. Select Rename from the context menu.
3. Enter the new name for the group and press Enter.
To replace a named group
1. Select any set of 3D objects.

2. Right-click a group and select Replace Group.
You can only replace groups in Named Selections.
To delete a named group
1. Select the group in the Groups panel.

2. Click Delete Group.
You can also right-click the group and select Delete Group from the context menu.
If all of the objects that comprise a group are removed from the design, the group is
automatically deleted.
Customizing a view
You can change the shortcut keys for standard views and create your own custom views to save settings
for object orientation and visibility.
User-created views will not auto-scale when they are moved.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To change view shortcut keys
1. Select the View tab in the Structure panel.

2. Select a shortcut key combination in the Shortcut drop-down list for the view you want to
change.
To add a custom view
1. Position the view in the design window as you want it saved.

3. Click Create View at the top of the panel.
4. Select from the following options:
 Name: Enter a unique name for the view. The name will appear in the Structure tree.
 Shortcut: Select a key combination from the drop-down list.
 Orientation: Select if you want the current orientation to be saved in the view.
 Object visibility: Select if you want the visibility of objects in the current view to be saved in
the view. Objects that are hidden when you create the view will be hidden when you apply the
view. Visibility is applicable to all types of geometry, planes, and curves.
 Visibility behavior for new objects: Select the visibility behavior you want to apply to objects
you create after you create the view.
 Leave Unchanged: New objects will retain their visibility when you apply the view.
 Visible: New objects will be visible when you apply the view.
 Hidden: New objects will be hidden when you apply the view.
5. Click OK.
Your custom view is added to the View tool menu.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To apply a custom view
You can change the current view to a custom view in the following ways:
 Select the View tab in the Structure panel, right-click the view, and select Apply view from the context
menu.
 Use the shortcut key (if assigned).
 Select the view from the View tool menu in the Orient ribbon group.
To replace a custom view
1. Position the view in the design window as you want it saved.

3. Right-click the custom view you want to replace and select Replace from the context menu.
The custom view is replaced with the current view.
To rename a custom view

2. Right-click the custom view you want to rename and select Rename from the context menu.
3. Enter a new name for the view.
To edit custom view properties

2. Right-click the custom view you want to edit and select Properties from the context menu.
3. Edit the view properties.
To delete a custom view

2. Select the view you want to delete.
3. Click Delete View at the top of the panel.
You cannot delete standard views.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Status bar
 Status message: Displays messages and progress information about your actions in the current tool.
You can view these messages in the top left of the Design window by selecting Show status messages
in design window in the Popular options.
 Selection list: Shows you a list of objects you currently have selected. Hover over the list area on the
status bar to see a complete list. When Pattern is selected in the Structure tree, the selection list
updates to display the number of patterns included in the design.
 Selection filter: Allows you to choose what can be selected in the Design window. A label in the status
bar, located to the left of the selected object status, displays the currently pre-selected object. .
 Error and warning messages: Displays error messages as they occur. Click the icon to display all the
messages currently relevant to your design. Click a message to highlight the object referenced by the
message. Double-click a message to select the object(s) referenced by the message.
 Quick measurement: Displays simple measurements of the selected object(s), such as the distance
between two objects or the X, Y, Z coordinate of a point. See Quick measurements. Use the Measure
tool for other types of measurements, such as volume and mass.
 Revert selection: Reverts your selection to your previous selection.
 Transparency control: Changes the transparency of Lightweight components.
 View controls: Use these controls to spin, pan, zoom, and switch to previous or next views. You can
also change your view using the tools found in the Orient group, which is found on most tabs.
Options panel
The Options panel allows you to modify the functions of the SpaceClaim tools. For example, when you use
the Pull tool, selecting an edge and then selecting the Chamfer Edge option creates a chamfer instead of
a round when you pull the edge.
Options are enabled when the relevant geometry is selected.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This is the Options panel for the Pull tool when an edge is selected:
Some options are also displayed in the mini-toolbar:
Properties
The Properties panel is on the left side of the SpaceClaim interface, below the Structure tree and Options
panel. When you select a complete component, surface, or solid by triple-clicking it in the Design window
or selecting it in the Structure tree, you will see its properties in the Properties panel. You can use the
Properties panel to modify various properties values, such as Color to set the color of a selected face or
body, or to change other properties values.
In addition to components, surfaces, and solids, you can modify property values for sketched objects,
inserted images, patterns, and sheet metal. The property settings for these objects are described in detail
in their specific topics.
It may be helpful to configure the Properties panel so that you can see object properties and the Structure
panel simultaneously.
To modify an object's properties
1. Select an object in the Structure tree or right-click the object in the Design window and select
Properties.
2. Edit the property values.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To modify document properties
1. Select the top-level design or a component in the Structure tree.
You can hold Ctrl and select more than one component.
2. In the Properties panel, expand Document properties to display information such as the date and
time of creation and modification.
3. Enter additional information such as Creator, Description, Title, and Version.
These properties can be included in BOM tables.
4. In the Name section of the Properties panel, select Use File Name if you want to display the file
name for the top level design component in the Structure tree.
To create a custom document property
1. Select the top-level design or a component in the Structure tree. You can select more than one
component.
2. Right-click in the Properties panel and select Add Document Property to create a custom
property.
3. Expand the property to display its value.
4. Enter a name for the property, select its type (date, Boolean, number, or string), and enter its
value.
Delete a custom property by right-clicking the property in the Properties panel and selecting
Delete Document Property.
To create a custom component property
1. Select a component in the Structure tree.

2. Right-click in the Properties panel and select Add Component Property to create a custom
property.
3. Expand the property to display its value.
4. Enter a name for the property, select its type (date, Boolean, number, or string), and enter its
value.
Custom component properties can be used in BOMs and note fields. Delete a custom property by
right-clicking the property in the Properties panel and selecting Delete Component Property.
Material properties
You can set the gage for a material used in a sheet metal part. Assigning a gage enables you to control
the thickness of a sheet metal part at a more granular level. Gage, or, ‘gauge’, is the thickness of the metal
organized by numbers: the smaller the number the thinner the metal. A sheet metal design or component
of a design must be assigned a material in order for the gage drop down to display. You cannot select a
gage for designs or components that are assigned the ‘Unknown Material’ option.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To assign a material, from the Structure tree select the design at the top level, or select the component for
which you want to assign a material, and then click the Material Name dropdown from the Material
group in the Properties panel. From the Thickness group in the Properties panel, click the gage drop
down, and select a gage.
You can specify material properties for a component in several ways:
Select a material from the Materials Library

2. In the Properties pane, expand Material properties.
3. Click in the Material Name field to display the Materials Library.
4. Select the Library tab.
5. Select a material and click OK.
The material and its properties are displayed and can be edited in the Properties panel. The
material also appears in the Local Materials tab and saves with the SCDOC file. You can download
materials from Resources in SpaceClaim options.
Select a Material from the local library
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3. Click in the Material Name field to display the Materials Library.
4. Select the Local Materials tab.
5. Select a material and click OK.
The material and its properties are displayed and can be edited in the Properties panel. The
material also saves with the SCDOC file.
You can rename, copy, and delete Materials from the Local Library. You can also create new
Materials.
Create a material

3. Enter the name of the material in the Material Name property.
4. Enter the density of the material in the Density property.
If you specified the density for the material elsewhere in the design, or specified it in the same
SpaceClaim session, SpaceClaim displays that value in the Density property for you.
5. (Optional) Expand other material properties and enter their value and units.
The material and its properties appear in the Local Materials tab and save with the SCDOC file.
To remove a material from a component, select Unknown Material from the Local Library.
You can only change the Density value for material properties. All other values are determined by the
material you select.
Recognizing rounds and chamfers
Rounds and chamfers created in SpaceClaim are automatically recognized, but they may not be
recognized on imported models.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Select a round or chamfer face.

2. Change the Round or Chamfer property to True.
Drawing sheet properties
You can modify properties of the drawing sheet views and other aspects of drawing sheets such as
annotations, BOM, tables, and threads in the Properties panel.
Keyboard shortcuts
You can use the following shortcuts to quickly access tools, tool guides, and other SpaceClaim commands.
Blend B
Circle C
Combine I
Escape Esc
Measure E
Fill F
Home H
Line L
Pull P
Rectangle R
Select S
3D mode D
Plan view V
Section mode X
Sketch mode K
Up To tool guide U
Move M
Trim Away T
Spin Drag with middle mouse button
Pan Shift+drag with middle mouse button
Zoom Ctrl+drag up and down with middle
mouse button
Zoom Extents Z
Snap view Shift+double-click middle mouse button
Previous view Left arrow
Next view Right arrow
Application menu Alt+F
Close document Ctrl+F4
Complete Enter
Copy Ctrl+C
Create Group Ctrl+G
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Cut Ctrl+X
Delete Del
Detach face Ctrl+D
Exit Alt+F4
Invert selection Ctrl+Shift+I
Display next Design window Ctrl+Tab
Display previous Design Ctrl+Shift+Tab
window
Move sketch grid in Ctrl+right arrow
Move sketch grid out Ctrl+left arrow
Nudge active dimension by Alt+up arrow or Alt+down arrow
normal distance or angle
Nudge active dimension by Ctrl+Alt+up arrow or Ctrl+Alt+down
small distance or angle arrow
Nudge active dimension by Shift+Alt+up arrow or Shift+Alt+down
big distance or angle arrow
Nudge secondary dimension Alt+left or Alt+right arrow
by normal distance or angle
Nudge secondary dimension Ctrl+Alt+left arrow or Ctrl+Alt+right
by small distance or angle arrow
Nudge secondary dimension Shift+left arrow or Shift+right arrow
by big distance or angle
New Ctrl+N
Open Ctrl+O
Paste Ctrl+V
Print Ctrl+P
Print Preview Ctrl+F2
Redo Ctrl+Y
Save Ctrl+S
Save As Ctrl+Shift+S
Save As New Version Ctrl+Alt+S
Select all of same type as Ctrl+A
selected
Bold text Ctrl+B
Italicize text Ctrl+I
Underline text Ctrl+U
Hide object Ctrl+H
Undo Ctrl+Z
Zoom In Ctrl+ +
Zoom Out Ctrl+ -
Set spin center Ctrl+T
Locate spin center Ctrl+L
Clear spin center Ctrl+Q
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Expand entire node in * on number pad

Structure tree
Expand selected node in + on number pad
Structure tree
Collapse selected node in - on number pad
Structure tree
Activate object in Structure
Ctrl+Shift+A
tree
Change Highlighting
Ctrl+Shift+H
scheme
Toggle quick rendering
Ctrl+Shift+R
mode
Using a multitouch screen
SpaceClaim supports Microsoft® Touch technology. It allows you interact with your designs using a stylus
or multiple fingers on a touch screen. Touch screens with multitouch capabilities improve your work
experience by providing:
 User interface controls that are always close to a finger, so you use your mouse less often.
 3D interaction, such as panning and rotating views, that offers a different navigation mechanism than
with modifier keys or separate tools.
 More intuitive selection, because you put your fingers directly on the geometry you want to
manipulate.
 Modeling in a more hands-on environment, so it feels more like working on a real part than a virtual
part.
 Real-time, interactive design reviews using large format multitouch displays.
When using SpaceClaim’s multi touch feature, you can widen the SpaceClaim application window to span
across two multi touch monitors at the same time, or, you can move SpaceClaim between monitors to
display the entire SpaceClaim window on either monitor.
While a significant effort was made to optimize the multi touch functionality to fit (and enhance) the
SpaceClaim user model, the intention was never to replace the mouse entirely. Touch should be used
when it feels easier to do so, and the mouse should be used alongside the touch screen. The same
philosophy applies to keyboard shortcuts and even to precise selection techniques: the user is
encouraged to try out touch to see where it improves the user experience - and feedback is very welcome.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Touch is incorporated into SpaceClaim in many ways:
 Navigation (Spin/Pan/Zoom/Rotate) uses emerging Microsoft standard gestures (those having been
extended from 2D to 3D).
 Precise selection of toolbar buttons is made easier by heads-up bubble notes, that appear over the
icon that a finger may obscure.
 Radial menus have been introduced to ease the choice of selection types, as a shortcut to get to major
tools, and as a method to select edge loops.
 A flick gesture takes the place of the missing mouse wheel to select objects that lie behind other
objects.
 Where possible, difficult selections have been made easier by automatic selection, such as the one axis
that is free to move in the Move tool (on assembled components).
Timing-based mode and Gizmo-based mode
Two modes have been added for interacting with the SpaceClaim touch interface:
 Timing-based: This mode automatically chooses touch functions based on the amount of time a touch
signal is maintained. For example, using two fingers moving together to immediately drag invokes
panning, while holding two fingers down for a while, then moving them, invokes what are normally
right-mouse-button drag mouse gestures.
 Gizmo-based: This mode is intended to transition existing SpaceClaim users to the touch interface.
Existing mouse buttons and popular keyboard buttons are placed in an on-screen gizmo, to clearly
map existing functions onto the touch interface. The benefits in terms of usability are not as apparent
with the Gizmo style, but users are encouraged to experiment with it. Because the gizmo buttons act
exactly like the mouse and keyboard buttons, use of the gizmo will not be explicitly described here.
An exception is that using the gizmo does not allow for flicks, so to select objects that are under other
objects, you must place the gizmo over the object, then drag the Select gizmo button around the
gizmo circle, and it acts like rotating a wheel (and thus more directly maps to the mouse wheel
function.)
The mouse experience is characterized by a cursor that is always visible, whose default mode is to
innocuously move the cursor around the screen. Nothing happens with a mouse until a button is
pressed, or a movement is made with a button pressed. Conversely, with touch, there is a lack of an
always-visible cursor (and it would be obscured by a finger anyway.) And so in SpaceClaim, the default
mode is innocuous pre-selection, until a selection is made (in various ways described below.) In the
timing-based paradigm, once a selection is made, then following touch movements act as mouse-
button drag actions. Here the important difference in the Gizmo is the most apparent to the user - as
ALL touch movements are interpreted as pre-selection actions - and only touching the screen using the
gizmo button labeled Left acts as a drag (same as the left mouse button.)
Additionally, precise sketching is made possible by the gizmo, since it is difficult to draw lines when the
endpoint of the line is under the fingertip (in the timing-based scheme.)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Basic touch gestures
Description Action
Tap Touch screen briefly
Double-tap Touch screen briefly twice
Triple-tap Touch screen briefly three times
Touch Touch screen and hold. This multitouch
icon pops up to show the difference
between a tap and a touch.
Drag Touch screen, move finger or pen across

screen
Delayed Touch screen, wait briefly, then move
drag finger or pen across screen. This
multitouch icon comes up to show that
the input for the next selection will be an
Alt reference (normally highlighted in
blue.)
Flick Touch screen, move finger or pen a few

inches, then remove finger or pen from
screen
Hover Move pen over screen without touching -
- only works with a pen
Radial Touch the screen with one finger and tap
menu with two others to invoke the radial
menu.
Switch between radial menus with

successive two-finger taps or a following
tap in the center of the menu.
Radial menus are disabled when using

the gizmo.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Hold An animation is displayed when you use

a multitouch gesture with a pause, such
as touching with two fingers, waiting, and
then dragging to invoke gesture mode.
The animation shows the wait time as the
circle is drawn. When the circle is
complete, then the wait time has been
reached and the alternate behavior is
invoked. If you lift or move your finger
before the circle is complete, then the
alternate behavior or mode is not
invoked. So in this example of two fingers
touching, it would revert to panning the
view. Hold one, two, three or four fingers
to invoke different functions.
Navigation
Action Description
Pan Move two fingers together across the screen.
Zoom Move two fingers away from each other to zoom in or toward each other to zoom out.
Rotate Hold one finger on the axis you want to rotate around and move the other finger in an
arc that is centered on your first finger.
Spin Move three fingers together across the screen.
Spin on an Hold one finger on the axis you want to spin around and drag two fingers on the screen.
axis
Snap View Hold three fingers to activate the Snap View tool. While the Snap View tool is active, tap
for a left mouse click and flick for a left mouse flick. Hold three fingers again to
inactivate the tool. You can also press the Escape key to exit the tool.
If you use multiple screens, then the screen that is designated as the touch screen at the operating
system level is the one for which SpaceClaim detects touch input. If a SpaceClaim session has windows
on multiple multitouch displays, you can sequentially use one or the other display for multitouch
interaction.
Touch gestures in Select, Pull, and Move
Action Touch or pen gesture Mouse

Select geometry Finger: Tap Click
Pen: Hover to preview the selection, tap to select
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Add or remove Ctrl + tap Ctrl + click

geometry from
selection, remove
query-selected
edge loops
Add geometry to Shift + tap Shift + click
selection
In Pull and Select: Drag to pre-highlight the object(s), then lift
your finger.
Add geometry to Alt + click
alternate
reference
selection
Alt + tap
 If you are already dragging geometry, then a long touch with

a second finger changes to an alternate selection tool (shown
on-screen with a blue touch circle)
Select a tangent Double-tap or touch and double-tap Double-click(s)

chain of edges,
tangentially  If you are preselecting an edge, invoke the Edge Radial menu
connected faces, to preview and select one of the loops with the menu.
successive edge
 If you are using the Gizmo, use the Select gizmo button to
loops, etc.
scroll to the other loops.
Select a solid Triple-tap or touch and triple-tap Triple-click
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Select the next Scroll the

face or edge mouse wheel
(that is behind a
face or edge)
Finger: Drag to preselect, then flick one finger up
 You can change the direction of the flick in Multitouch options

 If you are using the Gizmo, use the Select gizmo button to
scroll to the other objects.
Box-select Finger or pen: Touch, pause, and drag to the right or left Click, hold,
and then drag
to the right or
left
Box-select with n/a
four fingers
There are two modes:
 Quick select: Touch with four fingers and lift to select

everything inside the box.
 Preview select: Touch with four fingers and pause to preview
the selection. Move your fingers to change the selection and
you will see a new preview when you pause. The selection is
confirmed when you lift your fingers.
This allows you to preview and change your selection before it

becomes final, rather than getting one chance to select the
objects you want. Slight finger movements will not interrupt the
previewing.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Lasso-select Invoke lasso selection with the radial menu Click Select,
faces or edges then click
Using Lasso
Paint-select Invoke paint selection with the radial menu Click Select,
then click
Using Paint
Invoke a context- Finger or pen: Touch long enough to show the multitouch circle, Right-click
sensitive menu (a then lift finger or pen
right-mouse-
button menu) Pen: Tap with pen button pressed
If using the gizmo, just click the button labeled Right on the
gizmo.
Use gesture Finger: Touch with two fingers, pause, then drag in the gesture Gesture with
recognition (see pattern. You will know when the gesture can start when two the right
Mouse and touch multitouch circles like this pop up under your fingers: mouse button
gestures)
Pen: Touch and drag in the gesture pattern with the pen button
pressed
If using the gizmo, just drag the button labeled Right on the
gizmo.
Reset all pen and Ctrl + Shift + F2 n/a
touch input
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Select more while n/a

pulling
While something is selected and being pulled with one drag

action, pause the drag action (keep the finger down), and use a
finger of the other hand to select more geometry with the
standard MT selection methods. Continued dragging of the first
finger will now pull the new (augmented) selection.
If the second selection is started with a Touch-Hold, until the

multitouch icon turns blue, and then continued through to the
selection, then that second selection is treated as an Alt-
reference - and the Pull tool reacts accordingly.
Navigate while While something is selected and being pulled with one drag n/a
pulling action, pause the drag action (keep the finger down), and use
two or three fingers of the other hand to perform
Spin/Pan/Rotate/Zoom actions. Continued dragging of the first
finger will now pull the existing selection - at the same time as
the model is being navigated visually.
Multi-touch with the Pull tool
 Select and drag geometry to change it.

 Immediately drag to pre-highlight geometry. You can also touch in white space and drag to pre-
highlight. This shows you what will be selected before you select it.
 After you pre-highlight geometry, tap with a second finger or raise the first finger to select the
geometry.
 Press the spacebar to enter dimensions for an offset face, just like you can when you use a mouse
instead of multitouch.
 Starting on whitespace, drag with one finger, then hover over an edge and double-tap with another
finger to query select through the available edge loops. This behavior is the same as a simple double-
tap.
 Starting on whitespace, drag with one finger and hover over a face and triple-tap with another finger
to select all the faces of the body. This behavior is the same as a simple triple-tap
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Multi-touch with the Move tool
 Select faces, bodies, or components to move or rotate.

 Select secondary objects to set the direction.
 Re-anchor the move handle by dragging the yellow ball at its center.
 Tap to activate a rotation or linear axis. This is easiest to do using a pen, or if just fingers, by dragging
along then up-to-select.
 Drag to move or rotate geometry.
Multitouch with Windows Vista™
Multitouch devices are automatically detected on computers running Windows Vista™, and SpaceClaim
can be run using these devices on Vista™. You may need to configure one display at a time to avoid
common problems with multiple displays and multitouch on Vista™ (a symptom of this is dragging a
finger across the multitouch screen's desktop, only to see a box made on the other screen).
You should set up the multitouch screen as the only display device first (make it the primary display), then
configure your second display device. After this, the setting is remembered and you can drag the
SpaceClaim session from one screen to the other, using multitouch as it is available.
Mouse and touch gestures
Use gestures in the Design window as shortcuts to common actions and tools. Gesture information is
displayed in the status bar as you use gestures.
 To gesture with a mouse, hold down the right mouse button and drag in the gesture pattern.
 To gesture with a touchscreen or touchpad, touch with two fingers, pause, then drag in the gesture
pattern. With a pen, touch and drag in the gesture pattern with the pen button pressed.
 To cancel a gesture, pause for one second.
If you have upgraded SpaceClaim from a previous version and some of these gestures don't work for
you, then you may need to remove your user settings file. On Windows 7™ and Windows Vista™,
remove the files and folders in C:\Users\<YourUserName>\AppData\Local\SpaceClaim.
Using the radial menu
This menu gives you quick access to the most commonly used tools and makes it easy to choose a select
mode while another tool, such as the Pull tool, is active. The radial menu supports secondary selection. For
example, you can select one of the Pull tool guides, then select loops of edges with the radial menu,
whether or not a primary reference was selected.
When the radial menu is displayed on a multi-touch screen, touch input is processed only within the
menu to avoid accidental dismissal of the menu.
You can change radial menu options in the Popular section of SpaceClaim options.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To use the radial menu
1. Press and hold the left mouse button, then right-click to display the radial menu.
You can also press N to open the radial menu.
If your mouse is over an edge when you open the radial menu, the radial menu for edges is
shown.
2. Click in the center of the radial menu to toggle between select modes and tools.
The active tool is highlighted in orange.
3. Mouse over or click one of the select modes or tools to activate it.
The radial menu disappears and the cursor changes to indicate the active select mode or tool.
You can click outside of the menu or press Esc to close the menu without making a selection.
Examples
Opening the radial menu for an edge
Selecting
The SpaceClaim interface describes objects slightly differently than other modeling software you might be
familiar with.
You can select vertices, edges, planes, axes, faces, surfaces, rounds, solids, and components in 3D. In 2D,
you can select points and lines. You can also select circle and ellipse centers, the midpoints of lines and
edges, and the internal points and end points of splines.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can select components and other objects in the Structure tree and use the Selection panel to select
objects in the same part that are similar or related to the object currently selected.
Objects that can’t be selected are dimmed in the Design window.
Your selection list is shown in the status bar at the bottom of the SpaceClaim window. Status bar labels
display both pre-selected and selected objects. Hover over the status message for a detailed list of what
you have pre-selected or selected, including primary and secondary (Alt+selected) objects.
Select modes
You can click the arrow on the Select tool to use the following optional modes:
 Using Box: Click and hold the mouse button while drawing a box in the Design window. If you draw the
box from left to right, all objects fully enclosed within the box will be selected. If you draw the box from
right to left, all objects touching the box will be selected.
 Using Lasso: Click and hold the mouse button while drawing a freeform shape. All objects fully
enclosed by the shape will be selected.
 Using Polygon: Click and move the mouse to draw a line, then click again to draw the next connecting
line, so that you create a polygon shape around the area you want to select.
 Using Paint: Click and hold the mouse button while highlighting adjacent faces and edges. All edges
and faces that you move the mouse over will be selected. Release the mouse button to finalize your
selection.
 Using Boundary: Select faces or edges that define a boundary, click the Select Seed tool guide, and
click any object within the boundary. All objects from that seed object to the boundary are selected.
No matter which mode you use, the objects that will be selected are highlighted to preview your
selection. You can use the Selection filter to control what gets selected. To select or deselect all available
filters, select the All checkbox.
If you entered the Design tab with sheet metal features selected, the Select tool will work as it does in
Sheet metal. Right click on the sheet metal part in the Structure tree and choose Suspend Sheet Metal
in the context menu.
To select
The most commonly used selection methods are:
 Click to select an object.

 Double-click to select an edge loop. (Double-click again to cycle through alternate loops.)
 Triple-click to select a solid.
 Drag (or select Using Box from the Select tool menu) to create a selection box.
 Press Ctrl+A to select all similar objects, such as faces, edges, or points on the same solid or surface
part. For example, if you have a sketch curve selected when you press Ctrl+A, then only sketch curves
will be selected.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Hold Ctrl and select to add or remove items from the selection. Ctrl with box-selection toggles the
selection; Shift with box-selection adds to the selection.
 Hold Alt and select to create a secondary selection set.
Only visible objects are selected with double or triple click. Objects hidden in the Structure tree are not
selected.
Examples
Click once to
select a face:
Double-click to
select and cycle
through chains of
similar,
connected faces
(face loops):
Triple-click to
select a solid:
Click once to
select an edge:
Double-click to
select and cycle
through chains of
connected edges
(edge loops):
Detailed instructions
1. Select the Select tool from the Edit ribbon group.

2. Mouse over the vertices, edges, faces in the workspace to preview the selectable items in your
design.
If multiple objects occur at your cursor location, use the scroll wheel or arrow keys to preview
each one.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Click to select a vertex, edge, or face in 3D; click to select a line or point in 2D.
To select: Do this:
All the edges around a face Double-click an edge or line. Double-click again to select the next loop
or closed loop of edges. Repeat as necessary. You can also right-click the edge or line
and choose one of the loop options in the Select menu.
When you repeatedly double-click outside surface edges, the selection

cycles through open loop, tangent chain, and face loop, then repeats
through that list.
All tangent faces Double-click a face. (Tangent faces are created by rounds or when edges
are drawn on a face.)
Contiguous edges or faces Click one face or edge, then Shift+click another face or edge to select all
the faces or edges between the two.
The sides (but not the top Triple-click the solid and Ctrl+click the top and bottom to remove them
and bottom) of a solid from the selection.
A solid or surface body Triple-click the solid, or right-click on the solid and select Select > Body.
An entire sketch Triple-click the sketch.
A component Right-click on the component and select Select > Component. This
option is available only when you right-click an object within the active
component.
All objects of same type as Select an object and press Ctrl+A.
selected object
All the objects in the active Click Select All in the Select tool menu, or right-click and select Select >
component (except layout Select All from the context menu. The types of objects selected depend
surfaces) on whether you are in Sketch, Section, or 3D mode.
Layout surfaces Click the object in the Structure tree.
Anything within a selection See Box-selecting.
box
A lightweight component Check the Lightweight Components box in the Options panel. Then
right-click and select Select > Component.
The inverse of the current Right-click a selected object and select Select > Inverse Selection.
selection (in the active
component)
A protrusion Right-click on a protrusion and select Select > Protrusion.
A depression Right-click inside a depression and select Select > Depression.
One member of a pattern Right-click a pattern member and select Select > Pattern Member.
All members of a pattern Right-click a pattern member and select Select > All Pattern Members.
Anything partially in a Click and drag from the lower right to upper left when drawing a
selection box selection box.
The inverse of the current Press and hold Ctrl while box-selecting to toggle the selected state of
box selection the objects within the selection.
Objects that are behind Hold the Ctrl key and turn the mouse wheel.
other objects ("query
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
selection")
If any object was part of a group selection used to perform an action, the other parts of the group
are highlighted when that object is selected. Click again to select the entire highlighted group.
When selecting within a view on a drawing sheet, you can only select those objects that are on
the cross-section plane, or that are within the boundary of a detail view. Box selecting in Sketch
mode selects only sketch lines. Box-selecting in Section mode selects only section lines.
(Optional) Ctrl+click and Shift+click to add or remove items from the selection set.
Ctrl+click to add or remove one item from the selection set. Shift+click to add everything
between your first click and the Shift+click to the selection. You can add or remove items both in
the workspace and on the Structure tree. You can also press Ctrl and drag to add the items within
the selection box to the selection.
(Optional) Alt+click to create a secondary selection set.
Hold down the Alt key while performing any of the other selection techniques (double-click,
triple-click, Ctrl, Shift) to create the second selection set. Alternate selections are shown in blue,
and are used to guide the actions of the Pull and Move tools.
To clear a selection
Click any empty space in the Design window or select Clear Selection from the Select tool menu.
To revert your selection
Click Revert Selection in the status bar to go back to your previous selection.
This tool is especially useful when you accidentally clear your selection or add the wrong object and want
to go back to your previous selection. You can find this tool next to the Selection filter in the status bar, as
shown below.
To select by turning the mouse wheel

 Coincident objects: Objects often appear at the same location in 2D, such as a vertex and end point of
a line that are located at the same point in space. When selecting, check that you have selected the
correct object by turning the mouse wheel without moving the mouse.
 Edge shared by two surfaces or solids: Mousing over the edge shades the face that will be affected
by an action to the edge if you select it. Turn the mouse wheel to switch between the two faces.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Vertex shared between two edges: Mousing over a vertex shades the edge that will be affected by an
action to the vertex if you select it. Turn the mouse wheel to switch between the edges.
 Face of a solid when only the edge is displayed (such as in a drawing sheet view): You can select the
face by turning the mouse wheel. The edge becomes a slightly thicker line when the face is highlighted.
 Edge loops: If Select edge loops using the mouse scroll wheel is selected in the Advanced
SpaceClaim options, scrolling through edge loop choices pre-highlights the selection. Click on the pre-
highlighted edge loop to select it.
The up and down arrow keys work the same as the mouse wheel. Mouse over the element you want to
select, and press the up or down arrow keys to "scroll" through the possible selections. This is useful if you
are on a laptop or when you use a mouse that doesn't have a scroll wheel.
Tool guides
Within the Select tool, the following tool guide is available:
The Select tool guide is active by default. This tool lets you click, double-click, triple-click, Ctrl+click,
Shift+click, and Alt+click to select items.
Options
The following options are available for sketches:
Maintain sketch Keep the connection between a sketch curve and other curves that share its end
connectivity points. If you deselect this option and move a sketch curve, the curve will move
independent of other curves.
Cartesian dimensions Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian dimensions
from the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the
point you select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y
distances from the origin. When you select a point, the X, Y, and Z locations
display in the status bar.
Polar dimensions Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions from
the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you
select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from
the origin.
Snap to grid Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap to
the minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for
Metric and 0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid
spacing.
Snap to angle Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees.
See Snap options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
Selecting by drawing a box
The Using Box mode is found in the menu under the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group on the Design
tab, and also in the radial menu. You can access this menu while almost any tool is active. For example, if
you want to change selection modes while the Pull tool is active, just click the arrow under Select. The Pull
tool will remain active.
From the context menu, you can also choose Select > Using Box.
The mode enables you to draw a box in the Design window to select objects for most tools. As you draw a
selection box, objects are highlighted (after a slight delay) to help you see exactly what will be selected.
Draw the box from left to right to select only the objects that are fully contained within the box. The box
appears as a solid line.
Draw the box from right to left to select everything the box crosses, even if it isn't fully enclosed by the
box. The box appears as a dashed line.
In the animation below, box mode is used twice with the selection filter set to Smart (the default) to select
the entire part. You can see vertices, edges, and faces highlighted for selection as the box is drawn. First
the part is selected by fully enclosing the part with a box drawn from left to right. Then the part is selected
by drawing a box from right to left that crosses over but does not enclose all faces on the part. You can
release the mouse button at any time to select the highlighted objects.
To select objects by drawing a box
1. Click the arrow beneath the Select tool and click Using Box, or click and hold in the Design
window to activate the radial menu and then select Lasso.
2. (Optional) Use the Selection Filter in the status bar to change the type of objects that will be
selected.
The Smart option is enabled by default and whenever you switch to another tool. Select Smart to
select the highest checked item in the list that is found in the boxed, lassoed, or painted area.
Drawing a box or freeform shape selects objects in the following order:
 In a Design Window: Face, Edge, Sketch, Annotation, Plane, Axis, Point

 In a Drawing Window: Annotation, Sketch, Face, Edge, Plane, Axis, Point
Deselect Smart to select all the selected object types. Click to select or clear the types of objects
you want to select.
3. Start drawing a rectangle in the Design window. Click and hold the left mouse button at one
corner of the area you want to box-select.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Hold the mouse button and draw a rectangle in the Design window.
 Draw the box from left to right to select only the objects that are fully contained within the
box. The box appears as a solid line.
 Draw the box from right to left to select everything in the box, even if it isn't fully enclosed by
the box. The box appears as a dashed line.
The objects that will be selected are highlighted as you draw the box.
5. Release the mouse button to complete the box.
The objects are selected when you release the mouse button.
Filtering your selection
Filter the selection using the Selection Filter control in the status bar, as shown in the image below. The
Smart option controls how objects are selected when you use the Box, Lasso, or Paint selection modes to
select objects in the design area:
 Smart checked on will only select the highest checked item in the list that is currently in the selection
area.
 Smart checked off will select all of the checked items in the list that are currently in the selection area.
When you switch to another tool, the filter selections are remembered but the Smart option is enabled. If
you disable the Smart option, the previously checked options will be selected.
Changing your selection
Holding Shift while box-selecting adds to the selection. In the first image, the blue box is selected. After
holding Shift and box selecting, all of the boxes are selected:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Holding Ctrl while box-selecting toggles the selection. In the first image, the blue box is selected. After
holding Ctrl and box selecting, the blue box is deselected and the green boxes are selected:
Examples
Box-selecting from left to right
Box-selecting from right to left
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Box-selecting with Smart enabled in the Selection Filter
Box-selecting with Smart disabled in the Selection Filter
Selecting points by turning off Smart, Faces, and Edges in the Selection filter, then drawing a box around
the object in the Design window
Selecting by drawing a polygon
The Using Polygon mode is found in the menu under the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group on the
Design tab, and under the Select tool in the Edit Group on the Sheet Metal tab. You can also right-click in
the design window and choose Select>Using Polygon. This selection mode enables you to select all
objects within a polygon you create. Each time you click, a new starting point for the next line is
created. You control the length and angle of each polygon line you create.
Use this mode to draw around a specific geometry or model feature you want to select, for example, a
protrusion of other geometry you may want to clearly identify. Using a polygon shape for selection can
apply when you are, for example, trying to select an irregular or angular shaped part, or assembly of parts.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To select objects using a polygon
1. Select the Using Polygon tool.

selected.
you want to select.
3. Click points to draw a polygon around the model feature that you want to select.
As you draw the polygon lines, selected objects highlight as they are pre-selected.
4. Double-click or cross the polygon lines to finalize the selection.
 Smart checked on will only select the highest checked item in the list that is currently in the
selection area.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Example
Creating a polygon to select around a specific geometry
Selecting by drawing a freeform shape (lasso)
The Using Lasso mode is found in the menu under the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group on the Design
tab, and also in the radial menu. You can access this menu while almost any tool is active. For example, if
you want to change selection modes while the Pull tool is active, just click the arrow under Select. The Pull
tool will remain active.
This select mode enables you to draw a freeform shape in the Design window to select objects for most
tools. As you draw, objects are highlighted (after a slight delay) to help you see exactly what will be
selected.
In the animation below, lasso mode is used with the selection filter set to Smart (the default) to select the
entire part. You can see vertices, edges, and faces highlighted for selection as the shape is drawn. You can
release the mouse button at any time and a straight line is drawn from the beginning point to the current
point to complete the shape, and everything within the shape will be selected.
To select by drawing a freeform shape
1. Click the arrow beneath the Select tool and click Using Lasso, or click and hold in the Design
window to activate the radial menu and then select Lasso.
selected.

you want to select.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Start drawing a shape in the Design window. Click and hold the left mouse button at the spot
where you want to start drawing the shape.
4. Hold the mouse button and draw a shape in the Design window.
You can make multiple loops, like drawing a figure 8.
5. Release the mouse button to complete the shape.
The shape will be closed by a straight line between your starting and ending points when you
release the mouse button.
Everything except inserted images is selected when you release the mouse button.
You can activate Lasso mode by holding the Alt key while the Select tool is active. This hotkey only
works when you are using the Select tool, and not when another tool is active.
selection area.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Selecting three surfaces by drawing multiple loops
Selecting by painting
The Using Paint mode is found in the menu under the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group on the Design
tab, and in the radial menu. You can access this menu while almost any tool is active. For example, if you
want to change selection modes while the Pull tool is active, just click the arrow under Select. The Pull tool
will remain active.
This select mode enables you to select faces, edges, and sketch curves in the Design window by "painting"
faces and edges that are adjacent to each other. As you paint, objects are highlighted to help you see
exactly what will be selected.
In the animation below, paint mode is used with the selection filter to select only the edges of the lower
box. Edges are selected as the mouse moves over them. You can release the mouse button at any time to
select the highlighted faces or edges.
To select by painting
1. Click the arrow beneath the Select tool and click Using Paint, or click and hold in the Design
window to activate the radial menu and then select Paint.
selected.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
you want to select.
3. Click on the first object you want to select and hold the mouse button.
4. Drag the mouse onto adjacent faces or edges that you want to add to the selection.
The objects that will be selected are highlighted as you move over them with the mouse.
If you hold Ctrl you can move the mouse over an object without selecting it, or move the mouse
over a selected object to deselect it.
5. Release the mouse button to complete the selection.
The objects are selected when you release the mouse button.
 Smart checked on will only select the highest checked item in the list that is currently in the selection
area.
Selecting using boundary
The Using Boundary mode is found in the menu under the Select tool in the Design tab Edit group. This
mode enables you to select all objects within a boundary.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To select objects using a boundary
1. Select the Using Boundary tool from the Select drop-down menu in the Edit ribbon group on the
Design tab.
The Select Bounds tool guide is enabled by default.
selected.
you want to select.
3. Select the faces or edges you want to use to define a boundary.
You cannot select a combination of faces and edges.
The Select Bounds tool guide is 'sticky', so you do not have to hold the Ctrl key to add to your
selection. You can click in white space to clear your selections.
The objects remain selected as secondary references in case you need to add or subtract from the
boundary.
You can select bounds (Crl+alt selection) and seeds (Ctrl selections), then click the boundary tool under
the Selection drop down menu to perform the boundary selection operation without actually entering
the Select tool. The Select Bounds tool guide does not display.
4. Click the Select Seed tool guide.

5. Click any object within the boundary to use as the seed object.
You can select multiple seeds. All objects from the seed object to the boundary are pre-
highlighted for selection.
6. Click the Select tool to finalize the selection.
On a subsequent invocation of the tool, the primary and secondary references do not de-select, and are
not displayed. Click the appropriate tool guide to re-display your boundary or seeds.
selection area.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Example
Selecting faces to define a boundary and then selecting the seed object. All objects from the seed object
to the boundary are selected.
Using Clip with Plane
You can use multiple planes to quickly clip your design to show only the geometry on one side of a plane
or the other.
Clip with Plane options includes Clip, Reverse Direction, and Union. Planes, axes, and annotations are
not clipped. The image below shows how planes in different clip states display in the Structure tree:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
By default, when you create a plane, the Structure tree displays a black-outlined visible plane icon. You
can select a visible plane you want to clip from either the Structure tree or in the Design window, then
right-click anywhere in the Structure tree or Design window to display the Clip with Plane context menu.
You can select up to 10 planes to set a clipped volume. Planes selected for clipping display with red
boundaries in the design window.
As you develop a model, you can also work with Clip with Volume to create a spherical clip volume
around an object so that you can selectively isolate a specific region, element, or section of a design.
To clip your design with a plane or multiple planes
1. Select a plane, or, use Ctrl+Select to select multiple planes.

2. Right-click and hover over Clip with Plane to display the entire context menu.
3. Select Clip.
The plane or planes you clipped display with a red outline. Icons update in the Structure tree. With the
plane(s) selected, you can modify values in the Properties panel.
To restore the view of your design, right-click the plane and select Clip again.
By default, when clipping is initially set on one or more selected planes, they are automatically combined
using an “and” operation. This way you can isolate the inside of two parallel planes or the inside of 3 pairs
of parallel planes (one of the most common usages for this feature.).
To reverse the direction of the clipped view with a plane or multiple planes
1. Right-click a plane and hover over Clip with Plane to display the entire menu.
2. Select Reverse Direction.
The geometry of your design flips to what is on the other side of the plane. To return to the original
clipped view of your design, right-click the plane and select Reverse Direction again.
To view the plane's direction, click the Move tool. The blue arrow on the Move tool indicates the positive
direction of the plane. The reversed direction is the opposite direction of the blue Move tool arrow, as
shown below:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Selecting multiple planes for clipping adds them to an ‘or’ set. With a group (2 or more) of
planes, you can also right mouse click, then select Union from the Clip with Plane context menu.
This option is essentially an “or” operation that defines a plane group that you intend to
combine with the rest of the planes. Once you define and unite a group of planes, the Union set
is put at the beginning of the logical set, and the rest of the planes follow with their default
“and” states.
For example, you can select 3 planes and get these logical sets, as shown in the table of images
below:
 A and B and C, which is the default (showing 1/8 of the model)
 (A or B) and C, where A and B are united (showing 3/8 of the model)
 (A or C) and B, where A and C are united (showing a different 3/8 of the model)
 (B or C) and A, where B and C are united (showing a different 3/8 of the model)
 A or B or C, where A and B and C are united (showing 7/8 of the model)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To create a union between planes
1. Ctrl+Select more than one plane.

2. Right-click one plane and hover over Clip with Plane to display the entire menu.
3. Select Union.
The image below shows the results of uniting two planes. Sets of parallel planes default to keeping the
material inside:
When you save a model with clipped planes, and you are working with the model in various clipped plane
states in two or more design window panes, the clip state of each plane in the model is saved per window
with the model. As you move between window panes, the Structure tree updates to reflect the clip state
of each plane in the active window context.
As you develop a model, the Clip with Volume tool enables you to create a spherical clip volume around
an object so that you can selectively isolate a specific region, element, or section of a design.
Using clip with volume
Using Clip with Volume can be particularly helpful when you need to closely view and work on a specific
feature of interest within a complex model. For example, after isolating a design area, you can use the
Repair > Missing Faces tool to help detect and fix missing faces on a body.
To clip with volume
1. Rotate and zoom in to your model to locate the model element or area you want to view.
2. With nothing selected, right mouse click and select Clip with Volume > Set. This action clips the
viewable and selectable geometry by the radius of a virtual sphere.
3. Hover over the center of the element you want to view and then Click+drag to create your
spherical clip volume.
4. Release the mouse. The area you selected to preview magnifies and displays in a sphere as
clipped, or isolated, from the rest of the model.
5. Right mouse click and select Clip with Volume > Select to select the virtual spherical surface of
the area. Use Clip with Volume > Set Using Selection to set the virtual sphere's extents based
on the current selection.
6. Hover over the area to identify all of the various design elements.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Misc area of the Properties panel displays. You can toggle Clip selection and Zoom to fit as
needed to work with your design.
7. To further magnify the clip volume and relocate it to the center of the design window, right-click
and select Clip with Volume > Locate. Use the Design tools, such as Pull, to work with the
design.
8. To re-display your design with no clipping, right mouse click and select Clip with Volume >
Clear.
Use the Move option in the Clipped Volume menu to move the clipped volume frame to a different area of
the model, or the Resize option to adjust the size of the Clipped volume frame. See images below.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Changing your display
The tools you use to customize the appearance of your design within the design window are found on
SpaceClaim's Display tab.
 Customize your design by modifying which objects are displayed, the style in which solids and edges
are displayed, and the color in which solids appear in your design.
 Paint display properties from one object to another.
 Create layers to save different customizations and display characteristics.
 Customize the workspace by creating windows or splitting the window to display multiple views of
your design.
 Show or hide workspace tools.
 Configure the docking/detached location of all your workspace windows.
 Create views to save the camera perspective and assign the view to a hotkey.
Display tools are grouped into the following ribbon groups:
Orient Quickly display a particular view of your design.

Style Determine how the solids in your design will be displayed.
Window Create new design windows, split windows, and quickly switch between windows.
Grid Determine how the sketch grid and the geometry above or below the grid is displayed
Show Display or hide tools in the Design window.
Showing and hiding objects
You can use any of these methods for setting the visibility of objects in the Design window:
 Right-click an object in the Design window and select Isolate to view only that solid, surface, or curve.
 Right-click anywhere in the Design window and select Show All to make all objects visible.
 Right-click an object in the Structure tree and select Always Visible from the context menu. The object
will remain visible if you hide its layer, but this setting has no effect on other visibility commands such
as Isolate or hiding its parent component by deselecting its check box it in the Structure tree.
 Deselect the check box in the Structure tree to hide the object in the Design window. The object icon is
displayed in gray. You can also right-click an object in the Design window and select Hide (or select it
in the Design window and press Ctrl+H) to turn the visibility of the object off.
 Select the check box next to the object in the Structure tree to set the visibility of the object to the
layer visibility. If the layer is hidden, then the object will be hidden. If the layer is visible, then the object
will be visible.
If the layer visibility is on, the icon appears like this . If the layer visibility is off, the icon appears like this
. You cannot work with hidden objects in the Design window.
Shift+click and Ctrl+click multiple objects to work with them as a group.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Locking and unlocking objects
You can lock solids and surfaces so they cannot be changed. When an object is locked, you can only
change that object's visibility by clicking its check mark in the Structure tree. You cannot change the
object's geometry, location, name, color, or properties. Locked objects display a lock icon in the Structure
tree, as shown in the image below.
 You can't modify locked bodies directly or by group modification, and the API cannot modify them via
group values.
 Locked bodies cannot be pulled or moved, so the Pull arrow or Move handle appears gray. They can be
copied by holding Ctrl with the Pull or Move tool. The Pull arrow or Move handle changes to color
when you hold Ctrl.
 You can use a locked body as a cutter with the Combine tool, but you cannot use it as target.
 You can use a locked body as a location or selection reference, but it cannot be changed as a result.
For example, you can sketch on a locked body but the sketch lines will not imprint on the body.
To lock a solid or surface
1. Right-click the solid or surface in the Structure tree.
You can lock all solids and surface parts in a component by right-clicking the component.
2. Select Lock.
The object's icon changes to a locked icon.
To unlock a solid or surface
1. Right-click the solid or surface in the Structure tree.

2. Select Unlock.
Orienting designs
Select a tool from the Orient ribbon group to orient your design in the workspace. You can use these
tools at any time, even when you are designing with other 2D or 3D tools.
Drag the middle mouse button to spin, Shift+drag it to pan, and Ctrl+drag it to zoom. You can switch
between spinning, panning, and zooming by pressing and holding Ctrl (to zoom) or Shift (to pan).
When you release the key, you will return to spinning.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Orient ribbon group
The Orient ribbon group contains the following tools:
Use the Home tool to return the orientation of your design to the default, trimetric view. You can
customize the Home view to show your design with any orientation, location, and zoom level.
Click the Plan View tool to display a head-on view of the sketch grid or the select plane or planar
face. Alt+select an edge to orient the plan view horizontally or vertically.
You can use the Spin tool to re-orient your design in any direction. Spinning your design allows
you to view it from any angle.
Use the Pan tool to move your design within the Design window.
Use the Zoom tool to display your design closer or farther away in the Design window. You can
zoom the design to fill the Design window, zoom into an area, or zoom in or out a preset
amount.
Use the View tool to display a trimetric or isometric view of your design. You can also display a
head-on view of the top, bottom, front, back, right, or left side.
Use the Snap View tool to display a head-on view of a face. You can also use the tool to "throw"
the highlighted face to the top, bottom, right, or left by dragging it toward the edge of the
Design window.
Use the Rotate tool to rotate your design 90 degrees in the plane of the screen. You can rotate your
design clockwise or counterclockwise.
Use the Next and Previous arrows (or left/right arrows on your keyboard, or browser
next/previous buttons) to change your view to the previous or next orientations.
Orient modes
When you click the Spin, Pan, and Zoom tools, they stay enabled until you click them again, press Esc, or
click another tool.
Undoing and redoing views
You can undo and redo views using the Previous View and Next View tools on the status bar.
You can also use the left and right arrow keys, or any system-defined browser forward or back method
such as special keyboard buttons.
Spinning your design
You can use the Spin tool in the Orient group on the Design tab to re-orient your design in any
direction. Spinning your design allows you to view it from any angle. SpaceClaim uses standard arc-ball
rotation; your design spins as if you could grab it with the cursor and adjust it like a real object. You can
also rotate your design either clockwise or counterclockwise.
When you click the Spin tool, it stays enabled until you click it again, press Esc, or click another tool.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To spin your design
1. Click Spin in the Orient group on the Design tab or in the status bar.
You can also select one of the following from the Spin drop-down:
 On Center to spin around the center of your design.

 On Cursor to spin around the cursor location.
 Rotate 90 Clockwise to rotate your design 90° in a clockwise direction.
 Rotate 90 Counterclockwise to rotate your design 90° in a counterclockwise direction.
2. Click and drag to spin your design.
If you start dragging on a highlighted line, edge, or axis, you can rotate your design around it.
You can remove this feature by setting the advanced SpaceClaim option Rotate about pre-
selected object in spin. (Press Alt and drag to rotate around a highlighted object whether or not
this option is selected.)
Set the Rotate about pre-selected object in spin option. Then, when working in any tool, position the
middle mouse button on the face, edge, plane, or axis about which you want to spin your design, and
drag to spin.
You may find it easier to reach a desired orientation if you use short mouse drags to spin the
design a little bit at a time.
If you double-click a face while using the Spin tool, the face is zoomed so that it fills the design
window. You can also switch to the Zoom tool temporarily by holding down the Ctrl key while
turning the mouse wheel.
To set the spin center
Right-click anywhere in the Design window, select Spin Center, and select one of the following:
 Set: Sets the spin center to the center of the object you have selected. If you don't have an object
selected, the spin center is set to the spot where you right-click. If you previously set the spin center,
setting it again will change it to your current selection. You don’t need to clear the spin center to set it
again.
 Clear: Clears the spin center. When you rotate your view in 3D, the spin will be centered based on the
option you select in the Spin tool.
 Locate: Centers the view on the spin center, if one is set.
To display the spin center indicator
Select Spin Center in the Show group on the Display tab to see an indicator of your spin center in the
Design window when you spin your view. The indicator only appears while you spin, and it changes when
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
you have a spin center set. The default indicator is shown below on the left. The indicator below is shown
when you have the spin center set.
To rotate your design
From the Spin tool in the Orient group on the Design tab, select Rotate 90 Clockwise or Rotate 90
Counterclockwise. These controls can be used whether your Spin is set to On Center or On Cursor. Click
either rotational control once or multiple times to orient your design as needed for optimal viewing.
Panning your design
Use the Pan tool to move your design within the Design window.
When you click the Pan tool, it stays enabled until you click it again, press Esc, or click another tool.
To pan
1. Select the Pan tool from the Orient ribbon group or status bar.
2. Drag to move your design around the Design window.
If you double-click a face while using the Pan tool, the face is zoomed so that it fills the design
window. You can also switch to the Zoom tool temporarily by holding down the Ctrl key while
turning the mouse wheel.
When working in any tool, Shift+click the middle mouse button and drag to move your design.
Zooming in and out
Use the Zoom tool to display your design closer or farther away in the Design window. You can zoom the
design to fill the Design window, zoom into an area, or zoom in or out a preset amount.
When you click the Zoom tool, it stays enabled until you click it again, press Esc, or click another tool.
To zoom in and out
1. Select the Zoom tool from the Orient ribbon group or status bar.
2. Click where you want to center the zoom.
3. Drag down to zoom into your design; drag up to zoom out.
You can also use the scroll wheel to zoom in and out.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
When working in any tool, Ctrl+click the middle mouse button, then drag up and down to zoom. You
can also press Ctrl+ or Ctrl- to zoom in or out a preset amount.
To zoom the design or a selected face or edge to fit the Design window
Select Zoom > Extents or press Z.
The design or selected face or edge is zoomed so that it fills the Design window. When working with a
drawing sheet, it will fit the drawing sheet to the Design window. If you resize the Design window, the
design will also be resized until it again fills the Design window.
To zoom into a selected area
1. Select Zoom > Zoom Box In.
You can also right-click in the Design window and select View > Zoom Box In from the menu.
2. Click and drag to select the area.
Two rectangles appear as you draw. The dotted rectangle shows your selection; the solid
rectangle shows what will be displayed in the Design window. When you mouse-up, the design
pans and zooms until it fits within the area.
To zoom in and out a preset amount
Select Zoom > Zoom In to bring your design closer. Select Zoom > Zoom Out to move your design
further away.
When working in any tool, press Ctrl and + or Ctrl and - to zoom in and out a preset amount.
Rotating your design
Use the Rotate tool to rotate your design 90 degrees in the plane of the screen. You can rotate your
To rotate your design 90 degrees
Click the Rotate tool .
To change the rotation direction
Select Rotate > Rotate 90 Counterclockwise.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Your design rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise and the Rotate tool icon changes to . Clicking the
Rotate tool will continue to rotate in the counterclockwise direction.
Select Rotate > Rotate 90 Clockwise to rotate your design in the clockwise direction and set the Rotate
tool to rotate clockwise.
The Home view
Use the Home tool to return the orientation of your design to the default, trimetric view. You can
customize the Home view tool so that it displays your design with a specific orientation, location, and
zoom level.
Compared to the isometric view, the trimetric view orients your design so that the front face is angled
slightly towards you and less of the top is shown. The isometric view is on the left and the trimetric view is
on the right.
To display the Home view
Click the Home tool in the Orient ribbon panel or press H.
To customize the Home view
1. Use the other Orient tools to set up a view of your design in the workspace.
2. Select Home > Set As Home View to make the view in the active Design window the Home view.
Now, when you click the Home tool, your custom view is displayed. Your home view is saved with
your design.
Click Home > Reset Home View to return the Home view to the default, trimetric view.
Display a head-on view of the sketch view
Click the Plan View tool in the Orient ribbon group or in the Sketching mini-toolbar to display a head-
on view of the sketch grid or the selected plane or planar face.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If this tool is disabled, select a plane or planar surface or display the sketch grid.
Selecting a view
Use the View tool to display a trimetric or isometric view of your design. You can also display a head-on
view of the top, bottom, front, back, right, or left side. Your design's orientation in the head-on views is
determined by SpaceClaim's default coordinate system.
Compared to the isometric view, the trimetric view orients your design so that the front face is angled
slightly towards you and less of the top is shown. Compare the two views in the image below. The
isometric view is on the left and the trimetric view is on the right.
To select a view
Select the view you want from the View tool menu in the Orient ribbon group.
If you have Animate changes to view projection selected in the Advanced SpaceClaim options, the
change in view state is animated.
To display a trimetric or isometric view of your design
Select Trimetric or Isometric from the View tool menu.
To display a head-on view of your design
Select Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Right, or Left from the View tool menu.
Snapping to a view
Use the Snap View tool to display a head-on view of a selected face or plane. You can also use the tool to
throw the highlighted face or plane to the top, bottom, right, or left. On a drawing sheet, flipping one
view also flips all related views.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Snap View works on objects with a direction: planes, datums, cones, torii, curves and edges. For non-linear
curves, the direction is determined by the direction between the endpoints.
You can only use this tool in 3D mode; it is disabled in Sketch and Section modes.
To snap the view
1. Click Select or press S.

2. Click Snap View in the Orient group.
3. Use objects in the Design window to orient your view:
 Click and release on a plane, point, cone, torus, curve, or edge.
If the object is not oriented head-on, then it will rotate so the face you click is viewed head-on,
like this:
If the object is already oriented head-on, then it will rotate 90° counter-clockwise or it will
rotate so it is square with the Design window, like this:
 Click, drag, and release a plane, point, cone, torus, curve, or edge to throw it up, down, left, or
right.
If the object is not oriented head-on, then it will rotate so the face you click is viewed head-on
and square with the Design window, like this:
If the object is oriented head-on, it will rotate 90° in the direction you drag, like this:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Click anywhere in empty space to rotate the view 90° counter-clockwise, like this:
4. Repeat until you see the view you want.
Applying a graphics style
SpaceClaim offers several different styles to view your design. You can apply styles to your entire design
or drawing sheet, to individual layers, or to individual views in your drawing sheet.
To apply a graphics style to your design
1. Click Graphics in the Style group on the Display tab.

2. Select a graphics option:
 Shaded: The default and recommended view; displays solids and surfaces as three-
dimensional, shaded objects.
 Perspective Shaded: Like the Shaded style, except the objects are also displayed in
perspective.
 Wireframe: Only the edges of objects are displayed. The wireframes are the same color as the
edges.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Hidden Line: Objects are displayed as wireframes with hidden lines displayed in a light gray.
 Hidden Line Removed: Objects are displayed as wireframes and hidden lines are not shown.
3. All objects in the Design window will be displayed in the style you select.
Displaying edges
Use the Edges option tool in the Style group on the Display tab to customize which edges are
displayed. These settings are saved with the document, but are only used for 3D display. The edge display
options apply to the design in the current Design window tab, and not other designs you may have open
in other tabs in the Design window.
See Applying colors to change the color of edges.
To change edge display options
1. Click Edges in the Style group on the Display tab.

2. Select any combination of the following options:
The examples below show each option disabled and then enabled.
 Tangent: Display lines indicating tangent edges and edges that do not span a face.
 Surface: Display all edges on surfaces.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Solid: Display all non-tangent edges on a solid.
 Silhouette: Display the lines that indicate the silhouetted edges of all curved surfaces. This
option affects only Wireframe, Hidden Line, and Hidden Line Removed graphics styles.
 Layout Lines: Display layout lines on the layout planes shown in the Structure tree.
 Mesh: Display facet edges on an STL model. You can sketch on the mesh object and your
sketch tools will snap to the facets.
Applying colors
The color of solids, surfaces, and components are normally determined by the layer color; however, you
can override the layer colors for objects. By default, all objects are placed on Layer0, which is green. You
can modify the color of edges, faces and bodies when selecting an object.
See Working with Layers to change the layer color or move an object to a different layer.
See Changing object transparency to change the transparency of an object.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Use the Color tool in the Style ribbon group of the Display tab to override the layer color for solids,
surfaces, faces, and curves, or the color of individual faces on a 3D markup slide. When you add a Custom
Color in the color palette, it is added to the bottom of the menu and it is saved between SpaceClaim
sessions.
If you change the color when nothing is selected, the color will become the default for new objects. This
allows you to set the color for things you haven't created yet, without using layers and default layer
colors.
To override the layer color of a solid, surface, face, or curve
1. Select one or more solids, surfaces, faces, curves, or components in the Design window or
Structure tree.
You can select a body by selecting one of its faces or edges, then selecting Body as the Target.
If you select a component, then the color of all of the component's children will be changed.
2. Click Color in the Style group on the Display tab.

3. Select a color.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If the color you want is not in the list, click More Colors and select a color or create a new custom
color.
4. (Optional) Set the transparency of the object. See Changing object transparency.
To override edge color
1. Select any edge on a solid or surface.

3. Select a color.
This color will be used for all edges of the solid.
To remove color overrides and return the object to the layer color and transparency
Structure tree.
You can select a body by selecting one of its faces or edges, then selecting Body as the Target.
If you select a component, the color of all of the component's children will be changed.
2. Click Color in the Style group and select Remove Color Override.
To view an object's color properties
1. Select the object in the Design window or Structure tree.

2. Look for the Style attribute in the Appearance section of the Properties panel.
This property shows how the appearance of an object is overridden in the Style group:
 By Layer indicates that the object is assigned to a layer other than Layer 0, which affects its
default appearance.
 By Color indicates that the object's color has been set via the Color tool.
 By Style indicates that the Transparent or Opaque buttons in Style Override have been
toggled for the object.
Changing object transparency
By default, the transparency of an object is determined by its layer color and whether or not the object is
a surface. Surfaces are displayed as semi-transparent to visually distinguish them from solids. You can
override the transparency of objects using the Color tool.
In a graphics editing application, color is assigned to an Alpha channel (ARGB, for example). SpaceClaim
follows this standard convention and also treats transparency as a property of the object's color.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The hierarchy of rendering overrides is as follows:
 The opacity setting for the layer is used if no other transparency is set for the object.
 The transparency setting from the Color tool or Style Painter overrides the transparency of the layer.
 Style Override makes the object opaque or transparent, regardless of face or layer settings. These
overrides are automatically deselected when you change the transparency of an object using the Color
tool or Style Painter.
To change the transparency of an object
Structure tree.
Hold the Ctrl key to select more than one object.

3. Move the Opacity slider.
To override an object's transparency
Structure tree.
2. Click Style Override in the Style group on the Display tab.

3. Select one of the options:
 Transparent to make the object 35% transparent.
 Opaque to make the object completely opaque.
Deselect so neither override is selected if you want to use the object's transparency setting.
To reapply the layer color and transparency
1. Select one or more solids, surfaces, faces, or curves in the Design window or Structure tree.
2. Select Remove Color Override from the Color tool on the Display tab's Style ribbon group. You
can see this option in the image of the Color tool above.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Line styles
You can apply a custom line style and line weight to the lines in your designs and drawing sheets. The line
styles you choose apply to annotations, center marks, center lines, and drawing sheet cross-section view
arrows, hatching, hatched area borders, and detail view boundaries. You can apply line styles to individual
objects or to all the objects on a layer. The width that you set is exactly the width that will be printed
when you print an un-scaled drawing sheet.
You can set the default line styles for various objects in the SpaceClaim options. Setting the line styles
individually overrides the default setting.
Line styles can be assigned to layers so that you can have different line styles for sketch and layout lines.
To apply a line style
1. Select the objects or layer to which you want to apply the line style.
2. Select the line style from the Line Style tool menu.
3. Select the line weight from the Line weight menu in the Style group on the Display tab.
Painting display properties from one object to another
Use the Style Painter tool to apply the display properties of one object to another object. The tool applies
color and transparency intelligently from one object type to a different object type.
You can select a component in the Structure tree as the target for the Style Painter tool. The color and
transparency are applied to all solids in a component. You cannot select a component as the source
object, and only the solids in the target component are changed.
In the example below, the red part is semi-transparent and has blue edges. The style from the red block
was painted to the green block and to the note. The color, transparency, and edge color of the red block
was copied to the green block. Only the color of the red block was copied to the note, because a note
doesn't have transparency or edge color.
To paint display properties from one object to another

1. Click Style Painter in the Clipboard group on the Design tab.
2. Select the source object that you want to copy the display properties from.
3. Select the target object that you want to copy the display properties to.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Select Target tool guide automatically becomes active so you can paint the properties of the
source to as many targets as you like by simply clicking on them.
If you can't select the object you want, such as an edge, try scrolling the mouse wheel over the
object.
4. If you want to paint properties from a different source object, click the Select Source tool guide
or hold Ctrl and select a different source object.
The Select Target tool guide automatically becomes active again so you can click on as many
targets as you want.
Applying a rendering style
The Rendering Style tool, in the Style group of the Display tab, allows you to change how solid faces are
rendered. You can choose between a shiny, light reflective finish (Metallic), a matte finish (Plastic), a
sketched finish (Brushed), or a hatch line finish (Hatched). Assigning different rendering styles to a model
helps you to better visualize parts, assemblies, or components as you develop your design.
In the images below, all four rendering styles are used: the top of the pitcher is set to plastic. The handle
and pitcher are brushed. The blade base is hatched, and the base of the pitcher is set to metallic:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
In the image set below, Regular display mode is shown on the left and Quick Rendering mode is shown
on the right. Regular mode uses a single light source, while quick rendering mode uses multiple lights and
reflects a background of sky and clouds on surfaces to give them depth and interest:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To change the rendering style of a solid or surface
1. Select the solid or surface.

2. Click Rendering Style in the Style group on the Display tab.
This icon changes to reflect the current setting, but always appears as a shaded sphere.
3. Select Hatched, Brushed, Metallic or Plastic to apply that surface style to the selected solid or
surface.
To view objects in quick rendering mode
Press Ctrl + Shift + R to toggle quick rendering mode on or off.
Working with Keyshot rendering
After installing Keyshot™v2.2 v3.0, each SpaceClaim startup automatically retrieves installed Keyshot
materials and preview images to provide you with the most recent rendering materials available.
Rendering with Keyshot™ can now be performed on lightweight assembly components. Lightweight
components are a graphics-only representation of a design; only the component’s graphical information
is loaded. Rendering designs with lightweight components reduces CPU memory and file size, which
enhances SpaceClaim speed and performance.
Rendering with Keyshot™ can now be performed on mesh objects. Some very large objects can only be
loaded as mesh objects when there is insufficient RAM. Rendering mesh objects reduces CPU memory
and file size, which enhances SpaceClaim speed and performance.
Displaying your design in multiple windows
Use the New Window tool to create new workspace windows. Creating multiple windows allows you to set
up several views of your design. Each window has a numbered tab at the bottom of the workspace.
To create a new workspace window
Select the New Window tool on the Display tab's Window ribbon group.
A new tab appears at the bottom of your workspace and a number is appended to the design, drawing
sheet, or 3D markup name. You can click the middle mouse button on the tab of any design, drawing
sheet, or 3D markup window to close that window
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Splitting the workspace window
Use the Split Window tool in the Window ribbon group on the Display tab to divide the workspace
window into multiple windows. Splitting the window allows you to see multiple views of your design
simultaneously.
Select how you want to split the workspace window from the Split Window tool menu. The window is split
based on your selection. The active window is indicated with a yellow border.
Switching between windows in the workspace
If you have more than one window open, you can select the window you want to display from the tabs at
the bottom of the workspace.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you have many windows open and the tabs do not fit in the workspace, you can use the Next Window
and Previous Window arrows at the bottom of the workspace to switch between windows.
You can also use the Switch Window tool to select the window you want to display. Select the window
you want to display from the Switch Window tool menu on the Display tab's Window ribbon group.
Maximizing the Design window
Press F11 to maximize the design window to full screen. You can still switch between windows and use the
tool guides when the window is maximized.
Press F11 to return to the standard user interface.
Displaying workspace tools
You can adjust the display of workspace tools and the display of your design in the Design window using
the tools in the Show ribbon group on the Display tab, and by modifying SpaceClaim options.
To customize the tools displayed while you are working with your design
SpaceClaim offers the following tools on the Show ribbon group on the Display tab to assist you while
creating, editing, and detailing your designs:
 Check the World Origin box to display the axes that set the default orientation of the design in the
Design window.
 Check the Spin Center box to mark the center of the spin when using the Spin tool. (This is the same
as the Show Spin Center SpaceClaim option.)
 Check the Offset Baseline Faces box to display offset relationships with blue shading.
 Check the Layout Lines box to display sketch curves on layout planes.
 Check the Line weight box to switch the line style of lines (such as those displayed in Hidden Line,
Hidden Line Removed, and Wireframe graphics styles) from thin to the thickness set by the Lineweight
tool in the Style ribbon group.
 Check the Adjacent Entities box to display faint highlighting on adjacent faces when you hover over
an edge and on adjacent edges when you hover over a vertex. Scrolling the mouse wheel switches
between adjacent entities. This feature is useful in selecting the correct edge or face to extrude.
To display other workspace tools, modify the settings in the Popular SpaceClaim options.
You can also display journal-related tools by checking the Show Journal Tab option in the Popular
SpaceClaim options.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Hovering over an edge with Adjacent Entities highlights the faces shared by the edge
Sketch grid styles
You can modify whether the sketch grid is displayed, and how the geometry above or below the grid is
displayed in each Design window. You may want to use one style when you are examining a component,
and another when you are creating new geometry within a component. You can further customize the
sketch grid by hiding section lines and faces using SpaceClaim options.
To show or hide the sketch grid
Check the Show Sketch Grid box in the Grid ribbon group on the Display tab to display the sketch grid.
The sketch grid appears in all the sketching tools. Displaying the sketch grid allows you to snap to grid
lines and provides a visual cue to the orientation of your sketch within your design
To determine how geometry above or below the grid is displayed
 Check the Fade Scene Under Grid box to make the geometry under the sketch grid more transparent.
Sketch curves outside the current sketch plane appear faded, while layout curves are unaffected.
 Check the Clip Scene Above Grid box to hide the geometry above the sketch grid.
To clip your design with a plane
Right-click a plane and select Clip with Plane. To restore the view of your design, right-click the plane
and select Clip with Plane again.
Planes, axes, and annotations are not clipped.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Fading the scene below the grid makes it easier to see when you sketch in section mode.
Examining a section with the scene clipped above the grid
Displaying lightweight components
Lightweight components are a graphics-only representation of a design. You can adjust the transparency
of the lightweight components in your design. If you do not see lightweight components when you open
or insert a design, make sure your settings are configured to display them.
See also Lightweight components.
To adjust the transparency of lightweight components
1. Click the Transparency icon on the status bar.

2. Adjust the slider to set the opacity of the lightweight components in the Design window. All
lightweight components are displayed with this opacity.
To make a lightweight component appear solid
Select a lightweight component and press Ctrl+Shift+F8 to make the component appear solid. All other
lightweight components still appear dim.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Before dimming, the lightweight components appear slightly transparent and their edges aren't displayed.
After dimming, all components regardless of lightweight status, become dim except the selected
lightweight component.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Working with SpaceClaim documents
Creating, opening, and saving documents
When you create a new design, it appears on a tab in the workspace. Designs can contain drawing sheets,
multiple windows, and 3D markups. Each drawing sheet and 3D markup appears on its own tab in the
workspace. You can edit your design directly using the drawing sheet.
You can create a drawing sheet for an existing design, or you can begin with an empty drawing sheet
Click a tab at the bottom of the SpaceClaim application window to display that design, drawing sheet, or
3D markup document, or click the arrow icons to cycle between them. Click the x button to close the tab.
You can also backup your files, and archive them.
To create a new design
Select New > Design from the Application menu.
To create a new drawing sheet for the active design

 Select New > Drawing Sheet from the Application menu to create a drawing sheet with three
standard views of the design.
 Select New > Empty Drawing Sheet to create a drawing sheet without a format or views.
 If these menu options are disabled, create a new design.
To create a new design and associated drawing sheet
Select New > Design and Drawing Sheet from the Application menu to create a new design and an
associated drawing sheet.
To open an existing design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup document

 Select Open from the Application menu. You can open the Preview pane in the Open dialog to preview
the files. Select the file to open.
 The design and its windows, drawing sheets, and 3D markups open.
 You can Ctrl+click or Shift+click to open multiple files at once. Mouse over a recent file to see an
image of the design and the full path to the file.
To open an existing design by dragging and dropping

 Drag the .scdoc file icon to anywhere in the title bar and ribbon area.
 You can also drag the icon into the design window if no design tab is open.
 This will open the design in 3D mode along with all of its drawing sheets, annotations, etc.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To insert a design by dragging and dropping

 Drag the .scdoc file icon into the design window.
 This will insert the design into the active window in 3D mode. Drawing sheets, annotations, etc. are not
inserted.
To save a design
 Select Save from the Application menu.
 If you imported or opened non-SpaceClaim designs as multiple external documents, click References
to specify where the documents are saved.
 Otherwise, opened design documents are stored in their original locations as .scdoc files, and inserted
documents are saved in the same directory as your design.
To save a design and use it as a template

1. Create some geometry (or set some parameters) you wish to use as a template for new designs
2. Save the document as a SpaceClaim Template File (*.scdot)
3. Go to the Support Files section of the SC options
4. Check ON the Use template for new designs box
5. Click the Browse button and choose an .scdot file, then click the Open button
6. Click the OK button
7. Begin a New design; a new design opens with the geometry which was created in the Template
document
To copy a design
 Save any changes made to external components.

 Select Save As from the Application menu and enter a new name for the design.
 Click Save to save your active design with a new name and/or format.
To make a copy of a design and all its references for sharing or archiving, click Send.
To archive a design
 Select Send from the Application menu. The Archive dialog box opens.
 Check the Create ZIP file checkbox.
 When you archive a model, it stores the .scdoc file and the .zip file in a file folder named with the file
naming convention <model name>_archive.
 This feature allows for improved file organization and use of file storage space.
To save a version of your design

 Select Save as > New version from the Application menu.
 Saving a version allows you to create 3D markups.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To save a design as another file type
Please see Importing and exporting.
To close a design
Make sure its window is active in the workspace and then do one of the following:
 Select Close from the Application menu.

 Right-click the Design window tab and select Close.
 Click the x (Close) button on the Design window tab bar (at the bottom of the application window).
 Click the x at the upper right of the Design window if you have undocked it.
 Click the x at the upper right of a document tab. The x displays after the design or drawing sheet
name. A thumbnail of your design displays when you hover over the name of your design, as shown
below. A Save prompt displays if you have made changes to your design; select Yes to save your
changes and close the design, No to discard your changes and close the design, or Cancel to stop the
close process and return to your design.
To modify design properties

 Document properties are displayed when you select the top-level design in the Structure tree.
 Right-click in the Properties panel and select Add Property to create a custom property.
 Expand the property to display its value.
 Enter a name for the property, select its type (date, Boolean, number, or string), and enter its value.
Importing and exporting
Use the Open command to open files created with SpaceClaim (.scdoc) or any other modeling application.
Use the Save As command to export parts, assemblies, drawing sheets, and 3D markups to formats read
by other applications. Your license type determines which of these actions are supported.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you work frequently with non-SpaceClaim files, we recommend that you set your file options to
optimize the importing and exporting process for your needs.
Object IDs for edges, faces, and bodies are now stored within the SCDOC file. Object IDs are preserved
when other files are opened or inserted into SpaceClaim, and the IDs can also be exported. For example, if
you export a design to an analysis company, and they tag geometry with load positions, boundary
conditions, and so on, then when you re-import that design, make changes, and re-export to the analysis
company, they will not need to recreate their tags on the new design.
If you import a file and it fails, the reason for the failure is reported in the Status Log on the lower right
edge of the SpaceClaim window.
File type Open or insert Save as

3D PDF parts, assemblies, Geometry (PRC parts, assemblies, Facets and
B-Rep) Geometry (PRC B-Rep)
.pdf .pdf
Detailed information
 Adobe® Acrobat® 9 or 9.1 Pro Extended is required to open or save PRC B-Rep solids.
 Only 32-bit platforms are supported.
 Color information is imported for 3D PDFs.
 Adobe Acrobat 9 Pro Extended required for BREP import and export, 32-bit platforms only
ACIS parts, assemblies (versions up to parts and assemblies (versions

22) 6, 7, 15-22, V21 default)
.sat, .sab
 When you save an SAT file to an X_T file, edges with zero length are removed from the design.
 When you import ACIS files, the instance name "part n (body m)" is now imported, but only if the body
name is different from the part name. The component and body names are separated by a character
which you can define in the options for ACIS files. For example, the default character is a period, so the
imported name would be component.body. This way, if there were one body named wheel in one
component, the name of the imported component in SC would be wheel. An instance is a copy of a
body (a copied or pattered solid).
 ACIS bodies can be imported using the RealDWG option, Sketch curves and text can be imported into
Designs, 2D.
AutoCAD® R12 to 14, 2000, 2004, 2007, 2010 R12 to 14, 2000, 2004, 2007,
Includes Polyface Meshes 2010 .dwg, .dxf
.dwg, .dxf
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 AutoCAD drawings can be inserted as layouts.

 If you import an AutoCAD file and you don't see the geometry you expect, try changing the import
options. See File import and export options.
 When you save a design with a shaded graphics style as a DWG file, it is converted to the hidden line
style.
 When you save a sheet metal design as a DXF file, notes and bend lines are saved on the same layer,
and the overall unfold dimensions are removed.
 Line weights can be exported to AutoCAD (DXF or DWG). Hatch lines on drawing sheets are exported
as stand-alone lines.
 You can import polyface meshes from AutoCAD files as 3D solids. See File import and export options
for a list of polyface mesh import options.
 SpaceClaim imports "Proxy entities" in AutoCAD DXF and DWG files when you select the TeighaDWG
option.
 If an AutoCAD file won't open, try changing the DWG option to RealDWG. Some AutoCAD files contain
embedded ACIS models; however, these may not be standard ACIS models. The RealDWG libraries
contain an API to save back these variant ACIS models in the last common format, ACIS v7. The
TeighaDWG libraries do not.
 ACIS bodies can be imported using the RealDWG option, Polyface meshes import as lightweight (read-
only), Sketch
 Export as 2D snapshot
BunkspeedSHOT™ not supported parts and assemblies
.bip
CATIA® parts, assemblies (versions V4 parts and assemblies (V4, V5 R6
4.1.9 to 4.2.4, V5 R2 to R22) to R22, R17 default)
.model, .CATPart, .CATProduct, .CATPart, .CATProduct

.cgr, .exp
 CATIA faceted (.cgr) files can be opened, but appear as lightweight components that cannot be loaded.
You can save imported .cgr files as SpaceClaim documents that can be opened later; however, this
document’s content remains lightweight. It is visible in the Design window but you can't change the
model.
 CATIA files with product manufacturing information (PMI) can be opened or inserted. Visibility is
turned off. If a layer doesn't exist, it is created automatically.
 When exporting CATIA V5 files, you can deselect the Simplify Spline Surface Data option. When
importing or exporting CATIA files, the XYZ locations of point objects scale correctly.
 Includes Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) placed on the Imported Annotation Planes
ECAD Board, ECAD Library files not supported
.emn, .emp
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Named components are created at the heights and contours defined by the ECAD file. Areas defined as
"Keep in" or "Keep out" appear as open sketch lines. When you insert a board file, SpaceClaim
automatically assembles the SpaceClaim document created from the selected file. You can also insert
an ECAD library file (EMN) to pre-process it into a library of components for board files.
 To import an ECAD file, first open the EMP file to generate a folder of library files in the same directory
as the EMP file. Then open the corresponding EMN file to display the ECAD model in SpaceClaim.
 If the library folder already exists and it contains files with the same names as those that would be
created, the existing files are used. These files may exist if you previously imported the IDF data, or if
different board layouts share the same components.
 The library folder is named <filename> ECAD Library, where <filename> is the name of the IDF file.
Each imported file must have its own library. SpaceClaim does not support a shared library for IDF files.
ECAD IDF files (versions IDF 3.0 and IDF 4.0) not supported
.idf, emn
 Most content within IDF 4.0 files is supported.

 Assembly of panels and boards, cutouts, filled areas, keep-ins, materials, panels and everything related,
sub-layouts, and thermal models are not supported.
 Open IDF and PAD files
IGES parts, assemblies (versions up to parts, assemblies (version 5.3,

5.3) JAMA-IS, Types: 186, 144, 143)
.igs, .iges .igs, .iges

Image files files (insert only) parts, assemblies, drawing
See Inserting an image sheets, 3D markup slides
.bmp, .gif, .jpg, .png, .tif (export as 2D snapshot)
.bmp, .gif, .jpg, .png, .tif

Inventor® Inventor files .ipt (versions 6 – 10) not supported
Inventor assembly files .iam not supported

(versions 11 - 2012)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 You can read the limitations here:

http://doc.spatial.com/index.php/InterOp:Connect/Inventor/Inventor_Reader#Limitations.
 Limited support for Inventor assembly
 Assembly attributes such as colors and layers are not supported.
 Inventor parts and Inventor sub-assemblies should be present in the main (root) of the Inventor
Assembly directory.
 Assembly level features are not supported. For example, an instance can be marked as suppressed
(that is, not visible) in an Inventor assembly. Because the translator does not support reading
suppressed information, suppressed instances are translated.
 Inventor surfaces not supported
The translator currently does not handle "helical" surfaces in Inventor 6 files and "cylspl" surfaces in
Inventor 7 files. If the Inventor file contains any of these surfaces, a partial translation takes place
skipping the data for these surfaces and converting the remaining entities.
 Limited entity support for Inventor 11, 2008, 2009, and 2010
The translator currently does not support some specific entities resulting from advanced feature
Inventor operations such as Lofting.
 No support for attributes
The translator does not support translating attributes such as colors and layers.
 No support for hidden flag
The translator does not support filtering hidden bodies. Thus, all hidden bodies are translated as well.
 Limited support for units
The translator supports only millimeter and inch for Inventor 6 – 11 and 2008. For versions 2009 and
2010, the translator supports only millimeter as unit. All unsupported units are assumed to be
millimeter.
JT Open parts, assemblies (versions 6.4, 7.0, parts, assemblies (versions 6.4,
8.0, 8.1, 8.2, 9.0 to 9.5) 7.0, 8.0, 8.1, 8.2, 9.0 to 9.5)
.jt .jt
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 JTOpen 5.3 libraries are available for reading and writing JT files that were created with version 5.3.
 JT files with product manufacturing information (PMI) are supported for:
 datum labels
 text notes
 dimension measurements
 GD&T
 Surface finish symbols
 PMI option is ON by default
 Semantic and Polyline PMI are supported. Semantic imported dimensions will update with geometry
changes. Polyline are simply curves in space that do not update.
 Semantic PMI is placed on Layer0 after import. Polyline is placed on a layer called Imported Polyline
Annotations.
 For GD&T symbols, you can click any tolerance annotation or datum symbol to view its values in the
Properties panel.
 Click on an arrow or line to view or modify arrow or styles in the Properties panel.
Keyshot not supported parts, assemblies
.bip
NX parts, assemblies (versions NX1 not supported
through NX7 and UG 11 through
18)
.prt
Parasolid® parts, assemblies (versions 10.0 parts, assemblies V10 - V24
through 24) (V17 default)
.x_t, .x_b, .xmt_txt, .xmt_bin .x_t, .x_b

Point curve text curves (insert only) not supported
.txt
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 A spline curve is created by default or if the option Polyline=False is used. If the option
Polyline=True is used, then the points are connected by straight line segments.
 By default, 2D curves are created. When specifying 2D curves, the first column of the data points must
be an integer and gives the height of the plane of one of the curves. The beginning of a new curve is
specified by changing this height from one line to the next. If option 3D=True is used, the curves can
be 3D
 Multiple curves are separated by blank lines.
 You can import point curve text files that contain single-point curves, which will be created as points.
 Point-curve text files opened or inserted in SpaceClaim display a closed curve when the file has a
repeated value.
 Curves can be imported to coordinate systems or other geometry like other imported objects.
 Point-curve text files with columns separated by commas can be opened or inserted in SpaceClaim.
This feature allows you to import any comma-separated value file into SpaceClaim.
 If there is an error reading the input text file, a message will appear with the line number of the error in
parentheses followed by the text appearing on that line.
 The following example shows the contents of a point curve text file on the left and the 3D curves it
creates on the right:
3d=true
polyline=false
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
2 0 1
2 1 0
3 0 0
3 0 1
3 1 0
 The file includes the polyline=false option, so spline curves are created. If this option was
polyline=true, then straight lines would have been created.
 3D curves are created because the file contains the 3d=true option. If this option was not present in
the file, or if it was 3d=false, then the curves would be two-dimensional.
 The blank line after the first set of coordinates indicates that the next set of coordinates is a new curve.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 You can copy the file contents above and paste them into a text file, then use Insert File to
try it yourself.
Microsoft® Power Point® not supported 3D markup slides .ppt

Pro/ENGINEER® parts, assemblies V16 o Wildfire not supported
5.0 (Creo 1.0)
.prt, .asm
 When you import Pro/ENGINEER assemblies and parts are missing, you will be prompted to search for
the missing files.
 Wildfire 5 PMI is not supported.
 Instance and assembly accelerator files (*.xpr and *.xas) can now be opened directly into SpaceClaim.
Rhino® parts, assemblies (version 4.0) parts, assemblies (version 4.0)
.3dm .3dm
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 When importing a Rhino file, multi-segmented curves are consolidated.

 You can export layer names, color information, sketch lines, and material information.N
 Neighboring topology is taken into consideration by default. This means that if problems are found
with a face, then its neighboring faces can provide information used to fix the face.
 The Rhino 32/64-bit plug-in supports the Rhino V5 Beta version. You can use it to import and export
using Rhino V4 formatted data. As before, you can also cut and copy work in progress out of Rhino
and MOI, and paste it into SpaceClaim.
Supported Rhino Rhino object SpaceClaim entity

Object
Solids Closed polysurfaces Solid body
Closed surfaces: sphere,
torus, ellipsoid dots;
Polysurfaces (open) Sheet body
Surfaces Trimmed surfaces Sheet body
Untrimmed surfaces with
boundary edges
Curves (curve, polycurve) Named sketch curve
Point objects (point, point cloud) Not supported
Polygon mesh objects Not supported
Object name Entity name
Object color Entity color
Layers Layer name Layer name
Layer color Layer color
On/off layer Show/hide layer
Locked/unlocked layer Locked/unlocked layer
Layer structure Component structure
Materials Material name Material name
Other material attributes Not supported
Groups Not supported
SketchUp® Up to SketchUp 8 SketchUp V3.0 to V8.0
.skp .skp
SolidWorks® SW 98 to SW 2012 not supported
.sldprt, .sldasm
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 If you open a SolidWorks file, SpaceClaim searches for required assembly and external part files in the
following locations:
 Root folder of the assembly
 Equivalent subfolder in new root folder
 Absolute path to the component saved in the assembly file
 When you import a design from SolidWorks, the units are changed to match the part.
STEP parts, assemblies (version AP203, parts, assemblies (version

AP214 [geometry]) AP302, AP214 [geometry])
.stp, .step .stp, .step
 When you import STEP assemblies from one file, select the Create multiple documents when
importing assemblies SpaceClaim file option if you want the assemblies to remain in one file instead
of being split into multiple files, one for each internal component.
STL AP203, AP214 (geometry) AP203, AP214 (geometry)
.stl .stl
 When exporting STL files, the output is set to Binary by default.

 STL files can include polyface meshes, and they can be imported as lightweight objects. Polyface
meshes are imported as solids.
 When saving as an .STL file, the quality is based your graphics quality setting. We recommend setting
the option to enable the highest possible graphics quality if you want your design to be useful as an
SLA rapid prototype for form, fit, and function purposes.
 You can import an STL file as a solid, if it has multiple planar areas that can be merged into one planar
face.
VDA-FS parts, assemblies (version 1.0 and parts (version 2.0)

2.0)
.vda
.vda
Video files files (insert only) with proper not supported
See Inserting a video codec(s) installed
.wmv, .avi, .flv, .mkv, .mov, .mp4,

.mpg, mpeg, .ogm, .vob
VRML not supported parts, assemblies
.wrl
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Wavefront not supported parts, assemblies
.obj
 Structure is not maintained when you save as an OBJ file.

 When you save your design as an OBJ file, the current graphics tessellation is used for accuracy. You
can modify the tessellation by setting the Image quality vs. graphics speed SpaceClaim option.
XAML not supported part and assembly solids only
.xaml
 The orientation and translation of the current view is saved in an XAML file.
XPS not supported 3D markup slides
.xaml
To import a design
1. Select Open from the Application menu or click in the Quick Access toolbar, or click the
Insert tool in the Insert ribbon group on the Design tab.
Depending on the selected file type, additional elements appear in the Open window. For
descriptions of these options or to set their default values, click Options.
2. Select Check geometry to run the geometry check after the file is opened or imported. See
Checking geometry.
3. Navigate to and select the file you want to open or insert.
If you are opening a file, it is displayed in a new Design window. If you are inserting a file, it
appears as an external component within the active design.
If there is an invalid character in the path of a file you are trying to open or insert, that character is
replaced with a valid character to avoid errors.
If you open an Inventor, Pro/ENGINEER, or Unigraphics file that has missing components, you will
be prompted to locate the missing files.
Click Stop in the status bar to cancel an import while it is in progress.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The name of the imported file is displayed in the Status Log when it is successful.
To import a design by dragging and dropping
Drag the file icon to anywhere in the title bar and ribbon area. You can also drag the icon into the design
window if no design tab is open.
This will open the design and all of its drawing sheets, annotations, etc.
You can also cut and paste data from certain applications. See Copying and pasting from other
applications.
To export a design or 3D markup
1. Select Save as from the Application menu.
You can also press F12 or Ctrl+Shift+S.
Your design must be saved as a SpaceClaim document before you can export it in another format.
2. Select a file type from the Save as type drop-down.

3. Depending on the selected file type, additional options appear in the Save As window:
 Save as copy if you want to save copies of external components referenced by the design with
new names or replace external components with other external components. You must click
Resources to do this.
 References to display all the external components referenced by the file. Select one or more
external components and click Browse to rename or replace the components.
 Override Units is available when you export some file types. Select the units from the list.
 Options to also set your default export options for the selected file type.
 Improve exported data to clean up imprinted edges and split curves when you export data.
Hidden lines are exported with the default line weight. Components maintain their mirror
relationships when they are exported.
For CATIA, Parasolid, STL, and STEP files, you can select which version or protocol to save as. You
can also set your default export options by clicking Options.
You can save documents that only contain sketch curves to ACIS binary (.sab), ACIS text (.sat),
Parasolid, CATIA, IGES, STEP, and VDA formats. You can import and export free points for Rhino,
PDF, ACIS, IGES, JT Open, Parasolid, STEP and VDA formats.
Imported designs with identical file names are given unique file names when you save your
SpaceClaim design. For example, if you imported name.prt and name.asm, these files are saved
as name.scdoc and name2.scdoc.
4. Browse to a folder and type a file name in the dialog.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Click Save.
To export a design as an image
1. Select Save as from the Application menu.
You can also press F12 or Ctrl+Shift+S.
Your design must be saved as a SpaceClaim document before you can export it in another format.
2. Select an image file type (GIF, JPG, PNG, or TIFF) from the Save as type list.
3. (Optional) Click Image size to change the size of the image.
4. Browse to a folder and type a file name in the dialog.
5. Click Save.
To copy the contents of the Design window to Windows clipboard
Right-click in the Design window and select Copy Scene to copy an image of the contents of the Design
window to the Windows clipboard. You can then paste the image into a document.
To open a the parent document of a design
Right-click the top level component in the Structure tree and select Open root part to open the parent
document of a design that was saved after its parent was closed. This problem may exist in files that were
created with previous versions of SpaceClaim.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
PMI information from a CATIA file
Consolidated multi-segmented curves from a Rhino file
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Copying and pasting from other applications
You can copy from another application and paste into SpaceClaim. This is currently supported for Rhino
and Moment of Inspiration (MoI). Simply copy an object in Rhino or MoI, then open SpaceClaim and click
Paste.
Objects are placed in their original position and will not be placed relative to selected objects in
SpaceClaim.
Objects pasted from MoI do not have their units defined by default and could be scaled very differently
when you paste them into SpaceClaim. To change the units in MoI, click Options, then set the Unit System
field.
Printing drawing sheets and designs
Your zoom settings determine how a drawing sheet or design will print. For best results, select a paper
size from the Print window that is the same as the drawing sheet format. If you changed the orientation of
the drawing sheet, then the view that appears in the Design window is the one that will be scaled to fit the
selected paper size. This can result in a clipped drawing.
Shaded designs are converted to hidden-line removed graphics style when you select Print from the
application menu. Select Shaded from the Graphics Style drop-down after printing to return your design
to the shaded style.
When a curve is clipped (or hidden) behind a solid or surface in the Design window, it will not be clipped
when it is printed. The curve will appear to be in front of the solid or surface on the printed page. The
example below shows a curve that is clipped in the Design window on the left, and the same view in print
preview on the right.
To print a drawing sheet
1. Position your design in the Design window as you would like it to appear on the printed page.
Tip: Select Zoom > Zoom Extents from the Orient ribbon group in the Design tab.
You can also print the design at different zoom levels by zooming in or out, but for the best
results we recommend you use Zoom Extents.
2. Select SpaceClaim Options from the Application menu and click Detailing.
3. Select All New Documents from the Detailing options for drop-down list.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Click No format and select the paper size and orientation.

5. Click OK.
6. Select Print > Print Preview from the Application menu to preview the print.
You can zoom, set the page orientation, set print properties, and print the sheet from this
window.
7. Select Print from the Application menu.
You can also use Save As to save the sheet as a 2D PDF (*.pdf). The PDF will reflect the current format and
size properties of the sheet.
To print all open drawing sheets
1. Click Print in the Application menu.

2. Select All Open Sheets for the Sheet Range.
3. Set the paper size, margins, and other options as desired.
4. Click Print.
To print a design
1. Position your design in the Design window as you would like it to appear on the printed page.
Tip: Select Zoom > Zoom Extents from the Orient ribbon group in the Design tab.
You can also print the design at different zoom levels by zooming in or out, but for the best
results we recommend you use Zoom Extents.
2. Select Print from the Application menu.

3. Set the following options:
 Number of copies
 Paper margins: Set the margins in millimeters (mm) or inches (in).
 Paper orientation: Choose between landscape or portrait mode.
 Paper size: Select from the list of standard paper sizes.
 Print content: Select Scene to print the design based on the size shown in the Design window.
This setting is used by default for designs. Select Extents to expand the design until it fills the
printable area of the page. This setting is used by default for drawing sheets.
 Print scale: If you select Extents for the Print content, you can set the scale of the printed
image. Enter a value for the scale, or select Scale to fit.
 Shaded quality: You can set the resolution for 3D objects in dpi (dots per inch). Select System-
defined to use the printer's default dpi setting.
 Print to PDF: The design window and its contents scale to fit the paper size of the selected
printer. The Shaded Quality is automatically set to 110 dpi, which is best for on-screen viewing.
For printing, change the value to 300dpi.
4. (Optional) Click Preview to see how your printed design will look.
5. Click Print.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Design window contents will be zoomed so that it fits the page size.
To adjust the design's size on the page
1. Select Print from the Application menu and click Print Preview.
2. Select one of the following from the Content ribbon group:
 Scene to display the design based on the size shown in the Design window. This setting is
used by default for designs.
 Extents to expand the design until it fills the printable area of the page. This setting is used by
default for drawing sheets.
3. If you selected Extents, select or enter one of the following from the Scale ribbon group:
 Scale to fit to scale the design to fit the page. This setting is used by default.
 Enter a value in the scale drop-down to scale your design by that amount.
To correct a clipped print preview
1. Close the print preview.

2. Select the Home tool from the Orient ribbon group.
3. Select Print from the Application menu and click Preferences to display your printer's Printing
Preferences window.
4. Set your printer settings in the Layout area to match the format and orientation of the drawing
sheet.
5. Set the paper size in the Advanced area to match the format paper size.
If your printer only handles 8.5 x 11" paper, select the option that scales the image to fit the
paper.
6. Click OK on the Advanced Options and Printing Preferences windows, and click Apply on the
Print window.
To set page margins
1. Select Print from the Application menu and click Print Preview.
2. Click the Display tab and check Margins in the Show group.
3. Click the Print Preview tab and enter the margins in the Margins ribbon group.
Journals and logs
Journals record the actions you performed while creating your design, including file actions, such as
closing a design. You must play a journal from a newly opened SpaceClaim application to avoid errors.
SpaceClaim also logs information automatically into the SpaceClaim.log file, which can be found in one of
the following directories:
 C:\Users\<User>\AppData\Roaming\SpaceClaim on Vista systems

 C:\Documents and Settings\<User>\Application Data\SpaceClaim on XP systems
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can replay journal files in Cosmetic Replay mode, which skips extraneous cursor movements and
shows only a minimum of spin, pan, zoom, and other navigation movements. This allows you to make a
journal file and record it as a video without doing as much editing after the video is recorded. Animations
are shown for pulls and geometry moves and changes when appropriate.
To display the journal tools
1. Select SpaceClaim Options from the Application menu and click Popular.
2. Check the Show Journal tab in the Ribbon box and click OK.
The Journal Tools tab is displayed. It contains the Journal ribbon group.
To save all your actions in the current SpaceClaim session to a journal
1. Click Save Current.

2. Navigate to the directory where you want to save the journal, enter a name and click Save.
3. Save the design files used in the session.
To play the journal from your last session
1. Exit and restart SpaceClaim.

2. Click Replay Previous.
To play a saved journal
1. Exit and restart SpaceClaim.

2. Click Play or Cosmetic Replay.
Play plays back every movement you made in the session, while Cosmetic Replay skips
extraneous cursor movements and shows only a minimum of spin, pan, zoom, and other
navigation movements.
3. Navigate to and select the journal file you want to play and click Open.
4. Review the actions from the session.
To create a video
1. Click Create Video in the Journal tab. The Create Video dialog box opens.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Specify an output video file (.avi) by browsing to a location and entering a name for the file.
3. Select a video codec.
4. (Optional) Adjust the video settings
1. Pixel Depth: (16, 24, or 32) The default is 16. Pixel Depth represents the video quality and
thus the size of the file. The higher the pixel depth, the more colors are maintained in the
video.
2. Frame Rate: The default is 10.
3. Compression: On or Off
5. Click the Start button to begin recording video.
6. Perform the operations you want to record.
7. Click the Stop button to end recording. Once recording stops, the video file is created in the
specified location.
SpaceClaim file format
Our files comply with the Microsoft Open Packaging Convention, which is also used by Microsoft Office
2007. These files are actually zip archives with a special structure, the contents of which are primarily XML
data.
This open format makes it possible for third parties to get the information they need from SpaceClaim
without talking directly to the SpaceClaim API. For example, a PDM system could check in a SpaceClaim
document with all external dependencies and show a 3D preview of the model. One could also create a
batch translator that runs on a UNIX operating system.
Third parties planning on working with SpaceClaim data should contact SpaceClaim for advice on how to
best integrate their solutions. In general, the benefit of working with SpaceClaim files is that there is no
need for a license of SpaceClaim to be present to read SpaceClaim data. When creating SpaceClaim data
or extending the SpaceClaim user interface, the API is a better choice. SpaceClaim provides sample code
for extracting solids from SCDOC files.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Files contained within the SpaceClaim file
This figure shows the files contained within a sample Flashlight.scdoc file.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Files contained within the SpaceClaim file
The document.xml.rels file contains pointers to all the files required to load the design into
SpaceClaim. The figure below shows this content for the Flashlight example.
For example, you can use the information in this file to determine all the parts required for a BOM by
looking at the assemblyComponent relationship. In this case, it points to another file called Standard
Parts.scdoc. By opening this file and reviewing its components and subcomponents, you can generate
a BOM report.
There are three types of external file pointers:
 assemblyComponent points to a file that contains subcomponents used in the assembly

 drawingFormat points to the file used to format the drawing sheet
 redlineComponent points to a 3D markup slide
There are also multiple internal file pointers to the geometry files, thumbnail, tessellated data, and
window settings. The bodyGeometry Id provides the key to identifying the bodies described in the other
XML and XAML files.
To view the data contained within SCDOC files
1. Copy the .scdoc file you want to view.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Replace the .scdoc file extension with the .zip file extension.
3. Extract the files within the zip file.
4. Open the folders and view the contents of the xml and xaml files with an XML viewer like
XMLNotepad.
To edit the data contained within SCDOC files
You can safely modify some of the data contained within the .scdoc file; however, when creating
SpaceClaim data or extending the SpaceClaim user interface, the API is a better choice. The following
steps explain how to edit an annotation within the Flashlight\SpaceClaim\document.xml.
1. Once you extract the files, open the document.xml with an XML viewer like XMLNotepad.
2. Search for the text of the annotation you want to change.
3. Edit the text.
4. Save the file.
5. Create a new zip file containing all the previously-extracted files. Make sure that you do not
include the top-level folder.
6. Replace the .zip extension with a .scdoc extension.
7. Open the file in SpaceClaim to check your edits.
To view a tessellated model
Open the facets.xaml file with Internet Explorer, or any other xaml viewer.
To view a thumbnail of the file
Open the thumbnail.png file with any graphics program. The thumbnail is displayed in Windows Explorer.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Designing
The tools you use for 2D and 3D sketching and editing are found in SpaceClaim's Design tab. With the
design tools, you can sketch in 2D, generate and edit solids in 3D, and work with assemblies of solids.
In SpaceClaim, there are three modes you can use to design: Sketch, Section, and 3D mode. You can
switch between these modes at any time.
When creating designs, you will use the following tools most often:
Use the Select tool to select 2D or 3D objects in your design for editing. You can select vertices,
edges, axes, faces, surfaces, solids, and components in 3D. In 2D, you can select points and lines.
You can also use this tool to change the properties of recognized or inferred objects.
Use the Pull tool to offset, extrude, revolve, sweep, draft, and blend faces; and to round or chamfer
corner edges.
Use the Move tool to move any single face, surface, solid, or component. The behavior of the Move
tool changes based on what you have selected. If you select a face, you can pull or draft it. If you
select a solid or surface, you can rotate or translate it.
Use the Combine tool to merge and split solids and surfaces.
Use Section mode to create and edit designs by sketching on and editing any cross-section through
the design.
Design tools are grouped into the following ribbon groups:
Clipboard Cut, copy, and paste 3D objects.

Spin, pan, and zoom your design. You can also select or create
Orient
a view.
Create and edit lines, arcs, splines, rectangles, circles, and
Sketch
points in 2D.
Switch between sketching in 2D, editing a cross-section, and
Mode
creating and editing objects directly in 3D
Edit Edit 2D and 3D geometry.
Intersect Merge or split solids and faces.
Insert Import other components and orient them within your design.
Assembly Create relationships between the components in your design.
If an operation runs more than three seconds, the Stop icon is activated in the status bar. Click to
cancel the current operation. You can also press and hold Esc to cancel out of any design action that is
taking too long.
When using any tool guide, you can click an empty point in the Design window to clear the tool guide
selection and return to the previous action within the tool.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Design modes
In SpaceClaim, there are three modes you can use to design: Sketch, Section, and 3D. These modes make
it clear when you are working in 2D vs. 3D, and clarify the difference between working in cross-section
(where you can alter 3D objects) and sketching (where you cannot alter 3D objects).
To switch modes
1. Click a tool in the Mode ribbon group.
You can also right-click an empty area of the Design window and select Sketch Mode, Section
Mode, or 3D Mode from the context menu, or press K (for Sketch mode), X (for Section mode),
or D (for 3D mode).
If you are sketching, you can also click Return to 3D mode in the Sketch plane mini-toolbar.
2. If you are switching from 3D mode to one of the other modes, select a plane to sketch on or
create the cross-section.
When you select an origin object or its center and click Sketch mode, the sketch plane is aligned
to the origin object's XY axis.
To flip the view while in section mode
Right-click and select Flip Viewing Direction while section mode is active.
Mode ribbon group
The Mode ribbon group contains the following tools:
Sketch mode displays the sketch grid, so you can use any of the sketch tools to sketch in 2D.
Section mode lets you edit solids and surfaces by working with their edges and vertices in cross-
section. You can also use all the sketch tools in Section mode to create and edit solids and surfaces in
cross-section.
3D mode lets you work directly with objects in 3D space.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
A design in section mode; the active component is displayed in the part color (magenta in this example)
and the inactive components are displayed in gray.
Switching from Sketch mode to 3D mode automatically converts closed sketched curves into surface
objects and the sketch curves become edges. Only the sketch curves that contribute to the closed surface
are converted to edges; leftover curves remain in the design as free curves.
Editing in cross-section
Use Section mode to edit solids by working with their edges and vertices in cross-section. You can modify
faces, edges, planes, cylinders, rounds, and chamfers in section mode. You can edit solids and surface
bodies.
In Section mode, lines represent faces and points (or vertices) represent edges.
For example, to rotate a face around an edge, select the line that represents the face, Alt+click the vertex
that represents the edge, and pull. Moving a sketched line in Section mode does not move the solid it is
sketched on. You must move a section line (a line that represents a face) to modify a solid in Section
mode.
Hatching is used to show the intersection of the cross-section plane and a solid. Arc centers are shown as
small cross marks. Hatching appears bolder inside faces to indicate what is shown in a cross-section view.
(See examples, below).
You can use the following tools: Select, Pull, Move, Combine, Split Body, Shell, Offset, Fill, and all
sketch tools. Use the Select tool to edit spline faces (represented by a spline in cross-section). You can
also cut, copy, and paste. We recommend that you clip the scene above the grid to enhance the visibility
of the cross-section.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To edit in cross-section
1. Select or de-select options based on whether you want to maintain and view relationships while
you edit in cross-section.
2. Select the face you want to use to create the cross-section plane, or select any faces, edges, or
vertices that define a plane.
If you are in a drawing sheet with cross-section views, you do not have to choose a face, as the
plane of the drawing sheet is automatically used as the section plane.
3. (Optional) Move or rotate the cross-section grid and click the Section tool when you are finished.
4. Click and drag the edges and vertices of the cross-section to edit them.
You can also bend edges with the Bend tool, and pull section points (edges) and section lines
(faces) with the Pull tool. If you set the Auto-extrude/revolve sketches in Section mode
Advanced SpaceClaim option, sketch made with the sketch tools are automatically extruded or
revolved to form surfaces and solids when you begin the sketch on the edge of an existing
surface or solid. If you do not begin the sketch on an existing edge, you are switched to Sketch
mode.
We recommend zooming into your design so that it is easier to select the correct entity. For
example, if you are trying to select an edge, but your design appears very small in the Design
window, it is possible to accidentally select a midpoint or end point of the edge instead. Moving
the midpoint or end point of an edge will not be reflected by a mirrored entity.
Options
The following options are available in the Section tool:
Maintain Mirror Select this option to maintain the influence of mirrors in your design while editing.
Select this option to maintain the influence of baselines in your design while editing.
Maintain Offset
Baseline faces are shown as blue edges when viewed in cross-section.
Examples
Moving a spline point in section mode
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Bold hatching indicates the hatching that would be shown on a drawing sheet cross-section view
Extruding while sketching in Section mode
Cutting, copying, and pasting
Select a tool from the Clipboard ribbon group to cut, copy, or paste any 2D or 3D object. You can use
these tools any time, even when you are designing with other 2D or 3D tools.
Objects are pasted into the active component. Objects that can be named (components, bodies, axes, or
planes) will retain their names when pasted.
When you cut and paste a solid or surface, the object retains its color and face style.
To cut an object
1. Select the object.

2. Select the Cut tool from the Clipboard ribbon group.
You can also press Ctrl+X or right-click in the Design window and select Cut from the context
menu. If you cut the face of a solid, it is converted to a surface.
To copy an object
1. Select the object.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Select the Copy tool from the Clipboard ribbon group.
You can also press Ctrl+C or right-click in the Design window and select Copy from the context
menu.
To paste an object into the Design window
1. Cut or copy the object.
2. Select the Paste tool from the Clipboard ribbon group.
You can also press Ctrl+V or right-click in the Design window and select Paste from the context
menu.
If you do not specify a location to paste, the copy is placed in its original location relative to the
world origin.
When you paste an object and it is located outside of the visible area in the Design window, the
zoom is adjusted to make the object visible.
To paste an object onto a face
1. Select all the faces of the object.

2. (Optional) Alt+click the face of the object you want to attach to the face.
The face is highlighted in blue.
3. Cut or copy the selection.

4. Click the face onto which you want to paste the object.
5. Paste the object.
The object is pasted on the face at the location you clicked. The blue face is attached to the
clicked face.
To paste a round onto another edge
1. Select the face of the round.

2. Cut or copy the face.
3. Click the edge onto which you want to paste the round.
4. Paste the round.
To delete an object
1. Right-click the selected object (or set of objects).

2. Press Delete.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you want to delete something and fill the gap with neighboring geometry, or create faces in the
gap, you should use the Fill tool.
If you delete the face of a solid, it is converted to a surface.
Dimensions
You can dimension every element in your design, from lines in sketches to faces of solids. In SpaceClaim,
dimensions are not constraints. Rather, they are tools for precise control during the creation or
modification of a design. In SpaceClaim, if you do want to save a dimension with your design, use the
Ruler Dimension option when pulling or moving. You can save the ruler dimensions as Groups for later
edits.
Whenever dimension fields appear, you can press the spacebar or click on them to enter a value, and
press Tab to switch between fields.
You can use mathematical expressions in a dimension.
To dimension a sketch line during creation
1. Press the spacebar (or just type) to enter a value in the highlighted field.
2. Press Tab to switch between dimension fields.
3. Repeat step 2 until you have entered all the dimensions.
4. Press Enter to accept the values and return to sketching.
The dimensions persist until you select another tool or begin drawing another sketch object.
To dimension the start, end, or middle point of a sketch line from another point in
your sketch
1. Hover the mouse over the point from which you want to dimension.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Press Shift.
As you move your mouse around the sketch grid, a dimension will appear from the point you
indicated to the mouse location.
6. Press Enter to accept the values and place the point that begins or ends your line.
To dimension existing sketch lines
1. Click the Select tool.

2. Select the sketch object you want to change.
3. Dimension the item's size or location by doing one of the following:
 Press the spacebar (or just type) to enter a value in the highlighted field.
 Drag the selected item to change its size or location.
 Hover over a point in your design and press Shift to dimension between the selected object
and that point.
 Press Shift while dragging to dimension from the current mouse location.
To dimension while moving or pulling
1. Select a direction for the move or pull.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Press Enter to accept the values and move or pull the selected object the distance you entered.
To create a ruler dimension
1. Click Pull in the Edit group on the Design tab or press P.

2. Select the faces or edges whose location you wish to specify.
3. Select a direction for the dimension.
4. Select Create Ruler Dimension from the Options panel or right-click and select it from the mini-
toolbar.
The start point of the dimension is set as the location of the Pull arrow or Move handle.
5. Click an object to set the end point of the dimension.
Use the scroll wheel if multiple objects appear at the same point in the Design window.
6. Enter a value.
7. Press Enter to accept the value and complete the move or pull.
Press Esc to hide the ruler dimension.
You can make more than one change per ruler dimension.
To create an angular ruler dimension
1. Select the Move tool and switch to Section mode.

2. Select the section line (that represents a face) that you want to rotate.
3. (Optional) Anchor the Move handle to the object around which you want to rotate by dragging
the center sphere or using the Anchor tool guide.
4. Select the rotational axis of the Move handle.
5. Select Create Ruler Dimension from the Options panel or right-click and select it from the mini-
toolbar.
An angular dimension indicator appears from the red linear axis of the Move handle.
6. Select the end reference for the angular dimension.

7. Enter a value for the dimension.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Detaching
You can detach individual pieces of a sketch, or detach objects or faces in 3D. You can detach protrusions
to move them with the Move tool's Detach First option.
To detach in 2D
Alt+drag with the Select tool to detach the selected item when sketching. Use the 2D Move tool to
detach items and move them.
To detach in 3D
1. Click the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group.

2. If you want to detach an object, Ctrl+click all its faces to select them.
3. Right-click the object and select Detach from the context menu.
Undo and redo
SpaceClaim stores all your actions from the moment you open the SpaceClaim application until you close
it. This includes the use of all tools in all tabs, opening and closing files, loading and activating
components, and changing settings. Every action is recorded and can be undone and redone.
The undo list is set to 50 steps by default. You can modify this number, but we recommend that you keep
the default setting.
To undo or redo a tool action
Click the Undo and Redo tools in the Quick Access toolbar or press Ctrl+Z to undo and Ctrl+Y
to redo.
You can undo and redo actions until you have undone or redone every action in your session, or you can
jump to a particular action by selecting that action from the Undo and Redo menus. If undoing an action
will open or close a document or switch to a new Design window, a confirmation window is displayed.
When you undo a tool action, the view is also changed to the view you used to perform that action.
To purge all actions
Select Purge from the Undo menu.
This clears the memory of all previous actions for the SpaceClaim session.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To undo or redo a view
Click the Previous View and Next View tools on the status bar to undo and redo your design
view changes.
Checking Geometry
You can check the geometry for solids and surfaces. The geometry is checked for all possible ACIS errors.
Select errors and warnings in the dialog to highlight the associated geometry in the Design window, as
shown below.
To check an object's geometry
1. Right-click a solid or surface in the Structure tree.

2. Select Check Geometry.
You can click Stop in the status bar or press Esc to cancel the operation if necessary.
A dialog will open that lists any errors or warnings found.
3. Select errors and warnings in the dialog to highlight the associated geometry in the Design
window.
4. Select Zoom to fit selection to automatically zoom in to the problem area in the Design window.
5. Click Close when you are finished.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Working with sketch curves in 3D
You can use the following sketch tools in 3D mode:
Line Tangent Line

Spline Tangent Arc
Point
You can use the following tools from the Sketch group to change curves in 3D mode:
Create Rounded Corner can be used on curves when they are coplanar.
Create Corner can also be used on coplanar curves.
Trim Away can be used to trim curves in 3D mode.
Split Line can be used to split curves in 3D mode.
Using other tools to create and edit sketch curves in 3D mode
There are several methods that can create or edit sketch curves in 3D mode:
 Use the Pull tool to pull a point into a line or sweep a point along an edge.
 Use the Move tool to translate or rotate curves in 3D mode.
 Use the Face Curve tool to sketch on a face or surface.
 You can use the Extend tool on the Prepare tab with sketch curves in 3D mode.
 You can change the radius of a circle or an arc directly in 3D by selecting it with the Select tool.
Examples
Sketching a path and sweeping to create a pipe
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Sketching
Sketching is useful if you want to create a region that can be pulled into 3D. If you want to create a 2D
layout, and have no immediate need to generate 3D objects from the lines in the layout, then you should
create a Layout.
Use the sketch tools to sketch shapes in 2D. When you exit the sketch, regions are formed by intersecting
lines. These regions will become solids and lines become edges when you pull your sketch into 3D with
the Pull tool. Even when pulled into 3D, a region can be decomposed back into its sketched lines for
further editing as long as any remnant of the lines is still unused in 3D.
To use any of the sketch tools to sketch in 2D, you must first display the sketch grid. If you have a planar
surface highlighted, and press a sketch tool shortcut (such as L for the Line tool), you can mouse over
planar surfaces in the design to highlight surfaces for the sketch grid. (Press Esc while in this state to
return to the Select tool in 3D mode.) You can adjust the units and spacing of the grid, and we
recommend that you fade the scene under the grid to enhance the visibility of your sketch.
You can lock the base dimension base point when sketching multiple objects. Locking a base point
enables you to secure the dimensions of an object relative to that point, or, the dimensions of an object
relative to any object you previously sketched. As you sketch, you can enter coordinates for each
successive point relative to the previous point.
While you are sketching, you may need to orient your design. If you use the Spin, Pan, or Zoom tools to
reorient the sketch, click the navigation tool again or press Esc to continue sketching where you left off.
If you select Auto-extrude/revolve sketches in Section mode in the Advanced options, sketching in
Section mode will automatically extrude your sketch to 3D. The extrusion depth is set to 10 times the
spacing of your sketch grid. You can dimension this depth for any extruded sketch by entering a value in
that dimension field.
When you copy and paste sketch objects, they are placed in their original location relative to the center of
the grid. The objects will be highlighted when you paste, so you can easily move them to a different
position.
Sketched objects are added to the Curves folder in the Structure tree as you create them. If the list of
sketch curves is long, then you will see More Curves in the list. Click More Curves to display the entire list.
1. Click Sketch Mode in the Mode group on the Design tab.

2. Choose where you want to sketch.
Mouse over the planes and planar faces in your design to preview the location and orientation of
the sketch grid.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The sketch grid is placed automatically if you pre-select an object in the active component before
you click Sketch Mode. If you pre-select an origin object, the sketch grid will be aligned with its X
and Y axes and the sketch origin will be centered on the origin object. If you pre-select axes
objects, the grid will run through the axes.
If you previously selected a set of references that define a plane, the sketch grid is placed on the
defined plane. The sketch grid mini-toolbar allows you to switch from sketching on one plane to
sketching on another without leaving the sketch tools.
1. If the sketch grid is currently displayed, click Select New Sketch Plane in the mini
toolbar, or right-click and select Select New Sketch Plane from the context menu.
2. Mouse over any existing geometry to display existing planes.
3. Click to select the highlighted plane and display the sketch grid. Any vertices or edges on
the plane are drawn in the current layer color and bolded.
4. (Optional) Click Plan View in the mini-toolbar or in the Orient ribbon group to view
the sketch grid head-on.
3. (Optional) Move or rotate the sketch grid.
1. (Optional) Select any points, lines, or curves that you want to move with the sketch grid.
2. Click Move Grid in the mini-toolbar.
3. Use the Move handle to move or rotate the sketch grid. Highlighted curves will be
moved with the grid.
4. (Optional) Use the Orient To Object tool guide to orient the sketch grid to an object in
the Design window. The object does not have to lie in the sketch plane.
4. Select any sketch tool from the Sketch ribbon group.
You can draw points, lines, tangent lines, construction lines, rectangles, three-point
rectangles, circles, three-point circles, ellipses, splines, tangent arcs, three-point arcs,
sweep arcs, and polygons using the sketch tools. You can also create sketch lines by projecting
the edges of 3D solids onto the sketch grid.
SpaceClaim's sketch tools also let you split, trim, and offset lines, as well as create corners and
rounded corners.
5. Draw with the tool.
Mousing over the sketch grid snaps to points based on your snapping options. Press Shift to turn
snapping on and off.
While mousing, SpaceClaim also provides extension lines when you are parallel to an edge or
perpendicular to an end point. For certain drawing tools, it displays indicators of tangency, line
midpoint, line end point, squares, and golden rectangles.
All tools let you enter dimensions while sketching. In some tools, you can press Shift at a
reference point to see dimensions from that point to the cursor.
When you are done sketching with the tool, you can:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Click another sketching tool.

 Click Return to 3D Mode in the mini-toolbar or 3D Mode in the Mode group in the ribbon
bar to pull your sketch to 3D.
 Press Esc or click the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group to edit the sketch.
To lock a base point
1. Enter Sketch mode.

2. Select the Cartesian dimensions option in the Sketch Options panel.
3. Select the Lock base point checkbox in the Sketch Options panel.
4. Place the sketch on the sketch grid relative to your chosen dimensions from the locked base
dimension base point.
To change the location of a base point
1. While in Sketch mode, while hovering over the base dimension point from which you want to
take a dimension, press Shift to dimension between the selected object and that point.
2. Click and drag the line or point you want to edit.
The Cartesian dimensions are now taken from this new base dimension base point.
To edit a sketch
1. Click the Select tool. (You can also press Esc if you are in a sketching tool.)
Alt+click and drag if you want to detach the line or point before moving it.
Ctrl+click and drag to create a copy.
Enter a value to dimension the move.
You can also use the Move tool to edit a sketch.
To toggle between a curve and a construction curve
Right-click the curve and select Construction On/Off.
To mirror in Sketch mode
1. Draw a line or construction line.

2. Right-click the line and select Set as Mirror Line from the context menu.
3. Sketch on one side of the line to mirror the sketch on the other side.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can only mirror geometry drawn after you set the mirror line. If you want to mirror existing
geometry, use the Mirror tool.
Sketch ribbon group
The tools on the left side of the ribbon group are used to create sketch and construction curves. The tools
framed by the lighter area on the right are used to edit sketches.
The Sketch ribbon group contains the following sketch creation tools:
Use the Line tool to sketch lines in 2D.

Use the Tangent Line tool to sketch lines tangent to any curves in your design.
Use the Construction Line tool to draw lines that help you create an accurate sketch. These lines
become axes in 3D mode.
Use the Rectangle tool to draw a rectangle along the axes of the sketch grid.
Use the Three-Point Rectangle tool to quickly sketch a rectangle at any angle in 2D.
Use the Ellipse tool to sketch an ellipse in 2D.
Use the Circle tool to sketch a circle in 2D when you know the location of the circle's center and radius,
diameter, or a point on the circle's edge.
Use the Three-Point Circle tool when you don’t know the center of the circle, but you know where the
edge of the circle must be. This tool works with any combination of free points, known points, or
tangent attachments.
Use the Polygon tool to sketch a polygon with up to 32 sides.
Use the Tangent Arc tool to sketch an arc tangent to any single curve or line in your design.
Use the Three-Point Arc tool to create an arc by specifying its start and end points, and the radius or
chord angle.
Use the Sweep Arc tool to create an arc with a known center and end points.
Use the Spline tool to sketch splines in 2D. A spline is a continuously curved line, without sharp
boundaries (that is, without vertices).
Use the Point tool to sketch points in 2D.
Use the Face Curve tool to sketch a curve on a face of a solid.
The Sketch ribbon group contains the following sketch editing tools:
Use the Create Rounded Corner tool to trim back or connect two intersecting lines or arcs so that
they meet with an arc tangent at both ends.
Use the Offset Curve tool to create an offset of any line in the grid plane.
Use the Project to Sketch tool to project edges from a 3D object onto the sketch grid.
Use the Create Corner tool to trim back or extend two lines so that they meet at a corner.
Use the Trim Away tool to delete any line portion bounded by an intersection with a line or edge.
Use the Split Curve tool to split one line with another line or point.
Use the Bend tool to bend straight lines and edges to form an arc. You can also use the Bend tool to
adjust the radius of arcs and arced edges. Bend works on straight lines when you are sketching and
when you are editing in cross-section.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Use the Scale tool to display control handles you can use to manipulate a 2D object.
Sketching tool guides
The sketching tools have several tool guides that allow you to change the behavior of the tool. These
guides are active when appropriate:
Use Select Reference Curve to dimension a sketch based on an existing curve.
Use Move Dimension Base Point to move the base point from your starting point to a different
location. This is useful when you want to control the distance between your new sketch and existing
object.
Use Change Dimension Reference Angle to dimension a sketch based on a reference angle from a
point on an existing object.
Sketching mini-toolbar
While you are sketching, the mini-toolbar provides quick access to the following actions:
Click Return to 3D Mode to switch to the Pull tool and pull your sketch into 3D. Any closed loops will
form surfaces or faces. Intersecting lines will split faces.
Click Select New Sketch Plane to select a new face to sketch on.
Click Move Grid to move or rotate the current sketch grid with the Move handle.
Click Plan View for a head-on view of the sketch grid.
Options
The following options are available for every sketch tool:
 Cartesian dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian dimensions
from the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the point you select. If you
don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from the origin.
 Polar dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions from
the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select. If you don't
have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the origin.
 Snap to grid: Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap to the
minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and 0.125in for
Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
 Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap
to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap options to
change the angular increment used for snapping.
 Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design to a
drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves checkbox again in
the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves on the drawing sheet.
See Layout Curves.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Editing a sketch
You can edit the dimensions of sketched lines, arcs, and points using the Select tool. Tangency is
maintained when you edit a sketch.
To edit a sketch
Select the Select Reference Curve tool guide to dimension from another object, similar to the
Shift+hover functionality in other tools.
Alt+click and drag if you want to detach the line or point before moving it.
Ctrl+click and drag to create a copy.
Enter a value to dimension the move.
To edit the length and angle dimensions of a line
1. Click the end point of a line or arc to edit the length or diameter and angle or chord angle
dimensions of the line or arc.
2. Mouse over the opposite end point of the line or arc to display a blue circle.
3. Drag to move the reference point for the dimension's length.
4. Enter the dimension for the length from the end point of the line to the new reference point.
5. Mouse over the line showing the end of the angle reference to highlight it in blue.
6. Drag the blue line to move the reference for the angle dimension.
If you move the angular reference 360°, the angle measurement is changed from clockwise to
counterclockwise.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Enter the dimension to adjust the angle of the line from the new reference line.
To edit the distance from another point
1. Click the midpoint of a line, the center of an arc, or any sketched point to display a dimension to a
reference point.
2. Mouse over the reference point, then drag the blue circles to the location you want to dimension
from.
3. Click to set the new reference location.
To skew the X-Y lines, click the outer blue circle and enter the skew angle.
To change the properties of a sketch object
2. Select the sketch object to display its properties in the Properties panel.
You may need to adjust the width of the Properties panel or the columns within the properties
panel. Place your mouse over the vertical column line and drag to widen the column. Place your
mouse over the border of the panel and drag to widen the panel.
3. You can:
 Select a new color from the Color property to color the object.
 Switch between lines and construction lines by selecting a value from the Construction
property.
 Switch between straight lines and mirror lines by selecting a value from the Mirror property.
 Enter the number of sides for a polygon in the Number of Sides property.
Tool guides
When editing sketch dimensions with the Select tool, you can use the following tool guides after you
select an end point or arc center:
Select the Select Reference Curve tool guide and click another sketch line to edit the
dimensions from the selected point to that sketch line.
Use the Move Dimension Base Point tool guide and click any point to edit the dimensions
from the selected point to that point.
Use the Change Dimension Reference Angle tool guide and click to set the angle reference
for the selected point.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Editing a racetrack by dragging internal lines. You can drag to resize, rotate, lengthen, or make one side
larger than the other by dragging different lines or points in the sketch.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Copying a sketch
You can copy a sketch line in Sketch mode with the Select tool.
To copy a sketch line
Ctrl+drag (with the Select tool) while sketching to copy a sketch line.
Press the spacebar while Ctrl+dragging a sketch line to dimension the distance between the first line and
the second, copied line.
You can also select a sketch line, copy it, and then select a point to paste the line onto the point.
The sketch plane
The sketch grid indicates that you are performing actions in a 2D plane. Selection, sketching, creating
layouts, adjusting blend planes, cross-section editing, and annotation all use the sketch grid. You can
adjust the units and spacing of the grid, as well as how solids are displayed when the grid appears.
To display a sketch plane
1. Select Sketch Mode or any sketching tool.

2. Click a face, plane, axis, or drawing sheet.
You can also select the combinations used to insert a plane to display a sketch grid at that
location.
If you do not see the grid, make sure that the Show Sketch Grid box is checked in the Display
tab's Grid ribbon group.
To select a new location for the sketch plane
1. Click Select New Sketch Plane in the mini-toolbar, or right-click and select Select New
Sketch Plane from the context menu.
2. Mouse over any existing geometry to display existing planes.
3. Click to select the highlighted plane and display the sketch grid.
To move the sketch plane
1. (Optional) Select any points, lines, or curves that you want to move with the sketch grid.
2. Click Move Grid in the mini-toolbar.
The Move handle is now placed on the end point of the last line or curve you drew. This makes
drawing a trajectory in 3D space easier.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Use the Move handle to move or rotate the sketch grid.
To view the sketch plane head-on
Click Plan View in the mini-toolbar or in the Orient ribbon group to view the sketch grid head-on.
To switch to the last sketch plane
Right-click the plane and select Use Last Sketch Plane.
This command is in the context menu for all tools that can be used in both sketch and section modes,
such as Pull.
All closed sketch curves in the current plane are converted to surfaces.
The last plane used for sketching on is set as active, and dynamic plane mode is ended when you use the
Use Last Sketch Plane command.
To use Alt+Select in Sketch mode
While working in Sketch mode, you can align a sketch plane to any linear reference that you Alt+Select.
For example, on a block with angled planar faces, you can select a face and then Alt+Select an edge. The
Sketch grid aligns to the Alt reference.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Moving the sketch grid
Use the Move Grid tool to move the sketch grid. Make successive sketches by moving the grid after
sketching closed line regions. These closed lines turn into regions when you move the grid.
The icon at the center of the sketch grid indicates the origin of the grid and moves with the grid as
you move the grid.
To move the sketch grid
1. Click the Move Grid tool on the mini-toolbar or click the Move tool and check the Move Grid
option.
2. (Optional) Select any sketch entities that you want to move along with the sketch grid.
3. Select a Move handle axis.
4. Drag along the axis of the Move handle to move or rotate the sketch grid.
Press Shift while dragging to snap the move to angular and linear increments based on your snap
settings as well as to snap the move parallel to planes, edges, and axes. You can also right-click
and select Use Ruler Dimension, and enter a value or press Enter to drag the grid. You can also
use the standard Move tool guides when moving the grid.
The Move handle can be moved around by dragging the center ball onto appropriate entities on
the sketch grid.
To move the center of the sketch grid
1. Insert an origin.
2. Select an axis of the origin.
3. Switch to Sketch mode.
You can also move the center of the sketch grid while sketching by using the Move Grid or Select
New Sketch Plane tools in the Sketch mini-toolbar.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Layout curves
You can sketch on a plane when you want to draw curves but have no immediate need to generate 3D
objects. If you want to create a region that can be pulled into 3D right away, create a sketch instead.
You can think of a layout as a pencil drawing made on your design. If you try to pull layout lines to 3D,
they do not behave the same way that sketched lines do. Closed lines are not converted to regions, so if
you pull a layout line, it creates a surface, not a solid. When you are ready to use your layout to create
geometry, project the layout lines to a sketch. Projecting a layout line to a sketch is like inking the line.
Layouts always appear on planes in the Structure tree.
We strongly encourage you to use layers when working with layouts to help you organize your design.
For example, you can color individual lines on each layout, show or hide the lines, or put the bounding
planes on a separate layer and turn that layer's visibility off to de-clutter your design. (When you import
files, they will initially appear in one color.)
To create a layout
1. Insert a plane.
2. Right-click the plane in the Structure tree and select Edit Layout.
The icon on the Structure tree changes to reflect that the plane is a layout.
3. Sketch on the plane.
To convert an existing plane to a layout
1. Click the Edit Layout icon next to the plane in the Design window.
The icon on the Structure tree changes to reflect that the plane is a layout.
2. Sketch on the plane.
To convert a sketch to a layout
1. Select the sketch entities that you want to appear on the layout.
2. Click the Plane tool in the Insert ribbon group.
A layout plane is drawn around the selected sketch entities.
3. Click the Edit Layout icon next to the plane in the Design window to continue editing the
sketch objects on the layout.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To import a 2D AutoCAD DXF or DWG file as a layout
You can import a 2D AutoCAD file into your design in the following ways:
 Drag and drop the DXF or DWG file into the Design window to create a layout in the active component.
 Drag the file onto a plane in the Structure tree to place the drawing on that plane and convert it to a
layout.
Edit a layout
Right-click the plane in the Structure tree and select Edit Layout, or click the Edit Layout icon next to
the plane in the Design window.
A layout plane is drawn around the selected sketch entities.
Moving in two dimensions
Use the Move tool to move lines or points with the Move handle. When you move points or lines with
this tool, they do not maintain their connections to other lines or points. If you want to maintain the
connections in your sketch, use the Select tool to edit the sketch.
To move sketch entities

2. Select the curve or curves that you want to move.
3. Select the following options:
 Move grid: Select this option to move the sketch grid.
 Ruler: Can be used to dimension the move. See the instructions below.
 Create patterns: Create a pattern of the selected objects. Pattern relationships of sketch
curves and points are lost when you go into Section or 3D mode.
 Maintain sketch connectivity: Keeps the connections between a sketch curve and other
curves that share its end points. If you deselect this option and move a sketch curve, the curve
will move independent of other curves.
 Other options in the Options panel are not relevant when you move sketch entities.
4. (Optional) To change the anchor location of the Move handle
 Drag the yellow center sphere on the Move handle.
 Click the Anchor tool guide and select the face, edge, or vertex on which to place the Move
handle.
The yellow center sphere turns into a blue cube when the Move handle is anchored.
5. (Optional) To change the direction or trajectory for the move,

 Drag one of the small balls on the rotational axis to reorient the Move handle, or dimension
the orientation by typing the rotation angle while you are dragging, then pressing Enter.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 You can also Alt+click a point or line, or click the Move Direction tool guide, then click a point
or line, to orient one of the Move handle's axes toward that point or along that line.
If you Alt+click a trajectory, you can move along the trajectory. Ctrl+Alt+click to add
contiguous lines or edges to the trajectory.
If you Alt+click a plane, the direction of movement is set perpendicular to the plane.
6. Click an axis and drag in that direction to move the selected object.
A line extends from the Move handle axis to indicate the direction you selected for movement.
7. To dimension the move,

1. Click Ruler in the Options panel.
2. Click an edge or face to anchor the ruler.
The ruler is oriented along the selected Move handle axis.
3. Type a distance and press Enter.
Dimensional sketching
SpaceClaim allows you to do precise, dimensional sketching internal to the current line and relative to
other lines and points. If a dimension cannot be edited, it does not highlight on mouse-over.
To dimension the current line
1. Press the spacebar to enter a value.

2. Press Tab to highlight and edit a secondary dimension.
3. Press Enter to accept the values.
SpaceClaim allows you to enter mathematical expressions as dimension values.
To dimension relative to other lines and points
Hover the mouse over a line or point and press Shift to create a dimension relative to that line or point. If
you click a spline, the dimension is always created from the start point of that spline.
The dimension is displayed as Cartesian or Polar coordinates based on which coordinate system you
select in the Options panel.
To create an offset angular dimension
If the angular reference does not touch the arc center, parallel reference lines are created.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Points
Use the Point tool to sketch points in 2D and 3D. Points are useful as a dimensional reference, for
splitting, and for creating a point on a line or curve through which you want to draw a three-point circle.
You can also project vertices in 3D to create points in the sketch.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can draw.
To draw a point
1. Click Point in the Sketch group on the Design tab.

2. Choose a mode:
 If a sketch plane is not active, press Esc to sketch in 3D or click on an object or objects in the
Design window to make a sketch plane.
 If a sketch plane is active, click 3D Mode in the Mode group or press D to sketch in 3D.
3. (Optional) Dimension the point relative to another object.
4. Click to place a point:
 On a face or surface: click on a location on a face or surface.
 On an edge or curve: click on a location on the edge or curve.
 On the midpoint of a straight line between two points in 2D: hold Alt and Shift and select
two points, then click on the temporary point at the midpoint.
 On the midpoint of a straight line between two points in 3D: select two points.
 Projected onto a face: select a point and then a face to project onto.
 Projected onto an edge: select a point and then an edge to project onto.
 In a UV direction within a face/surface: select an existing point on a face and then a location
on the face to specify the direction.
 Along an edge from an existing point on the edge: select a point on an edge and a location
along the edge.
You can also use temporary points, axes, and planes to help you create points. When hovering
over, or selecting on a point with the Select tool, the X, Y, Z locations of the point display in the
status bar.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
Use the Select tool guide to select a location for the point.
Use the Select Direction tool guide to change the direction of the dimension for the point.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Lines
Use the Line tool to sketch lines in 2D or to draw lines between points on objects in 3D. These lines will
become edges when you pull your sketch into a solid with the Pull tool.
To draw lines on a sketch plane
1. Click Line in the Sketch group or press L.

2. If a sketch plane is not active, click on an object or objects in the Design window to make a sketch
plane.
3. Click to set the first point of the line.
You can dimension the points relative to other objects.
4. Continue selecting points to draw line segments.
If you want any section of the line to be an arc, right-click and select Switch to Arc, then click to
set the radius. Right-click and select Switch to Line to return to drawing straight lines between
points. You must create at least one line segment before using this option.
5. End the line:

 Double-click to set the end point of the line.
 Right-click and select Finish Line.
 Press Esc.
 Connect the end point to the start point.
 Click any tool (except the Clipboard and Orient tools).
Click and drag to draw one straight line.
To draw lines between points in 3D

2. (Optional) Select Define line from center in the Options panel to start drawing the line from its
center instead of an end.
3. Switch to 3D mode:
 If a sketch plane is not active, press Esc.
 If a sketch plane is active, click 3D Mode in the Mode group or press D.
This can be any point on an object in your design.
5. Continue selecting points to draw line segments.

6. End the line:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 Press Esc.
To use a line as a mirror
Right-click the line and select Set as Mirror Line.
To toggle between a line and a construction line
Right-click the line and select Construction On/Off.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
Define line Select this option to sketch a line from the center. Click to define the center of the line,
from center then click again to set the length. You can also drag to draw the line.
Examples
Sketching a line between two solids in 3D
Tangent lines
Use the Tangent Line tool to sketch lines tangent to any curves in your design.
To draw a tangent line on a sketch plane
1. Click Tangent Line in the Sketch group.
The tool is disabled if there are no curves or lines in the sketch plane.
2. Click the curve you want to draw tangent to.

3. As you move the mouse, the start point moves so that the line remains tangent to the curve.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The tangency indicator shows you how the new line will be tangent with existing geometry if you
click on the current cursor location.
4. (Optional) Dimension the line with a length.
You cannot dimension from another sketch object when creating a tangent line.
5. Click to set the end point of the line.
If you move your mouse over another curve, the line snaps so that it is tangent to the second
curve. Hold Alt to stop your cursor from snapping to curves.
To draw tangent lines between points in 3D

The tangency indicator shows you how the new line will be tangent with existing geometry if you
To use a tangent line as a mirror
To toggle between a tangent line and a construction line
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Construction lines
Use the Construction Line tool to draw lines that help you create an accurate sketch. Construction lines
become axes in 3D. They are also useful for creating mirrors.
To draw a construction line
1. Select the Construction Line tool from the Sketch ribbon group.
2. (Optional) Dimension the first point relative to another sketch object.
4. (Optional) Dimension the line.
5. Click or press Enter to end the line.
By default, the line is dimensioned to its start point, but you can dimension to another sketch
object.
To use a construction line as a mirror
To toggle between a line and a construction line
Rectangles
Use the Rectangle tool in the Design tab or press R to draw a rectangle along the axes of the sketch
grid. When you exit the sketch, any rectangles become surfaces, and the lines become edges of a
rectangular solid when you pull your sketch into 3D with the Pull tool.
To draw a rectangle
1. Click Rectangle in the Sketch group or press R.

2. (Optional) Select Define rectangle from center in the Options panel to start drawing the
rectangle by clicking the point for its center instead of a corner.
3. Click to set the first corner.
Move your mouse over the sketch grid to preview the rectangle. Dashed lines appear when you
create a square or golden rectangle.
You can dimension the points relative to other sketch objects.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Click to set the opposite corner of the rectangle.
Options
Define Select this option to sketch rectangles from their centers. Click to define the center of
rectangle from the rectangle, then click again to set the length of the sides. You can also drag to draw
center the rectangle. Hold the Alt key while drawing a rectangle to toggle this option on-the-
fly.
Examples
Sketching a square
Sketching a rectangle from its center
Three point rectangles
Use the Three-Point Rectangle tool to quickly sketch a rectangle at any angle on the sketch plane. These
lines will become the edges of a rectangular solid when you pull your sketch into 3D with the Pull tool.
To draw a three-point rectangle
1. Click Three-Point Rectangle in the Sketch group.

3. Click to set the first corner of the rectangle.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Click to set the length of the second side.

Click and drag to draw the first side, then click to set the length of the second side.
Options
Select this option to sketch rectangles from their centers. Click to define the
Define Rectangle from center of the rectangle, then click again to set the length of the sides. You
Center can also drag to draw the rectangle. Alt+drag or Alt+click to return to the
standard behavior when the option is selected.
Circles
Use the Circle tool to sketch a circle in 2D when you know the location of the circle's center and a point
on the circle’s edge, or the radius or diameter. The circle can become a cylinder or hole when you pull it
into 3D with the Pull tool, or a sphere or torus if you rotate or sweep it.
To draw a circle
1. Click Circle in the Sketch group or press C.

2. Click to set the circle’s center.
3. Click to set the circle's diameter.

4. The circle will snap to existing sketches or determined circles and arcs in the plane of the sketch.
If you sketch two circles that are tangent to each other, and then change the diameter of one
circle by editing its dimension, tangency with the other circle is maintained.
If you drag the center of a circle that is tangent to another circle, the radius of the other circle
changes to maintain tangency.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Editing a tangent circle by dragging the circle's center; tangency is maintained
Three point circles
Use the Three-Point Circle tool when you don’t know the center of the circle, but you know where the
edge of the circle must be. This tool works with any combination of free points, known points, or tangent
attachments. The circle will become a cylinder or hole when you pull it into 3D with the Pull tool. You can
also rotate the circle about a line to make a sphere or torus.
To draw a three-point circle
1. Click Three-Point Circle in the Sketch group.

2. (Optional) Select Three-point circle segment in the Options panel to create an arc that is a
segment of a three-point circle.
3. Click to set the first point on the circle’s edge.
If you click a curve or line, the circle will be drawn tangent to the curve or line, unless you click the
midpoint or vertex.
4. Click to set the second point on the circle’s edge.
If the circle disappears as you move your mouse over the sketch grid, then the cursor location
cannot be included in any circle drawn through the first two points and the current point. If you
click a curve or line, the circle will be drawn tangent to the curve or line unless you click the
midpoint or vertex.
5. Click to set the last point on the circle’s edge.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Options
Three-point Check this option to create an arc that is a segment of a three-point circle. To create an
circle segment arc with this option, click to set the first point, click to set the second point, then enter
the diameter or click to set the final point.
Examples
Editing a tangent circle by dragging the circle's center; tangency is maintained
Dragging (with the Select tool) a three-point circle drawn through a rectangle’s vertex maintains the
connection.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Ellipses
Use the Ellipse tool to sketch an ellipse in 2D. The ellipse can become an elliptical solid or hole when you
pull your sketch into 3D with the Pull tool. You can also sweep the ellipse in 3D, or rotate it.
To draw an ellipse
1. Click Ellipse in the Sketch group.

2. Click to set the center of the ellipse.
3. Click to set the overall length and angular orientation of the first axis.
4. Click to set the length of the second axis.
Tangent arcs
Use the Tangent Arc tool to sketch an arc that is tangent to a curve or line in your design. This arc will
become an edge when you pull your sketch into 3D with the Pull tool.
To draw a tangent arc
1. Click Tangent Arc in the Sketch group.
2. Click the line or curve you want to draw tangent to.
This is usually done at the end point of a line, arc, or spline, but it can be on the line. If two lines
share an end point, use the scroll wheel to set tangency to the other line.
3. (Optional) Dimension the radius and chord angle.

4. Click to set the end point of the arc.
The arc cannot end on its start point to make a circle or end on the same line as its start point.
To draw a tangent arc between points in 3D

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3. Click to set the first point of the arc.
The tangency indicator shows you how the new arc will be tangent with existing geometry if you
To edit a tangent arc
Drag the arc to edit it. When you drag a tangent arc, it increases its radius while maintaining its chord
angle.
Examples
Arc sketched tangent to two circles
Editing a tangent arc maintains its connections
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Swept arcs
Use the Sweep Arc tool to create an arc with a known center and end points. Tangency is not a factor in
the creation of this arc. The arc will become an edge when you pull your sketch into 3D with the Pull tool.
To draw a swept arc
1. Click Sweep Arc in the Sketch group.

2. Click to set the center of the arc.
You can dimension the point relative to other sketch objects.
3. Click to set the start point and radius of the sweep circle.
You can dimension the chord angle or offset the angular dimension.
Three-point arcs
Use the Three-Point Arc tool to create an arc by specifying its start and end points, and the radius or
chord angle. This arc can be created tangent to another arc, line, or spline at its start. .The arc will become
an edge when you pull your sketch into 3D with the Pull tool. As an option, you can also create a Three-
Point Arc in 3D mode.
To draw a three-point arc
1. Click Three-Point Arc in the Sketch group.

2. Click to set the start point of the arc.
If the start point is on another line, arc, or spline, then the arc will initially be drawn tangent to
that line, arc, or spline.

4. Click to set the arc's radius.
You can dimension the chord angle or radius.
The arc will snap to tangent objects.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Polygons
Use the Polygon tool to draw a polygon with between 3 and 64 sides. You can dimension the location of
the axis, the length of the radius, the orientation angle, and set the number of sides as you sketch the
polygon.
The sides of a sketched polygon maintain their relationship to each other. When you pull a polygon into
3D, faces with a polygon relationship are displayed with a pattern when you select the solid. Changing
one face or edge affects all the faces in the relationship.
To draw a polygon
1. Click Polygon in the Sketch group.

2. (Optional) Select Use internal radius in the Options panel to dimension the polygon based on
the diameter of a circle inscribed within the polygon. Uncheck the option to dimension the
polygon based on a circumscribed circle.
3. Click to set the center of the polygon.
4. Drag the mouse to draw the polygon and change its orientation.
The orientation is the polygon's angle relative to the X and Y axis.
You can press Tab and type a number to change the diameter, orientation, or number of sides.
5. Click to complete the polygon.
The sides of the polygon are all related, and act as one object. When pulled in 3D, the edges and
faces of the polygonal solid will also maintain this relationship.
Tip If you trim a polygon sketch with the Trim Away tool, you can drag the original sides of the
polygon with the Select tool to recreate the polygon.
To set the number of sides
Press Tab and type a number while you draw a polygon.
Or
1. In Sketch mode, select the polygon with the Select tool.

2. Right-click the polygon and select Properties.
3. Enter a value for the Number Of Sides property.
Polygons can have a minimum of 3 sides, and a maximum of 64 sides.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To remove the polygon relationship from the faces of a polygon solid
Right-click a face of the polygon and select Remove Association.
Any changes you make to the face of the polygon will affect only that face.
Options
Use Select this option to dimension the polygon based on the diameter of a circle inscribed within
internal the polygon. Uncheck the option to dimension the polygon based on a circumscribed circle. In
radius the image below, the blue circle is inscribed within the polygon and the orange circle is
circumscribed around it.
Examples
A polygon pulled into a solid maintains the relationships between its sides. In this example, pulling one
side pulls all sides of the polygon.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Splines
Creating a spline
Use the Spline tool to sketch splines in 2D or to draw splines between points on objects in 3D. A spline is
a continuously curved line, without sharp boundaries (that is, without vertices). Splines can become edges
when you pull your sketch into 3D with the Pull tool. Sweeping along a spline in 3D lets you create
smooth, curvy shapes.
To draw a spline on a sketch plane
1. Click Spline in the Sketch group.

2. If a sketch plane is not active, click on an object or objects in the Design window to make a sketch
plane.
3. Click to set the first point of the spline.
Hold Alt and click to set the point if you want it to be tangent with an adjacent sketch or edge.
When highlighting the vertex (which is actually an end point of one of the intersecting edges
which has influence at the time) scroll the mouse wheel to select other adjacent edges with which
to set the tangent vector direction, as previewed by the green tangency symbol.
4. Click to set the next points of the spline.
You can Dimension spline points by entering the coordinate distance from the start point to each
point, or dimension each point relative to another sketch object.
5. End the spline:

 Double-click to set the end point of the spline.
 Hold Alt and click to make the end point tangent with an adjacent sketch or edge.
 Right-click and select Finish Spline.
 Press Esc.
 Click any other tool (except the Clipboard and Orient tools).
To draw a continuous spline

2. Select Draw continuous spline from the Spline section of the Sketch options panel.
3. Click and drag to draw the spline.
4. Release to finish drawing.
To draw a spline between points in 3D

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Hold Alt and click to set the point if you want it to be tangent with an adjacent sketch or edge.
When highlighting the vertex (which is actually an end point of one of the intersecting edges
which has influence at the time) scroll the mouse wheel to select other adjacent edges with which
to set the tangent vector direction, as previewed by the green tangency symbol.
4. Continue selecting points to draw spline points.

5. End the spline:
 Hold Alt and click to make the end point tangent with an adjacent sketch or edge.
 Press Esc.
To create a closed spine
You can create a closed spline in the following ways:
 When drawing a spline, end it on the start point.

 When editing the spline, drag one end point on top of the other point.
Once you have created a closed spline, you cannot edit it into an open spline.
Options
Examples
Sketching a spline between points in 3D
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Editing a spline
You can drag a spline, its spline points, or its control points while the Select tools is active. You can be in
2D or 3D mode.
Spline points are the points along the spine that define the position of its curves. Spline points are
displayed as circles when you hover over a spline.
Control points are displayed outside of the spline, and define the curvature of the spline between points.
Control points are displayed as diamonds connected by a dotted line when you select a spline.
To move a spline
1. Click the Select tool in the Edit group on the Design tab while in 2D mode.
2. Mouse over the spline to highlight the spline and display its defining points.
3. Click anywhere on the spline except for the defining points, and drag it to move it.
To edit a spline
1. Click the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group while in 2D mode.
3. Click and drag on any spline or control point to move it, leaving the other spline and control
points fixed in space.
You can box-select spline points.
4. (Optional) Edit the dimensions associated with that point.
To change spline end points
1. Select the spline to display its end point control handle.
The end point control handle is a light blue point at the end of a dotted line extending outwards
from the end of the spline. In some cases, these end points may be located some distance away
from your sketch. Zoom out from the sketch until you can see the end point control handle.
If another line, arc, or spline shares that end point, the end point influence may snap into
tangency with that sketch entity. To adjust the end point influence in this case, move the mouse a
short distance away from the end point to display the end point control handle.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
After it is moved, the end point will snap to its original tangency.
2. (Optional) In 3D, hold Alt and select a planar or linear object that you want the spline to be
tangent with. You can hold Alt and select a curve, edge or face if the curve, edge or face passes
through the point. If you select a face, the tangency at the point where the point intersects the
curve or surface is used. The default is the tangency direction with the least amount of curvature.
3. Drag the end point control handles to change the influence of that end point on the shape of the
spline.
The control handle will snap back to its initial tangent direction, which is indicated by a dotted
line.
The amount of the end point's influence can be controlled by dragging the end point control
handle closer to or further away from the end point.
To add spline points
3. Right-click anywhere on the spline except on the defining points, and select Add Knot to create
another spline point at that location.
To remove spline points
2. Click the spline to highlight it and display its defining points.
3. Right-click the point you want to remove and select Remove Spline Point.
The spline adjusts to accommodate the removal of the point.
To change the end point tangency of a spline
2. Select the spline in the Design window.
3. Set the value for Periodic in the Properties panel:
 True: If you change this property to True, the tangencies of the beginning and end of the
spline curve will match to create a closed curve. If a spline curve is open and you set the
property to True, the spline will be closed, as shown here:
 False: If you change this property to False, the end tangencies of a closed curve don’t match. If
a spline curve is closed and you set the property to False, the curve will become teardrop-
shaped because the end points will no longer be tangent, as shown here:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To extend a spline by pulling
1. Click the Pull tool in the Edit group on the Design tab while in 3D mode.
2. Click an end point of the spline and drag in the direction of the Pull arrow.
You can also click the end point, click the Up To tool guide, then click the object up to which you
want to pull.
Examples
Dragging a spline point
Dragging a control point
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Dragging end point control handles in 3D
Splitting curves
Use the Split Curve tool to split one curve with another curve or point. You can also use a 3D object that
intersects the curve, such as a plane or face. The segments of the split curve can then be selected and
edited independently.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can split curves.
To split a curve
1. Click Split Curve in the Sketch group.

2. Click the curve you want to split.
3. Click a curve or point that intersects the curve you want to split. The curve will be split at the
intersection.
Trimming lines
Use the Trim Away tool to delete any line portion bounded by an intersection with a line or edge.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can trim lines.
To delete a bounded line
1. Click Trim Away in the Sketch group or press T.

2. Mouse over a line to preview the section that will be deleted.
3. Click to delete the highlighted line section.
The portion of the line you clicked is deleted up to any intersection with another 2D line or edge
of a solid.
Creating corners
Use the Create Corner tool to trim back or extend two lines so that they meet at a corner.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can create corners.
To connect two lines with a corner
1. Click Create Corner in the Sketch group.

2. Click a line, arc, or spline.
3. Mouse over another line to preview the corner that will be created.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you mouse over a line that is the cross-section edge of a solid or a silhouette edge, it will not
change. Only a sketched line will change.
4. Click an intersecting line to trim the lines, or a non-intersecting line to extend the lines.
5. If the lines intersect, click the part of the intersecting line you want to keep. If the lines do not
intersect, you can click anywhere on the line to extend the lines to form a corner.
Options
The following options are available in the Create Corner tool:
Trim/Extend curve If you select this option and click the first line, then click a second, non-intersecting
line, you extend the first line, but not the second. If the two lines intersect, the first
line is trimmed by the second line.
Examples
Creating a corner between arcs
Extending a spline to the intersection with another sketch curve
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Creating rounded corners
Use the Create Rounded Corner tool to trim back or connect two intersecting lines or arcs so that they
meet with an arc tangent at both ends. You can also use this tool with coplanar 3D lines, such as lines you
created by blending.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can create rounded corners, which are also
known as fillets.
To connect two lines with a rounded corner
1. Click Create Rounded Corner from the Sketch group on the Design tab.
2. Select a line or arc.
The first line or arc you select will be extended, if necessary.
3. Mouse over another line to preview the round that will be created.
If you mouse over a line that is the edge of a solid, that edge will not change. Only a sketched line
will change. The radius of the arc is previewed as you move the mouse. Enter a radius to
dimension it.
4. Select an intersecting line to trim the lines, or a non-intersecting line to connect the lines.
Where you click on the intersecting line defines the radius of the tangent arc, or you can
dimension the round (or chamfer) by entering its diameter.
If the lines intersect, click the part of the intersecting line you want to keep. If the lines do not
intersect, you can click anywhere on the line to extend the first line to form a rounded corner.
Circles are never trimmed.
To edit a rounded corner
Drag the rounded corner with the Select tool to change its radius. Tangency is maintained.
Options
The following options are available with the Create Rounded Corner tool.
Chamfer Mode Create an equal-sided chamfer instead of an arc.

Disable
Leave the underlying lines instead of removing them.
Trimming
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Rounding a corner with the Chamfer Mode option
Rounding a corner with the Disable Trimming option
Rounding a corner where the first line selected is extended
Rounding corners of 3D lines and then sweeping to create a pipe
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Offsetting curves
Use the Offset Curve tool to create an offset of any curve in the grid plane. If you are creating an offset
spline, you will get the best results with an offset distance appropriate to the curvature of your spline.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can create offset curves.
To offset a curve
1. Click Offset Curve in the Sketch group on the Design tab.

2. Select the curves you want to offset.
Standard curve selection techniques apply, so you can double-click to select connected loops of
curves. Ctrl and Shift can also be used to extend or replace the selected items prior to offsetting.
You can also use box, lasso, and paint select modes to select multiple sketch curves. See Using
the radial menu to learn how to access these select modes.
If you select more than one curve, then they will be merged when they are offset.
To clear the current selection, click an empty spot in the Design window.
3. Hover the mouse over a line or point and press Shift to create an offset from that curve or point.
As you move the cursor away from the selected curve, you can see a preview of the offset result.
The offset defaults to one grid square.
4. (Optional) Select an option to specify how intersecting offset curves should meet.
5. Enter a dimension or click to set the width of the offset.
Options
The following options are available in the Offset Line tool:
Close with corner Close intersecting offset lines with a corner.

Close with arc Close intersecting offset edges with an arc.
Close naturally Close intersecting offset edges with a curve.
Offset both ways Create two offset lines on either side of the selected line.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Highlighted line offset using each option. Shown from top to bottom: Close naturally, Close with corner,
and Close with arc.
Projecting onto the sketch grid
Use the Project to Sketch tool to copy an edge or vertex of a solid to a 2D line or point that you can
manipulate with the sketch tools. You can also project a note onto the sketch grid. Projecting an axis onto
the sketch grid creates a construction line.
Except when explicitly selecting a new sketch plane, this is the only sketch tool that can select items that
are not on the sketch grid. You can also select note text and project the text onto your sketch.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can project edges onto it.
You can project a body onto a layout sketch plane on a drawing sheet.
To project a face, edge, vertex, or note onto the sketch grid
1. Click Project to Sketch in the Sketch group on the Design tab.
Mouse over your design to highlight the objects available for projection.
2. Click the edge, edge chain, vertex, or note text you want to project into the sketch plane.
Standard edge selection methods apply, so you can double-click, Ctrl+click, and Shift+click to
create or modify your selection.
You can also click and drag to draw a selection box enclosing the objects you want to project,
including silhouette edges.
The edge, vertex, or text appears as a sketched line to show that it is now a line or point in the
sketch plane.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Duplicate edges (that appear on top of each other) in the sketch are consolidated when you
return to 3D mode.
Tip If you have difficulty seeing a projected line, check that Fade Scene Under Grid is selected on
the Display tab.
To project a solid onto the sketch grid
1. Click Project to Sketch in the Sketch group on the Design tab.

2. Click on the Select Bodies tool guide if you want to select bodies in the design window.
You do not need the tool guide to select bodies in the Structure tree.
3. Select one of the following options:

 All body edges if you want all edges projected onto the sketch grid.
 Visible body edges if you want only the visible, or silhouette, edges projected onto the sketch
grid.
4. Select a body in the Design window or Structure tree.
Examples
Projecting all body edges to the sketch grid
Bending
Use the Bend tool to bend straight lines and edges to form an arc. You can also use the Bend tool to
adjust the radius of arcs and arced edges. Bend works on straight lines when you are sketching and when
you are editing in cross-section.
You can insert a point curve text file to make a complicated bend.
To bend a line or edge
1. Click Bend in the Sketch group or press B.

2. If you are working in Section mode, select the face that contains the edge.
3. Click and drag a line or arc to bend it or change its radius.
Enter a value to dimension the radius.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Scaling sketches
Use the Scale tool to display control handles that you can use to manipulate a 2D object. The Scale tool
also works in Section mode on solids with only planar faces.
The Scale tool works for sketches that lie on a plane. If you need to scale sketches that lie on multiple
planes, see Scaling sketches with Pull.
To scale, rotate, or pan an object
1. Click Scale in the Sketch group on the Design tab.

2. Select a drawing or clipping plane.
3. Select any 2D object (including arcs and splines) or 3D edge.
You can hold Ctrl or draw a box in the Design window to select multiple objects.
You can select individual spline points to change part of a spline curve.
4. Scale, rotate, or pan the object by doing the following:

 Scale: Drag the white control handle. You can press Shift while dragging to lock the aspect
ratio. You can also enter a dimension, including a percentage (such as 50%).
 Rotate: Drag the green control handle.
 Change the center of rotation and scaling: Drag the pink circle.
 Pan: Move the mouse over the dashed border so it changes to a solid line then drag the boxed
object(s).
Options
The following option is available in the Scale tool:
Fix aspect ratio Select this option to keep the ratio between the sides the same when you drag or
enter a dimension. You can also Shift+drag to keep the aspect ratio without
selecting this option.
Reorient the box Move and rotate the scale bounding box without affecting the selected geometry.
Maintain sketch Keep the connection between a sketch curve and other curves that share its end
connectivity points. If you deselect this option and scale a sketch curve, the curve will scale
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
The Scale tool’s dimensions refer to the extents of the selected sketch object
Scaling in Section mode
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Scaling sketches with Pull
You can scale sketch curves with the Scale tool, or you can use the Pull tool.
You should use the Scale tool when you want to scale sketch curves that lie on a plane. Use the Pull tool
when you want to scale curves that lie on multiple planes, as in the example below.
To scale sketch curves with the Pull tool

2. Select the curves.
3. Click the Scale tool guide.
4. Select an anchor point.
5. If Blend is highlighted in orange, click to turn this option off in the Options panel.
Scaling won't work if the Blend option is enabled.
6. Drag in the direction of the yellow guide arrow.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Editing
Use the editing tools to create and edit 2D and 3D solids. You can select, pull, move (in 2D and 3D), edit in
cross-section, fill (heal), bend lines and edges, and tweak faces.
In SpaceClaim, there is little need for a distinction between creating and editing. There is no hierarchical
feature tree, so you have considerable freedom when designing. Create a box by pulling on a rectangular
region. Edit the size of the box by pulling on one of its faces. Draw a rectangle to create a pull-able
region. Draw a rectangle on a face to create a new face.
In general, you are either editing or creating with one of the main tools (Select, Pull, Move, Combine, or
sketching and editing in Section mode), the many secondary tools, or inserting relationships between
faces in the design (Shell, Offset, Mirror). Combining objects (intersecting, merging, cutting, etc.) is
handled by the tools in the Intersect ribbon group.
Selection is integral to face and edge manipulation. You can extend selections with standard controls
(double-click, Ctrl, Shift), by right-clicking and selecting from the Select menu, or using SpaceClaim's
power selection functions.
A quick note about solids and surfaces: SpaceClaim always converts a closed set of surface faces into a
solid. Similarly, sketched lines that clearly create regions on faces are replaced with real edges. The change
in face transparency and edge lines reflects this transformation.
You can cut, copy, paste, and detach objects in most tools.
You can also nudge objects in most tools. Hold Ctrl+Alt and the up or down arrow to nudge an object.
The up arrow increases the dimension and the down arrow decreases the dimension. If you nudge
multiple times then click Undo, all the nudges will be reverted. You can view and change the nudge
distance in the Snap options.
In SpaceClaim, there are three modes you can use to edit your designs:
Sketch mode displays the sketch grid, so you can use any of the sketch tools to sketch in 2D.
Section mode lets you edit solids by working with their edges and vertices in cross-section.
3D mode lets you work directly with objects in 3D space.
Edit ribbon group
The Edit ribbon group contains the following tools:
Use the Select tool to select 2D or 3D objects in your design for editing. You can select vertices,
edges, curves, planes, axes, faces, surfaces, rounds, solids, and components in 3D. In 2D, you can
select points and lines. You can also select circle and ellipse centers, the midpoints of lines and
edges, and the internal points and end points of splines. The Select tool can also be used to edit a
sketch.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Use the Pull tool to offset, extrude, revolve, sweep, draft, scale, drape, and blend faces; use it to
round, chamfer, or extrude edges.
Use the Move tool to move one or more faces, surfaces, solids, or components. The behavior of the
Move tool changes based on what you have selected.
Use the Fill tool to fill in the selected faces with the surrounding surface or solid. The region must be
completely surrounded to be filled. You can also use the Fill tool to patch new surfaces through
loops of edges.
Use the Replace tool to replace one face (or multiple faces) with another face (or faces). You can
also use it to simplify a spline face that is very similar to a cylinder or plane, or to align a set of
planar faces that are almost aligned.
You can edit any face or surface with Tweak Face to change its surface geometry. This tool is
available in 3D mode and in drawings.
Editing with annotation dimensions
You can use 3D annotation dimensions to change your design using the Pull and Move tools. Annotation
dimensions can be used in combination with ruler dimensions.
To view a video tutorial on this topic, see Tutorial: Annotation Dimensions on the SpaceClaim web site.
To use 3D annotation dimensions with the Pull or Move tool
1. Click Pull or Move in the Edit group on the Design tab.

2. Select the objects you want to pull or move. You can select an edge, face, point, or surface.
3. If you are using the Move tool, select a direction on the Move handle.
4. Click the spark icon next to the dimension you want to use to drive the change. The icon turns
yellow when you hover over it with your mouse, as shown in the image above.
The dimension field can be edited when you click on the spark icon.
These icons appear when you use a tool that can be used with annotation dimensions to drive
changes. The annotation dimension must be associated with the face, edge, or point you want to
change.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you are using the Move tool and you don't see the spark icons, you need to select a direction
on the Move handle or you must create a ruler dimension. You get more predictable results if you
re-anchor the Move handle to the appropriate face, edge, or point.
5. Type a new dimension and press Enter.
The objects you selected will change based on the dimension.
If the dimension you change isn't associated with the objects you selected, nothing will change
and you will see an error message in the Status area on the lower right side of the SpaceClaim
window.
If the tool can't make the change in the direction that the Pull or Move handle points toward,
then it will try to make the change in the opposite direction to achieve the dimension you enter.
Examples
Selecting a dimension with the Pull tool active
Selecting a dimension with the Move tool active. You must select a direction on the Move handle before
you can select a dimension.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Changing the value of the dimension field
Using an angular dimension to Pull a face with a revolve axis set
Using a linear dimension to offset a face with Pull
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Using a linear dimension to change the angle of a face with Move
Note: We re-anchored the Move tool to the lower, horizontal edge of the face
Pulling with a radial dimension on a face that is offset with another cylindrical face; also works when you
select both radial faces without an offset relation
Mathematical expressions
The following expression elements are available:
 Infix (dyadic) operators: + - * / ^

 Prefix (monadic) operators: + -
 Functions: sin cos tan asin acos atan sqrt log log10 exp
 Constants: pi e root2 root3
 Units: m cm mm yd ft in ' " deg rad
Normal precedence rules apply:
1 + 2 * 3 ^ 4 = 1 + (2 * (3 ^ 4)) = 163
Parentheses are required for expression arguments and optional for simple arguments:
 sqrt 2 = sqrt(2) = 1.4142...

 sqrt 2*2 = (sqrt 2) * 2 = 2.8284...
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 sqrt(2*2) = 2
Missing operators are inferred:
 1 1/2 = 1 + 1/2
 1’6” = 1’ + 6”
 1ft 6in - 17in = 1ft + 6in - 17in
 1 2 3 4 5 = 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 = 15
 (1)(2)(3)(4)(5) = (1) * (2) * (3) * (4) * (5) = 120
 2(1 + 2) = 2 * (1 + 2) = 6
 sqrt 2 sqrt 2 = sqrt 2 * sqrt 2 = 2
 4(4atan(1/5) - atan(1/239)) = 4 * (4 * atan(1/5) - atan(1/239)) = pi
Units are applied to previous terms if units were not specified and are applied to subsequent terms unless
you override them:
 1 + 1cm = 1cm + 1cm

 1cm + 1 = 1cm + 1cm
 1cm + 1 + 1mm = 1cm + 1mm + 1mm
 1cm + 1 1/2 mm = 1cm + 1mm + 1mm / 2
Trigonometry functions work in radians by default, but you can enter degrees:
sin(45 deg)
Numbers support standard form, but e is a built-in constant:
 2e2 = 200
2e 2 = 2 * e * 2 = 10.873...
 2e-2 = 0.02
2e – 2 = 2 * e – 2 = 3.436...
 2e1 = 20
2e = 2 * e
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pulling
Use the Pull tool to offset, extrude, revolve, sweep, draft, and blend faces; use it to round, chamfer, or
extrude edges. You can also drag a point with the Pull tool to draw a line on a sketch plane.
Pulling the apex of a cone changes its height. Pulling through the base plane will invert the cone. Pulling a
loop of edges attached to a vertex will create conical faces at the corners when appropriate.
You can select a face, then pull, dragging anywhere to act, or you can click, drag, and release a
highlighted face. In general, the result of a pull stays selected or highlighted after the pull operation.
The action of the Pull tool depends on which faces and edges you select to work with, and which faces,
planes, or edges you select to drive the change. For example, if you choose to work with a face, then
select an edge to "drive" the pull, the Pull tool infers that you want to pivot the face around that edge.
When multiple actions can be inferred, you can use the tool guides to correct the Pull tool's inference. The
Pull tool maintains any offset, mirror, pattern, or coaxial relationships.
When you pull a face, there are two main decisions you need to make. The first is to determine the
direction you want to pull in. A default direction is offered to you, but it can be overridden using the
Direction tool guide. The second is to determine what is going to happen at the edges of the face. By
default, the edges of the face are determined by its neighbors, but you can override this behavior by
including the edges in your Pull selection to create an extrusion. When you pull, connected chamfers are
automatically removed and replaced.
If you entered the Design tab with sheet metal features selected, the Pull tool will work as it does in
Sheet metal. To work as usual, right click on the sheet metal part in the Structure tree and choose
Suspend Sheet Metal in the context menu.
To create and edit a solid
1. Click Pull in the Edit group on the Design tab or press P.
Mouse over faces and edges in your design to preview the natural Pull direction. If your mouse is
over multiple faces or edges, use the scroll wheel to preview the Pull direction for each one.
2. Select the faces, edges, and points you want to pull to create 3D solids or surfaces.
You can right-click in the Design window and select Anchor Pull Handle, then click to anchor the
Pull handle on another object. This command is useful when you want to dimension a Pull from a
different location than the center of a face.
If the Pull arrow appears gray instead of yellow, then the object is locked and can't be pulled
unless you unlock it. To unlock an object, right-click the object in the Structure tree and select
Unlock.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. (Optional) Alt+click to select the face or edge that will drive the change.
You can also select the appropriate tool guide, then click the face, point, or edge. The driving
edge or face is shown in blue. If you select the Show cursor arrows SpaceClaim option, arrows
appear to indicate the directions you can move your mouse to edit the selected object.
If you want to use an annotation dimension, see Driving modification with annotation
dimensions.
Measurements can also be used to drive modifications.
To drive modifications with measurements

4. Enter the Pull tool
5. Select a face, edge or vertex
6. Enter the Measure tool (shortcut is “e”)and measure any single object or measure between two
objects
7. Click in the Measurement results (hover over measurements to display purple box). Once selected,
that single measurement will display on screen with arrows pointing to either object chosen for
measurement.
8. Click in the highlighted dimension box and modify the value for a one-time adjustment of the
model or create a Measurement Group which can be modified at any time.
9. Measurement groups can also be created from Area results. Modifying the group then adjusts
the model to produce a desired area. For example, create a Measurement group for the area of a
side of a box. While pulling the front of the box, you can enter a new area value for the side to
complete the Pull.
10. (Optional) Select options from the Options panel, or right-click and select them from the mini-
toolbar.
11. Click and drag in the direction of the Pull arrow to create or edit a solid.
12. If the correct pull arrow is not highlighted, press Tab or click the Pull arrow you want to use.
Press Shift to snap while pulling.
Press the spacebar or click on a dimension to enter a value.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To dimension the pull, type the distance you want to pull and press Enter. You can also type a
dimension in the dimension box in the mini-toolbar.
You do not have to click and drag on (or even near) the Pull arrow. In fact, we recommend that
you move your cursor away from the arrow for more precise control of the pull. The only
important input to the Pull tool is the direction in which you are moving the cursor. When you
pull, contiguous solids are automatically combined.
If you want to pull in a head-on view, use the ruler at the bottom right corner of the Design
window to pull instead of the Pull arrow. Slide the gray bar to the left to subtract material, and to
the right to add material.
You can also click the Up To tool guide, then click the object that sets the plane up to which you
want to pull. (When pulling an edge, the face does not need to intersect the edge you are
pulling.)
If you pull through another object in the same component, the smaller object is merged into the
larger one, and receives the larger object's properties. If you pull multiple, touching surfaces, the
smaller surfaces are merged into the largest one. Select the No Merge option if you don't want
objects merged.
Hold the Ctrl key while pulling to create a copy of the object that is offset by the distance you
pull. You can also hold Ctrl while revolving to create a copy of a surface. The influence of
neighboring faces is taken into account to trim or extend the edges of the copied face, when
appropriate. You can use the Up To tool guide with Ctrl to make a copy, and you can use the
Both Sides option to make two copies that are offset in opposite directions from the original. You
can also use the Up To tool guide to pull surfaces up to a reference edge.
Press Esc to cancel the Pull.
See the topics in the Table of Contents under Designing > Editing > Pulling for the list of
actions you can perform with the Pull tool.
Do it faster
1. Select the faces, edges, and points you want to work with.
In general, pulling a face increases the size of the solid, pulling an edge creates a surface, and
pulling a point creates a line or curve.
2. (Optional) Alt+click the face or edge that will drive the pull.
3. Drag in the direction of the Pull arrow.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pulling a curve
When you select a curve with the Pull tool, the direction of the extrusion is determined by the plane of the
curve.
The default direction to pull a

curve is along the Z axis.
If a curve lies on the Z axis, the

pull arrow points in the Y
direction.
If you select two curves on the

same plane, the pull arrow points
in the direction that is
perpendicular to the plane of the
curves.
If you select a curve that touches

another curve, the pull arrow
points in the direction
perpendicular to the plane of the
two curves.
Tool guides
Within the Pull tool, there are several tool guides that let you specify the behavior of the Pull tool:
The Select tool guide is active by default. When this tool guide is active, you can perform standard
selection tasks, and create natural offsets and rounds. Select a face, parallel faces, or surface edges
to offset them. Select a solid edge to round it. Alt+click to select the driving face or edge for
revolves, directed extrusion, sweeps, and drafts. Alt+double-click an edge to select an edge loop.
Alt+double-click again to cycle through alternate edge loops. You can select objects across multiple
components to pull.
Use the Direction tool guide to select a straight line, edge, axis, origin axis, plane, or planar face to
set the pull direction.
Select a face to pivot or select a face and edge to revolve. Then use the Revolve tool guide to select
the straight line, edge, or axis around which you want to pivot or revolve.
Select any number of contiguous faces on the same body, then use the Draft tool guide to select
the plane, planar face, or edge around which you want to pivot. None of the contiguous faces can
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
be parallel to the neutral plane, face or edge around which you want to pivot.
Use the Sweep tool guide to select the straight or curved lines or edges along which you want to
sweep. Faces and edges can be swept, and the sweep trajectory cannot be in the same plane as the
face.
Use the Scale Body tool guide to scale objects in 3D. See Scaling solids and surfaces.
Use the Up To tool guide to select the object that you want to pull to. The pulled object's face or
edge will mate with the surface of the selected body or be pulled up to a plane through the
selection. You can also use this tool guide to pull surfaces up to a reference edge. The object will be
copied if you hold Ctrl.
Pull Options
The following options are available in the Pull tool. Once you select the edge or face to pull, select these
options from the Options panel or the mini-toolbar:
Add Only add material when you pull. If you pull in a subtractive direction, no change will
occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
Cut Only remove material when you pull. If you pull in an additive direction, no change will
occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
No Merge Pulls without merging into other objects even when the object pulled intersects with an
existing object.
Pull Both Select a single, detached edge, imprinted edge, or surface, then click this option to pull
Sides both sides of the edge or surface at once.
Ruler Select this option, then click to connect a ruler, oriented along the pull axis, to an anchor
edge or face. You can use the ruler to dimension the pull. The direction must be specified
to successfully create a ruler dimension. Press Esc to cancel the ruler dimension.
Full Pull Extends an edge or face to the nearest face. This option works similar to the Up To tool
guide, except you don't select the face to extend to.
You can use this option to automatically pull edges up to the closest faces that intersect
with the object. The edges you select are extended in the direction of the Pull handle up
to the next set of faces or edges that fully bound the extension. The original surfaces that
the edges belong to are extended and new edges may be created; however, new faces are
not created.
Opens the Measure tool. Selecting a measurement result returns you to the Pull tool and
Measure displays the measurement value in a dimension box with an arrow pointing to the
measured object. Modify the value for a one-time adjustment of the model or create a
Measurement Group which can be modified at any time.
Maintain Select this check box to maintain the offset relationship when pulling.
Offset
Thicken When this check box is selected and you pull a surface, the surface is extruded into a solid.
surfaces This is the default behavior. When the option is deselected and you pull a surface, the
surface is offset to a new location, changing the original surface. When you hold Ctrl and
drag a surface with the option selected or deselected, the surface is copied and then
offset.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pull Modes
The following modes are available in the Pull tool depending on the objects you have selected:
Up to Pulls the element so it mates with the surface of the selected body or be pulled up to a
plane through the selection. You can find this option in the mini-toolbar and it is the same
as the Up To tool guide.
Round When you are pulling an edge, select this option to create a rounded corner, which is also
known as a fillet.
Chamfer When you are pulling an edge, select this option to create a chamfer.
Extrude When you are pulling an edge, select this option to extrude the edge into a surface.
Edge
Copy Edge When you are pulling an edge, select this option to create a copy of the edge.
The type of offset is determined by whether or not Offset edges by geodesic calculation
is selected in Advanced options. This option is selected by default. When this option is
selected, all the points on the offset edge are the same distance from the initial edge. In
the examples below, the original edge is highlighted in green, the regular offset is shown in
orange, and the geodesic offset is shown in blue.
Pivot Edge When you are pulling an edge, select this option to pivot the edge along the selected Pull
arrow.
Select this option to create a blend between the selected faces, surfaces, or edges when
Blend
you pull.
Rotational Select this option to create cylinders and cones whenever possible during the creation of a
blend blend.
Periodic Select this option to go all the way around when blending.
blend
Ruled Select this option to create straight edges when you pull between three or more surfaces or
sections faces. When you blend between faces, this option has the same effect as selecting the face
and its edges.
Revolve Select this option to create a helix.
Helix
Right- Select this option to determine the direction in which the helix is revolved around its axis.
Handed
Helix
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Rotational Select this option once you have selected a rotation axis to pull a rib in a rotational
Rib direction.
Normal to Select this option to keep every portion of the swept geometry normal to the sweep
Trajectory trajectory.
Draft Both Select this option to pivot the face on the opposite side of the reference face as well as the
Sides selected face.
Examples
Pulling the edge of a surface first simplifies the edge, then its neighboring edges are extended (or
trimmed)
Pulling the edge of a surface while holding Ctrl makes a new surface that is tangent to the edge
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pulling edges up to other edges with the Up To tool guide
Pulling a point on a surface towards an Alt+clicked vertex
Pulling edges with the Full Pull option. If you select the lower edge of the green surface shown above,
you will receive an error because the neighboring surface does not extend past the end of the selected
edge. The edge on the right side of the face can be pulled with the option, because the neighboring face
extends beyond its length. A new edge is created, which is marked in red in the illustration on the right.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pulling edges to their nearest neighbor with the Full Pull option
Pulling a sketched line on a planar face creates a surface in the same plane as the face
Pulling the edge of a toroidal surface. Three directions are available for pulling.
Holding Ctrl while pulling a surface with the Both Sides option creates copies of a surface.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pulling two edges with the Extrude (2a), Pivot (2b), and Copy edge (2c) options.
Pulling a face offsets it, and its edges are influenced by neighboring faces.
Pulling a face with its edges selected extrudes the face without influence from neighboring faces.
Pulling a conical face Up To a parallel cylindrical face replaces the cone with the cylinder if the axes are
close together. Otherwise, the conical face is replaced with a cylindrical face that is coaxial to the cone and
has the same radius as the cylinder.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pulling a pocket with rounded edges down through the bottom of a solid transfers the rounds to the
resulting hole.
Pulling a surface up to a reference edge
Pivot two separate edges together when pulling in one direction.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Offsetting or extruding faces
To offset or extrude a face
1. Select the Pull tool in the Edit group on the Design tab. The Select tool guide on the right
side of the Design window should be active.
2. Select the face or surface you want to offset or extrude.
You can select multiple surfaces and faces of solids to offset or extrude them simultaneously.
3. (Optional) Add edges to your selection.
Select the edges of the face that you want to extrude when you pull. (Any unselected edges are
defined by the neighboring geometry during the pull, creating an offset instead of an extrusion.)
4. (Optional) Select the Direction tool guide , then click the straight line, axis, or edge if you
want to offset or extrude in a different direction.
You can also Alt+click a straight line, axis, plane, origin axis, or edge. Sometimes SpaceClaim
guesses your intent incorrectly when you Alt+click the direction line. If this happens, just use the
Direction tool guide to correct it.
The pull direction is shown in blue and the pull arrow is reoriented.
5. Click and drag the face in the direction of the Pull arrow.
Dragging a: Does this:

Solid face Offsets the face in its natural offset direction
Solid face and all its Creates an extrusion
edges
Surface face Thickens or thins the face
Corner edge of a Creates a round, chamfer, or extrusion, depending
solid on the selected option
Round or chamfer Offsets the round or chamfer
Variable round Uniformly offsets the variable round
Cylinder, torus, or Offsets the cylinder, torus, or cone
cone
6. To dimension the offset, type the distance you want to pull and press Enter.
7. Press and hold Ctrl to offset a copy of the face as a surface.
8. Neighboring faces automatically extend to bound the offset face.
9. You can also use the Up To tool guide to pull up to any edge, plane, surface, or face in your
design. If you pull a round, chamfer, or cylinder with the Up To tool guide, and pull up to similar
geometry, the radius or offset is changed to the dimension of the Up To face you select.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Options
options from the Options panel, or right-click and select them from the mini-toolbar:
Select the Add option to only add material. If you pull in a subtractive direction, no
Add
change will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
Select the Cut option to only remove material. If you pull in an additive direction, no
Cut
Pulls without merging into other objects even when the object pulled intersects with an
No Merge
existing object.
Select this option, then click to connect a ruler, oriented along the pull axis, to an
anchor edge or face. You can use the ruler to dimension the pull. The direction must be
Ruler
specified to successfully create a ruler dimension. Press Esc to cancel the ruler
dimension.
Pulls the element so it mates with the surface of the selected body or be pulled up to a
Up to plane through the selection. You can find this option in the mini-toolbar and it is the
same as the Up To tool guide.
Examples
Selecting a face to offset
Selecting a face and edges to extrude
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Selecting a face and edges, and setting a direction to extrude in a direction
Pulling an inner cylindrical surface up to an outer surface to create a solid ring
Extending or extruding surface edges
You can extend or extrude the edges of any surface with the Pull tool. When you extend an edge, the pull
extends the neighboring faces without creating a new edge. Extruding an edge creates edges.
To extend or extrude the edge of a surface
1. Click Pull in the Edit group on the Design tab. The Select tool guide on the right side of the
Design window should be active.
2. Select the outside edge of a surface.
Ctrl+click to select multiple edges.
3. Click the Pull arrow oriented along the surface to extend the edge. Press Tab or click the other
Pull arrow to extrude the edge in another direction.
4. (Optional) Ctrl+click the vertex of one or both neighboring edges to ignore their influence.
5. Drag in the direction of the Pull arrow to extend the edge or create a new surface perpendicular
to the old one.
If the correct pull arrow is not highlighted, press Tab or click the Pull arrow you want to use.
The natural direction of a surface edge is in the plane of the surface.
You can use the Up To tool guide to pull a linear edge up to a face, surface, edge, or point. If the
face or surface does not intersect the edge you are pulling, the edge will be pulled parallel to the
selected object.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To dimension the extension, type the distance you want to extend the surface while you are
pulling and press Enter.
Options
Add
Cut
No Merge
existing object.
Extends an edge or face to the nearest face. This option works similar to the Up To tool
guide, except you don't select the face to extend to. If used to revolve or sweep, click
Full Pull
this option to revolve 360 degrees or to the next face, sweep through the full trajectory,
or blend through selected faces.
Ruler
dimension.
Extrude Edge When you are pulling an edge, select this option to extrude the edge into a surface.
When you are pulling an edge, select this option to pivot the edge along the selected
Pivot Edge
Pull arrow.
Examples
Pulling the edge of a surface up to another edge forms a solid if it closes the body
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pulling the edge of a cylindrical surface extends the surface along a cylindrical path (A) unless you hold
Ctrl (B).
Pulling the edge of a cylindrical surface with the No Merge option selected creates a new edge.
Pulling the edge of a cylindrical surface with the Both Sides option and holding Ctrl creates a new surface
tangent to the cylinder and extends in both directions from the edge.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pulling an edge with the Pivot Edge option
Pulling an edge with the Copy Edge option
Rounding edges
Use the Pull tool's Round option to round the edges of any solid. You can also round an inside or
outside corner of a surface. To create a rounded face between two faces, see Rounding between faces
and surfaces.
Rounds are recognized as a face type, with their own options in the Properties panel. You can change the
Round value (true or false) and the Radius value. The Round value for a variable radius round is Varies.
You can change a constant- or variable-radius round with the Pull tool in section mode.
To round an edge
1. Click the Pull tool in the Edit group on the Design tab.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Select the edge or edges you want to round. Double-click to select a tangent chain.
You can also select the vertex of an inside or an outside corner of a surface.
3. Select the Round option in the Options panel or from the mini-toolbar. This option is
automatically selected for edges that can be rounded.
4. Click and drag the edge in the direction of the Pull arrow.
To dimension the round, press the Spacebar, type the radius, and press Enter.
When you pull an edge to create a round, the Pull tool determines whether it should be a
constant radius or a variable radius round based on the geometry.
Once you create a round, pulling an adjacent face also pulls the round.
When you round more than one edge at the same time, and one or more of the rounds cannot be
created, only the successful rounds are created.
The face hidden by the round is remembered, so that if you fill the round it can be displayed. If you
move a round, the face hidden by it is also moved.
Examples
Rounding the inside and outside corner of two surfaces.
Pulling edges on geometry that automatically determines rounds will be variable radius.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
When creating surface-to-surface rounds, the expansion direction depends on the order in which you
select the edges. In the example above, the rounds expand toward the left because the upper edge was
selected first.
Rounding the edge created by two rounds with one edge not tangent.
Pulling rounds in a tangent chain
Pulling the selected tangent chain does not change the round shown in blue.
Adding and changing a rounded edge on a shelled or offset part changes the inside faces.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Rounding elliptical edges
To create a full round by selecting edges
1. Click the Pull tool.

2. Select the two edges on opposite sides of the face you want to become a full round, or select the
circular edge on the end of a cylinder.
You can select more than one pair of edges, and create full rounds between the pairs.
3. Pull the edges down so they are just rounded.

4. Slowly pull the mouse in the opposite direction, until the faces are no longer round, and continue
pulling until the full round appears.
To create a full round by selecting faces

2. Select the face where you want the full round.
3. Hold Ctrl and select the two side faces that will be tangent to the full round.
4. Right-click and select Full Round.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Example
Creating a full round by selecting three faces
To convert a constant-radius round to a variable-radius round

2. Right-click the round face and select Edit as Variable Radius Round.
To edit a variable radius round
 Click the Pull arrow on an end of the round face and drag toward or away from the face to adjust the
radius at the edge of the round.
 Click the Pull arrow pointing toward the center of the face and drag it along the face (or enter a length
or percent) to set another point where you can adjust the round's radius.
 Hold Ctrl and drag to copy a control point.
 Press Tab to switch among and edit the dimensions by typing a number.
 Two rounds that intersect at a shared edge can be made variable together by selecting the shared
sharp edge for modification. Both rounds become variable at that point. They can be made variable
independently by selecting the sharp end edge that is not shared by the rounds.
Examples
Editing a variable radius round
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Setting another point for adjusting a variable round's radius
Selecting multiple edges to create a variable round across those edges
To remove a rounded edge with the Pull tool
This method completely removes the rounded edge.

2. Select the rounded edge.
3. Select the Round option in the Options panel or from the mini-toolbar.
The round is removed.
To remove a rounded edge with the Fill tool
This method removes the rounded edge and creates a round group in the Groups panel. You can right-
click the group and select Reattach Round to restore the rounded edge.
1. Click the Fill tool in the Edit group on the Design tab.
2. Select the rounded edge.
3. Click the Complete tool guide.
The round is removed and a round group is created.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Rounding between faces and surfaces
You can create a rounded edge across the gap between two faces or surfaces that would meet at a corner.
To create a rounded face on an edge, see Rounding edges.
When you round between faces of two solids, the solids must extend into the area where the rounded
face is created.
To round between faces or surfaces

2. Select the faces you want to create a round between.
3. Select the Round option in the Options panel.
The pull arrow changes to indicate that a round will be created between the faces and a curve is
displayed to show you the direction of the round. Yellow cursor arrows show you the directions
you can pull to create the round if you have cursor arrows enabled.
4. Press Tab to cycle through all of the possible rounds that can be created between two faces or
surfaces.
If the two faces you are rounding between are rounds, then Tab lets you choose either rounding
between or changing the radius of both existing rounds.
5. Click and drag in the direction of the Pull arrow.
To dimension the round, press the Spacebar, type the radius, and press Enter.
When you pull an edge to create a round, the Pull tool determines whether it should be a
constant radius or a variable radius round based on the geometry.
Once you create a round, pulling an adjacent face also pulls the round.
When you round more than one edge at the same time, and one or more of the rounds cannot be
created, only the successful rounds are created.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Unlike rounds made on edges, the faces hidden by the round are not remembered. If you fill the round
it will be replaced by an edge.
Examples
Rounding between faces on two parts
Material exists in the area where the rounded face is created, so this operation will succeed.
A rounded face cannot be created between these faces because material doesn't exist in the area between
the parts where the round will be created.
This sequence shows creating a round between faces, then using the Fill tool to remove the round. The Fill
replaces the round with an edge and not with the original geometry.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Rounding between two surfaces creates a rounded surface.
Chamfering edges
You can chamfer the edges of any solid by selecting the Pull tool's Chamfer option. Sketched chamfers
that you make using the Create Rounded Corner tool with the Chamfer option are recognized as
chamfers when they are extruded into a solid.
Chamfers are recognized as a face type, with their own options in the Properties panel. You can change
the Chamfer (true or false) and Distance values.
After you create the chamfer, you can adjust the setback distance of both sides and you can change its
offset. Drag the arrows above or below the chamfer to change the distance, or drag the arrow that is
perpendicular to the chamfer to change its offset. You can also pivot the edges and the chamfer's
distance properties will be updated with the new values.
When you make a hole in a chamfered face, the face is no longer a chamfer. You can still pull the face,
or the hole, but you cannot change the chamfer to a round or dimension the chamfer.
To chamfer an edge

2. Select the edge or edges you want to chamfer. Double-click to select a tangent chain.
3. Select the Chamfer option in the Options panel or from the mini-toolbar.
4. Click and drag the edge in the direction of the Pull arrows.
Pulling the arrow that is normal to the chamfer face changes the offset distance for the whole
chamfer. Pulling either of the side arrows changes the setback distance of that side. You can press
Tab to move among the arrows.
To dimension the chamfer, right-click and enter a setback distance in the mini-toolbar, or press
the space bar, type the setback distance, and press Enter.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To create a chamfer with the same setback distance and size as an existing chamfer, use the Up
to tool guide and select an existing chamfer face. You can also select an edge with Up To to set
the setback distance.
To modify a chamfered edge
1. Select a chamfered edge or a chain of chamfered edges.

 To change the setback distance of one side of the chamfer, pull the arrow above or below the
chamfer, as shown below. Press the space bar while pulling to type a distance value. You can
also change both setback distances in the Properties panel and in the mini-toolbar.
 To change the offset distance of the chamfer, pull the arrow that is perpendicular to the
chamfer, as shown below. Press the spacebar while pulling to type a distance value.
 To modify by Distance and Angle, select one of the side handles to display the mini-toolbar
and click the Angle dimension option. The selected side becomes the distance side and
the other switches to angle.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 To convert the chamfer to a normal face, select False in the Chamfer field of the Properties
panel. You can select True to convert a face to a chamfer; however, faces with holes cannot be
modified as chamfers. Changing this property does not change the geometry. See the
instructions below to remove a chamfer from an edge.
Hold the Shift key while pulling a chamfer setback or offset to snap to existing edges.
To convert between rounded edges and chamfered edges

2. Select the edge or edges you want to convert to chamfers or rounded edges.
Double-click to select a tangent chain.
You can't convert a chamfered edge if you have changed the setback distance(s).
3. Select the Chamfer option or the Round option in the Options panel or from the mini-
toolbar.
The rounded edge is converted to a chamfered edge.
You cannot convert a chamfer to a round if you have changed its setback distance(s).
To make a chamfer with the same setback and offset as another chamfer

2. Select an edge or an existing chamfer that you want to change.
3. Click the Up To tool guide.
4. Select the chamfer whose values you want to copy.
The first chamfer will be changed so its offset and setback distances are the same as the second
chamfer.
To remove a chamfer with the Pull tool
This method completely removes the chamfered edge.

2. Select the chamfered edge.
3. Select the Chamfer option in the Options panel or from the mini-toolbar.
The chamfer is removed.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To remove a chamfer with the Fill tool
This method removes the chamfered edge and creates a chamfer group in the Groups panel. You can
right-click the group and select Reattach Chamfer to restore the chamfered edge.

2. Select the chamfered edge.
The chamfer is removed and a chamfer group is created.
Examples
Pulling to enlarge an existing chamfer while holding Shift to snap to an edge
You can only snap to an edge in this case when you pull an existing chamfer.
Using the Up to tool guide to change the offset and setback distances of a chamfer to match an existing
chamfer.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Creating a chamfer on multiple edges at the same time
Extruding edges
You can extrude the edge of any solid by selecting the Pull tool's Extrude Edge option. You can also
extend and extrude surface edges.
To extrude an edge
2. Select the edge or edges you want to extrude.
Ctrl+click to select multiple edges. Double-click to select a tangent chain.
3. Select the Extrude Edge option in the Options window, or from the mini-toolbar.
The Pull arrow changes to show the two directions in which you can extrude the edge. One arrow
is highlighted to show the primary direction.
4. If the arrow pointing the direction you want to pull is not highlighted, click the arrow or press Tab
to change the direction.
5. Click and drag the edge in the direction of the Pull arrow.
To dimension the extrusion, right-click and enter a distance in the mini-toolbar, or type the
distance while you are pulling and press Enter.
Press Ctrl to copy the edges.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Press Ctrl+C, then Ctrl+V to quickly copy and paste a selected set of edges in place.
You can click the Up To tool guide and click a face, edge, or point to pull up to. If the face does
not intersect the edge you are pulling, the edge will be pulled parallel to the face. If you pull the
edge of a surface up to another object, the result is automatically solidified if it creates a closed
volume.
Options
Add
Cut
No Merge
existing object.
Ruler
dimension.
Extrude Edge When you are pulling an edge, select this option to extrude the edge into a surface.
When you are pulling an edge, select this option to pivot the edge along the selected
Pivot Edge
Pull arrow.
Pivoting edges
You can pivot the edge of any solid with the Pull tool's Pivot Edge option. You can also pivot two separate
edges together when pulling in one direction.
To turn a cylinder into a cone, select the Pull tool and the Pivot Edge option. Then click the edge of the
cylinder and pull it until it forms a point. To turn a truncated cone into a cylinder, click the small edge and
pull it out.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To pivot an edge
1. Select the Pull tool in the Edit group on the Design tab.
The Select tool guide is enabled by default.
2. Select the edge or edges you want to pivot. Double-click to select a tangent chain or edge loop.
3. Select the Pivot Edge option in the Options panel, or from the mini-toolbar.
The Pull arrow changes to show the two directions in which you can move the edge to pivot the
connected faces. One arrow is highlighted to show the primary direction.
4. If the arrow pointing in the direction you want to pull is not highlighted, click the arrow or press
Tab.
5. Drag the edge in the direction of the Pull arrow.
During the pull, the distance you have moved the edge is displayed. You can dimension the
distance in Section and 3D mode, and dimension the angle in Section mode.
You can hold Shift to snap to existing geometry.
Examples
Simultaneously pivoting multiple edges
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pivoting two separate edges together when pulling in one direction
Dimensioning the pivot angle
Revolving faces
You can revolve any face or surface with the Pull tool. The face or surface can lie on both sides of the
revolve axis.
To revolve a face
2. Select the surfaces, faces, or solids you want to revolve.
3. Alt+click the straight line, axis, or edge to set the revolve axis.
You can also select the Revolve tool guide, then click to set the revolve axis. The revolve axis is
shown in blue.
4. Click and drag in the direction of the Pull arrow to revolve the selected object, select the Up To
tool guide and click an edge, face, or plane, or select Full Pull from the Options panel or mini-
toolbar.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Neighboring faces automatically extend to define the boundaries of the revolved faces of solids.
Revolving from a flat surface face has no neighboring faces, so it makes new face boundaries.
To dimension the rotation, type the rotation angle and press Enter. The positive direction is
shown by the Revolve handle.
Alt+click an axis, then mouse over a face and pull to revolve the face around the axis.
Options
Add
Cut
No Merge
existing object.
Once you select the edge about which to revolve or sweep, click this option to revolve
Full Pull 360 degrees or to the next face, sweep through the full trajectory, or blend through
selected faces.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Revolve using cut, 180 degree revolve, and a full revolve of an ellipse around an asymmetrical axis
Revolving a surfacing using Cut, when the surface lies on both side of the axis and is enclosed within a
solid
Revolving edges
You can revolve an edge to form a surface with the Pull tool. You can revolve the edge of a solid or
surface.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To revolve an edge of a solid or surface
2. Select the edges you want to revolve.
3. Alt+click a straight line, axis, or edge to set the rotation axis.
You can also select the Revolve tool guide, then click the revolve axis. The revolve axis is shown in
blue.
4. Click and drag in the direction of the Pull arrow to revolve the selected edge or select the Up To
tool guide and click an edge or face to revolve up to.
Ctrl+click to select edges of faces along with the face to force the pull tool to create new
neighboring faces to contain these edges (essentially changing from a draft to a revolve). Unlike
other CAD products, SpaceClaim allows revolving planar and non-planar edges and faces about
lines that do not lie in those planes. This allows skewed rotational solids and surfaces.
You can use the Up To tool guide when you revolve edges.
To dimension the rotation, type the rotation angle while the Revolve handle is displayed and
press Enter.
To revolve an edge of a surface
2. Select the outside edge of a surface.
3. (Optional) Hold Ctrl and select an end point to maintain constant radius as the edge is revolved.
If you don't select an end point, the edge will follow influencing sides of surfaces or solids, if they
exist. A side influence can be another edge of the surface if it lies in the same plane, or a solid or
surface that touches the end of the edge. See the examples below.
4. Alt+click a straight line, axis, or edge to set the rotation axis.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can also select the Revolve tool guide, then click the revolve axis. The revolve axis is shown in
blue.
5. Click and drag in the direction of the Pull arrow to revolve the selected edge.
To dimension the rotation, type the rotation angle while the Revolve handle is displayed and
press Enter.
Options
Add
Cut
No Merge
existing object.
selected faces.
Examples
Revolving the edge of a solid to create a surface
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Revolving an edge of a surface that is not in the plane of the surface makes an edge with a constant
radius because the edge has no side influence in this direction.
Revolving an edge of a surface with side influence makes an edge that is influenced by adjacent edges.
Revolving an edge of a surface with side influence with its end-point selected makes an edge with a
constant radius.
Revolving an edge that crosses the axis will create more than one surface or solid if the edge is not
symmetrical across the axis.
Revolving helices
You can revolve a helix with the Pull tool. Path and geometry are previewed as you pull along the axis or
enter dimensions, as shown in the image below.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To revolve a helix
2. Select the face or edge you want to revolve.
3. Select the Revolve tool guide.

4. Click the axis you want to revolve around.
5. Select the Revolve Helix option in the Options panel.
6. (Optional) Set the handedness of the helix by checking or unchecking the Right-Handed Helix
option in the Options panel.
7. Pull along the axis to create the helix dynamically.
As you pull, you can enter dimensions in the helix dimension fields:
 Pitch is the amount that the helix face shifts per 360 degrees of rotation.
 Taper is the helix angle.
Press Tab to switch between dimension fields and Enter to accept the dimensions and create the
helix.
To create a helix dimensionally
You can also create a helix by entering the height (the total length of the helix). Press Tab to switch
between dimension fields and preview the helix. Click the Full Pull option to create the entire helix based
on the dimensions.
Options
Add
Cut
No Merge Pulls without merging into other objects even when the object pulled intersects with an
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
existing object.
Right-Handed Select this option to determine the direction in which the helix is revolved around its
Helix axis.
Sweeping
You can sweep a face, edge, surface, 3D curve, or other object along a trajectory with the Pull tool.
Sweeping a face around a closed path creates a torus.
To sweep a face

2. Select the profile you want to sweep.
3. Select the Sweep tool guide, then click the sweep trajectory. The sweep trajectory is shown in
blue. Alt+double-click to select a tangent chain. Ctrl+click to add contiguous paths.
You can also select the profile to sweep and then Alt+click the sweep trajectory or Alt+Ctrl+click
multiple trajectories. The sweep tool is selected automatically.
If the trajectory along which you want to sweep is a non-linear curve, you can also Alt+click the
curve, which selects the Sweep tool guide automatically.
If you select the Normal to Trajectory option, the sweep is aligned along the origin trajectory
To quickly sketch a face perpendicular to a desired trajectory, select the end of the trajectory and
select a sketching tool to place the sketch grid at that point. Then draw the face.
toolbar.
Select:
Select Normal to Trajectory to keep the swept surface normal to the sweep trajectory. If your
sweep trajectory is perpendicular to the face you want to sweep, this option is enabled for you.
 Select Scale Sections to control the effect of the vector from the 0-to-X trajectory so that it
controls both orientation and scale of the sweep sections. Uncheck the box if you want the
vector to control only the orientation of the sweep sections.
 You can also select from the standard Pull options listed below.
5. Click and drag in the direction of the Pull arrow to sweep the selected objects, or select Full
Pull from the Options panel or mini-toolbar to sweep the entire length of the trajectory. If you
select Full Pull and the profile being swept is in the middle of the trajectory, it will be swept in
both directions.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can also use the Up To tool guide to select a face or surface on which you want to end the
sweep.
Options
Add
Cut
No Merge
existing object.
selected faces.
Examples
Hexagons swept around circular and hexagonal sweep paths
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Sweeping along a primary trajectory with Normal to Trajectory selected. Every section plane that is
normal to the origin trajectory is the exact same profile as the initial section, limited by the extents of the
trajectory.
Sweeping along a primary trajectory with Normal to Trajectory not selected. Every section plane that is
parallel to the initial section profile is the exact same profile as that initial section, limited by the extents of
the trajectory.
Sweeping a rectangle along a Sweeping a rectangle along a

trajectory with Normal to trajectory with Normal to
Trajectory selected. Trajectory not selected.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Sweeping a hole along a trajectory by selecting the axis of the hole, then the trajectory.
If you sweep a non-continuous profile, separate swept surfaces are created.
Sweeping with multiple trajectories
You can Alt+Ctrl+click to select multiple trajectories to sweep along. The trajectory you click first is the
origin trajectory (labeled O) and the second trajectory is labeled X. If you select the Normal to Trajectory
option, the sweep is aligned along the origin trajectory. If the object being swept is in the middle of the
sweep, you can pull in either direction to sweep only in that direction.
Sweeps can vary the sketch entities (or edges) along the sweep trajectory. The trajectories can be thought
of as guides that make continual changes to the profiles as if they had been dragged while in Sketch
mode. Tangency and other constraints are maintained.
When you sweep using more than two trajectories and Scale Sections is turned off, the profile lines and
curves will follow the trajectories individually and constraints are preserved. You can see an example in the
image below.
You can use a chain of tangent edges as a guide for Sweep.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The extent (or length) of a sweep is limited by the shortest trajectory. If the profile being swept intersects
at any point along the trajectory, you can pull in either direction to sweep only in that direction. You can
also select Full Pull to create a bidirectional sweep that extends throughout the trajectory.
The sweep preview includes the following visual elements:
 The blue square indicates the direction of the origin trajectory at its start, and is localized around the
origin trajectory’s intersection with the profile to be swept.
 A right-angle symbol is displayed on the origin trajectory when you select the Normal to origin
trajectory option.
 The preview rectangles are green and scale with the sweep if you select the Scale sections option.
Sweep with two guides
In a sweep with two guides, every section plane that is normal to the origin trajectory has a profile section
that is aligned to the vector defined by the O-X vector in that plane, scaled by the length of the O-X
vector, and limited by the extents of the shortest trajectory. If there are two or more trajectories and the
spline that connects them (as a profile) is tangent to the surfaces that contain the trajectory edges, then
the spline not only scales and aligns to the O-X vector, but also deforms to keep that profile tangent, at all
points along the trajectories, to the neighboring surfaces. The profile does not have to touch the
trajectories, but the profile plane has to intersect with the trajectories.
You can also sweep with two closed trajectories:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Sweep along more than two trajectories
If the profile is composed of lines and circles, then guide curves will control the shape of the profile much
the same way a sketch is controlled by dragging the mouse. More specifically, there are three constraints:
a line or circle that touches a guide curve will maintain the connection throughout the sweep, a circle with
a guide curve at its center will stay centered on that guide curve through the sweep, and any members of
the profile that are tangent will remain tangent. If the profile contains splines, then any lines or splines
attached to a guide curve will deform so they remain attached throughout the sweep. In this case,
neighboring faces that are tangent to the profile can be Alt-selected to specify that the profile should
remain tangent to the neighboring face throughout the sweep.
When sweeping, cross-sections can be displayed as a preview for their sweep along the trajectories, also
shown in the figure above. You can control the display of the cross-sections with the Animate Full Pull
Advanced SpaceClaim option.
Sweep tangent to a surface
If you select a sweep trajectory that is the edge of a surface, and the object being swept is tangent to that
surface, then the initial tangency is maintained along the entire sweep, as shown in the figure below.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Sweep with a trajectory and an axis
If you sweep a profile along a trajectory with an axis as the secondary trajectory, then the profile normal is
maintained while the profile orientation changes as it is rotated around the axis.
Sweeping with an axis
To set the orientation while sweeping

2. Select the object you want to sweep.
3. Alt+click the primary trajectory.
4. Ctrl+Alt+click the secondary trajectory.
5. Click the Rotate tool guide and click the axis or line that will set the orientation during the sweep.
6. Drag to create the sweep.
The object being swept must be in the plane that contains the axis and an intersection with the
baseline trajectory.
Examples
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Setting the orientation of the selected object as it is swept along the trajectory.
Variable sweep with axis. Every section plane that is cut through a point on the origin trajectory and
through the selected axis has a profile section that is aligned to the vector defined by the O-X vector in
that plane, scaled by the length of the O-X vector, and limited by the extents of the shortest trajectory.
This makes every section appear to radiate around that selected axis.
Drafting faces
You can draft faces around a plane or another face, edge, or surface with the Pull tool. Drafting changes
the angle of the selected contiguous faces. For example, a mold designer drafts faces to facilitate removal
of parts from the mold.
To draft a face
1. (Optional) Insert a plane around which you want to draft faces.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You need to do this when you want to draft around a plane that doesn't already exist as geometry
in the design.
3. Select the face or contiguous faces you want to draft.
4. Alt+click the plane, face (including rounds), or surface about which you want to draft.
You can also select the Draft tool guide , then click the face or surface. The draft plane, face,
or surface is shown in blue.
Tip: When you need to select more than one face or surface for the Alt-reference (or after
selecting the Draft tool guide) then you have to hold the Ctrl and the Alt keys while selecting the
additional references.
If you select one edge loop, you can create an edge-driven draft. If you select two edge loops,
you can create a split draft.
5. Click and drag in the direction of the Pull arrow to draft the selected faces.
To dimension the draft, type the rotation angle while you are pulling and press Enter.
Options
 Add: Select the Add option to only add material. If you pull in a subtractive direction, no
 Cut: Select the Cut option to only remove material. If you pull in an additive direction, no
 No merge: Pulls without merging into other objects even when the object pulled intersects
with an existing object.
 Up to: Pulls the element so it mates with the surface of the selected body or be pulled up to a
plane through the selection. You can find this option in the mini-toolbar and it is the same as the
Up To tool guide.
 Draft both sides: Select this option to pivot the face on the opposite side of the reference
face as well as the selected face.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Drafting a face about a round
Drafting non-contiguous faces
Drafting around a plane that does not touch the faces being drafted
Drafting faces around a plane. The drafted faces pivot around the face or plane you select as the draft
plane.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Drafting both sides around the plane.
Drafting a face where a plane must be selected as the draft plane. See Inserting a plane for instructions
to create a plane.
Drafting the offset faces (inside and the outside) of a shelled solid.
Drafting around a spline surface with the Draft both sides option selected
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Drafting a set of surfaces about a planar surface not attached to the solid
Blending
You can create blends between points, edges, or faces. The Blend mode is activated if you select two
points, edges, or faces in the Pull tool. You can activate the Extrude mode if you want to pull the objects
normally.
To create a blend
 Enter the Pull tool
 Select a point, edge, or face
 Ctrl+Select a corresponding point edge or face
 You can select more than two objects
 The blend is previewed as you select
 Complete the blend
Options
The following options are available in the Pull tool Options panel when you select the appropriate
geometry for a blend.
 Rotational blend: Create cylinders and cones whenever possible during the creation of a blend. You
must have selected faces, points, or edges that can be rotated around a common axis.
 Periodic blend: Go all the way around when blending. The blend will begin and end at the first
selected object. You must have selected three or more faces, points, or edges that can be rotated
around a common axis, and that also span an arc greater than 180 degrees. (Blending between 3
equal-radius circle faces creates a torus.)
 Ruled sections: Create straight edges when you blend. When you blend between faces, this option has
the same effect as selecting the face and its edges.
 Local guides: Selected guide curves only influence areas near to them.
 Clocked guides: Guide curves are oriented relative to the face edges instead being simply translated
from vertex to vertex.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Clocked guides unchecked Clocked guides Checked
Example
When blending between colored objects, the blended geometry takes on the color of the object that was
selected first.
Blending between faces
You can blend between two or more faces with the Pull tool. Blended faces automatically simplify to
analytic geometry when possible.
Once you have created a blend, you can use the Tweak Face tool to edit the blended surfaces or faces.
To blend between two faces
1. Click Pull in the Design tab Edit group.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Select the first surface or face.

3. Ctrl+Select the second surface or face.
The Pull Mode switches to Blend and the Blend Options panel opens.
A blend preview displays between the first two faces. Blend surfaces begin tangent to the edges
of the initial face and end tangent to the edges of the last face. You can Alt+Click on these faces
to reverse the tangent direction.
4. (Optional) Alt+click the edges or lines you want to use as guides for the blend. Guide curves must
touch all blend profiles.
5. Continue selecting surfaces or faces.
6. (Optional) Modify the blend by selecting from the following options:
 Rotational blend: Create cylinders and cones whenever possible during the creation of a
blend. You must have selected faces rotated around a common axis.
 Periodic blend: Go all the way around when blending. You must have selected three or more
faces rotated around a common axis, that also span an arc greater than 180 degrees. (Blending
between 3 equal-radius circle faces creates a torus.)
 Ruled sections: Create straight edges when you pull between three or more surfaces or faces.
 Local Guides: Selected guide curves only influence areas near to them.
Checked Un-Checked
 Clocked guides: Guide curves are oriented relative to the face edges instead being simply
translated from vertex to vertex.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Clocked guides unchecked Clocked guides Checked
7. Click or select Full Pull from the Options panel or mini-toolbar to create the blend.
To create a blend surface tangent to a face along a given direction
To create a blend surface tangent to two faces along a given direction, select two curved faces and
Alt+click a linear object, such as an axis, datum axis, sketch curve, or edge to indicate the direction for
finding two tangent locations. Where you click when selecting the surface determines the approximate
location of the edge of the surface. The Pull tool previews the edges and the resulting sweep.
To create a blend surface tangent to one face and through one curve (or edge) along a given direction,
select a face and a curve and Alt+click a linear object to set the direction.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Blending between edges
Use the Pull tool in the Design tab Edit group to blend between two or more edges. You can select guide
curves for the edges to follow when creating the blend.
To blend between edges
1. Click Pull in the Design tab Edit group.
2. Select the first curve or edge.

3. Ctrl+Select the second curve or edge.
A blend preview displays between the first two edges.
4. (Optional) Alt+click the edges or curves you want to use as guides for the blend. Guide curves
must touch all blend profiles.
5. Continue selecting curves or edges.
 Rotational blend: Create cylinders and cones whenever possible during the creation of a
blend. You must have selected edges rotated around a common axis.
 Periodic blend: Go all the way around when blending. You must have selected three or
more edges rotated around a common axis, that also span an arc greater than 180 degrees.
 Ruled sections: Create straight edges when you blend between three or more curves or edges.
 Local Guides: Selected guide curves only influence areas near to them.
 Clocked guides: Blend edges passing through or ending at edges (not vertices) will be equally
spaced along the edge.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Clocked guides unchecked Clocked guides checked
When a blend between splines will self-intersect, the splines are modified slightly to prevent this from
happening.
Adding Tangency
Make the blend tangent to adjacent faces by Alt+selecting them.
Swept blends
A Swept Blend is a blend between two or more edges without local guide influence. The entire blend is
swept along the guide curve, as shown below.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you check the Local guide option, the guide curve has a local effect on the blend.
Swept blends are different from sweeps. Swept blends need at least two profiles, while sweeps use a
single profile. Sweeps give you limited control over the orientation and angle of the section along the
trajectory, or at the end cap, because it is always determined by sweeping the profile along the trajectory.
With swept blends, you specify the section shape and orientation explicitly at the ends and at specific
points along the trajectory (guide curve).
When you select more than one guide curve, the additional guide curves give you more control over the
final shape of the blend. Each guide curve affects entities in the profile that are closest to the curve.
Vertices between guide curves are controlled by curves blended between the neighboring guide curves.
Examples
Selecting three edges to fill in a missing triangular round on a corner
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Blending between points
You can create a curve by blending between points. Blend between any two points to create a curve, or
select multiple points to create a spline.
To blend between points
1. Enter the Pull tool.

2. Select the first point or vertex.
3. Ctrl+click to select multiple points or vertices.
A blend preview displays between the first two points.
4. Ctrl+Select more points or vertices.

5. To make the pulled curve tangent:
 Ctrl+click neighboring edges of the vertices if you want the blend curve to begin tangent to
one or more edges.
 Alt+click one or more neighboring faces if you want the blend curve to be tangent to the
face(s).
 Rotational blend: Create arcs whenever possible during the creation of a blend. You must
have selected points rotated around a common axis.
 Periodic blend: Go all the way around when blending. You must have selected three or
more points rotated around a common axis, that also span an arc greater than 180 degrees.
 Ruled sections: Create straight line segments when you blend between three or more points.
Creating slots
You can create slots from holes using the Pull tool. You can also edit slots. Slots maintain the relationship
between their faces.
If you pull a hole with a rounded or chamfered edge into a slot, the slot will have a rounded or chamfered
edge.
You must select the axis of the hole, rather than the axis of a round or chamfer on the hole. You will
not be able to pull the slot if you select the axis of the round or chamfer.
To create a slot

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Select the axis of a hole.
If you have trouble selecting the axis, hover first over the inside face of the hole and the axis will
appear.
3. (Optional) Hold Alt and click on a face, edge, or vertex to set the direction or trajectory of the Pull.
4. (Optional) Select the Pull Both Sides option to create the slot in both directions.
5. (Optional) Select Full Pull to pull the slot along the full length of the trajectory, if you selected
one.
6. Pull the axis or face of a hole to create a slot.
If you want to pull in a new direction, press the Tab key to change the direction of the Pull
handles.
To create a curved slot
1. Select the axis or face of a hole.

2. Select the Rotate tool guide and click the axis of the driving cylinder.
You can also Alt+click the axis of the driving cylinder.
3. Pull the hole to create a curved slot.
You can pull a curved slot 360 degrees to make a round cut.
To create a radial slot
1. Select the axis or face of a hole.

2. Do one of the following:
 Alt-click the face of the driving cylinder to set the direction of the Pull towards the axis of the
driving cylinder. Click the Pull Direction tool guide and pull the hole to create a radial slot.
 Ctrl-click the face of the driving cylinder to set the direction of the Pull towards the axis of the
driving cylinder. Click the Pull Direction tool guide and pull the hole to offset the cylinder and
create a radial slot simultaneously.
 Select the Pull arrow that points toward the axis and pull.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you want to lengthen a radial slot while keeping it the same distance from a radial face,
Ctrl+click the radial slot's axis and the face, then pull.
If you want to move a slot along with a radial face Ctrl+select the hole’s axis and the face, then
Ctrl+pull.
To create an offset of a radial slot
1. Select an axis of a slot.

2. Hold the Alt key and select the cylinder face or face to set the offset direction.
3. Hold the Ctrl key and pull or enter a radius value.
To create a swept slot
1. Select the axis of a hole.

2. Select the Sweep tool guide.
3. Click the sweep trajectory.
A sweep mode arrow indicates the beginning of the sweep.
4. Click and drag in the direction of the Pull arrow to sweep the selected objects.
You can also select Full Pull from the Options panel or the mini-toolbar to sweep the entire
length of the trajectory. If you select Full Pull and the face or surface being swept is in the middle
of the trajectory, it will be swept in both directions.
To edit a slot
You can modify a hole that was dragged to form a slot by pulling on any of the slot axes.
If the slot has a rounded or chamfered edge, double-click the round or chamfer to change its dimensions.
If you select Detach first in the Options panel, then the slot will become a solid if you use the Move tool
to move it off the body, as shown below.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To move a slot radially
1. Select the Pull tool.

2. Select both axes of the slot.
 Alt-click the face of the driving cylinder to set the direction of the Pull towards the axis of the
driving cylinder. Click the Pull Direction tool guide and Ctrl-drag to move the slot radially.
 Ctrl-click the face of the driving cylinder to set the direction of the Pull towards the axis of the
driving cylinder. Click the Pull Direction tool guide and Ctrl-drag to offset the cylinder and
move the slot.
You can also move a hole radially by pressing Shift while dragging it with the Pull tool.
To remove the slot relationship
Right-click a face of the slot and select Remove Association.
Any changes you make to the slot's face will affect only that face.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Pulling mirrored holes to create slots
Creating a circular slot by entering an angle dimension with the Pull Both Sides option
Creating a radial slot by selecting an axis or edge parallel to the hole’s axis as the Pull direction
Creating a slot using a vertex as the Pull direction
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Scaling solids and surfaces
You can scale solids and surfaces with the Pull tool. You can scale multiple objects in different
components.
To scale a solid or surface

2. Select a solid or surface.
3. Click the Scale Body tool guide.
4. Click a point, vertex, or origin to set the origin for scaling.
5. Pull to scale dynamically (a field appears to show the scale as you pull) or press the spacebar and
enter the scale.
You can enter mathematical expressions to calculate a scale factor.
To scale using an annotation dimension, click the spark icon next to the dimension and type a
new value.
Select the solid or surface, Alt+click a vertex to anchor the scale, and pull.
To scale a solid asymmetrically

2. Select a solid.
4. Click a point, vertex, or origin to set the origin for scaling.
5. Hold Alt and select an origin axis, or hold Alt and Ctrl and select a point and a line.
6. Drag in either direction of the line to scale the part in that direction.
You can press the spacebar and enter a scale value while you are dragging.
To convert an existing solid or surface from millimeters to inches
1. Change the units to inches as described above.

2. Select the Pull tool in the Edit ribbon group on the Design tab.
3. Select the object you want to convert.
4. Scale the object by 25.4.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To scale a datum plane or axis

2. Select the datum plane and/or axis and select a curve, surface, or solid.
You must hold Ctrl and select the plane. Box-select will not select it.

4. Select an anchor point.
5. Drag in the direction of the Pull arrow.
Examples
Scaling a solid asymmetrically
Scaling a plane and an axis with a solid
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can use annotation dimensions to scale an object. See Editing with annotation dimensions.
Copying edges and faces
You can copy edges and faces by selecting the Pull tool's Extrude Edge option. You can also copy edges
and faces with the Move tool.
When copying and pasting the edge of a surface as a curve or line, the lines are placed on the active layer
and remain selected until you clear the selection. This feature is useful if you need references to rebuild a
surface.
To copy an edge or edges

2. Select the edge or edges you want to copy. Double-click to select a chain of edges.
3. Select the Copy Edge option in the Options panel or from the mini-toolbar.
You can also Ctrl+drag with the Pivot Edge or Extrude edge options selected to copy the edge.
The Pull arrow changes to show the two directions in which you can create copies of the edge.
One arrow is highlighted to show the primary direction.
4. If the arrow pointing the direction in which you want to copy the edge is not highlighted, click the
arrow or press Tab to change the direction.
5. Drag the edge in the direction of the highlighted Pull arrow.
During the pull, the distance between the copied edge and the new edge is displayed. When you
create an external edge, a surface is created between the copied edge and the new one.
Press Ctrl and drag to copy the selected face.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Copying edges to create new edges on a face
When copying an edge, the edge adjusts based on the solid's geometry
Copying a round face
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pulling with the Select tool
You can pull with the Select tool or the Pull tool.
To pull with the Select tool
Drag the vertex of a selected face to another vertex to pull the selected face, as shown in the figures
below.
Dragging a copy of a solid back into the solid
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pivoting with the Select tool
You can pivot an edge with the Select tool or the Pull tool.
To pivot an edge
Drag the vertex of a selected edge to another vertex to pivot the selected face, as shown in the figure
below.
Using Measure to drive Pull
Measurements can be made, and the results used, while in the Pull tool.
To use measurements from within the Pull tool:
1. Enter the Pull tool

2. Enter the Measure tool (shortcut is “e”) and measure any single object or measure between two
objects
measurement.
model.
5. (Optional) Create a Measurement Group which can be modified at any time.
1. Select a single measurement
2. Open the Groups panel
3. Click on Create Group
4. The measurement group is created
5. At any time, clicking on the group in the Group tree will open the Pull tool and put the
measurement value in edit mode. Simply enter a new value and complete the Pull.
Measurement groups can also be created from Area results. Modifying the group then adjusts the model
to produce a desired area. For example, create a Measurement group for the area of a side of a box.
While pulling the front of the box, you can enter a new area value for the side to complete the Pull.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Moving
Use the Move tool to move any object in 2D or 3D, including drawing sheet views. The behavior of
the Move tool changes based on what you have selected.
 If you select an entire object, such as a solid, surface, or sketch, you can translate or rotate the object.
 You can move one side of a solid, surface, or sketch to enlarge or reduce the size of the object.
 If you move an object into another object in the same component, the smaller object is merged into
the larger one and receives the larger object's properties.
 Moving a component moves everything contained within the component.
 You can move a circular edge of a flat surface the same way you move a circular sketch curve.
 Moving the apex of a cone changes the height. Anchor the Move tool to the outer face to scale the
cone.
When you move a component that has been assembled using assembly constraints, the Move handle is
positioned at the constraint and the axes that are constrained are disabled. If the assembly constraints
only allow movement in one direction, then that direction will be automatically selected. For example, if
you move a component with a Center Axes assembly constraint, the Move handle is positioned on the
axis and you can only move the component in directions that will keep the axes aligned.
If the Move handle appears disabled, check the Structure tree to determine if an assembly condition
exists for the component you are trying to move.
Offset, mirror, and coaxial inferred relationships also affect Move.
If you entered the Design tab with sheet metal features selected, the Move tool will work as it does in
Sheet metal. To work as usual, right click on the sheet metal part in the Structure tree and choose
Suspend Sheet Metal in the context menu.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To Move objects

2. Select the object(s) that you want to move.
 Ruler: Once you select an axis on the Move handle, select this option and click an edge or face
to anchor the ruler. The ruler is oriented along the selected Move handle axis. Enter a value to
use the ruler to dimension the move.
 Create patterns: Select this option if you want to create a pattern by dragging selected
objects with the Move tool. Dragging creates a copy of the selected object, moves it to a new
location, and creates a pattern relationship. Select the Maintain orientation option to keep
the initial orientation of the original object when you rotate or translate the pattern. See
Creating a pattern.
 Detach first: Detach the selected protrusions and depressions, move them, and reattach them
at the new location.
 Maintain sketch connectivity: Keeps the connections between a sketch curve and other
curves that share its end points. If you deselect this option and move a sketch curve, the curve
will move independent of other curves.
 Remember orientation: Sets the orientation of the Move tool for the object. The orientation is
only remembered for the current session. You can change the Move handle orientation by
using the Direction tool guide, holding Alt and selecting a reference object, or by dragging a
ball on the Move handle's axes. You can select the following options in the drop-down list to
the right of the option:
 Default: The Move handle orientation is determined by the object(s) you select.
 Global: Saves the current Move handle orientation, and this orientation is used for all
objects.
 Per Object: Saves the current Move handle orientation for the selected object. When you
select the object again with the Move tool active, the Move handle will be oriented at its
saved orientation.
4. Click an axis and drag in that direction to move the selected object.
A line extends from the Move handle axis to indicate the direction you selected for movement.
If the move fails, the Move handle is repositioned to the last valid location and orientation. If you
are trying to move a protrusion surrounded by round faces, you may need to fill the rounds.
5. You can also Alt+select a plane between Move handles to invoke free drag movement within that
plane. Place the Move tool on any movable object and then hold the Alt key. Quarter circle planes
appear between the Move handles. Selecting one changes the cursor to a free drag cursor and
allows free movement within the plane. Select any Move handle to disable the free drag.
The cursor does not need to be on the axis to move the selected object. In fact, you may find it easier
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
to control the move if you drag some distance from the entity and the Move handle.
Examples
Moving a protrusion with rounds that intersects with a stepped solid with the Detach first option
Moving a circular edge along a surface
Moving an imprinted face off of a solid face creates a surface.
Moving imprinted edges on a face, and other intersecting imprinted edges are adjusted as needed. The
examples above show how the edges are adjusted when the imprinted areas are moved.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Moving the end point of a line segment that has a tangent arc on its other end changes the arc so that it
remains tangent to the line segment as you move its end point
To move relative to other objects
 Snap to a co-planar face: Hold Shift while dragging to snap to co-planar faces when you have the
Move handle anchored to a planar face.
 Move an object up to another object: Click the Up To tool guide to move objects so the center of
the Move handle is adjacent to the object.
 Orient an object to another object: Select the object to move and a Move handle axis, then click the
Orient to Object tool guide and select a second object. The selected object will be rotated so the
selected Move handle axis is aligned with the second object.
To change the anchor location of the Move handle
 Drag the yellow center sphere on the Move handle

 Click the Anchor tool guide and select the face, edge, or vertex on which to place the Move handle.
 You can also click the Origin tool in the Insert tab to insert an origin anywhere in your design that
you want to anchor the Move tool.
The yellow center sphere turns into a blue cube when the Move handle is anchored.
To change the direction or trajectory for the move
 Drag one of the small balls on the rotational axis to reorient the Move handle, or dimension the
orientation by typing the rotation angle while you are dragging, then pressing Enter.
 You can also Alt+click a point or line, or click the Move Direction tool guide, then click a point or line,
to orient one of the Move handle's axes toward that point or along that line.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you Alt+click a trajectory, you can move along the trajectory. Ctrl+Alt+click to add contiguous lines
or edges to the trajectory.
If you Alt+click a plane, the direction of movement is set perpendicular to the plane.
Example
Normal to Surface - While moving the diamond along the selected trajectory, Ctrl+Alt+click the face of
the cylinder to set the orientation of the diamond normal to the cylinder.
To dimension a move
1. Follow the steps to move an object.

2. After you click an axis on the Move handle, click Ruler in the Options panel.
3. Click an edge or face to anchor the ruler.
The ruler is oriented along the selected Move handle axis.
4. Type a distance and press Enter.
To copy an object using the Move tool
 Press Ctrl to copy the object selected for movement and place it at the location at which you drag or
dimension the move.
You can press the spacebar to dimension the move.
 Double-click the Up To tool guide to make multiple copies of the selected object. To exit this mode,
click on another tool or in empty space in the Design window.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Copying the red face multiple times by double-clicking the Up To tool guide to keep it active for more
than one move
Making copies by double-clicking the Up To tool guide also works with sketches
Tool guides
Within the Move tool, there are several tool guides that let you specify the behavior of the Move tool:
The Select tool guide is active by default. When this tool guide is active, you can select faces,
surfaces, solids, or components within the Move tool.
Click any object with the Select Component tool guide to select the solid to which the object
belongs. If the solid is the only object in its component, the component will be selected.
Select a point, vertex, line, axis, plane, or planar face with the Move Direction tool guide to orient
the Move handle and set the initial direction of the move. (The object will not move until you drag.)
Select a set of lines or edges with the Move Along Trajectory tool guide to move the selected
objects along that trajectory. For best results, perform Moves along trajectories in small increments.
If the object to be moved is a protrusion, it will be detached, then reattached in the new location.
When you move a protrusion along a trajectory, rounds are automatically removed. Ctrl+Alt+click a
face to control the orientation of the object being moved or patterned along.
Select an object, then use the Anchor tool guide to select the face, edge, or vertex that will anchor
the move. You can anchor the Move handle to a temporary object, such as the intersection between
two axes by Alt+Shift+clicking the two objects.
Select an object, then use the Fulcrum tool guide to move other objects around it. Select a pattern
member to anchor it, or select a component to explode an assembly. See Moving with the
Fulcrum tool guide.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Once you select the object to move and a Move handle axis, use the Up To tool guide to select the
object you want to move up to.
If a Move handle axis is selected, the Move is limited to that direction. If no handles are selected, the
object is translated until the center of the Move handle lies on the selected reference. (A move
handle must be selected to move up to the axis of an origin.)
In a linear move to an intersecting object, the center of the Move handle is moved to the selected
object. If the two objects do not intersect, the first object is moved along the desired direction up to
the closest point to the second object. You can use this tool guide to:
 Select a point along a trajectory or the axis of an origin to move up to.

 Move the sketch grid in Sketch and Section modes.
 Move an axis so it is coincident with another axis in a body. If you move the axis of a pattern,
all pattern members will move together to the new location.
You can double-click the Up To tool guide to keep it active. While the tool guide is active, it will
copy faces and surfaces instead of moving them. To deactivate the tool guide, click it again, select
another tool guide, or exit the Move tool.
Once you select the object to move and a Move handle axis, use the Orient to Object tool guide to
click an object. The selected object will be rotated until the selected Move handle axis is aligned
with the clicked object. You can also use this tool guide to rotate the sketch grid in Sketch and
Section modes.
Options
The following options are available in the Move tool:

 Symmetric Move: Select this option to move symmetrically.
 Measure: Opens the Measure tool. Selecting a measurement result returns you to the Move tool.
When you select move direction, the measurement value is displayed in a dimension box with an arrow
pointing to the measured object. Modify the value for a one-time adjustment of the model or create a
Measurement Group which can be modified at any time.
 Ruler: Once you select an axis on the Move handle, select this option and click an edge or face to
anchor the ruler. The ruler is oriented along the selected Move handle axis. Enter a value to use the
ruler to dimension the move.
 Maintain orientation: Select this option to maintain the orientation of the object when rotating or
moving along a trajectory.
 Create patterns: Select this option if you want to create a pattern by dragging selected objects with
the Move tool. Dragging creates a copy of the selected object, moves it to a new location, and creates
a pattern relationship. Select the Maintain orientation option to keep the initial orientation of the
original object when you rotate or translate the pattern. See Creating a pattern.
 Detach first: Select this option to detach selected protrusions and depressions, move them, and
reattach them at the new location.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Maintain sketch connectivity: Keep the connection between a sketch curve and other curves that
share its end points. If you deselect this option and move a sketch curve, the curve will move
 Keep beam fixed: This option is for beams and causes the beam to remain fixed while the profile
becomes offset from the beam. See Moving beams.
 Remember orientation: Sets the orientation of the Move tool for the object. The orientation is only
remembered for the current session. You can change the Move handle orientation by using the
Direction tool guide, holding Alt and selecting a reference object, or by dragging a ball on the Move
handle's axes. You can select the following options in the drop-down list to the right of the option:
 Default: The Move handle orientation is determined by the object(s) you select.
 Global: Saves the current Move handle orientation, and this orientation is used for all objects.
 Per Object: Saves the current Move handle orientation for the selected object. When you select the
object again with the Move tool active, the Move handle will be oriented at its saved orientation.
The Move handle
You will use the Move handle to move objects in 2D and 3D. The Move handle allows you to translate and
rotate objects. You use the Move handle by clicking the axes of the Move handle and dragging to move
the selected object.
When you select the object you want to move, and click one of the Move tools, SpaceClaim guesses at the
anchor point and orientation of the Move handle. If either of these is incorrect, you can change them.
You can adjust the size of the Move handle in Popular options.
To translate objects using the Move handle
1. Click the axis that is aligned with the direction you want to move the selected object.
2. Drag in the direction of the axis to move the object.
You can Ctrl-drag to create a copy of the object while moving.
To rotate objects using the Move handle
Use the curved rotational axis that is aligned with the direction you want to rotate:
 Drag the axis to rotate the selected object.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can hold the Ctrl key to create a copy of the object while moving.
 Double-click the axis to rotate the object 90°. You can hold the Ctrl key while double-clicking to create
a copy of the object at 90°.
To move freely within a plane using the Move handle
Use the planes between Move handles to move within a plane.
 Hold the Alt key

 Quarter circle planes display between the Move handles
 Select the plane to move within
 Release the Alt key and start dragging
While dragging, the cursor changes to the free drag cursor.
 Clicking on any Move handle cancels free drag movement.
To realign the axes of the Move handle
You can realign the Move handle in the following ways:
 Drag the small balls on each rotation axis of the Move handle to reorient it. While dragging, you can
also press the spacebar to enter the angle directly.
 Drag the center ball of the Move handle (or use the Anchor tool guide) to place it on another solid,
face, edge, or vertex. If you use this method, keep in mind that the selected object is still the one that is
going to move.
 Alt+click a point or line (or use the Move Direction tool guide) to orient the closest linear axis toward
that point or along the line.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Adjusting the size of the Move handle in Popular options
Moving symmetrically
Use the Symmetric Move option in the Move tool to move objects relative to each other about a plane
as if they are mirrored objects but without the need to create a mirror association between the objects.
Unlike the Mirror tool, the Symmetric move option can be used to move dissimilar geometry as well as
similar.
You can use this option with an automatically determined virtual mirror plane based on the Move handle
location or you can use the fulcrum tool guide to establish a fixed mirror plane.
With a fulcrum-selected mirror plane, geometry which is the same on both sides of the plane is found and
moved automatically when moving geometry on one side of the plane. The center of each selected object
determines which side of the plane the geometry lies on.
Faces, edges, vertices, section curves, and sketch curves can be moved symmetrically. Curves that partially
overlap the symmetry plane can be moved. The symmetric move option is not available for moving
objects which have an established mirror association
To move objects symmetrically about a virtual mirror plane
1. Select two or more objects.

2. Click the Move tool.
3. Click Symmetric Move in the Move Options panel.
4. Click one of the translation arrows and drag. As you drag, a ghost mirror plane appears at the
center of the Move handle, perpendicular to the direction you are dragging. Movements are
mirrored about this plane. A ghost move handle is displayed on the other side of the virtual
mirror plane to indicate the mirrored translation or rotation. Selected objects are moved
symmetrically about the indicated plane.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To reset the virtual mirror plane, change selection or toggle the Symmetric Move option.
Examples
Moving two solids symmetrically about a virtual mirror
Moving two curves
To move objects symmetrically with a fulcrum-selected mirror plane
1. Create a plane or planar face.

2. Select one or more objects.
4. Click Symmetric Move in the Move Options panel.
5. Click the Fulcrum tool guide.
6. Click the plane or planar face to specify the symmetry plane.
Objects on the other side of the fulcrum plane with matching geometry are automatically
detected and moved symmetrically about the plane.
7. Drag a rotation or translation arrow on the move handle to modify the geometry symmetrically
about the fulcrum-selected mirror plane.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Pivoting an edge modifies the matching geometry on the other side of the fulcrum-selected mirror plane.
Moving faces that are symmetric to each other but lie partially on either side of the mirror plane. The
center of each of the objects’ bounding boxes is on either side of the plane, so the symmetric move
tool can detect the symmetric geometry and the angled faces can be moved
Creating a pattern
You can create a pattern of protrusions or depressions (including slots), points, components, planes,
origins, or axes. You can also create patterns of sketch curves. You cannot create a pattern of threads. You
can use the Undo button Ctrl+Z or Redo button Ctrl+Y when creating a pattern.
You can also create a pattern from a mix of object types, such as a pattern of holes (faces) and bolts
(imported components). In SpaceClaim, any pattern member can be used to modify the pattern after you
create it. If the change cannot be made to all pattern members, the member that cannot change is still
part of the pattern. Once you select a Pattern Type, the fill displays to show a pattern preview.
When you select a member of a pattern, you will see fields for the pattern count and distances relative to
the member you have selected. Press Tab to move among the dimension and count fields.
 Icons next to the pattern’s dimensions and counts show which will be changed if you change the value
of the highlighted field. The closed lock indicates that a dimension won’t change and the open lock
shows you it will change. You can override a lock on a dimension by clicking its icon to toggle it
between locked and unlocked.
 Dimension or count line placement, arrows, and value fields show you how the pattern will change if
you change the value of a field.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Your selection determines how changes to the distance and count affect the pattern’s position. If you
select one member of the pattern, the change is centered on that member. If you select all pattern
members, the change is centered on the entire pattern, with the distance between members locked by
default. You can control which direction the pattern will grow based on which member you select and
which count or distance you change.
 Changing a pattern count in one direction does not change the distance between pattern members.
Instead, the overall distance of the pattern will change. This is indicated by the closed lock icon.
 Circular patterns are anchored at the opposite end by default when you move one end.
With a pattern node selected in the Structure tree, you can:
 Change fill pattern parameters in the Layout section of the Properties panel. Changes that you
make automatically update the pattern in the design window.
 Right-click and select Lightweight Pattern to toggle a pattern component between a lightweight
pattern and regular pattern. When selected, a  check mark displays next to the Lightweight Pattern
command. This also works with sheet metal components with a Pattern node selected in the Structure
tree, right-click and select Make Lightweight.
 To update lightweight fill patterns to fit the existing geometry of your design, select the lightweight
pattern node, then right-click and select Update Pattern.
Patterns of sketch entities and 3D curves are no longer patterns when they change into another form,
such as a surface or solid. For example, if you pattern a C-shaped curve, then it will remain a pattern
when you switch from sketch mode to 3D mode. But if you close off the curve to make a box before
you switch to 3D mode, then the boxes will become surfaces and will no longer be a pattern.
To create a one- or two-dimension linear pattern
1. Click the Linear tool in the Insert group on the Design tab.
2. Select a protrusion, depression, body, sketch, points, axes, planes, origins, or 3D curves to be the
first member (leader) of the pattern. The Direction tool guide activates.
3. Select a line, edge, axis, or a set of points to set the direction of the pattern.
4. (Optional) Modify the Pattern options in the Options panel.
Pattern Type: One-dimensional or Two-dimensional.
Change X Count, or X Pitch values for One-dimensional
Change X, Y Count, or X, Y Pitch values for Two-dimensional
As you switch between pattern types, or change pattern values, the pattern preview displays your
changes in blue.
5. Select the Create Pattern tool guide, or press Enter, to complete the pattern.
The image below shows the preview for a two-dimensional pattern. For one-dimensional, only the X-
direction is displayed. Clicking the arrows flips their direction 180-degrees.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
For through-all cuts, the preview is on the plane closest to the direction reference. For blind cuts, the
preview is on the face of the selected pattern leader.
You can also create one-dimensional linear patterns on cylindrical faces as long as the pattern direction is
either the cylinders axis or parallel to the axis.
To create a pattern of a pattern
Follow the steps for the linear pattern, but select a member of a linear pattern as the first member of the
pattern.
To create a circular pattern
1. Click the Circular tool in the Insert group on the Design tab.
Change Circular Count, or Angle values for One-dimensional.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Change Circular Count, Angle, Linear Count, or Linear Pitch values for Two-dimensional.
Note that a Circular Count of one will create a single radial pattern.
changes in blue.
The image below shows the preview for a two-dimensional pattern. For one-dimensional, only the
Angular direction is displayed. Clicking the arrows flips their direction 180-degrees.
You can create circular patterns on cylindrical faces, both around the face and along the axis.
To create a fill pattern
1. Click the Fill tool in the Insert group on the Design tab.
2. Select a protrusion, depression, sketch, points, axes, planes, origins, or 3D curves to be the first
member (leader) of the pattern. The Direction tool guide activates..
4. Modify the options in the Options panel
Pattern Type: Grid or Offset
Modify the X Spacing or Y Spacing
Modify the Margin values. A dashed orange boundary line displays the pattern's marginal
boundary.
changes in blue.
To create a radial circular pattern
1. Select all radial pattern members.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Re-anchor the Move tool on the circular axis.

4. Select the Create patterns check box in the Options panel.
5. Drag the radial pattern to form a circular pattern.
To create a pattern of points along an edge
1. Select a point to be the first member of the pattern.

3. Select the Create patterns check box in the Options panel.
4. Click the Move Along Trajectory tool guide.
5. Click one of the edges connected to the vertex.
6. Click the Move handle axis.
7. Drag to create the end pattern member and create the pattern.
8. Press Tab to change the count, length, and percent fields to edit the pattern of points.
All points are associated with the edge, so that when the edge changes, the points also change as
shown in the example below.
To edit a pattern's properties
1. Select one pattern member to display the pattern count and dimensions.
2. Edit the pattern's properties.
Press Tab to switch between the fields.
Click the lock icon to lock or unlock a value.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Press Enter.
The result of editing the count and spacing is relative to the member of the pattern you select.
To quickly increase or decrease the number of pattern members, press Tab until the count field is
highlighted, then hold the Alt key while you press the up or down arrow.
To move a pattern

2. Select a pattern member to move a linear pattern or the pattern axis to move a circular or arc
pattern.
3. Move the pattern member with the Move handle.
If you move an interior member of a pattern and it is not anchored, all the pattern members
move:
If you move a member at one end of a pattern, the member at the opposite end is anchored and
the pattern is skewed:
If you anchor a different member than the member opposite the direction you are moving, Move
skews the pattern.
If you have a linear pattern in a radial direction and you move an interior member without setting
an anchor, then the entire pattern shifts in the selected direction
Use the Up To tool to move a pattern member up to another face or edge. Pattern dimensions (such as
Count and Length) display as expected.
To move a radial pattern in a linear direction

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Right-click a pattern member and click Select > All Pattern Members.
3. Select the Direction tool guide.
4. Click an object to set the direction of the move.
5. Drag the pattern.
To adjust pattern distance or spacing
1. Click Select or Move in the Edit group on the Design tab.

2. Select a pattern member.
This member will serve as the anchor, and other pattern members will move relative to this
member.
3. Press Tab until the field you want to change is highlighted:

Distance: This field is the overall distance of the pattern. The pattern member you select is
anchored, and the length will change relative to this member. The arrows indicate the direction
of change. You can see this field at the top of the image below.
 Spacing: This field is the spacing between pattern members. This field has arrows in both
directions and is located between two pattern members. The field is highlighted in blue in the
image below.
 Radial patterns: If you select a member of a radial pattern, you can change the angle between
pattern members and the distance from the pattern members to the center of the pattern.
4. Type a new distance or angle and press Enter.
The spacing between all pattern members will change.
To remove a pattern member from the pattern
Right-click the face of the pattern member and select Unpattern Member. Doing this makes the member
independent, so changes to the feature won't propagate to the pattern.
To create a pattern group
1. Select a pattern or pattern member in the Design window.

2. Click the Groups tab in the Structure panel.
3. Click Create Group.
A group is created that displays the number of members in the pattern. You can click on this
group to select the pattern and change its parameters in the Design window.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To assemble components on a pattern
You can assemble a component with a pattern member, then propagate the component to all of the
pattern members. The component will be copied and assembled to each pattern member.
1. Assemble a component to some geometry that is a pattern member using the Align, Tangent, or
Orient tools.
2. Right-click the Assembly Condition in the Structure Tree and select Update Components on
Pattern.
The components will be propagated to the pattern, as shown below.
To create a pattern along a trajectory
1. Click Move tool.

2. Select the object you want to pattern.
3. Click the Move Along Trajectory tool guide and select the curve to use as a trajectory.
You can also hold Alt and double-click the curve.
4. Check Create Patterns in the Move options.

5. Pull the trajectory arrow.
6. Release the mouse button to display pattern dimensioning options, then enter values by tabbing
through the options.
7. (Optional) Check Maintain Orientation in the Move options to keep the patterned objects in the
same orientation as the original object.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pattern along a trajectory without maintaining orientation
Pattern along a trajectory with orientation maintained.
Examples
Rectangular pattern
Changing spacing between pattern members changes the pattern's overall length when the length field
isn't locked.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
A pattern of sketch objects is no longer a pattern when you switch to 3D mode and the sketched objects
are converted to surfaces.
Sketch curve patterns can propagate in two dimensions. The pattern above contains three squares in the
X direction and two squares in the Y direction.
Exploding an assembly
1. Select all the components in the Structure tree that are part of the assembly you want to explode.
2. Anchor the Move handle on one component.
3. Select the Fulcrum tool guide and click another component.
4. Select an axis on the Move handle and drag to explode the assembly in that direction.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pivoting and pulling a solid
You can use the Move tool to pivot or pull a solid.
To pull a solid

2. Select the face you want to move.
3. Use the Move handle to move the face.
The solid is extended in the direction of the move
To pivot a solid
1. Select an edge loop on the solid that you want to pivot.

2. Click a linear axis of the Move handle.
3. (Optional) Click the Fulcrum tool guide and click an alternate plane to pivot around.
4. Drag to pivot the solid around a plane drawn through a point opposite the selected edge loop or
to pivot the solid around the plane you selected with the Fulcrum tool guide.
If the Move tool cannot maintain a planar or cylindrical face while pivoting, it will create a blended
face.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Moving with the Select tool
You can move solids and surfaces with the Select tool.
To move a solid or surface
You can do any of the following:
 Select a vertex of a solid or surface, then drag it to move the solid or surface. (Surfaces on the same
plane are treated as a single surface and move together.)
 Alt+click a point, then drag the vertex to rotate in the plane of the screen.
 Alt+click an edge or two points, then drag the vertex to rotate the object around the axis defined by
the line or points.
 You can place the dragged vertex on a plane or edge by dragging until the plane or edge is
highlighted.
You cannot drag unfolded sheet metal parts in the Unfolded window by dragging their vertices with the
Select tool.
Examples
The blue edge was selected using the Alt key, then the green vertex was dragged in the direction of the
arrow. The part pivots around the blue edge.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The vertex highlighted in green was dragged down until the face shown on the right was highlighted. The
triangular part moves down so the vertex is in the same plane as the face.
Moving with the Fulcrum tool guide
The Fulcrum tool guide moves objects around a point, edge, or face. You can use this tool guide to pivot
patterns or faces, and to create a simple exploded assembly.
To move objects with the Fulcrum tool guide

2. Select the point(s), edge(s), or face(s) you want to move. You can select surfaces, solids, or
components in the Structure tree.
This object will be highlighted a shade darker than its normal color. Selected components will be
highlighted with a red bounding box.
3. Click the Fulcrum tool guide on the right side of the Design window.
4. Select the point, edge, or face you want to use as the fulcrum. You can select surfaces, solids, or
This object will be highlighted in blue.
5. Drag an arrow or radius on the Move handle to move the object(s).
Examples
In the examples below, the object was dragged in the direction indicated by the red arrow.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Moving an edge using another edge as the fulcrum point
Moving a pattern with one pattern member as the fulcrum point. You must select all the faces on the
pattern member that you move.
Moving components with a face of one component as the fulcrum point. Select the components in the
Structure tree.
Moving protrusions and depressions
You can move protrusions and depressions with the Select tool or the Move tool.
To move a protrusion or depression
1. Select a protrusion or depression.

2. Drag the protrusion or depression.
If two faces connect at an angle greater than 90 degrees, you can drag the protrusion across the
two faces, as shown in the image below.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Using Measure to drive move
Measurements can be made, and the results used, while in the Move tool.
To use measurements from within the Move tool:
1. Enter the Move tool.

2. Place the Move tool on a face, edge or vertex.
3. Click one of the Move tool handles to establish a direction.
objects.
measurement.
model.
5. At any time, clicking on the group in the Group tree will open the Move tool and put the
measurement value in edit mode. Simply enter a new value and complete the move.
to produce a desired area. For example, create a Measurement group for the area of a side of a box. While
moving the front of the box, you can enter a new area value for the side to complete the move.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Alternative work flow:
1. Enter the Move tool

2. Place the Move tool on a face, edge or vertex
objects
4. Click in the Measurement results (hover over measurements to display purple box).
5. Select on a direction arrow to display the single measurement. Once selected, that single
measurement will display on screen with arrows pointing to either object chosen for
measurement.
model.
5. At any time, clicking on the group in the Group tree will open the Move tool and put the
measurement value in edit mode. Simply enter a new value and complete the move.
to produce a desired area. For example, create a Measurement group for the area of a side of a box. While
moving the front of the box, you can enter a new area value for the side to complete the move.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Other examples:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Fill
Use the Fill tool to fill in the selected region with the surrounding surface or solid. Fill can "heal" many
cuts made into geometry, such as chamfers and rounds, subtractive revolves, protrusions, depressions,
and regions removed by removing regions in the Combine tool. When using Fill to fill a gusset, the bend
geometry on which the gusset is defined remains intact.
The Fill tool can also be used to simplify surface edges and cap surfaces to form solids. You can select a
combination of faces and edges to replace them with a single new face.
You can use the Fill tool in Sketch mode to fill a loop of sketch curves that is almost closed, but that has
multiple small gaps. If the gaps are too large, multiple error messages appear to show you where the gaps
are. You can also use it to concatenate multiple sketched curves.
You can also use the Fill tool when editing a layout. Fill functionality is useful when you sketch faces
across section lines, but do not want the section lines to split the surfaces when you switch to 3D.
When you change the geometry of a model, for example, the model’s length, height, or width, the
model’s fill pattern will automatically update to correctly re-fill to the model’s new geometry.
Using the Fill tool
Click on one of the links below for detailed information about working with the Fill tool:
Sketch and layout curves
If you select one or more end points of sketch curves, the curves are concatenated into a single spline.
Neighboring sketch curves are merged into one selectable item with an underlying spline. The spline is
not displayed until the concatenated curve is modified:
Let's look at the following sketch curves:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
One of the rectangles isn't closed. If we fill this rectangle, the loop is automatically closed and it becomes
a surface:
The gap in this loop is small enough for the Fill tool to automatically close. Larger gaps will not be closed.
If a gap is less than 1.5 times the length of the minor grid spacing on the sketch grid, the edges are
extended to close the gap. If the gap is larger, a message appears in the status bar and the gap's
endpoints flash.
The Fill tool also created surfaces from the other closed loops of sketch curves. The darker shaded areas in
the image above show where the surface parts overlap. If we move the rectangle, we can see the surface
that was created automatically:
The result only has edges for the sketch curves that we did not select, because the selected curves were
used to create a separate surface.
Now let's go back and close the open rectangle, and let the Fill tool automatically create surfaces without
selecting any edges:
This surface has edges for every closed sketch curve. The same thing automatically happens if we go from
sketch mode to 3D mode.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If we select all the sketch curves, then click Fill, we get a surface without any interior edges:
You can also fill layout and sketch loops:
And a loop of non-tangent 3D curves:
Vertices
You can select any number of edge points in any order. Each edge point is removed and a spline is
created to make a smooth curvature change between the neighboring edges to the point:
If you Fill a vertex on a solid, the system attempts to merge coincident edges into a single edge:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Edges on surfaces
If you select one surface edge in the shape of a spline or arc, the edge is simplified into a straight line:
If you select two or more edges of a surface, the edges are simplified with a straight edge between the
end points:
If you select an edge that is completely within a surface, the edge is removed:
If you select all the edges that enclose a surface, the surface is simplified into a rectangle based on its
extents:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you select a single edge that lies on an analytic surface, Fill will simplify it with the neighboring edges:
You can fill irregular gaps on a circular surface, and the gap is simplified into a straight edge. Use Fill again
on the straight edge, and the edge becomes round:
Chamfers on surfaces
Select a chamfer on a surface and then use the Fill tool to fill the chamfer.
Edges on more than one face
If you select a chain of open, planar surface edges, Fill creates faces based on the edges you select:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
or
If you select an open edge loop that belongs to multiple faces, Fill attempts to cap it with an analytic
surface (cylinder, cone, etc.):
If you select a series of planar edges, you will get a planar face:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you select a series of surface edges that are not planar, Fill extends neighboring faces if the Patch Blend
option is off:
If the Patch Blend option is turned on,
If you select an edge loop and Alt+click to select neighboring faces, the new face will be tangent to any
faces you used Alt+click to select:
You can also extend neighboring faces to fill sliver gaps (double click to get loop):
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you select open edges of a self-intersecting surface, Fill tries to form a solid and remove excess (also
works in combine):
If you select an edge loop and use the Patch blend and Tangent extension options:
When you fill a loop of edges, you can use Alt and select curves and the new face(s) will pass through the
curves:
If you select an edge loop and guide curves, with or without the Tangent extension option (which applies
to areas not influenced by guide curves):
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you select an imprinted edge on the face of a surface or solid, the imprinted edge is removed. This
works the same as delete:
If you select laminar edge(s) of a solid or surface, Fill simplifies the edges by replacing them with a single
edge with the same geometry:
Solids
If you select faces, Fill deletes them and extends neighboring faces:
If you select a chamfer or round, Fill removes them and adds them to a named group:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you select rounds with neighboring rounds, Fill creates planar caps (because rounds should not be
extended by definition):
If you select rounds on shelled parts, both faces of the shell are filled:
If you select joint edges created in Sheet Metal, the joints are removed:
If you select two imprinted edges, as shown below, they are combined into one edge:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Faces and edges or sketch curves
With at least one face selected and at least one edge or sketch curve selected, Fill will remove the selected
faces and create a single new face using the removed faces and the selected edges as inputs:
If you select two faces or surfaces that don't touch, you can replace them with a single face. You must
double-click to select the gap between the faces:
Any combination of sketch curves, layout curves, surface edges, and solid edges
When you select any combination of sketch curves, layout curves, surface edges, and solid edges that lie
in the same plane and form a closed loop, Fill creates a planar surface:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To fill a region
1. Select the edges that define a surface region, or the faces that define a region within or on a solid.
You can select an object in the Structure tree to simplify it.
You can select faces and the Fill tool will automatically create a patch if you also select at least
one edge.
2. Click the Fill tool or press F.
To fill sketch or layout lines
1. Select a closed or almost closed loop of sketch lines.
If a gap is 1.5 times the length of the minor grid spacing on the sketch grid or less, the edges are
extended to close the gap. If the gap is larger, a message appears in the status bar and the gap's
endpoints flash.
The mode is switched to 3D mode, and the filled loop becomes a surface.
You can select the face of a solid when only the edge is displayed (such as in a drawing sheet
view) using the scroll wheel. The edge becomes a slightly thicker line when the face is highlighted.
If you fill lines in a layout, you can then pull the surface into 3D from the layout, but remain in edit
layout mode after this action.
You can fill lines and edges whether or not the sketched lines you want to fill were sketched in the
same plane as the edges. (If the lines are imprinted on a face and become edges, filling those
edges deletes them.)
Click the Fill tool in Sketch mode to fill any closed or almost closed loops and switch to 3D mode.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Tool guides
Within the Fill tool, there are several tool guides that let you specify the behavior of the Fill tool:
The Select tool guide is active by default. When this tool guide is active, you can select edges and
faces to be filled. You can click an edge loop or use box-select to select multiple objects.
The Select Guide Curves tool guide allows you to select a guide curve.
The Complete tool guide generates the filled face.
Options
 Patch blend: Select this option to use the initial tangency of the neighboring faces to fill the selected
edges with a patch blend. This option blends all the faces into a smooth, single-face patch, instead of
extending the faces that "own" the edge until they intersect. Alt+click the points that you want to
blend through. This option is automatically selected when you hold the Alt key or use the Select Guide
Curves tool guide to select a reference curve.
The tangency of neighboring faces is ignored unless you hold Alt or click the Select Guide Curves tool
guide and select them.
 Show deviation: Shows a deviation analysis of the surface or face you created with the Patch blend
option. The new face is temporarily colored to indicate the distance from points on its surface to the
faces it was created from. Use the Color and Scale controls to change how the analysis is displayed.
Examples
Simplifying edges
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Simplifying edges across multiple faces
Filling with straight and curved edges
Filling with curved edges as guides
Capping a surface
Capping a surface that crosses multiple edges
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Selecting internal edges to keep Selecting lines to simplify a

them after filling. surface by filling. Internal edges
are removed.
Filling edges to form a solid
Patch blend with and without tangent extension. The Tangent extension option is select on the left, and
not selected on the right.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Removing rounds
You can use the Fill tool from the Edit group on the Design tab to remove and cap round faces. You
might want to do this if you are trying to move a protrusion surrounded by round faces and it cannot be
moved because the rounds create complex or difficult geometry. The Fill tool attempts to remove the
rounds of the faces you select, and extend the faces that are not selected. With the Fill too, you can
double-click a rounds chain to remove a long continuous chain of rounds.
Before you begin:
 You will have a greater chance of success if you remove only a few rounds at a time. If you spend
a lot of time removing rounds, you may want to review SpaceClaim's tutorials or technical support
information, online at SpaceClaim.com, for advanced techniques you can use when removing
rounds.
 Closely inspect your model from various angles and zoom levels, so you can best determine the
areas of rounds you want to remove. Each area of a model is unique, and different areas may
require different approaches to round removal.
 To ensure accurate and complete round removal, remove the rounds in the reverse order in which
they were created, as shown in the example below of a model with colored rounds:
To fill a round or chamfer
1. Click the Select tool guide.

2. Select the round or chamfer.
3. Click the Fill tool or press F to fill the round and create caps if necessary.
A Round Group is created in the Groups panel each time you fill a round.
You can fill any round created in SpaceClaim, even a round that removes the underlying face, until
the round is changed by some other action.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To remove a round face
1. Select the round face.
If removing a face makes an invalid solid, the solid is converted to a surface.
If a round face is difficult to remove, try Alt+clicking it with the Fill tool, or using the Replace tool.
Capping multiple round faces
When multiple selected round faces are removed by the Fill tool, they are removed in a specific order so
that they can be restored by right-clicking and selecting Reattach Rounds for each group, in reverse
order.
Usually you can select all the round faces and click the Fill tool to remove and cap them all. However,
sometimes this is not possible. In that case, select one round and fill it. If that works, undo and select that
round and the next. Undo. Continue adding rounds to your selection and trying to fill them until the fill
fails. Now you have identified one of the rounds that is causing the problem. Next, fill all the rounds that
filled successfully. Finally, repeat this process in the other direction of the round tangent chain. Once you
have filled all the rounds except for the one or two causing the problem, select the one causing the
problem and its two neighbors. Then click Fill. This process allows more options for the extension of
neighboring edges to intersect and cap the round.
If you are experiencing difficulty filling a chain of round faces, first split the round faces, then fill the newly
created faces, then fill the remaining round faces.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
A difficult-to-remove round replaced before removing
Filling a corner round that was created as a surface-surface round in an imported design
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
About to fill imported geometry bounded by surface rounds
Filling a rounded edge chain - the original chain to be filled, chain after splitting round faces, and filled
chain
If a round cannot be removed, a "stop face" is added and round removal is discontinued (A stop face is a
cap or vent face.)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can fill a chain of round faces when only one end of the round chain has a stop face.
Using other tools to remove rounds
Replace tool
As an option, when removing rounds, you can also use the Replace tool from the Edit group on the
Design tab, to replace one face with another. You can replace multiple faces with a single face, replace a
single face with multiple faces, or replace multiple faces with multiple other faces.
Full round replaced with a face
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Progression using a face to remove a round
Sphere tool
 Try using the Sphere tool from the Insert group on the Design tab. Using this tool, you can create a
round sphere and place it at difficult geometry junctions. Once in place you can use the sphere to split
the junction in order to remove the round. In some cases, you may want to create a chain of two or
more spheres to help with removing larger or more complex rounds areas.
 To avoid trouble with removing spheres, it's good practice to fill the sphere immediately after you
remove the rounds on either side of a sphere or sphere chain.
Using the Sphere tool to split and partially remove a round
Replacing faces
Use the Replace tool in the Edit ribbon group on the Design tab to replace one face with another.
You can replace multiple faces with a single face, replace a single face with multiple faces, or replace
multiple faces with multiple other faces.
The Replace tool also lets you manually simplify or align complex faces and curves into planes, cones, and
cylinders. (If you want to automate this process, use the Simplify tool in the Adjust group on the Repair
tab to automatically find problem areas.)
To replace a face
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Click the Replace tool in the Edit ribbon group on the Design tab.
2. Select the face you want to replace (that is, the target).
3. Select the face, surface, or plane you want to use to replace the target face (that is, the source).
You can select sources in the Design window or in the Structure tree.
Do it faster
1. Click the target face and Alt+click the source face, surface, or plane with the Select tool.
2. Click the Replace tool to replace the target face with the source face.
To replace multiple targets

1. Click the Replace tool.
2. Click the Target tool guide to make it sticky, then click each target face.
You can also use any multiple-face selection method.
3. Select the source face, surface, or plane.
You can select a source in the Design window or in the Structure tree.
To replace a target with multiple sources

2. Select the target face.
3. Click the Source tool guide to make it sticky, then click each source face, surface, or plane.
You can select sources in the Design window or in the Structure tree and can also use any
multiple-face selection method.
4. Click the Complete tool guide or press Enter to replace the target.
To replace multiple targets with multiple sources

2. Click the Target tool guide, then click each target face.
3. Click the Source tool guide twice to make it sticky, then click each source face, surface, or plane.
You can select sources in the Design window or in the Structure tree and can also use any
multiple-face selection method.
4. Click the Complete tool guide or press Enter to replace the targets.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Replacing a target split face with

a source surface
Replacing multiple target faces

(the protrusion) with a single
source face (the surface)
Replacing multiple target faces

(in the depression) with multiple
source faces (on the surface)
To align or simplify faces

2. Click the Target tool guide, then click each face that you want to align or simplify.
If the selected faces are candidates for alignment or simplification, they are highlighted in red.
Faces can be aligned or simplified by the Replace tool if they are within SpaceClaim’s alignment
or simplification tolerance of ±0.0001m.
3. Click the Complete tool guide or press the Enter key to align or simplify the highlighted faces.
To simplify curves
2. Ctrl+click each curve that you want to simplify.
If the selected curves are candidates for alignment or simplification, they are highlighted in red.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Click the Complete tool guide or press the Enter key to align or simplify the highlighted curves.
Examples
Almost-planar faces
highlighted for alignment
Faces highlighted for

simplification
Tool guides
Select target faces using the Sticky tool guide Target tool guide.
Select source faces, surfaces, or planes using the sticky Source tool guide.
Click the Complete tool guide to replace the target face with the source face, or to simplify or align
the target face.
Tweaking a face
You can edit any face or surface with Tweak Face to change its surface geometry. This tool is available in
3D mode and in drawings.
The degree (or complexity) of a primitive face is automatically increased when you edit it with the Tweak
Faces tool. This makes the editing process smooth and seamless, so curves are smooth when you add
them.
Surfaces are checked for self-intersection when you modify the surface using its control points. You will
receive an error message if a change would create a self-intersecting surface.
If you save a selection in the Selection panel and it includes control points, the Face Edit tab will
automatically open when you load that selection.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To tweak a face
1. Click Tweak Face in the Edit group on the Design tab.
The Face Edit tab appears in the ribbon bar.
2. Select an editing method:

 Control Points to expose the control points for the face or surface so you can move them.
 Control Curves to expose the control curves for the face or surface so you can move them.
 Blend Curves to edit faces or surfaces that can be recreated as a blend.
 Sweep Curves to edit faces or surfaces created with sweep.
3. Select a control point or curve on the face.
Hold Ctrl or draw a box to select multiple points or curves.
4. (Optional) Use the controls in the Select group to expand or contract your selection:
The U direction is indicated by blue lines in the Design window, and the V direction is indicated by
red lines.
Click
 or to expand the selection so it includes all points in the U (blue) or V (red)
direction.
 Click or to expand the selection so it includes the next point in the U (blue) or V (red)
direction.
 Click or to reduce the selection by one point in the U (blue) or V (red) direction.
5. Select a tool to edit the face or surface:
 Add Control Curve
 Move
 Scale
 Or any other tool on the Design tab.
6. (Optional) Select Tweak face display options.
7. Click Close Surface Tools to close the tab and end your editing session.
To modify a control curve by creating a group
You can modify a control curve by creating a group. The group you create will display a ruler dimension
that you can edit to modify your curve.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Tweak face editing methods
You can think of the editing methods as modes. Different controls are displayed for each method, and
these controls allow you to adjust the face or surface differently.
You can choose from the following methods:
Control points
Use this method when you want to change a face by moving its control points.
Control curves
Use this method when you want to change a face by changing its control curves.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Blend curves
Use this method when you want to change a face by changing its blend curves.
Sweep curves
Use this method when you are editing a face or surface created by sweeping and you want to change a
face by changing its sweep curves. The sweep curves are shown in blue and the surface that was swept is
shown in red. You can use these curves to make new sweep faces, and then manually swap out the new
faces for the old, but they can't be used to change the original swept solid.
Add a control curve
You can add control curves to a face or surface when any editing method is active.
To add a control curve
1. Click Add Control Curve in the Edit group on the Face Edit tab.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Tweak Face tool must be active for this tab to be visible.
2. Click the point on the face or surface where you want to add the control curve.
You can use temporary geometry to help you find the point where you want to add a control
curve.
Tweak face display options
These display modes can help you see the contours of a face or surface.
 Grid displays a grid on your face or surface. This is similar to the Grid tool on the Measure tab.
 Curvature displays a gradient on your face or surface. The curvature with the largest radius is shown in
the maximum color. The curvature with the smallest radius, or no radius, is shown in the minimum
color. This is similar to the Curvature tool on the Measure tab.
 Porcupine displays a fringe graph on your face or surface. This display shows you the tangency of your
surface at multiple points.
 Show Off-Face Control Points displays all control points. If this option is not selected, you won't see
control points that don't affect the surface.
 Show Periodic Seams displays the beginning seam of the surface when you are editing periodic faces
(cylinders, cones, and other revolved surfaces). This may help you see of the characteristics or behavior
of some periodic faces as you edit.
To show a grid on your face or surface
1. Select Grid in the Show section on the Face Edit tab.

2. (Optional) Change the Color and Scale of the grid.
To show curvature on your face or surface
1. Select Curvature in the Show section on the Face Edit tab.

2. (Optional) Change the shading colors under Curvature in the ribbon group.
The maximum color is on the left and the minimum color is on the right.
To show a fringe graph on your face or surface
1. Select Porcupine in the Show section on the Face Edit tab.

2. (Optional) Adjust the Density to change the number of fringes displayed along the curve.
3. (Optional) Adjust the Scale to change the length of the fringes relative to the amount of
curvature.
Inserting
The Insert tools allow you to insert components, images, planes, axes, origins, cylinders, and spheres, and
create relationships between the solids and surfaces in your design.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Insert ribbon group
The Insert ribbon group contains the following tools:
Use the File tool to insert a component or an image into your design.
Use the Plane tool to insert a plane into your design.
Use the Axis tool to insert an axis into your design.
Use the Origin tool to insert an axis into your design at the location of the Move handle.
Use the Cylinder tool to quickly create a cylinder.
Use the Sphere tool to quickly create a sphere.
Use the Linear pattern tool to create a linear pattern.
Use the Circular pattern tool to create a circular pattern.
Use the Fill pattern tool to create a fill pattern.
Use the Shell tool to convert a solid to a shell.
Use the Offset tool to create an offset relationship between faces in your design.
Use the Mirror tool to designate a face or plane as a mirror.
Inserting another design
You can insert another design created in SpaceClaim or another application as a component of your
design. The design is inserted as an external component, linked to the external file. You can make this
component internal to your own design. Lightweight components are displayed with solid edges and
transparent faces until you right-click the component and select Load component from the context
menu.
You can also insert an image file or a video file.
To insert another design as a component
Drag and drop a file from outside SpaceClaim into the Design window, or follow the steps below.
1. Click File in the Insert group on the Design tab.

2. Navigate to and select the design you want to include as a component, then click Open on the
Open Design window. You can select more than one SpaceClaim document, and they will be
inserted as components.
You can select from the Files of type drop-down menu to filter the files list.
Progress is displayed on the status bar until the design is inserted as an external component. You
can insert multiple copies of the same component. Modifying one of these components will
modify every copy unless you make them internal to your design.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If the design consists of multiple files and some files can't be found, you will get the Missing Files
dialog which allows you to browse to locate these files.
To replace one component with another
1. Right-click the component in the Structure tree.

2. Hover over the Source option then select Replace Component from the context menu.
3. Navigate to and select the design you want to use as a replacement.
4. The component is replaced.
Make an external component internal to your design
1. Right-click the external component in the Structure tree.

2. Hover over the Source option then select Use Internal Copy from the context menu.
If your design includes multiple copies of an external component, making one of them internal
does not affect the other copies. Making another copy of the same external component internal
creates a second instance of the same internal component.
Downloading TraceParts
SpaceClaim connects you directly to the TraceParts Web, where you can choose from millions of modeled
parts. This service is free of charge with a valid SpaceClaim license.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To download a part from the TraceParts Web
1. Select TraceParts Web from the File tool in the Insert group on the Design tab.
2. Select a part from the categories on the left side of the web page.
A technical drawing is displayed along with a description, PDF documentation, and available part
sizes.
3. Select the part you want to download, then choose a CAD format (2D AutoCAD, 3D Acis 6.3, or
3D SpaceClaim) and click Add to Caddy.
TraceParts directs you to a page with your caddy displayed at the top of the page.
4. (Optional) Select "version for CAD direct export" or 2009+.

5. When the part becomes available in the caddy, click Download.
6. Choose an option for opening or saving the zip file and click OK.
The zip file downloads to your machine. Unzip the file to extract an scdoc and a text file of the
part. You can then open the part in SpaceClaim.
Inserting an image
You can insert an image into your design or onto a drawing sheet. Inserted images and their transparency
colors, aspect ratio, and placement information are saved with the design.
After you insert an image, you can select the image to display control handles for image editing. The
control handles highlight when moused over and selected. If Show cursor arrows is selected in
SpaceClaim Popular Options, arrows also appear next to your cursor that indicate the directions in which
you can move your mouse to manipulate the image.
When placing the image, all the normal orientation shortcuts work, as well as Ctrl+Alt dragging the
middle mouse button to scale/zoom the image itself. This keyboard shortcut provides an way to quickly
scale the image to the size of the face.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
When you insert an image with the File tool and wrap it onto a face with the Place Wrapped Image tool
guide:
 You can select Location, Size or Location and Size from the Lock property to prevent changes to the
size and location of an image wrapped to a face.
 You can select both inserted and wrapped images.
 Once you select a wrapped image, you can drag it around the face it is wrapped onto, resize it, and
rotate it with the image control handles.
 Multiple images can be wrapped onto the same face or surface.
 Images wrapped onto a face or surface move with the face or surface.
To insert an image
1. Select File from the Insert ribbon group.

2. Select the BMP, GIF, JPG, PNG, or TIF image file you want to insert and click Open.
You can select Image files from the Files of type drop-down menu to filter the files list.
3. (Optional) Zoom the image in or out by Ctrl+Alt+dragging with the middle mouse button.
4. Mouse over the design to align the image with the highlighted object.
To place an image on a curved face, select the Place Wrapped Image tool guide if you want the
image to flow over the curved face. Otherwise, the image will be placed tangent to the curved
face. You may also use this tool guide to place a wrapped image on a planar face. The edges of
the image are clipped to accommodate the size and shape of the planar face.
5. Click on the face that defines the plane on which you want to insert the image. You can place an
image on a datum plane.
The image appears in the Structure tree. The image’s name is based on the file name from which
the image was created. Removing or altering the image in SpaceClaim does not affect the original
file.
To resize an image
Select the image and drag the blue control handles.
Hold the Shift key to maintain the aspect ratio while resizing. Hold the Alt key to scale the image around
the center handle.
You can right-click the image and select Properties to lock the aspect ratio in the Keep aspect ratio
property in the Properties panel.
To rotate an image
Drag the green control handle at the top of the image to rotate the image.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can also drag the red control handle which is not connected to the image edge to change the center
of rotation.
To rotate a wrapped image
With a planar image, there is a green rotation control handle located outside the top of the image. This
does not exist with a wrapped image.
Hover over one of the blue control handles at the edges of the image and query select to change it to a
green control handle. You can then select the green control handle and rotate the image about the red
control handle.
To flip an image
Drag handle across the other side of the image to flip the image.
To move a planar image with the Move tool

2. Select the image.
You can Ctrl+click to select the image along with other objects.
3. Use the Move handle to move the line or point.
To move a planar or wrapped image with the Select tool
1. Click the Select tool.

You can Ctrl+click to select the image along with other objects or to select multiple images.
3. Use the mouse to drag to move the image(s).
To replace an image
1. Right-click the image.

2. Select Replace image.
To copy an image

2. Press Ctrl and drag the image to create a copy of the image.
To copy and paste an image, see Cutting, copying, and pasting.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To set the transparency of the image
Enter a value or move the slider in the Transparency property.
To set a color in the image to be transparent
1. Click in the Advanced property to display the Image Preview window.

2. Mouse over the pixels in the image to display their RGB values.
3. Click the eyedropper and select a pixel in the image that is the color you want to become
transparent.
You can use the zoom slider to resize the image and you can drag to pan the image within the
window.
The color you selected appears in the drop-down next to the eyedropper icon. You can add
multiple transparent colors by repeating this process, and remove colors by clicking Delete
Selected Color or Delete All Colors icons. The image window previews the image with the
transparency you selected.
To lock an image
Set the Lock property to Location, Size, or Location and Size.
The image cannot be edited while it is locked depending on the option set. Set Lock property to No to
unlock.
Tool guides
Place Planar Image positions the image on a plane or planar face.
Place Wrapped Image wraps an image onto a non-planar surface or face. Images are clipped to
accommodate the size and shape of the face the image is being placed on.
Inserting a video
You can insert WMV and AVI video files in your design. Videos can be inserted on curved or planar faces,
and can be played from within SpaceClaim.
Videos are added to the Structure tree. If you place a video on a face or surface, you will still see the video
if you hide the face or surface.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To insert a video

2. Select Video files for the file type.
3. Select the video file and click Open.
4. Position the video:
Select the Place Planar Image tool guide to put the video on a planar face or a plane.
Select the Place Wrapped Image tool guide to put the video on a curved face.
To resize or reposition a video
1. Click the Select tool or press the S key.

2. Select the video in the Design window or Structure tree.
3. Resize or reposition the video:
 Use the blue knobs to resize the video.
 Use the green knob to rotate the video.
 Drag the video to move it.
To copy and paste a video, see Cutting, copying, and pasting.
To play a video

2. Right-click the video in the Design window and select the playback options:
 Play to play the video once.
 Loop to play the video indefinitely.
3. When the video is playing, right-click and select Pause or Stop.
To change the transparency of a video

2. Select the video in the Design window or Structure tree.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Click Transparency in the Properties panel and move the slider or press - or + to decrease or
increase the transparency.
Tool guides
Place Planar Image positions the video on a plane.
Place Wrapped Image wraps an video onto a curved surface.
Inserting a plane
You can define a plane by selecting various faces, edges, axes, or lines in your design. You can select any
combination of coplanar axes, curves, edges, and coordinate axes.
The plane will extend a small amount beyond the edges of the face to make it easier to work with. The
plane will maintain this margin around all the objects in your design, extending and trimming itself as you
add, remove, or move solids within your design.
Planes are useful for creating layouts and annotations. Planes are not linked to the geometry used to
create them; they must be explicitly selected to move along with other items. You can also use a plane to
quickly clip your design to show only the geometry behind the plane.
To insert a plane
1. Click Plane in the Insert group on the Design tab.

2. Select one of the following:
Select a: To insert a plane:

Planar face That contains the face
Planar face and point Through the point and parallel to the face
Planar face and edge Through the edge and perpendicular to the face (useful when
creating a sweep path)
Two parallel planar faces At the midpoint between the two faces
Axial or cylindrical face Tangent to the face at the selection point
Two axial faces with parallel axes Tangent to both faces as close as possible to the selection points
Planar edges That contains the edges
Axis That contains the axis
Two axes That contains the axes
Two origin axes That contains the axes
Axis (or line) and one point That contains the axis (or line) and the point
End point of any line Through the end point and normal to the line at the end point
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Control point of a spline Through the selected point and perpendicular to the plane that
contains the spline
Three points That contains those three points
Line sketched on a plane Through the line and normal to the plane
Line and point on the line Through the line and the point
Two planar lines That contains those two lines
Two points Through the two points
Two points and a Plane or planar Through the two points and perpendicular to selected plane or
face planar face
3. (Optional) Click the Build Plane tool guide to select reference objects, then select a temporary
(dotted) plane to create the one that you want from the possible planes. See Inserting
temporary points, axes, and planes for detailed information about creating temporary planes.
4. An error message is displayed in the status bar if your selection does not define a plane.
To insert a plane tangent to a cylinder and parallel to a plane
Select a plane, Ctrl+click a cylinder, then click the Plane tool.
To insert a plane tangent to a cylinder and perpendicular to a plane
Select a cylinder, Ctrl+click a plane, then click the Plane tool.
To insert a plane through the mid-point between two points
1. Select the Plane tool.

2. In 3D mode or Section mode, Alt+Shift+click two points to create a temporary plane that includes
the midpoint.
3. Click the temporary plane.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To clip your design with a plane
Right-click a plane and select Clip with Plane. To restore the view of your design, right-click the plane
and select Clip with Plane again.
Planes, axes, and annotations are not clipped.
Examples
An edge and the axis of a coordinate object selected to create a plane.
To change the appearance of a plane
You can use the Fill, Outline, and Clipface options to change the appearance of a plane.
 Fill: Set to Automatic by default. Automatic causes geometry behind the plane to look lighter than
geometry outside the plane boundaries. If you change to No Fill, all geometry will have the same
opacity.
 Outline: Set to Automatic by default. Automatic you see the outline of the plane. If you change to No
Outline, the plane is invisible unless selected.
 Setting planes to No Fill and No Outline is useful when dimensioning parts. It is easier to see
annotations when planes are less visible.
 Clipface: Sets the Clipface color override for each clipping plane in the design window. It does not
change the color of the plane itself, just the color of the face the plane is touching.
Inserting an axis
You can extend any axis in your design to make it available for revolves or rotations. The axis will extend a
small amount beyond the edge of the space containing your design. It will maintain this margin extending
and trimming it as you add, remove, or move objects in your design. Axes are not linked to the geometry
used to create them (unless they are an extension of existing axes); they must be explicitly selected to
move along with other items.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To insert an axis
1. Click Axis in the Insert group on the Design tab.

Select: To insert an axis:

Axial face That contains the face's axis
Two, non-parallel planar At the intersection of the theoretical planes containing the two faces
faces
Linear edge That contains the edge
Cylinder and tangent plane At the intersection of the cylinder and plane
Line That contains the line
Origin axis Along the origin's axis
Circle or arc That contains the center point and is normal to the line
Point and a plane Through the point and normal (perpendicular) to the plane
Two points Through both points
Three axes At the point where a cylinder's axis would be positioned between the
three axes
3. (Optional) Click the Build Line tool guide to select reference objects, then select a temporary
(dotted) line to create the one that you want from the possible axes. See Inserting temporary
points, axes, and planes for detailed information about creating temporary lines.
To insert an axis through the mid-point between two points
1. Click in the Edit group on the Design tab.

2. Hold Alt+Shift and select two points to create two temporary axes that cross at the midpoint.
3. Click the temporary axis.
4. Click Axis in the Insert group on the Design tab.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Creating an axis by selecting the axes of three cylinders
Inserting an origin
You can insert an origin at any location in your design where you can anchor the Move tool. You can
anchor a ruler to an origin, and snap to origins while in Sketch mode. This allows you to dimension from
an origin and quickly move the sketch grid to an origin. You can also insert an origin at a solid's center of
mass or volume.
To insert an origin
1. Click Origin in the Insert group on the Design tab.
2. An origin is previewed attached to the cursor.
3. Move the cursor to position the origin. The origin will adjust its orientation based on the type
geometry it is on.
4. Click to place the origin.
To insert an origin using the Move tool

2. Position the Move handle where you want the origin to appear.
3. Select the Origin tool in the Insert ribbon group to insert an origin.
The origin appears in the Design window and in the Structure tree.
To insert an origin at the mid-point between two points
1. Select the Move tool.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Alt+Shift+click two points to create a temporary point at the mid-point.

3. Click the temporary point to place the Move handle there.
4. Select the Origin tool in the Insert ribbon group.
The origin appears at the midpoint.
To insert an origin at the center of mass or volume
1. Click Mass tool from the Analysis group on the Measure tab.
2. Select the solid at whose center you want to place the origin.
Axes appear at the center of mass or volume.
3. Select the Origin tool in the Insert ribbon group..
The origin appears at the center of mass or volume.
To place the sketch grid on an origin

1. Select the vertex of an origin.
2. Enter sketch mode.
The sketch grid is now located on the x and y axis of the selected origin.
To define the origin for a newly created component

1. Insert an origin.
2. Alt+click the origin.
3. Right-click a solid and select Move to New Component from the context menu.
You can also create a new component and then drag and drop the solid into that component
while the origin is Alt-selected.
4. Right-click the component in the Structure tree and select Open Component.
The component opens in a new design window.
5. Display the world origin.
The world origin in the new design window is positioned at the same location as the alt-selected
origin.
Example
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Alt+selecting an origin when creating a new component
The image on the left shows the World Origin and an origin created on the solid. The image on the right
is the component opened in a new design window with the world origin in the location it was placed on
the object.
Inserting a standard hole
The Standard Hole tool creates industry standard drilled and tapped holes. Select one of the available
standards (ISO, UNC, etc.) and then choose from available sizes and specify other hole
characteristics (Blind, Tapped, Countersink, Counterbore, Drill point details).
The current hole profile is displayed in the Preview group. It dynamically updates as you define the hole.
There is also a gallery of common hole profiles to choose from.
Hovering over the Preview shows the hole's definition, as it would appear in a Hole Table.
While choosing a placement location, a preview of the hole opening, including countersink and/or
counterbore, is attached to the cursor. This allows you to view the footprint of the hole as you locate it.
Standard hole creation overview
1. Click Standard Hole in the Insert group of the Design tab.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Hole Toolbar opens. Groups in the toolbar contain the options and inputs for hole definition.
2. Set options and enter values to define the hole. This can be done in any order, however, certain
combinations are not allowed. For example, Drill point is only enabled for blind holes.
3. Choose a tool guide for hole placement.
 Snap to Grid
Select a face on which to display the sketch grid. As you move the cursor, the hole center will
snap to the grid points.
 Free Placement
Pick anywhere on any face to locate the hole center.
4. Place the hole by clicking in the desired location. You can continue to place this type of hole at
more locations, or you can change values and options to place different types of holes. All holes
show in preview until you decide to complete them.
5. While the holes are previewed, you can:
 Ctrl+click a hole preview to remove it from the set of holes to be created.
 Press the Escape key to clear all previews without exiting the tool.
6. Complete the hole(s) by clicking Complete. All previewed holes will be completed. You can
also double-click when you place a hole to complete it.
7. Continue to make more holes or leave the Hole toolbar.
8. Click in the Close group to close the toolbar.
The following sections give more detail about Standard Holes.
Hole Type
Specifies the defining standard for the hole in terms of the following:
 Series
 Choose an industry standard (ISO, UNC, UNF, etc.) or customizable table (Drill chart).
 Size
 Your choices depend on which Series you select. Size is disabled when you use a Drill chart. If you
switch between series, the size for each is remembered. For example, if you create a UNC 1/4 - 20 hole
and then switch to ISO, the next time you select UNC, the size will still be 1/4 - 20.
 Fit
 Possible choices are: Close, Nominal, and Free. Fit is disabled for certain Series, the Drill chart, and
Tapped holes.
 Diameter
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Industry standard sizes determine the Diameter. You can still enter a value but it displays in bold font
to indicate it is non-standard. Drill chart diameters are determined by their Name in the table (see the
Drill chart section).
Preview
Preview shows the hole profile based on current selections and values. Shown below is a Blind, Tapped,
Countersunk, and Counterbored hole with Drill point details.
As you work with different inputs, Preview gives visual feedback. Below are examples of what you would
see when entering values for Diameter, Hole Depth, Countersink Angle, and Drill point Angle.
Preview also has a gallery of profiles to choose from. Click on the Preview image to open the gallery.
Selecting a profile automatically makes the necessary selections in the Hole toolbar to jump-start hole
definition.
Hole Treatment
Defines the hole depth and threads in terms of the following:
 Blind
 When checked, the hole has a specified depth. Otherwise, it is a through hole.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Hole depth
 Depth of a blind hole. Depending on the Bottom settings, it may include the drill point.
 Tapped
 Tapped holes have threads which changes how the diameter is specified. When Tapped is checked,
diameter displays tap drill size.
 Cosmetic
Threads can be shown cosmetically (no actual thread geometry). Note that only the most common
Standard Hole sizes have cosmetic display. Cosmetic threads appear in the Structure tree and can be
toggled on/off.
 Depth
 May be determined by Series and Size. If so, you can still enter a different value. The value you
enter will be displayed in bold font to indicate it is non-standard.
 Default thread depth is twice the basic hole diameter.
Hole Style
Defines the characteristics of the hole opening in terms of the following:
 Countersink and Counterbore

 Can be used in combination to create the following hole opening profiles.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 Diameter and Angle
 Define the countersink's shape. Together, Diameter and Angle determine countersink depth.
 Some Series specify both dimensions, some specify one, and others specify none. If they are specified,
you can still enter a different value. The value you enter will be displayed in bold font to indicate it is
non-standard.

 Diameter and Depth
Define the counterbore's shape.
Some Series specify both dimensions, some specify one, and others specify none. If they are specified,
you can still enter a different value. The value you enter will be displayed in bold font to indicate it is
non-standard
Hole Bottom
Defines bottom geometry for blind holes in terms of the following:
 Drill point and Angle
Adds drill point geometry with a user specified tip angle.
 Omits Drill point from hole depth.
 Includes Drill point in hole depth
Drill Chart
Drill chart is a Series that is customizable. It refers to a set of .xml files that contain hole definition tables.
Edit the files to customize the Standard Hole tool.
In the <SpaceClaim loadpoint>\Libraries\Holes\Drills directory, you will find the following files:
 Fraction.xml
 Letter.xml
 Metric.xml
 Number.xml
File names refer to how the hole name is specified. Below is an example from Letter.xml.
<Name>A</Name>
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
<Diameter>0.234</Diameter>
<ImperialDisplay>0.234</ImperialDisplay>
<MetricDisplay>5.94</MetricDisplay>
Modify the files according to this format to define custom holes.
To create a hole using Drill chart

1. Select Drill chart as the Series.
2. Enter a Diameter.
 Enter a letter, decimal value, fraction (1/64, 3/32, etc.), or number (#1, #2, etc.)
 Units are assumed but can be overridden. For example, if Units are metric, 5.94 is assumed to
be 5.94mm. Override the default by entering 0.234".
3. Diameter as entered is matched to the corresponding hole in the appropriate chart. Hover over
the Preview to see the callout information.
4. Place the hole on a face.
5. Click Complete, or double-click.
Hole Selection
SpaceClaim recognizes Standard Holes. Hovering over a hole face will pre-highlight the hole object.
Select individual hole faces using query select.
Deleting any Standard Hole face, or the face it was created on, breaks the Standard Hole association.
Individual faces are still selectable, but are not recognized as a Standard Hole.
To edit a Hole
1. Select the hole to modify.
You can also CTRL select, or box-select, several holes that share any of the same parameters.
2. Open the Standard Hole Edit tab.
The Edit tab is not available for multiple holes that share no parameters.
3. Edit the Hole definition.

4. You can continue to select and Edit more holes.
5. To close the Edit tab:
 Select a non-hole object
 Click white space in the Design window
 Enter selection for another tool
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Creating a cylinder
Use the Cylinder tool to sketch the cylinder's axis in 2D and create its diameter in 3D.
If you select a 3D curve or edge before you click the Cylinder tool, the cylinder is created as a swept pipe.
To draw a cylinder
1. Click Cylinder in the Insert group on the Design tab.

2. Click to set the first end point of the cylinder's axis.
3. Click to set the other end point.
4. Click in the Design window to set the diameter of the cylinder.
Click and drag to draw the axis, then click to set the diameter.

2. (Optional) If you want to dimension the first end point of the axis, press Shift and hover the
mouse over a line or point to create a dimension relative to that line or point.
3. Click or press Enter to set the first end point of the axis.
4. (Optional) Dimension the axis.
5. Click or press Enter to set the other end point of the axis.
By default, the axis is dimensioned to its first end point. You can also press Shift and hover the
mouse over another line or point to create a dimension relative to that line or point.
6. (Optional) Dimension the cylinder's diameter.

toolbar.
8. Click or press Enter to set the diameter of the cylinder.
To create a swept pipe
1. Select a 3D curve or edge.
If the curves or edges include angles, a spherical surface is added at the angle. If you use the Fill
tool on the spherical joints, the corners are converted to sharp corners. See the examples below.

3. Click in the Design window to set the diameter of the cylinder.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Options
The following options are available in the Cylinder tool.
Add Add material to create a solid cylinder.

Cut Remove material when the cylinder intersects another object.
Creates a cylinder without merging into other objects even when the cylinder
No Merge
intersects with an existing object.
Near-side body
Add material only on the near side when the cylinder intersects another object.
only
Examples
Using the Near-side body only option to add cylinder material only on the near side of a thin placement
wall
Creating a swept pipe with the Cylinder tool
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Creating a swept pipe with the Cylinder tool, then using Fill on the spherical joint to create a sharp corner
Creating a sphere
You can quickly create a sphere using the Sphere tool.
To create a sphere
1. Select the Sphere tool from the Insert ribbon group.

2. (Optional) Click No Merge in the Properties panel if you don't want the sphere merged with
existing bodies.
3. (Optional) Click Cut in the Properties panel to remove material from existing bodies where they
overlap the sphere.
4. Click to set the center of the sphere and the plane in which the sphere's radius is dimensioned.
As you move the mouse, you can see a preview of the sphere. Sphere creation works best when
you move the cursor in the x-y direction of the plane indicated by the first click.
5. Click to set the radius of the sphere.
To create a sphere over a face or edge
1. Select one or more faces or edges.

2. Select the Sphere tool from the Insert ribbon group.
A sphere is created that minimally covers the selected faces and/or edges.
Options
The following options are available in the Sphere tool.
Add Add material to create a solid sphere.

Cut Remove material when the sphere intersects another object.
Creates a sphere without merging into other objects even when the sphere intersects
No Merge
with an existing object.
Near-side body
Add material only on the near side when the sphere intersects another object.
only
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Using the Near-side body only option to add sphere material only on the near side of a thin placement
wall
Creating a sphere over a face or edge
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Selecting faces and clicking the Sphere tool to create a sphere, then clicking the Sphere tool multiple
times to enlarge the selected sphere
Shelling a solid
Use the Shell tool in the Insert ribbon group on the Design tab to remove one of the faces of a solid
and create a shell of a specified thickness. You can then use the Shell tool to remove other sides of the
shell. SpaceClaim automatically creates an offset relationship between the sides of the solid for you.
You can also create a closed shell without removing a face.
Shelled solids can have chamfers and rounds, and the faces can be drafted. The chamfer or rounded edge
will be created and maintained on both offset faces. A shelled solid with a chamfer is shown in cross-
section below.
To create a shell
1. Click the Shell tool in the Insert ribbon group on the Design tab.
Mouse over the solids in your design to highlight the faces that could be removed.
2. (Optional) Enter a value into the dimension field to change the thickness of the shell.
Enter a negative number to create the shell thickness from the outside of the solid.
3. Select the face you want to remove.
The face is removed and a shell is created. The baseline of the offset is shown in blue. If you did
not change the thickness, the default thickness is set by the minor grid spacing.
4. (Optional) Continue clicking to remove additional faces.
To create a closed shell
1. Select the solid.

2. Click the Shell tool.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
An internal shell is created.
To edit a shell
Right-click the shell to change its thickness.
Tool guides
The Remove Faces tool guide is active by default. Select a face of the solid to remove it and create a
shell. Ctrl+click to remove multiple faces.
If you create a shell, then add a protrusion onto it, you can extend the shell through the protrusion
by clicking the More Shell tool guide, then clicking the newly added protrusion.
The Complete tool guide creates the shell and reactivates the Remove Faces tool guide so
you can create another shell.
Example
An open shell and a closed shell
Adding and changing a rounded edge on a shelled or offset part changes the inside faces.
Creating an offset relationship
Use the Offset tool to create an offset relationship between two faces. This relationship will be maintained
in the other 2D and 3D editing tools. For example, when you select an offset face with the Pull tool, the
offset dimension is displayed. Baseline faces do not display a dimension.
To create an offset relationship
1. Click the Offset tool in the Insert ribbon group.
Mouse over your design to see the faces eligible for offset relationships.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. (Optional) Select options.
Select the Find All Same Offset option if you want to select all contiguous face pairs that have
the same offset distance as the pair you selected. If this option is not selected, the offset
relationship is only created for the selected pair of faces.
3. Click the first face.

4. Click the second face.
You have now established an offset relationship between the face pair and other contiguous face
pairs with the same offset distance (if the All the Same option is selected). The Toggle Baseline
tool guide activates.
5. (Optional) Click to select the baseline face(s).
When you move one of the faces with a design tool, the other face in the offset pair moves to
maintain the offset relationship. When you fill one face of an offset pair, the other face is also
filled.
Tool guides
Within the Offset tool, there are several tool guides that help step you through the editing process:
The Face Pair tool guide is active by default.
When the Toggle Baseline tool guide is active, click the faces that you want to be the baseline of the
offset.
Examples
An offset relationship between two cylindrical faces causes both to change when you change the diameter
of either cylinder
Inserting a face curve
You can draw spline curves on a 3D face using the Face Curve tool. These curves follow the contour of a
face. The face curve can be used like any other edge to modify the object.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To insert a face curve
1. Click Face Curve in the Insert group on the Design tab.

2. Click spots on the faces or edges of a part to draw the spline curve. Your spline can be drawn on
one or more faces, but can only be drawn on one object.
3. Double-click to end the curve or close the curve by clicking on your beginning point.
Now you are in editing mode and can change the curve as desired. The curve will not be applied
to your design until you complete the operation.
4. (Optional) Right-click a spot on the curve and select Add Face Curve Point to add a spline point.
5. (Optional) Right-click a spline point and select Remove Face Curve Point to delete the point.
6. (Optional) Drag points to change the curve.
7. (Optional) Set the value for Periodic in the Properties panel:
 True: If you change this property to True, the tangencies of the beginning and end of the curve
will match to create a closed curve. If a curve is open and you set the property to True, the
spline will be closed.
 False: If you change this property to False, the end tangencies of a closed curve don’t match. If
a curve is closed and you set the property to False, the curve will become teardrop-shaped
because the end points will no longer be tangent.
8. Click the Complete tool guide or press Enter to apply the curve to your design.
Tip: You will get much more predictable results if the face to face boundaries you are drawing over are
tangent. Click on the edges (tangent or not) to place a point for more control over the intersection point
at that boundary.
Tool guides
The Complete tool guide creates the face curve.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Sketching a face curve that is closed over tangentially-connected solid faces
The result of offsetting the edges that were created as a result of the face curve above
Creating mirror relationships
Use the Mirror tool in the Insert ribbon group on the Design tab to mirror any geometry that can be
moved with the Move tool. You can insert a mirror plane between two faces, associating the faces so you
can edit them together. You can copy a solid, surface, face, or curve from one side of a mirror plane to the
other.
You can mirror curves, points, and axes without leaving sketch mode or cross section mode. When you
mirror a curve, changing its geometry does not propagate to the other side.
You can mirror solids that contain patterns of features on a face, and the pattern will be updated on both
sides. The pattern must be created before the solid is mirrored.
The plane becomes a persistent mirror once you create geometry using the mirror. The mirror relationship
is maintained when you use other 2D and 3D tools to edit your design. Components maintain their mirror
relationships when they are exported
Mirrored objects are created on the same layer as the original object. Mirrored points do not maintain
their mirror relationship.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To mirror an object
1. (Optional) Create the plane you want to use as a mirror using the Insert Plane tool and position it
with the Move tool.
2. Click Mirror in the Insert group.
The Select Mirror Plane tool guide is enabled.
3. Click the plane to use as a mirror.
Mouse over the objects in your design to preview the geometry that can be created by the mirror.
4. Click the object you want to mirror.
You can click objects in your design or click a component in the Structure tree.
Do it faster
1. Click the Mirror tool.

2. Select the plane you want to be a mirror.
3. Click the object you want to mirror.
Tool guides
Within the Mirror tool, there are several tool guides that help step you through the mirroring process:
The Mirror Plane tool guide is active by default. Select a face or plane to use it as a mirror. (You can
also use this tool guide to select another mirror plane to use if one is already selected.
The Mirror Body tool guide activates automatically once you select a mirror face or plane. Mouse
over the solids in your design to preview the solid that will be created by the mirror. Click a solid to
mirror it.
Once you select a face or plane to use as a mirror, use the Mirror Face tool guide to select the faces
you want to mirror. Mousing over the faces before you click them previews the face that will be
created by the mirror. Click a face to mirror it.
The Setup Mirror tool guide can be used any time to create a mirror plane between two faces. Only
those two faces will be affected by the mirror. To create a relationship among many faces,
Ctrl+select faces and then select a mirror plane to auto-detect identical faces equidistant from the
mirror plane.
Use the Remove Mirror tool to remove the mirror relationship between two faces.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Example
A mirrored solid with a pattern of features is updated when the count is changed from 7 to 5 on one side.
Mirroring a sketched circle
Modifying the circle does not change the geometry of the mirrored circle.
Mirroring a solid, surface, or face
You can use the Mirror tool to create a copy of a solid, surface, or face.
To mirror a solid or surface
1. Click the Mirror tool in the Insert ribbon group.
The Select Mirror Plane tool guide is enabled.
2. Select the plane to use as a mirror.

3. Click the Mirror Body or Mirror Face tool guide.
Mouse over the solids or faces in your design to preview the solid, surface, or face that will be
created on the other side of the selected mirror plane.
4. Click the solid or face to create the mirrored solid or face.
The mirror plane is created and will persist in other tools.
If you enclose a volume by mirroring faces, a solid is created.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Options
 Merge mirrored objects: When you use a face as the mirror plane, or when the mirror plane lies on a
face of the source object, the two mirrored objects will be merged. Deselect this option to make a new
object, as shown below.
 Create mirror relationships: If you deselect this option, only the geometry is created and not the
mirror relationship. Changes to either object will not be reflected in the other, as shown below.
Setup a mirror relationship between two faces
You can create a mirror plane between two symmetrical faces in your design.
To set up a mirror relationship
1. Click the Mirror tool in the Insert ribbon group.
2. Click the Setup Mirror tool guide.
As you mouse over the faces in your design, the eligible faces are highlighted. A face is eligible if
it is symmetrical to another face in your design.
3. Click a face.
4. Click a parallel face.
The second face is highlighted in blue and the mirror plane appears halfway between the two
faces. Edits to one face will now be mirrored on the other face. Geometry in between the two
faces will be updated accordingly.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Remove a mirror face or plane
You can remove or disable a mirror.
To remove a mirror face or plane
1. Click the Remove Mirror tool guide.

2. Click the face from which you want to remove the mirror relationship.
You can temporarily disable a plane in any tool. Select a mirrored face to display the mirror plane,
then click the mirror icon to disable the mirror. Click the mirror icon again to enable the mirror.
Find similar faces on the other side of a mirror
You can create mirror relationships by finding similar faces on the other side of an existing mirror.
To find similar faces on the other side of a mirror
1. Click the Setup Mirror tool guide.

2. Click a face.
Ctrl+click to select multiple faces.
3. Alt+click a mirror plane.
Identical faces equidistant from the mirror plane are highlighted in blue, and a mirror relationship
is created.
Inserting temporary points, axes, and planes
You can create temporary points, axes, and planes while working with other tools. Temporary objects can
be used to dimension to and create other objects. For example, you can use them to create a ruler
dimension, or anchor the Move handle on them.
To clear a temporary object, select the object and press Delete. A temporary object also disappears when
you click in an empty space with the Selection tool or create another temporary object.
Alt+Shift+click: 2D example: 3D example:

A point For curves: A tangent line and a For solids: A plane that is normal to the view
perpendicular plane. direction (or parallel to the plane of the screen)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
A point on a
curve
3D image
Two points A midpoint between two points and a bisecting line
Three points A plane

(not applicable in 2D)
Two parallel A line midway between two lines A line midway between two edges and planes
lines or edges (2D) that intersect the edges and the line (3D)
Two parallel A plane midway between two planes
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
planes
Two non-parallel Two bisector lines and the An axis between the two points at the closest
lines, edges, or intersection point (2D) approach between each other, and a point and
axes a mid-plane at the middle distance along that
axis (3D)
Two non-parallel Two bisecting planes and the edge where the planes intersect
planes
Three planes The point where the three planes intersect

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
An arc A circle that completes the arc
A conical face The point where the conical face would come to a point
and its axis
Ellipse The major and minor foci
A line or edge Axis from the point normal to the edge and a second axis parallel to the edge
and a point that through the point
is not in line with
the line or edge
An axis and an The point at the intersection of the axis and the plane of the face
intersecting face
or surface
A curve and an The points where the face would intersect the curve, and the axes that pass through
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
intersecting face the points, are tangent to the curve, and are on the same plane as the curve. One
or surface point and axis are created if the face would only intersect the curve at one point.
A point and a Plane that is tangent to the face and a point that is normal to the axis from the face
face or surface to the point
A point and a line A plane through the line or edge, or a plane that is normal to the plane that goes
or edge through the point. If a line is chosen at a particular point, then that location on the
line can also be used as a point reference.
(2D and 3D produce the same
result, shown on the right)
A line or edge Planes that are perpendicular to the face and go through the line or edge.
and a planar
face
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Linear patterns
You can create patterns of:
 Protrusions or depressions (including slots)

 Points, planes, origins, or axes
 Sketch curves
 Components
Patterns can be made from a mix of object types, such as a pattern of holes (faces) and bolts (imported
components). You cannot create a pattern of threads. You can use the Undo button, Ctrl+Z or Redo
button, Ctrl+Y when creating a pattern.
To create a one- or two - dimensional linear pattern
1. Click the Linear tool in the Insert group on the Design tab.
3. Select a line, edge, axis, or a set of points to set the direction of the pattern. The Define Pattern
Change X Count, or X Pitch values for One-dimensional
Change X, Y Count, or X, Y Pitch values for Two-dimensional
changes in blue.
5. Select the Define Pattern tool guide.

The image below shows the preview for a two-dimensional pattern. For one-dimensional, only the X-
direction is displayed. Clicking the arrows flips their direction 180-degrees.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
For through-all cuts, the preview is on the plane closest to the direction reference. For blind cuts, the
preview is on the face of the selected pattern leader.
You can also create one-dimensional linear patterns on cylindrical faces as long as the pattern direction is
either the cylinders axis or parallel to the axis.
In SpaceClaim, any pattern member can be used to modify the pattern after you create it. If the change
cannot be made to all pattern members, the member that cannot change is still part of the pattern.
To create a pattern of a pattern
Follow the steps for the linear pattern, but select a member of a linear pattern as the first member of the
pattern.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Press Enter.
To move a pattern

pattern.
move:
skews the pattern.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

member.

 Distance: This field is the overall distance of the pattern. The pattern member you select is
image below.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Orient tools.
Pattern.
The components will be propagated to the pattern.
Examples
Rectangular pattern
Changing spacing between pattern members changes the pattern's overall length when the length field
isn't locked.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
A pattern of sketch objects is no longer a pattern when you switch to 3D mode and the sketched objects
are converted to surfaces.
Sketch curve patterns can propagate in two dimensions. The pattern above contains three squares in the
X direction and two squares in the Y direction.
Circular patterns
You can create circular patterns of:
 Protrusions or depressions (including slots)

 Points, planes, origins, or axes
 Sketch curves
 Components
To create a one- or two - dimensional circular pattern
1. Click the Circular tool in the Insert group on the Design tab.
Change Circular Count, or Angle values for One-dimensional.
Change Circular Count, Angle, Linear Count, or Linear Pitch values for Two-dimensional.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Note that a Circular Count of one, in a two dimensional pattern, will create a single radial pattern.
changes in blue.
5. Select the Define Pattern tool guide.

The image below shows the preview for a two-dimensional pattern. For one-dimensional, only the
Angular direction is displayed. Clicking the arrows flips their direction 180-degrees.
You can create circular patterns on cylindrical faces, both around the face and along the axis.
 Circular patterns are anchored at the opposite end by default when you move one end.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To create a radial circular pattern
1. Select all radial pattern members.

2. Click the Circular pattern tool.
3. Set the Pattern type to One-dimensional.
4. Enter the Circular count and Angle.
5. Click on the circular axis.
To create a single radial pattern, set the Pattern type to Two-dimensional and enter a Circular Count of
1.
3. Press Enter.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To move a pattern

pattern.
To move a radial pattern in a linear direction

2. Right-click a pattern member and click Select > All Pattern Members.
3. Select the Direction tool guide.
4. Click an object to set the direction of the move.
5. Drag the pattern.

member.

Distance: This field is the overall distance of the pattern. The pattern member you select is
image below.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Orient tools.
Pattern.
Fill patterns
You can create Fill patterns of:
 Protrusions (including sheet metal form)

 Depressions (including slots and standard holes)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To create a fill pattern
1. Click the Fill tool in the Insert group on the Design tab.
2. Select a protrusion or depression to be the first member (leader) of the pattern. The Direction
tool guide activates..
4. Modify the options in the Options panel
Pattern Type: Grid or Offset
Modify the X Spacing or Y Spacing
Modify the Margin values. A dashed orange boundary line displays the pattern's marginal
boundary.
changes in blue.
To edit a fill pattern's properties
With a fill pattern node selected in the Structure tree, you can:
 Change fill pattern parameters in the Layout section of the Properties panel. Changes that you make
automatically update the pattern in the design window.
 Right-click and select Lightweight Pattern to toggle a pattern component between a lightweight
pattern and regular pattern. When selected, a  check mark displays next to the Lightweight Pattern
command. This only works with sheet metal components: with a Pattern node selected in the Structure
tree, right-click and select Make Lightweight.
 To update lightweight fill patterns to fit the existing geometry of your design, select the lightweight
pattern node, then right-click and select Update Pattern.
To move a pattern

pattern.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
move:
skews the pattern.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Orient tools.
Pattern.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Intersecting
You can use the intersect tools to merge and split a solid or surface in your design with another solid or
surface. You can merge and split solids or surfaces with other solids or surfaces, split a solid with a face,
and split a face with another face. You can also project the edges of a face onto other solids and surfaces
in your design.
SpaceClaim's intersection capabilities include the full suite of geometry combination, all done with one
major tool (Combine) and two minor ones (Split Solid and Split Face). Combine always takes two or more
objects. The split tools always act on one object and that object is automatically selected from the cutter
or projection face.
To understand what the Combine tool can do, the first step is to know which objects can be handled.
Solid objects have faces that meet at corner edges. Edges that lie on faces can be deleted, but corners
cannot. Surface objects have faces that come together at internal edges, and are surrounded by outside
edges. Outside edges can be extended. Internal edges can be deleted if they are bounded by planar faces.
For the purposes of combine, planes can be thought of as surface faces that extend across the design.
When surfaces enclose a volume, they automatically change into solid objects. When edges of the same
surface become coincident, they will automatically merge. Planes cannot be split by any combine
operation, but they can be used to split with. In general, layer, color, and visibility in the structure tree
propagates from the first selected item (the target) to the result. What happens as a result of the
combination can be overridden with the options (both in the panel and the mini-toolbar). When you use
the Combine or Split tools, the newly created objects have the layer properties of the previous objects.
You have complete control over the pieces that solids and surfaces get cut into. When appropriate,
SpaceClaim prompts you to remove regions, but you can choose to keep or remove those regions.
When using the intersect tools, the original, individual layers and colors of the objects are maintained.
Intersect ribbon group
The Intersect ribbon group contains the following tools:
Use the Combine tool to merge and split solids and surfaces.
Use the Split Solid tool to split a solid by one or more of its faces or edges. Then select one or more
regions for deletion.
Use the Split Face tool to create an edge on a face by splitting it with another face or surface.
Use the Project to Solid tool to create edges on a solid's face by extending the edges of another
solid or surface.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Combining and splitting
The Combine tool is used to make combinations of objects. You can add (or merge) objects together and
you can subtract (or split) objects from each other. These actions are also known as Boolean operations.
Tool guides for the Combine tool are sticky, and appear with a double outline when you click them. The
tool guide remains selected so you can perform the same action repeatedly without holding the Ctrl key.
To unstick a tool guide, click it again, click another tool guide, or click an empty place in the Design
window.
When you use a pattern with the Combine tool, the entire pattern is merged or used to cut the target.
To split solids and surfaces
1. Click Combine.
2. Select the target solid or surface that you want to split.
3. Select one or more object to use as the cutter.
4. (Optional) Select the split region(s) that you want to delete.
1. Click Combine in the Intersect group on the Design tab.

2. Select the target solid or surface that you want to split.
You can select objects for Combine in the structure tree. If you select a component, all objects
belonging to that component will be selected.
You can use temporary geometry to split an object.
You can use a locked body as a cutter with the Combine tool, but you cannot use it as target. See
Locking and unlocking objects.
3. (Optional) Select the following options:

Merge when done: Merge all newly-created, touching solids or surfaces when you exit the
Combine tool.
 Imprint curves: Create edges at intersections instead of selecting regions.
 Keep cutter: Keep the cutting surface in your design. If this option is not selected, then the
cutting surface is automatically deleted as soon as you select it.
 Make all regions: Cut the target object with the cutter object and the cutter object with the
target object. The target and cutter must be the same type of object.
4. Select one or more object to use as the cutter.
Depending on the option you chose, the cutting surface will be kept or deleted. You can see the
solids or surfaces created by the cut in the Structure panel.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Move your mouse over the target solid to see the regions created by the cut.
5. (Optional) Select the split region(s) that you want to delete.
To merge solids and surfaces
1. Click Combine.
2. Select the target solid or surface.
You can select objects for Combine in the structure tree. If you select a component, all objects
belonging to that component will be selected. You can also box select multiple solids or surfaces
to merge them in one operation.
Solids can be merged with solids, and surfaces with surfaces. Solids and surfaces can only be
merged if the surfaces make a region that can be added to or cut out of the solid.
3. Click the Select Bodies to Merge tool guide or hold the Ctrl key.
4. Select the solid(s) or surface(s) that you want merged with the target.
Do it faster: Hold Ctrl and select the solids or surfaces you want to combine, and then click the
Combine tool to merge them.
To make 3D curves at the intersections between faces
1. Click Combine.
2. Select the target solid or surface.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Tool guides
Tool guides for the Combine tool are sticky, and appear with a double outline when you click them. The
tool guides remain selected so you can perform the same action repeatedly without holding the Ctrl key.
To unstick the tool guide, you can click it again, click another tool guide, or click an empty place in the
Design window.
The Select Target tool guide is active by default. If you did not pre-select the target solid or surface,
you can select it from within the Combine tool using the Select tool guide.
Click the Select Bodies to Merge tool guide to select multiple solids or surfaces to merge together.
The Select Cutter tool guide activates once you select a target. When this tool guide is active, click
to select the solid or surface you want to use to cut the target. You can Ctrl+click when this tool
guide is active if you need to add other bodies to your cutter selection.
The Select Regions tool guide activates once the target is cut. When this tool guide is active, mouse
over the target to preview the regions created by the cut. Click a red region to delete it.
Options
The following options are available for the Combine tool. Select one or more of these options from the
Options docking panel, or right-click and select them from the mini-toolbar:
 Make solids: Solids are made when possible where the target and cutter objects intersect. When you
select this option, you can choose any of the following:
 Merge when done: Select this option to merge all newly-created, touching solids or surfaces when
you exit the Combine tool. You can also click on white space anywhere in the Design window to
complete the merge. Hidden objects are not merged. This saves you the extra step of selecting all
the cut-up regions after you are done with a complicated slice-and-dice session, and manually
merging them all back together.
 Keep cutter: SpaceClaim assumes that you created a cutter object to be used only for cutting. If you
want to keep the cutting surface in your design, select this option. If this option is not selected, then
the cutting surface is automatically deleted as soon as you select it. In other words, cutter objects
are normally "used up" unless you select this option. A kept cutter can be a surface or solid, but
either way only the regions of the target can be removed.
If you are splitting surfaces, check this option to prevent the cutter object from being split by the
target object.
This option is automatically selected if the cutter object is locked.
 Make all regions: Select this option to cut the target object with the cutter object and the cutter
object with the target object. Target and cutter must be the same type of object, either both solids
or both surfaces. Because this option can create a large number of regions, it can be helpful to use
this option along with the Merge When Done option to quickly merge all remaining regions when
you click another tool or press Enter to finish using Combine.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Make curves: Select this option to make 3D curves where the target and cutter object intersect. The
curves are created in the active part, rather than the part that the first body belongs to.
 Imprint curves: Select this option to create edges at intersections instead of creating 3D curves.
You will not be able to preview regions for deletion. As soon as a region is selected for deletion, this
option is disabled. The edges are created on the first body you select.
 Extend intersections: Select this option to extend the intersection of partially intersecting surfaces so
the underlying surface is completely split.
Examples
You can use Combine to cut or merge coincident surfaces. (The delete region step is not shown in the first
illustration.)
Merging solids and surfaces
Use the Combine tool to merge solids and surfaces.
To merge solids and surfaces
1. Select the Combine tool from the Intersect ribbon group or press I.
2. Click the first solid or surface.
3. Ctrl+click additional solids or surfaces to merge them.
The Structure tree shows the merge.
Ctrl+click the solids or surfaces you want to combine in the Structure tree, then click the Combine tool
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
to merge them.
Solids can be merged with solids, and surfaces with surfaces. Solids and surfaces can only be merged if
the surfaces make a region that can be added to or cut out of the solid. For example, if you select the face
of a cylinder, copy and paste it, then you can merge it with the solid used to create it.
Merging solids
You can merge two or more solids with the Combine tool.
To merge two solids
1. Select the Combine tool from the Intersect ribbon group.

2. Click the first solid.
3. Ctrl+click the second solid to merge it with the first solid.
The second solid takes on the color and visibility properties of the first solid. The Structure tree
shows the merge.
To merge multiple solids
1. Select the solids you want to combine using box selection.
The solids take on the color and visibility properties of the merged solid that appeared top-most
in the Structure tree. The Structure tree shows the merge.
You can also select the Combine tool, select the first solid, then Ctrl+click each individual solid
you want to merge.
Merging surface protrusions
You can merge a surface that forms a protrusion to a solid.
To merge a surface protrusion

2. Click the first solid.
3. Ctrl+click a surface that could create a protrusion on the solid to merge it with the solid.
The surface becomes a protrusion on the solid and takes on the color and visibility properties of
the first solid. The Structure tree shows the merge.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Merging surfaces
You can merge surfaces with the Combine tool. Surface must share edges to be merged. If surfaces
enclose a volume, you can use the Combine tool to quickly convert the enclosed volume into a solid and
trim the extra.
Sometimes, if you manipulate a surface so that it becomes self-intersecting, you may need to create a
solid from the surface that remains.
To merge surfaces that share edges

2. Click the first surface.
3. Ctrl+click the second surface to merge it with the first surface.
The second surface takes on the color and visibility properties of the first surface. The Structure
tree shows the merge.
To merge surfaces that enclose a volume
1. Select the surfaces that intersect to form an enclosed region using box selection.
The enclosed region becomes a solid and takes on the color and visibility properties of the
merged surface that appeared top-most in the Structure tree. The Structure tree shows the
merge.
To create a solid from a self-intersecting single surface

2. Select the "open" edge of the set of surfaces, shown in black.
3. Click the Combine tool.
To repair a self-intersecting surface

2. Double-click the edge loops.
3. Click the Combine tool.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Example
Six surfaces enclosing a volume, box-selected and combined with the Combine tool
Repairing a self-intersecting surface with the Combine tool
Ctrl+click to select an open edge loop of a surface, then close the surfaces with the Combine tool
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Capping a surface with a plane
Ctrl+click a surface and a plane to cap the surface.
Splitting bodies and surfaces
Use the Combine tool to split bodies and surfaces.
To split bodies and surfaces
1. Click the Combine tool from the Intersect ribbon group or press I.
2. Select the body or surface you want to cut.
The Select Cutter tool guide is activated.
3. (Optional) Control the behavior of the cut by selecting options.

4. Click the surface you want to use to cut the body.
Depending on the option you chose, the cutting surface will be kept or deleted. Review the
information in the Structure panel to see the bodies or surfaces created by the cut.
Mouse over the target body to see the regions created by the cut.
5. Click each region you want to delete.
When you are finished selecting the areas to be deleted, click the Select Target tool guide to
combine some more, or select another tool.
If you want to split a body by a face of the body, select the Split Body tool.
If you want to create an edge on a face, select the Split Face tool.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To split the target object with the cutter object and the cutter object with the target
object

2. Select the Make all regions option.
3. Click the objects you want to cut.
Target and cutter must be the same type of object, either both bodies or both surfaces.
4. Mouse over the surface to see the regions created by the cut.
Because this option can create a large number of regions, we recommend using this option along
with the Merge When Done option to quickly merge all remaining regions when you click
another tool or press Esc to finish using Combine.
5. Click the region you want to delete.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Using two surfaces as the cutter, when the surfaces can't be merged outside of the region where they
intersect the target. The two surfaces are merged to create a cut in the target.
Splitting a solid with a surface, plane, or another solid
Use the Combine tool to split solids. Solids can be split by surfaces, planes, and other solids.
Split a solid with a solid

2. Click the solid you want to cut.
3. Click the solid you want to cut with.
4. Mouse over the solid to see the regions created by the cut.
The regions you can delete are highlighted in red.
Split a solid with a surface or a plane

3. Click the surface you want to cut the solid with.
You can Ctrl+click multiple surfaces that together completely intersect a solid.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Using the Split Body tool
Use the Split Body tool to split a body by one or more of its faces or edges. Then select one or more
regions for deletion. The Split Body tool expects that you have already selected the cutter objects. From
these faces or edges, the single target body is inferred, since a face or edge can only belong to one body
or surface. If only one body face is selected as a cutter, the default action is to extend that face to cut as
far as it can through the body. If a face of a surface is selected, then it is automatically removed.
The Split Body tool works in two modes:
 "Slow mode" is activated by clicking a Split Body tool guide. In this mode, once a tool guide is clicked,
it remains selected until another tool guide is clicked. This mode works just like any other tool.
 "Fast mode" automatically activates tool guides and moves you through the workflow. This predictive
mode allows you to box-select multiple cutters to add even more efficiency.
You can use the Split Body tool to:
 Split a body by its edges

 Split a body by its faces
 Split a body by a plane
You can select a body or surface from the Structure tree as the target and a plane from the Structure tree
as the cutter.
When splitting with a plane passing through the entire body, some cuts may not be desired. Use the
Local Slicing option to gain specific control over which cuts are applied.
To split a body by one of its faces
1. Click the Split Body tool from the Intersect ribbon group.
2. Select the faces or edges you want to use to cut the body.
Hold Ctrl and click or draw a box to select multiple faces or edges.
You can create temporary geometry and select it to cut the body.
3. Mouse over the body to see the regions created by the cut.
4. (Optional) Click a region to delete it.
When you are finished deleting regions, select another tool.
If the selected edges do not completely encircle a portion of a body or surface, no region
selection can occur.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Select a face with the Select tool, then select the Split Body tool to cut the body with the face.
To selectively split a body:

1. Click the Split Body tool in the Intersect group on the Design tab
2. Select the body
3. Check ON the Local Slicing option
4. Click the cutter plane; you will see a blue outline which previews local slicing locations for splitting
the body
5. Click on a blue outline preview to cut the body; the Select Regions tool guide is then activated
however, holding the Ctrl key or clicking the Select Cuts tool guide allows you to create
additional cuts
6. Click a region to delete it
If you need to make multiple cuts on the same target body, manually click the Select Cuts tool guide to
make it sticky before step 5.
Tool guides
Within the Split Body tool, there are several tool guides that help step you through the splitting process:
The Select Cutter tool guide is active by default. When this tool guide is active, click to select the
face you want to use to cut the body.
The Select Cuts tool guide activates when the Local Slicing option is selected. Possible cuts are
highlighted where the plane intersects the body. Mouse over the cuts to highlight them for
selection.
The Select Regions tool guide activates once you once the body is cut by the face. When this tool
guide is active, mouse over the target to see the regions created by the cut. The regions you can
delete are highlighted in red.
Options
The following options are available in the Split Body tool. Once you select the edge or face to pull, select
these options from the Options docking panel, or right-click and select them from the mini-toolbar:
Merge when Select this option to merge all touching bodies or surfaces when you exit the Split Body
done tool. Hidden objects are not merged.
Extend faces Extends the selected cutter face to cut through the target body.
Local Slicing Select this option with the Select Cuts tool guide to choose specific cuts made by a plane
passing through the entire body.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Body split by a spline face
Splitting a face
Use the Split Face tool to create an edge on a face or surface by splitting it with another face or edge. You
can use the new edge to modify the face independent of previously attached geometry.
To create an edge on a face
1. Click Split Face in the Intersect group on the Design tab.
The Select Target tool guide is enabled.
2. Select the face you want to split.

3. (Optional) Select a tool guide.
Mouse over faces or edges in your design to preview the edge that will be created on the target.
Dimensions are displayed along the U and V edge of the face.
4. Click to select the face, plane, or edge you want to use to split the selected face. You can select
multiple faces.
You can hold Shift and hover over an edge while selecting the cutter points. The midpoint on the
edge will be marked with a yellow ball in parentheses. The x and y dimensions will emanate from
that point.
5. The Select Results tool guide remains active until there is only one split line remaining, so you
can remove all but one split line without reactivating the tool guide
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Example
Dimensioning from the midpoint of an edge to split a face.
To split a face with another face or plane
1. Click the Select Cutter Face tool guide.

2. Mouse over the faces and planes in your design to preview the edge that will be created on the
target.
3. Click the face or plane to split the selected face with an edge.
To split a face using a point on an edge
1. Click the Select UV Cutter Point tool guide.

2. Mouse over the edges of the face to preview the edges that will be created.
3. Click a point on the edge to split the selected face. The percent distance along the edge is
displayed.
To split a face using two points
1. Click the Select Two Cutter Points tool guide.

2. Click a point on an edge.
3. Mouse over the face or edges to preview the edges that will be created.
4. Click a point on another edge or on the face to split the selected face.
Examples
Previewing edges that can be created using the Select Cutter Point and Select Two Cutter Points tool
guides
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Splitting a face in section mode by selecting points on a section line
Splitting multiple faces with the Select Two Cutter Points tool guide
To split a face using a perpendicular line from a point on an edge
1. Click the Select Perpendicular Cutter Point tool guide.

3. Mouse over edges of the face to preview the edges that will be created.
4. The distance and percentage along the edge is displayed. You can Press the Space bar and Tab
key to change these values.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To split a periodic face
1. Click Split Face in the Intersect group on the Design tab.

2. Click the Select Target tool guide.
3. Select the 'periodic face' you want to split.
4. Click on the point of the face where you want it split, as shown below.
5. The Select Results tool guide is now active, so you can click edges that you don't want to keep,
as shown on the left of the image below. The result after the two straight edges have been
removed is shown on the right.
Tool guides
Within the Split Face tool, there are several tool guides that help step you through the splitting process:
The Select Target tool guide is active by default. If you did not pre-select the target face or surface,
you can select it from within the Split Face tool using the Select tool guide. Ctrl+click multiple
surfaces or solid faces in the same plane to split them all.
The Select Cutter Face tool guide activates once you select a target. When this tool guide is active,
click to select the face or surface you want to use to create an edge on the target.
The Select UV Cutter Point tool guide activates once you select a target. Mouse over an edge to
preview the new edges that will be created. Click to create the edge on the selected face. You can
mouse over an edge with this tool guide to display and edit the length along the edge, and the
percentage of the edge that is between the first point and the end point.
The Select Perpendicular Cutter Point tool guide activates once you select a target. Select an edge
to preview where the perpendicular split will be made. Click to create the edge on the selected face.
The face is split perpendicular to the edge you select.
The Select Two Cutter Points tool guide activates once you select a target. Click to select the first
point on an edge, then mouse over another edge to preview the new edge that will be created. Click
to create the edge on the selected face. The shortest line is drawn between the two points. You can
mouse over an edge with this tool guide to display and edit the length along the edge, and the
percentage of the edge that is between the first point and the end point.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Select the Select Results tool guide, then click newly created edges to remove any edges you don't
want to keep.
Options
The following option is available in the Split Face tool:
Make Curves Select this option to create sketch lines instead of splitting the face.
Splitting a surface
Use the Combine tool to split solids. Surfaces can be split by solids, planes, and other surfaces.
To split a surface by a solid or plane

2. Click the surface you want to cut.
3. Click the solid or plane you want to cut the surface with.
To split a surface by another surface

2. Click the surface you want to cut.
3. Click the surface you want to cut the surface with.
You can Ctrl+click multiple surfaces that together completely intersect the target surface to fully
cut the surface. You can box-select surfaces that only partially intersect the target surface to
partially cut the surface.
Removing material from a solid
Use the Combine tool to remove material from a solid based on the intersection of a solid or surface. You
can remove the material defined by a surface that forms a depression, or remove a solid completely
enclosed within another solid.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Remove material from a solid with a surface that forms a depression

3. Click the surface you want to use to create a depression.
Remove an enclosed volume from a solid
1. Create the exterior solid and interior solid in two different components.

3. Click the exterior solid.
4. Click the interior solid to use it as the cutter.
5. Click the interior solid to delete it.
Projecting to a solid
Use the Project tool to create edges on a solid's face by extending the edges of another solid, surface,
sketch, or note text.
When you project onto a face, the tool makes a new surface to hold the projected edges, if possible.
To project the edges of a face, surface, sketch, or note text to a solid
1. Click Project in the Intersect group on the Design tab.

2. Select the edges, face, surface, sketch, or note text whose edges you want to project.
Select an object in the Structure tree to project all the edges of the object.
The projection occurs perpendicular to the selected object onto the nearest solid faces. The
nearest solid faces are determined automatically.
3. (Optional) Click the Select Direction tool guide and select a face or edge to change the direction
of the projection.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. (Optional) Click the Select Target Faces tool guide and select the face(s) on which you want the
edge projected.
5. Select from the following options in the Options panel:
 Project through solids: Project the edges on all faces through the entire solid instead of just
the faces closest to the object you project.
 Project silhouette edge: Projects the outline, or silhouette, of a part. You must set the
direction using the Select Direction tool guide.
 Extend projected edges: Extend the projected curves to the edge of the face(s) they are
projected on.
 Extend target faces: Extend the target face when the projected face is larger than the target.
See the example below.
 Wrap around target: Projects a planar object, text, or note onto cylindrical or multiple planar
faces and wraps it around the faces. This option also works for conical surfaces and over target
tangent face boundaries.
The projection preview is shown in purple, and will be updated based on the options and tool
guides you use.
6. Click the Complete tool guide or press Enter to project the edges.
Tool guides
The Select Curves tool guide allows you to select the curves you want to project.
The Select Direction tool guide allows you to select the direction in which the curves will be
projected. If you don't use this tool guide, the curves will be projected in both directions.
The Select Target Faces tool guide allows you to select the face(s) that the curves will be
projected upon.
The Complete tool guide projects the edges.
Options
Project Project the edges on all faces through the entire solid instead of just the faces closest to
through solids the object you project.
Project Projects the outline, or silhouette, of a part. You must set the direction using the Select
silhouette edge Direction tool guide.
Extend Extend the projected curves to the edge of the face(s) they are projected on.
projected
edges
Extend target Extend the target face when the projected face is larger than the target. See the example
faces below.
Wrap around Projects a planar object, text, or note onto cylindrical or multiple planar faces and wraps
target it around the faces. This option also works for conical surfaces and over target tangent
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
face boundaries.
Examples
Projecting a sphere onto a planar face. Because a sphere has no edge to project, you must choose Project
silhouette edge in the Options panel.
Projecting an edge with the Extend target faces option enabled. The rectangular face was chosen with
the Select Target Faces tool guide.
Wrapping a planar object and text onto cylindrical faces with the Wrap around target option.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Working with components
Components are shown in the Structure tree on the Structure panel. All the objects in the Structure tree
are contained within a top-level design component (Design1 in the figure below.) This top-level
component is created automatically when you first save your design.
You must create any other components yourself. Once you have created a component, the icon changes
to show that the top-level design is now an assembly.
To create a component
You can do any of the following in the Structure tree to create a component:
 Right-click any component and select New Component from the context menu to create a new
component within that component.
 Right-click an object and select Move to New Component to create a component within the active
component and move the object into it. If the object has a custom name, the new component will have
the same name.
 Ctrl+click multiple objects, then right-click and select Move Each to New Components from the
context menu to create a new component for each object within the active component and move the
objects into those components. If the object has a custom name, the new component will have the
same name.
An annotation plane with dimensions cannot be moved to a component because the references would
be lost.
To activate a component
Activating a component allows you to work with the objects within that component.
Right-click the component the Structure tree and select Activate Component from the context menu.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If the component is lightweight, it is also loaded. As you design, any new objects you create are created
within this component.
You can right-click on an object in the design window and select Load Component from the context
menu. Selecting Load Component loads the component and all its subcomponents' geometry
information. Once loaded, you can then use any tool to modify the component.
To cut, copy, and paste a component

1. Activate the component
2. Cut, copy, or paste the active component or any of its subcomponents:
 To cut a component, select it and click the Cut tool in the Clipboard group on the Design tab
or press Ctrl+X.
 To make an independent copy, select a component and click the Copy tool or press Ctrl+C.
 To make a dependent copy, Ctrl+drag a component (even an inactive one) into another
component.
Non-movement changes will be made to both the copied and original components. Make the
copy independent to change this behavior.
 To paste a component, select the component within which you want to paste the cut or copied
component, and click the Paste tool or press Ctrl+V.
When you use this method to create a copy, the copied component is independent.
To mirror a component
1. Click on the Mirror tool in the Design tab Insert group.
2. Select a mirror plane.
3. Select the component to mirror.
To sort objects within a component
Right-click the component and select Sort > Sort A to Z or Sort > Z to A from the context menu.
To rename a component
Components have a part name and a component name. The part name is displayed in the Structure tree
next to the component icon. The component name is shown in parentheses next to the part name.
To change a component's part name, right-click the component in the Structure tree and select Rename
from the context menu.
To change a component's component name, select the component in the Structure tree and modify the
Component Name value in the Name section of the Properties panel.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To change the top-level component's display name, select the top-level component in the Structure tree
and modify the Display Name in the Name section of the Properties panel.
To delete a component
Right-click a component and select Delete Empty Components from the context menu to delete any
empty subcomponents within the component. If the component itself is empty, or contains only empty
subcomponents, it is also deleted.
Internal, external, and independent components
Internal components
Objects that are inside of the SpaceClaim document file are internal components. Components you
create in the Structure tree are internal by default.
You can convert an internal component into an external component. This creates a separate file for the
component and makes it external. See the instructions below.
You can create an internal copy of an external component. This integrates the component into your
design, and removes the association to the external component.
External components
Objects that are outside of the SpaceClaim document file are external components. Designs that you
load using the File tool on the Design tab are external. See Inserting another design.
You can make a copy of an external component internal. The copy will be included in the .scdoc file so it
can be viewed and modified in your design. The original external component will not be changed. See the
instructions below.
If you have the Use lightweight assemblies option selected in the File import and export options,
external components will be loaded as lightweight components. See Lightweight components.
Dependent and independent components
You can load multiple instances of an external component. These are known as dependent components.
Changes to one instance will change all instances. The copy exists in the .scdoc file, but its geometry
comes from the external file.
Copies of external components that have been made independent of other copies are known as
independent components. Changes to the independent copy will not affect the original and vice versa.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Notes about dependent and independent components

 You can make an instance of an external component independent, so changes to that instance don’t
affect other instances.
 If your design includes multiple copies of an external component, making one of them internal does
not affect the other copies.
 Making another copy of the same external component internal creates a second instance of the same
internal component. You will be asked to save the new external component when you exit SpaceClaim
if you haven't saved it.
 Making an external subcomponent independent makes its parent component independent.
 Independent status is propagated up through the structure as far as needed to differentiate the
subassembly from peer assemblies. Names are changed accordingly.
 Independent status is not propagated down through the structure.
Examples
The structure of a design with copied subassemblies is shown below. Copies of the wheelAxleAssembly
subassembly (highlighted) exist in both suspension assemblies:
When we make the highlighted subassembly independent, the subassembly names are changed. The
names of the components are the text not in the parentheses. The change affects wheelAxleAssembly and
its parent; both names have a 2 appended in the image below:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To insert a component or assembly
1. Select the Insert File tool in the Insert ribbon group.

2. Navigate to the component and double-click to insert it.
The component will be inserted as an external component. The component is placed in the center
of the workspace and its sub-components (if it is an assembly) appear in the Structure panel.
To make a component independent
Right-click the inserted, dependent component in the Structure tree, then hover over the Source option
and select Make Independent from the context menu. You can hold the Shift key to select multiple
components and make them all independent at once.
The icon in the Structure tree changes, and the component is renamed <OriginalComponentName>2.
To make an internal component external
If you want the document saved in the same folder as its parent and its name to be the same as the
component name:
1. Right-click the component in the Structure tree and hover over the Source option then select
Convert to External.
If you want to save the document in a different folder or with a different name:
1. Right-click the component and select Open Component from the context menu.
The selected component appears in a new Design window.
2. Select Save As from the Application menu. (DO NOT check the Save as copy box.)
3. Browse to select the folder where you want the document saved or create a new folder.
4. Type a file name.
5. Click OK.
Whichever method you use, the component is saved as a separate file and its icon in the Structure tree
changes to reflect that the component is now external.
If the design has not been saved, you will be prompted to choose a folder no matter which method
you use.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To make a copy of an external component internal
1. Select one or more components in the Structure tree.

2. Right-click on the component and hover over the Source option then select Use Internal Copy
from the context menu.
The selected component is copied into your design. Any changes you make to the component do
not affect the original, external file.
3. Use Internalize All to make all external components in the design internal.
To save a copy of an external component
1. Select one or more external components in the Structure tree.

2. Click Save As.
3. Select Save as copy.
4. Click References.
The Referenced Designs dialog will open.
5. Click Browse and select a folder where the copies of the external components will be saved.
6. Select the external components you want to save.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Save.
Files are automatically renamed to resolve conflicts. You will receive a warning message in the
status line when this happens.
Lightweight components
If you have the Use lightweight assemblies option selected in the File import and export options,
external components will be loaded as lightweight components. Only the component's graphic
information is loaded.
A lightweight assembly component uses less memory than an object that is fully loaded. You can quickly
view the component with the Orient tools. When you are ready to work with it in SpaceClaim, you
can load the geometry information.
See also Displaying lightweight components and Internal and external components.
To load a lightweight component
Right-click the component in the Structure tree and select Load Component from the context menu.
The component and all its subcomponents' geometry information is fully loaded. You can modify the
components with any SpaceClaim tool.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To make an external component lightweight
Right-click on the component in the Structure tree and select Make Lightweight from the context menu.
The component becomes lightweight and uses less memory. You cannot make an internal component
lightweight.
Assigning assembly conditions
Assembly tools allow you to create conditions between components. These conditions constrain the
components so they can't be moved in ways that violate the condition. For example, imagine two
cylindrical components (one large and one small) that are constrained with a tangent condition. The large
cylinder can be moved vertically without moving the small cylinder, but both cylinders move if either is
rotated because tangency must be maintained.
Assembly conditions are created in the Structure tree and have the same icon as the tool. You can click on
the assembly condition to highlight the faces that share the relationship.
You can create multiple assembly conditions for your components and you can toggle them on or off, or
delete them, in the Structure tree. If your components don't fit together the way you expect, try clicking
the checkbox next to the assembly condition in the Structure tree to turn it off. An assembly condition
that cannot be satisfied is indicated with a different icon.
When you use the Move tool to move a component that is constrained to have only one degree of
freedom, the direction of the degree of freedom is automatically active for the Move handle.
See the printable Assembly constraints reference chart for descriptions of the constraints created
between different combinations of geometry.
Objects must belong to different components for assembly conditions to be assigned. Components
can be mirrored.
To toggle an assembly condition
Uncheck the assembly condition checkbox in the Structure tree to disable the assembly condition. Check
the box to enable the assembly condition.
To select all assembly conditions
Click Select all conditions in the Options panel when an assembly tool is enabled.
You can also select a single assembly condition in the Structure tree and press Ctrl+A.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To delete an assembly condition
1. Select the assembly condition in the Structure tree.
You can click Select all conditions in the Options panel when an assembly tool is enabled if you
want to delete all conditions.
2. Press the Delete key or right-click and select Delete Assembly Condition.
To highlight faces that share an assembly condition
Select the assembly condition in the Structure tree.
You can click Select all conditions in the Assembly Options panel to highlight all conditions.
You can use the following tools from the Assembly group to create assembly conditions:
Tangent Aligns two faces so they are tangent or aligns a face tangent with a line, point, or plane.
Possible face types include planes, cylinders, spheres, and cones.
Align Aligns two points, lines, planes, or combination of these elements. If you select a cylindrical
or conical face, then the axis is used. If you select a spherical face, then the center point is
used.
Orient Rotates components so the selected elements are oriented in the same direction.
Rigid Locks the orientation and position of two components to each other.
Gear Constrains two objects so one of the objects rotates in response to the rotation of the other
object. Gear conditions can be created between two cylinders, two cones, a cylinder and a
plane, or a cone and a plane.
Anchor Locks the position of a single component in 3D space.
Aligning objects
The Align tool enables if a model is loaded, and it aligns two points, lines, planes, origins, or combination
of these elements. If you select a cylindrical or conical face, then the axis is aligned. If you select a
spherical face, then the center point is aligned. You can define a ball joint assembly condition using Align
by selecting the face of the ball and then the face of the socket. The ball rotates within the socket no
matter where you place the move handle on the ball part.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can use the Align tool to move objects without assigning assembly conditions. If the objects
belong to different components, uncheck Create conditions in the Assembly Options panel before
moving.
To align objects
1. Click Align in the Assembly group on the Design tab.
The Align tool guide is enabled by default.
2. Select an edge or face of the component that you want to move.
You can Ctrl-click to select multiple objects.
The Reference tool guide is enabled.
3. Select an edge or face of the component that you want to remain stationary.
The components align. You can control the alignment animation with the Animate Full Pull
The constraint is added to the components in the Structure tree.
Do it faster
Use the Select tool to click the component you want to move, then Ctrl+click the component you want to
remain stationary. Then click Align in the Assembly group on the Design tab.
To reverse the sense of an align condition
Right-click an Align condition in the Structure tree and select Reverse Sense to align the components to
the opposite side of the alignment plane.
You can also modify the Reversed value to True or False in the Assembly Condition section of the
Properties panel.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To define an offset distance for an align condition
1. Select the Align condition in the Structure tree.

2. Change the angle value in the Offset property in the Properties Panel.
To align objects without an assembly condition
1. Click Align in the Assembly group on the Design tab.
2. Uncheck Create conditions in the Options panel.

3. Select an edge or face of the object that you want to move.
4. Select an edge or face of the object that you want to remain stationary.
Tool guides
The Align tool guide allows you to select the component to move.
The Reference tool guide allows you to select the component to remain stationary.
Examples
Clicking on the Align assembly condition in the Structure tree highlights the faces.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pulling one face of the aligned pair changes one object and moves the other.
Pulling an adjacent face has no affect on the aligned pair.
Defining a ball socket using align.
Anchoring components
The Anchor tool fixes the position of a single component in 3D space.
The Anchor tool is enabled when you select an appropriate object that belong to a component.
To define an anchor condition
You can also select the component in the Structure tree.
2. Click Anchor in the Assembly group on the Design tab.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The constraint is added to the component. If the component is selected with the Move tool, the
move handle is disabled.
Creating gear conditions
The Gear tool constrains two objects so one of the objects rotates in response to the rotation of the other
object. Gear conditions can be created between two cylinders, two cones, a cylinder and a plane, or a
cone and a plane.
The Gear tool is enabled when you select appropriate objects that belong to different components.
To define a gear condition

1. Hold Ctrl and select an edge or face of the two component that you want to define as gears.
2. Click Gear in the Assembly group on the Design tab.
The constraint is added to the components.
To reverse the sense of a gear condition
Right-click a Gear condition in the Structure tree and select Reverse Sense to align the components to
Properties panel.
To reverse the rotation direction of a gear condition
1. Select the Gear condition in the Structure tree.

2. Right-click and select Reverse Rotation Direction.
By default, gears rotate in the opposite direction to the gear turning them. You can reverse this to
simulate a belt or chain drive, in which both gears spin in the same direction.
Examples
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Several examples of gear constraints
Orienting objects
The Orient tool enables if a model is loaded, and it rotates components so the selected elements are
oriented in the same direction.
You can use the Orient tool to move objects without assigning assembly conditions. If the objects
moving.
To define an orient condition
1. Click Orient in the Assembly group on the Design tab.
Do it faster
Hold Ctrl and select the component that you want to move and the component that you want to remain
stationary, then click Orient in the Assembly group on the Design tab.
To reverse the sense of an orient condition
Right-click an Orient condition in the Structure tree and select Reverse Sense to align the components to
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Properties panel.
To define an offset angle for an orient condition
1. Select the Orient Direction condition in the Structure tree.

To orient objects without an assembly condition
1. Click Orient in the Assembly group on the Design tab.
2. Uncheck Create conditions in the Assembly Options panel.

Tool guides
Examples
Orienting two components that have an Align constraint on their axes turns the second part you select.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Locking the orientation and position of components
The Rigid tool locks the orientation and position of two components to each other.
The Rigid tool is enabled when you select appropriate objects that belong to different components.
To define a rigid condition

1. Hold Ctrl and select an edge or face of the two components that you want to remain stationary
with each other.
You can also select two components in the Structure tree.
2. Click Rigid in the Assembly group on the Design tab.
The constraint is added to both components in the Structure Tree.
Making objects tangent
The Tangent tool enables if a model is loaded, and it aligns two faces so they are tangent or aligns a face
tangent with a line, point, or plane. Possible face types include planes, cylinders, spheres, and cones.
You can use the Tangent tool to move objects without assigning assembly conditions. If the objects
moving.
To define a tangent condition
1. Click Tangent in the Assembly group on the Design tab.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you want to align to the other side of the plane, right-click the assembly condition in the
Structure tree and select Reverse Sense.
Do it faster
Hold Ctrl and select the component that you want to move and the component that you want to remain
stationary, then click Tangent in the Assembly group on the Design tab.
To reverse the sense of a tangent condition
Right-click a Tangent condition in the Structure tree and select Reverse Sense to align the components to
Properties panel.
To define an offset distance for a tangent condition
1. Select the Tangent condition in the Structure tree.

To make objects tangent without an assembly condition
1. Click Tangent in the Assembly group on the Design tab.
2. Uncheck Create conditions in the Options panel.

Tool guides
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Moving parts in an assembly
You can set up virtual mechanisms by defining mating conditions in your assembly. These relationships
are solved when you move any related part in the assembly if the Enable assembly mechanisms option
is selected in SpaceClaim Options > Advanced.
For example, load the file SliderMechanism.scdoc and move the purple component (Component5) in the
direction of the black arrow shown on the left in the image below.
When you move a component that has a mating condition, the Move handle is positioned at the
constraint and the axes that are constrained can't be moved. If the assembly constraints only allow
movement in one direction, then that direction will be automatically selected. For example, if you move a
component with a Center Axes assembly constraint, the Move handle is positioned on the axis and you
can only move the component in directions that will keep the axes aligned.
You can solve assembly mechanisms by changing ruler dimensions or annotation dimensions, and they
can be saved as groups for modification. The images below show movement of the SliderMechanism
assembly that is driven by a change to the annotation dimension.
Detailing
You can detail your designs to communicate with others or to submit your designs for review with the
tools on SpaceClaim's Detailing tab. With the detailing tools, you can annotate your designs, create
drawing sheets, and review changes to designs. You can customize detailing options to conform to
standards or create your own custom style.
Detailing tools are grouped into the following ribbon groups:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Orient Quickly display a particular view of your design.

Font Format note text by adjusting the font characteristics.
Create notes on your design with text, dimensions, geometric tolerances, tables, surface
Annotation
finish symbols, and datum symbols, center marks, center lines, and threads.
Views Add views to a drawing sheet.
Sheet Setup Format a drawing sheet.
3D Markup Create markup slides to illustrate the changes made to a design.
Press Esc, then S to end any detailing action and return to the Select tool.
Annotation
You can annotate your designs, drawings, and 3D markups with notes, dimensions, geometric tolerances,
surface finish and datum symbols, as well as center marks, center lines, and threads. When you create
annotations that are attached to the objects in your design, they stay attached, even when you modify
those objects using the Design tools. Annotations created on a drawing sheet or 3D markup slide are part
of that sheet or markup only; they do not appear on your design.
Each annotation has properties which you can modify in the Properties panel. When you create the first
annotation, it is scaled so that it will be visible when your design is zoomed to its extents in the Design
window. All other annotations use the same scale.
Annotation ribbon group
The Annotation ribbon group contains the following tools, from left to right:
Use the Select tool to choose Using Box, Using Lasso, Using Polygon, or Using Paint to select the
highlighted object.
Use the Dimension tool to create a measured dimension.
Use the Note tool to select an annotation plane and enter text onto the plane.
Use the Note Leader tool to connect a note to an object.

Use the Geometric Tolerance tool to create a geometric tolerance.
Use the Table tool to insert a table note.
Use the Bill of Materials tool to create and insert a BOM.
Use the Thread tool to create a threaded surface on any cylinder, cone, or hole.
Use the Datum Symbol tool to insert a datum symbol.
Use the Hole Table tool to create a hole table.
Use the Balloon tool to add BOM balloon notes.
Use the Center Line tool to add a center mark on any circle, arc, cylinder end, or sphere, and put
center lines on any cylindrical face.
Use the Datum Target tool to insert datum targets onto your design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup
slide.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Use the Bolt Circle tool to view information about diameter, angular, and radial dimensions for a
circular pattern.
Use the Surface Finish tool to create a surface finish symbol.
Click to display SpaceClaim's detailing options.
Press Esc, then S to end any detailing action and return to the Select tool.
Creating notes
Use the Note tool to annotate your designs, drawing sheets, and 3D markups. You can use this tool to
create and edit notes. You can also project the note onto a sketch or onto a solid. Place the annotation
plane on one layer and the note on another layer, then turn off layer visibility for the annotation plane to
hide it. You can also create circular note text.
To create a note
1. Select the Note tool from the Annotation ribbon group in the Detail tab.
Mouse over the faces of your design to preview the eligible annotation planes. (In Sketch and
Section mode, the sketch grid defines the annotation plane.)
2. Click a face to create the plane on which to place the note.
To create an annotation plane for a cylindrical face, select the cylinder's axis.
If you need to change the annotation plane, right-click and click Select New Annotation Plane
from the context menu and select a new annotation plane.
3. Click to place the note on the plane.

4. Enter the text of the note.
Click in the mini-toolbar to insert a symbol into your note at the cursor location.
Click in the mini-toolbar to insert a dynamic field. Dynamic fields include current values from a
variety of properties.
You can format the note text, and enter the text by cutting, copying, and pasting the text from
other notes or dimension annotations.
5. Adjust the orientation of the note by dragging the rotation handles.
For vertical notes, set the Stacked property to True.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To create a note field
Field codes can be included within a note. The text in field codes is variable text; in other words, the text
within a field is tied to code, so if you change a field code in your note or drawing sheet, for example, a
date format, the field automatically updates.
Some field codes are bi-directional; for example, adding the Scale field code to a drawing sheet enables
you to change the scale by editing the note, or, change the scale by changing the value from the Scale
drop-down in the Sheet Setup group in the Detail tab.
1. Click within the text of the note and place the cursor where you want the field to appear.
2. Right-click to display the mini-toolbar.
3. Click in the mini-toolbar to display the Insert Field window.
The Fields tab displays the properties available for insertion. (Document properties are those that
appear in the Properties panel when you click the top-level design in the Structure tree.)
4. Select a value from the Category drop-down to filter the properties displayed in the Fields list.
If you click Selected Object, you can click any object in the Design window or Structure tree to
make its properties available.
If you select Formula, you can enter an expression, and include any numeric fields within the
expression.
5. Click a property in the Fields list.

6. Click the Format tab to format the text within the field.
The formatting options are based on the type of the property value. For example, strings can be
formatted with upper case, lower case, initial capitals, or title case.
7. Click OK to insert the formatted, dynamic field into the note at the cursor location.
If the field is empty, check to make sure that the property you selected has a value by selecting
the appropriate object and viewing the Properties panel.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To copy a note
Ctrl+drag a note to copy it.
You can also do the following:
 Click on a note.
 The note displays inside the text box border.
 Click on the border.
 Press Ctrl+c
 Press Ctrl+v
 The note copy displays below and to the right of the original note.
 If you paste the note on a different sheet, it will paste in the same location as in the original sheet. It
does not paste at the cursor location.
 If you are zoomed in, the note will paste in the center of the view. If there is another note at that
location, the new note will paste below and to the right of that note.
To edit a note
1. Select the note to move, size, or rotate it.
If you select a single note, you can edit, resize, and rotate the note. If you select multiple notes,
you can only move or change formatting.
To move the note box, mouse over the edge of the box until the cursor changes to , then drag
the note.
To size the box containing the note, drag the handles of the note box (the white circles).
To rotate the note, drag the rotation handle (the green circle). Press Shift to snap to angular
increments.
2. Select the text of the note to reformat it.
Click a field to edit it. Changing the value of a string also changes it in the Properties panel.
3. Modify the note's properties in the Properties panel.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Circular Text
 Type - Choose from:
 None
 Clockwise
 Counterclockwise
 Radius - Enter a radius for the note circle.
 Cosmetic
 Space - Choose from:
 Model Space sizes the text based on the actual measurements of the objects in your
design.
 View Space sizes the text based on the view of the design in the Design window.
 Mirrored - Set this property to True to display the text as if it is seen in a mirror.
 Stacked - Set this property to True to stack the text vertically instead of horizontally.
 Flagnote
 Flagnote is a drop-down menu of border shapes to put around the text.
 Minimum width prevents the border from resizing automatically to fit the content of the
note.
 Position
 Anchor influences the position and size of a note within a plane. Where you anchor a note
determines the direction that the text will fill the note. For example, if you select the Left
Top position, as you type, the expanded text box flows from left to right and top to bottom.
The choices are:
 Left Top
 Left Bottom
 Right Bottom
 Right Top
 Left Center
 Right Center
 Top Center
 Bottom Center
 Center
When moving a note or circular note, the note’s anchor (or circular note’s text center)
now snaps to an edge, a sketch point, or an axis. Select the Move tool, and then select
the note’s red anchor and drag it to an edge, sketch point, or axis. The red anchor will
snap to the note’s anchor location that is closest to the drag point. The Anchor position
updates in the Position group of the Properties panel as you move the anchor to a new
location.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To fit text within a note box

 RMB Click on the note and open the Autofit drop-down menu.
 Choose one of the following options:
 Do not autofit: The text box adjusts to the size of the text and grows as you type. There is no blank
space around the note and making the text larger or smaller adjusts the box accordingly.
 Resize text height on overflow: The text always fits the width of the box. If you make the box
wider, text from the second line will move up to the first line.
 Shrink text on overflow: The text adjusts uniformly (width and height) and scales to fit in the text
box.
 Shrink text horizontally on overflow: The width of the text changes but the height remains the
same.
To adjust the text width
The Font group in the Detail tab has tools for increasing and decreasing text width.
 Click the Width Factor drop down menu and select from the width factor options.
 Click the Increase Width Factor button to increase the width in 0.1 increments.
 Click the Decrease Width Factor button to decrease the width in 0.1 increments.
To align multiple notes

1. Select multiple notes.
2. In the RMB menu, choose from the following:
 Align Lefts - Align the left side of each note box.
 Align Centers - Vertically align the center of each note box.
 Align Rights - Align the right side of each note box.
 Align Top Lines - Align the bottom of the first line of text in each note box.
 Align Middles - Horizontally align the middle of each note box.
 Align Bottom Lines - Align the bottom of the last line of text in each note box.
 Make Same width - Make each note box the same width based on the first note selected.
Some text may be scaled accordingly.
 Make Same Height - Make each note box the same height based on the first note selected.
 Make Same Size - Make each note box the same size (height and width) based on the first
note selected. Some text may be scaled accordingly.
 Distribute Horizontally - The space between each note box is distributed evenly horizontally.
 Distribute Vertically -The space between each note box is distributed evenly vertically.
 Remove Horizontal Spacing - The even horizontal spacing is removed and any significant
overlap is equalized.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Remove Vertical Spacing - The even vertical spacing is removed and any significant overlap is
equalized.
Any notes rotated differently are not affected by the above commands.
To display the text of an annotation and hide the plane
1. Create two layers, one for notes, and one for the annotation planes.
2. Place the note on one layer and the annotation plane on another layer.
3. Turn off the visibility of the layer that contains the annotation plane.
Creating circular notes

Use the Note tool to create and edit circular Note text. This text type can orient either clockwise (CW) or
counterclockwise (CCW). The circle center is indicated by a cross-hair marker. The circle radius displays as
a visual guideline. Use the size handle to size the circle. You can adjust the orientation of the note by
dragging the rotation handle. Enter or change new radius settings in the Options panel.
With circular text you can create:
 Single line text
 Multi-line text: Type the first line of text, and then press Enter to create an additional line of text.
 Formatted, single or multiple line text: Use the mini-toolbar to format circular note text. You can
change the font, font size, and style of all or some of the text; however, you cannot underline
circular text.
 A note with a True Type or a Microsoft Windows 3.1 font (Modern, Roman, and Script). True Type
fonts may be used when etching or laser-cutting in sheet metal, where the width of the character
is determined by the width and/or focus of a laser beam.
To create a circular note
1. Select the Note tool from the Annotation ribbon group in the Detail tab.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Section mode, the sketch grid defines the annotation plane.)
2. Click a face to create the plane on which to place the note.
3. Click to place the note on the plane.

4. Enter the text of the note.
5. In the Properties panel, select Clockwise or Counterclockwise from the Type drop down.
6. Click the fact to update the note.
Once you create the circular note text, you can:
 Click in the mini-toolbar to insert a symbol into your note at the cursor location.
 Click in the mini-toolbar to insert a dynamic field. Dynamic fields include current values from a
variety of properties.
 Format the note text, and enter the text by cutting, copying, and pasting the text from other notes or
dimension annotations.
 Adjust the orientation of the note by dragging the rotation handles. Drag the center cross-hair marker
to move the text.
 Use leading spaces (inserted before text or within text) and trailing spaces (inserted after text) to
position text around the circle radius as needed.
 Convert the text to lightweight text in sheet metal. Lightweight text is transparent, and is used to
represent text objects in a virtual way (so that further operations on the part do not have to recalculate
all the new graphics data dealing with text). In lightweight mode, the text cutouts seen by the user are
only recreated when the text is edited, as opposed to every time any other action is performed on the
model.
 Move the note: Simply drag a red anchor point to snap to an edge, a sketch point, or an axis. The red
anchor will snap to the note's anchor location that is closest to the drag point.
Formatting note text
You can adjust the font, size, style (bold, italic, underline), alignment of the text within the box, and create
superscripts and subscripts using the tools in the Font ribbon group, or by right-clicking the annotation
and selecting from the mini-toolbar.
You change the text characteristics for notes, dimensions, and tables at the same time.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Font ribbon group
The Font ribbon group contains the following tools:
Font Select the font family (Ctrl+Shift+F)

Font Size Select or enter a font size.(Ctrl+Shift+P)
Width Factor Drop down menu and select from the width factor options.
Increase Width Factor Button to increase the width in 0.1 increments.
Decrease Width Factor Button to decrease the width in 0.1 increments.
Vertical Text Offset Superscript or subscript the note text.
Make the text bold (Ctrl+B), italic (Ctrl+I) the text, underline (Ct+U), or
strikethrough the note text.
Left, center, or right-justify the note text.
Set the text direction from left-to-right or right-to-left.
To format text
All text within a note boundary – singular or multiple lines of text – aligns to the format you set.
1. To change the text formatting for an entire note, dimension, or table, select one or more in the
Design window. Hold Ctrl to select more than one or draw a box in the Design window.
Place your cursor at the location in the text where you want to change the formatting. To change
the text formatting for only some of the text in a note, dimension, or table, select only the text
you want to change.
2. Use the tools in the Font ribbon group to format the text.
To create a superscript or subscript, select a preset amount from the Vertical Text Offset
drop-down, or select Custom and enter a custom amount to raise or lower the text.
Creating note leaders
Use the Note Leader tool to create an arrow from your note.
To create a note leader
1. Click Note Leader in the Annotation group on the Detailing tab.
Mouse over notes on the active annotation plane to see the possible ways to connect the note
leader to the note.
2. Click a note's connection point to draw the first segment of the note leader.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Mouse over your design to highlight the geometry to which you can attach the end of the note
leader. You can also attach leaders to temporary objects.
3. For a segmented line, click to set each point of the note leader line.
4. End the note leader by clicking a vertex, edge, or face to attach the end of the note leader, or
double-click to end the note leader at any point.
The end of the note leader is an arrow unless you attach it to a face.
To insert an all-around symbol
Right-click the note leader and select All Around.
To change a note leader's segments
Drag a segment of the note leader line to move it and its surrounding boundary points. Right-click the
note leader and select Add Jog Point to create a new segment.
You can delete note leader line segments by deleting the jog points that border the segment.
To change a note leader's properties
1. Right-click the note leader and select Properties.

2. Modify the Arrow Style, Length, and Width values.
3. Set the All Around value to True to display an all-around symbol. Select False to hide it.
To attach a note leader to a virtual sharp
1. Select the Note Leader tool from the Annotation ribbon group in the Detailing tab.
2. Ctrl+click a line.
3. Ctrl+click a converging line.
The head of the note leader is attached to the virtual sharp. You can also drag the virtual sharp’s
end point, draw another leader to the virtual sharp, create virtual sharps in cross-section, for
rounds, and between an angled and straight edge.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
A virtual sharp
Attaching to the bottom connection point of a note to create a leader with a jog or shoulder.
Attaching to the center connection point of a note to create a straight leader.
Use the center connection point to create circle flag notes or BOM balloon notes according to the JIS
standard, without a jog or shoulder.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Creating dimension annotations
Use the Dimension tool to add a measurement to your design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup.
You can use annotation dimensions with the Pull and Move tools to change your design. See Driving
modifications with annotation dimensions.
An annotation plane cannot be moved to a sub-component after you add dimensions because the
references would be lost.
You can enable dual dimensions, which will display each dimension in both Metric and Imperial units. See
Units options.
To create a dimension annotation
1. Click the arrow under Dimension in the Annotation group on the Detailing tab and select
Dimension.
2. If you are creating a dimension in 3D, click a face to create an annotation plane on which to place
the dimension.
Section mode, the sketch grid defines the annotation plane.) If multiple objects occur at your
cursor location, use the scroll wheel or arrow keys to highlight each one.
3. Click an edge or face.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Where you click on a circle determines whether you will measure from the circle's center, near, or
far edge. To select the center click the top, bottom, left, or right side of the circle.
4. Mouse over your design to preview the possible dimensions.

5. Click a second object if you want to dimension between two objects.
6. (Optional) Select a dimension orientation in the Options panel. You can also select the orientation
for the first and second reference.
7. Click to create the dimension.
To create an arc length dimension
Two methods:
 Hold the Ctrl key down and click on the arc.

 Click the arc first and hold the Ctrl key down while dragging the dimension.
To create ordinate dimensions
1. Click the arrow under Dimension in the Annotation group on the Detailing tab and select
Ordinate Dimensions.
2. If you are creating a dimension in 3D, click a face to create the plane on which to place the
dimension.
Section mode, the sketch grid defines the annotation plane.) If multiple objects occur at your
cursor location, use the scroll wheel or arrow keys to highlight each one.
from the context menu. Then right-click the new place and click Set As Annotation Plane.
3. Click a line or edge to set the baseline dimension.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can use an existing extension line as a dimensioning reference. An extension line is the line
that connects the point to the dimension text. If you select an extension line, the baseline
dimension for the extension line's dimension is used.
4. Mouse over the face to see all the possible dimensions.

5. Click a point to place the dimension line.
If you select a face, all of the possible ordinate dimensions will be created.
You can click multiple points to use the same baseline for those dimensions.
The baseline dimension (0) is displayed or hidden based on which detailing standard is selected in
the Detailing options.
Automatic jog points are included if ordinate dimensions are too closely spaced. This helps make
them easier to read.
Using an angled baseline
First, establish a simple, oriented dimension. Then use one of the witness lines to set the baseline and
orientation of the ordinate dimensions.
In the example above, the leftmost witness line of the existing circle-to-circle dimension was selected to
define the baseline.
To dimension bodies
1. Click Dimension in the Annotation group on the Detailing tab.

2. Click the Select bodies tool guide on the right side of the Design window.
3. Select the solid body or bodies you want to dimension:
 If you select a single body, then the maximum horizontal or vertical dimension is created, as
shown below.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 If you select more than one body, then the dimension is created for both solids and is
anchored on the side closest to where you click on the solid. You must click on the Select
bodies tool guide before you select each solid, so you click the tool guide and select the first
part, then click the tool guide again and select the second part.
In both of the examples below, the upper part was selected near its top. The lower part was
selected near its top in the example on the left and near its bottom in the example on the
right. The mouse arrows indicate where the lower part was selected. You will see a preview of
the dimension when you click the tool guide and hover over the second part.
 If you create the dimension in a section view of a drawing sheet, then the dimension is created
on the extents of the body that is visible in the section plane, as shown below.
To edit a dimension annotation
1. Select the dimension annotation to move, size, or rotate it.
To move the dimension note, mouse over the edge of the box with the Select tool until the cursor
changes to , then drag the note.
To size the box that contains the dimension note, drag the handles of the note box (the white
circles).
2. Select the text of the note to reformat it.

3. (Optional) Right-click the dimension and select text formatting options from the mini-toolbar.
Click to select a tolerance format, then edit the text of the tolerance.
Click to insert a field. You can select a field type and format from the Insert Field window.
Select from the drop-down to insert a symbol.
4. Click an arrowhead to cycle through alternative leader styles.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can also right-click an arrowhead and select Arrow Style to select a style for that arrowhead,
or select the arrowhead, then select the style for the head in the Properties panel.
5. Click the note leaders to modify them.
You can right-click a leader and select Add Jog Point to add a new point.
6. To change the distance between a dimension extension line and its reference point on the object,
click on the extension line, then hover over the end closest to the object. Drag the red dot to
change its distance from the object.
If you cant' see the extension line, hover over the end of the dimension leader, where the line
would be. You will see two red dots that you can drag:
7. Modify the dimension note properties in the Properties panel. Modify the:
 Arrow Length and Width properties to set the length and width of the arrowheads
 Measurement property to change the measurement type. For example, you may want to
display the radius of a hole instead of the diameter.
 Precision property to change the number of decimal places.
 Upper Limit, Lower Limit, and Type of tolerance property to change the format of the
dimension and enter upper and lower tolerance values.
8. To fit a dimension within the text box
 RMB Click on the note and open the Autofit drop-down menu.
 Choose one of the following options:
 Do not autofit: The text box adjusts to the size of the text and grows as you type. There is
no blank space around the note and making the text larger or smaller adjusts the box
accordingly.
 Resize text height on overflow: The text always fits the width of the box. If you make the
box wider, text from the second line will move up to the first line.
 Shrink text on overflow: The text adjusts uniformly (width and height) and scales to fit in
the text box.
 Shrink text horizontally on overflow: The width of the text changes but the height
remains the same.
To display the annotation and hide the plane
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To align multiple dimensions

1. Select multiple dimensions.
2. In the RMB menu, choose from the following:
 Align Lefts - Align the left side of each dimension.
 Align Centers - Vertically align the center of each dimension.
 Align Rights - Align the right side of each dimension.
 Align Top Lines - Align the bottom of the first line of text in each dimension.
 Align Middles - Horizontally align the middle of each dimension.
 Align Bottom Lines - Align the bottom of the last line of text in each dimension.
 Make Same width - Make each dimension the same width based on the first note selected.
 Make Same Height - Make each dimension the same height based on the first note selected.
 Make Same Size - Make each dimension the same size (height and width) based on the first
note selected. Some text may be scaled accordingly.
 Distribute Horizontally - The space between each dimension is distributed evenly
horizontally.
 Distribute Vertically -The space between each dimension is distributed evenly vertically.
 Remove Horizontal Spacing - The even horizontal spacing is removed and any significant
overlap is equalized.
 Remove Vertical Spacing - The even vertical spacing is removed and any significant overlap is
equalized.
Any notes rotated differently are not affected by the above commands.
To display dimensions for an annotation plane
Right-click an annotation plane and select:
 Show all dimensions to display dimensions on all annotation planes.

 Show dimensions to display the dimensions for only the annotation plane you right-clicked.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Annotations with orientation changed in the Options panel
1. Dimension Orientation set to Aligned

2. Dimension Orientation set to Horizontal
3. Dimension Orientation set to Vertical
4. 1st Reference Orientation set to Horizontal, 2nd Reference Orientation set to Vertical
A dimension annotation with dual dimensions enabled in the Units options
Ordinate dimension annotations
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Ordinate dimensions for a planar face
Automatic jog points with closely spaced ordinate dimensions
Dimension between virtual points
You can create dimensions from the line between two points or the mid-plane between two lines, even
when that line doesn't exist as an edge.
To dimension between virtual points
1. Click Dimension in the Annotation group on the Detailing tab.

2. Select a point (A) as your starting point.
3. Hold Ctrl and select a second point (B).
This creates a virtual line between points A and B, which will be the baseline of your dimension.
4. Select a third point (C).
Now you have a dimension between line AB and point C:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you hold Ctrl when you select point C, the dimension is created between line AB and line BC:
5. (Optional) If you select point C without holding Ctrl, and hold Ctrl to select a fourth point (D), the
dimension is created between line AB and line CD:
6. Click anywhere in the annotation plane to place the dimension.
To dimension to a virtual sharp
1. Select the Dimension tool from the Annotation ribbon group in the Detailing tab.
2. Hold Ctrl and select a line.
3. Hold Ctrl and select a converging line.
The head of the note leader is attached to the virtual sharp. You can also drag the virtual sharp’s
end point, draw another leader to the virtual sharp, create virtual sharps in cross-section, for
rounds, and between an angled and straight edge.
4. (Optional) To end the dimension at another virtual sharp,
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Hold Ctrl and select a line.

2. Hold Ctrl and select a converging line.
5. Click anywhere in the annotation plane to place the dimension.
Dimension to a mid-plane line
1. Select the Dimension tool from the Annotation ribbon group in the Detailing tab.
2. Define the mid-plane line:
1. Select a face or edge:
2. Hold Ctrl and select a second face or edge:
3. The mid-plane line is displayed as a gray line, and the beginning of the dimension is attached to
this line.
4. Select the face, edge, or point you want to dimension to.
The end of the dimension is attached to the face, edge, or point.
5. Click to place the dimension annotation.
You can reverse these steps to begin the dimension with an existing line or point and end the
dimension with a mid-plane line. You can also dimension between two mid-plane lines.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
A dimension between virtual points
A dimension from a mid-plane line to an edge
A dimension between two mid-plane lines
A dimension to the virtual sharp of a chamfered edge
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
A virtual sharp
Creating geometric tolerance annotations
Use the Geometric Tolerance tools in the Annotation ribbon group in the Detailing tab to add a
tolerance to your design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup slide. In SpaceClaim, geometric tolerances are not
created automatically. You can enter anything in a geometric tolerance, so we recommend that you read
the geometric tolerance tooltips carefully to create intelligent geometric tolerance annotations.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To create a geometric tolerance annotation
1. Click the Geometric Tolerance tool .

2. Click to place the geometric tolerance annotation on the appropriate annotation plane and
display the Format tab.
3. Select the characteristic symbol from the Symbol drop-down in the Geometric Tolerance ribbon
group.
4. Click in one of the Tolerance fields and enter any combination of text and modifying symbols
from the Symbols ribbon group.
To create multi-row geometric tolerance annotations, select a characteristic symbol, then enter
text and modifying symbols in the second row. To combine the two rows so that they have one
characteristic symbol, check the Composite Frame option.
5. Press Esc to exit the annotation and close the Format tab.
Datum and surface finish symbols
You can insert datum symbols onto your design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup slide.
To add a datum symbol
1. Select the Datum Symbol tool .
Mouse over the faces of your design to preview the eligible annotation planes.
2. Click to place the datum symbol on the appropriate annotation plane.

3. Enter a letter.
4. Use the Note Leader tool to create the note leader.
To replace a dimension with a datum
1. Click the Datum Symbol tool .

2. Click the dimension text.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Datum targets
Use the Datum Target tool in the Detail tab Annotations group to create datum targets in your design,
drawing sheet, or 3D markup slide. As shown below, you can insert the following datum target types:
 Point
 Circular Area
 Axis (cylindrical or conical only)
 Line
 Rectangular area
The top field of a datum target is the dimension (target area size or the diameter of the datum target
point); the bottom field is the reference letter (target identifying letter), as shown in the image below:
When you create a datum target, by default, the datum callout height ratio is 3.5. This setting controls
how many times the current text height the callout circle size should be, for example, the setting of 3.5x is
for ASME, and ISO and ISO-based models use a 4x setting.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To insert a datum target
1. Select the Datum Target tool .

2. In the Options panel, choose the target type.
 Point
 Circular area
 Line
 Axis
1. Hover over the faces of your design to preview the eligible annotation planes.
2. Move the cursor to where you want to place the target.
3. Click and drag the target leader to a position inside or outside the annotation plane.
4. Click the top field to enter (or to change an existing) number or letter for the callout, as shown in
the image set below:
To edit a Datum Target:
Datum targets have three components. You can change the properties of each in the Properties panel.
 With a callout selected, you can change the following properties:

 Hidden - True or False
 Layout - If Number of Callouts is greater than 1, they can be stacked Top, Bottom, Left, or Right.
 Number of Callouts - Greater than or equal to 1
 Text Height - Based on model units
 Text Position - Inside or Outside the callout
 With a leader selected, you can change the following properties:
 Arrow Style - Choose from the drop-down list of available styles.
 Arrow Length - Choose the Default or enter a value in model units.
 Arrow Width - Choose the Default or enter a value in model units.
 With a target selected, the available properties depend on the type of target.
 Point
 Type - Choose from Point, Circular, or Rectangular.
 Point Size - Enter a value in model units.
 Circular area
 Radius - Enter a value in model units.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Rotation - Enter a number of degrees to rotate the circle.

 Hatch Angle - Enter a number in degrees.
 Hatch Spacing - Enter a number in model units.
 Width - Enter a number in model units.
 Height - Enter a number in model units.
 Rotation - Enter a number of degrees to rotate the rectangle.
 Hatch Angle - Enter a number in degrees.
 Hatch Spacing - Enter a number in model units.
 Line

 Length - Enter a number in model units.
 Point Size - Enter a number in model units.
 Rotation - Enter a number of degrees to rotate the line.
 Show Points - True or False
 Axis
 Point Size - Enter a number in model units.
 Rotation - Enter a number of degrees to rotate the line the point and leader attachment
locations.
 Show Points - True or False
You can change default settings for datum callouts and targets from the Annotation group in General
SpaceClaim Options.
 Show datum target end points: Checkbox to control whether or not datum target lines should show
their end points.
 Datum Callout text height ratio: Controls how many times larger the callout circle should be
compared to the text height.
 Datum Target default point size: Controls the point size used by datum target points, lines, and
circles. Default point size can be overridden on a per object basis.
 Datum Target area default hatch spacing: Controls the hatch spacing for circular and rectangular
datum targets. Default spacing can be overridden on a per object basis.
 Datum Target area default hatch angle: Controls the hatch angle for circular and rectangular datum
targets. The default angle can be overridden on a per object basis.
 Datum callout leader arrow shape: Controls the arrow shape of leaders connected to datum targets.
 Line style options:
 Set line style and thickness for Datum target area borders
 Set line style and thickness for Datum target area lines
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Dimensioning datum targets
You can dimension in the following ways:
 To or from the circular area of a datum.

 To or from the center of a rectangular datum or any of its edges.
 To the endpoints of a datum target line or the entire line.
 The diameter of a datum target axis by clicking on the circle.
 From each point of the datum target axis.
Assembly considerations
Datum targets only appear in the root document of the current design window. If they appeared in the
component itself, they would be shown in every occurrence of the component in an assembly. Having
them in the root document of the design window provides flexibility and prevents multiple, unnecessary
duplicates.
For example, in a table with four legs, each leg is the same component, but each leg in the table assembly
may need a different datum target, or no target at all. See the image below.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Surface finish symbols
You can insert surface finish symbols onto your design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup slide. Surface finish
symbols move along with the surface they are attached to.
To add a surface finish symbol
1. Select the type of symbol you want to use from the Surface Finish tool drop-down.
Mouse over the faces of your design to preview the eligible annotation planes. If an annotation
plane already exists, right-click and select Select New Annotation Plane to choose a different
plane.
2. Click a face to place a leader on the plane.
You can click as many faces as you'd like to add leaders to those faces.
3. Click in an empty area of the Design window to place the surface finish symbol.
4. Modify the values in the Properties panel. Modify:
 Font Size to change the font size for all the text fields on the symbol.
 Template to change the number of fields.
 Show All Around Symbol to add that symbol to the surface finish symbol.
 Type to change the type of surface finish symbol.
5. Enter text or symbols in the field.
You can press Tab to switch between the fields. Right-click and select from the mini-toolbar to
insert a symbol.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Surface finish symbols using the Standard, Standard 2, and Standard 3 templates
Center marks and lines
You can put a center mark on any circle, arc, cylinder end, or sphere, and you can put center lines on any
cylindrical face on a drawing sheet.
To add a center mark or center line
1. Click the Center Line tool .

2. Click an:
 Edge of the end of the cylinder or hole to add a center mark.
 Cylindrical face to add a center line.
 Sphere to add a center mark.
Examples
Center mark on the end of a cylinder and center line along the face of a cylinder
Center mark on a sphere
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Threads
Use the Thread tool to create a threaded surface on any cylinder, cone, or hole. Select a thread edge or
face to view its properties in the Properties panel.
The depth of a threaded blind hole on a curved surface is defined as the measured distance from the end
of the thread to the closest point on the outer contour of the thread.
To create a threaded surface
1. Click the Thread tool in the Annotation ribbon group on the Detailing tab.
2. Click the edge of a cylinder, hole, or cone.
The threads are indicated as a spiral, not circular, texture on the surface, and the thread depth is
shown when you view the threaded object in Section mode. An inner thread or outer thread
object also appears in the Structure tree. (Broken threads appear with a small yellow triangle over
the icon.)
3. Click the surface to edit the properties of the threaded surface in the Properties panel.
 Type: Controls whether threads are selected from a table or entered manually. For cylinder
threads, select Standard to select values for the other properties from a drop-down list. The
most likely values are selected by default (next smaller size for external threads, and the next
larger size for internal threads). Select Custom to enter offset values. For tapered threads
(threads made on conical surfaces) you can only use the Offset option.
 Series: You can select ISO or UNC.
 Size: Select from a list of available sizes in the series you select.
 Thread Depth Type: Can be Blind or Full Thread. Full Thread is the default for through holes
and Blind is chosen automatically when the thread placement cylinder or cone ends in a plane
at a convex edge.
 Minor Diameter: The smallest, or inner, diameter of a thread.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Major Diameter: The largest, or outer, diameter of a thread.
To change the depth of a threaded hole
1. Click on the thread edge or hole in the Design window or select the thread in the Structure tree.
2. Press the Tab key or click on the dimension field.
3. Type a new value for the depth.
To customize the thread properties
The thread data XML files that drive the drop-down menus for Standard thread properties are located in
the SpaceClaim Library/Threads directory. You can:
 Add files to the directory to display the name in the Series property drop-down when you click the
threaded surface with the Thread tool. Remove files to remove them from the property.
 Add rows to an individual file to display them in the Size property drop-down. Remove rows to remove
them from the property.
 Specify a different directory for thread files by adding a different directory to the support file options.
This is an example of the XML file used for threads:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>

<thread:ThreadSizeTable
xmlns:thread="http://www.spaceclaim.com/threadSizeTableVersion2">
<thread:Units>in</thread:Units>
<thread:ShowThreadDesignationInDiameterDimension>false</thread:ShowThreadDesignationI
nDiameterDimension>
<thread:ThreadSizes>
<thread:ThreadSize>
<thread:Name>1 - 64</thread:Name>
<thread:Size>0.073</thread:Size>
<thread:MinorDiameter>0.0544</thread:MinorDiameter>
</thread:ThreadSize>
</thread:ThreadSizes>
</thread:ThreadSizeTable>
To use the example above,
1. Copy the text inside the gray box and paste it into a text file.
2. Save the file with a .xml extension in the SpacClaim Library/Threads folder.
For example, your file could be named MyThreads.xml.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Change the text shown in red to your values.
You should add your own custom files instead of changing the default files.
Bill of Materials (BOM)
You can insert a Bill of Materials (BOM) onto your design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup slide. BOM values
are automatically populated for both internal and external components that are part of an assembly.
SpaceClaim only itemizes components; if the design only has solids in the structure tree, they will not be
included in the BOM. The QTY column in a design's BOM table shows the number of sub-components,
not items that are included in an assembly.
When a drawing includes a BOM table that contains data added with a newer service pack of SpaceClaim
than you are using, the new columns are displayed in red. This indicates that the data cannot be changed,
and can only be viewed.
You can include X, Y, and Z dimensions of components in a BOM table. The extents shown are the exact
extents of all solid and surface geometry in the component, for both visible and hidden solids and
surfaces. Sketch curves, bitmaps, and other entities are not included in the extents. Use these dimensions
to create a cut list of parts in an assembly of panels in the BOM, along with their number and dimensions.
See the instructions for adding a column to a BOM table below.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To add a Bill of Materials to a document
1. Click the arrow next to the Bill of Materials tool in the Annotation group on the Detailing tab
and select a type:
 Top level: Creates a table that includes only parent components (or parts):
 Parts only: Creates a table that includes all child components:
 Indented: Creates a table that includes all components, with child components indented:
2. The last type of BOM you created is remembered and will be automatically chosen if you click the
BOM icon instead of the drop-down arrow.
3. (Optional) If you created a view of a component on the drawing sheet, select the component on
the Options panel to create a BOM for just that component.
4. (Optional) Modify the Bill of Material's properties in the Properties panel.
5. Click to place the Bill of Materials on the design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup slide. The table
appears in gray until you place it, and it changes to black after it is placed.
To cancel, press the Esc key before you click to place the table.
The BOM appears in the Structure tree.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can copy and paste a BOM, and you can copy the contents from a BOM table and paste them
into Microsoft Excel.
To edit a Bill of Materials
 When you change a value in a BOM table, the property is changed. You can also select the BOM and
edit its properties in the Properties panel.
 Drag and drop rows and columns to reorder them.
 Select a row or column, right-click, and select from the menu to insert, delete, or merge rows or
columns.
 Select a row, right-click, and select Split Table from the menu to divide the BOM into two tables, for
example, if necessary to fit on the drawing sheet.
 Resize a table by dragging the circles at its corners or edges.
 Rotate a table by dragging the green circle at the top of the table.
To add columns to a BOM table
1. Right-click an existing column and select Insert > Insert Columns to the Left or Insert Columns
to the Right.
2. Select the new column by clicking above the first row of the column, like this:
3. Select a Column Type in the Properties panel.

4. Select a Column Value if you selected Document Property, Material Property, or Custom Property
for the column type. The values in the column will be automatically filled-in.
If you select Material Property for the column type and Mass or Volume for the column value,
then the column data will only be filled-in when a material has been assigned to the object.
To export a Bill of Materials
1. Click on a BOM table, then click its edge to select the entire table. The edge will change from a
dashed line to a solid line when you have the entire table selected.
2. Right-click the table and select Save Table As.
3. Select HTML, XML, BOM Template (.scbomtemplate) for the Save as type.
If you choose 'BOM Template' as the type, all the formatting, header, table properties, and contents are
saved to a .xml file which you can edit.
To use a BOM Template

1. Click the arrow on the BOM tool.
2. Select Template from the drop down list.
3. Select the .scbomtemplate document and click the Open button.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Place the BOM table.
Sorting a Bill of Materials
You can sort the columns in a BOM table.
1. Select a column.
2. Choose Sort by column in the RMB menu.
3. The values are sorted numerically and then alphabetically in ascending order.
4. Sort the column a second time to sort in descending order.
You can manually edit any values in the BOM but any sorts have to be re-done to update the table.
Sorting works with indented and regular BOM's.
Sequential sorting is remembered across columns. Below is an example of two sequential sorts:
1. First sort items alphabetically by name.

2. Then sort numerically by Quantity.
3. Result:
1. Rows are put in ascending order according to Quantity
2. Items with duplicate quantities are then put in alphabetical order according to their
names. In the image below, items are sorted by Quantity (1, 2, 3). Then all items with a
Quantity of 1 are sorted alphabetically.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Selecting a row in the BOM to insert or delete rows, merge cells, or split table
Tables
You can place a table on an annotation plane using the Table tool in the Annotation ribbon group.
You can copy annotation dimensions from drawings and paste them into tables, and their values will be
updated when the dimensions change.
To add a table
1. Add an Annotation plane or activate an existing plane.

2. Click the Table tool .
3. Drag to create the table with as many columns and rows as you need. The default cell size is
determined by the font size in the Detailing tab.
To edit a table
 Select the table, then drag to select multiple cells. Once multiple cells are selected, you can right-click
and select Merge Cells or Unmerge Cells.
 Right-click a cell and insert columns and rows.
 Select one or more cells and right-click to access the other context menu functions, which allow you to
add and remove columns and rows.
 Click within a table cell to edit its contents.
 Drag a column or row boundary to resize the column or row.
 Select rows, columns and cells by positioning the cursor to the left of the row, to the top of the column,
and in the internal left side of the cell.
 Select and then drag a row or column to move it within the table.
 Apply font and paragraph properties to selected text.
 Press Tab to navigate through table cells.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Resize a table by dragging the circles at its corners or edges.

 Rotate a table by dragging the green circle at the top of the table.
 Copy an annotation dimension and paste it into a table cell. The dimension value will be updated
automatically if the dimension changes.
To move or rotate a table
1. Click the outer, dotted border of the table to select it.

2. Use the:
 Arrow keys to move the table.
 Ctrl+arrow keys to move the table by a very small amount.
 Round handle at the top of the table to rotate the table.
To delete text within a table
1. Select all the cells in the table.

2. Press Delete.
To delete a table
1. Select the table.

2. Select the rectangular border.
3. Press Delete.
To modify table properties
1. Click the outer, dotted border of the table to select it.

2. Enter values in the Properties panel.
You can modify:
 Cell alignment and margins.

 Position of the table anchor.
 Number of rows and columns, column width, and row height.
To copy table contents
Press Ctrl+C or right-click and select Copy. You can paste the data from a table into Microsoft Excel.
Hole tables
Use the Hole table tool from the Annotation ribbon group in the Detail tab to create a table that
orders a design’s round holes by size (classified by duplicates) and labels the holes on a planar face. In a
hole table, holes are sorted in order from left to right, then top to bottom. This feature works with holes
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
only (threaded or non-threaded) including designs with hole patterns, but does not work with slots of any
type.
A Hole table displays in the Structure tree as an Annotation Plane. You can deselect the Annotation Plane
checkbox to hide the Hole table. A Hole chart displays the quantity of holes in your design that
have similar diameters. Once you create a Hole table, origin points, and X and Y axis labels, display as
shown in the image below, and you can create a Hole chart:
To create a Hole table

1. Click on a planar face that includes holes. SpaceClaim creates a datum plane for the Hole table.
2. Click and drag the Hole table to an empty space in the design window. X and Y axis labels, and an
origin point, display.
Holes with counterbores, countersinks, or fillets are shown in the table. Dimensions are taken from the
intersection with the top plane and the hole.
SpaceClaim uses all faces of the solid with the same orientation to collect holes for the table. Label editing
works for holes that appear on multiple faces as shown in the image below.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Moving a Hole table origin
You can drag a Hole Table origin to move it. As shown in the image below, an origin displays as a red
circle:
 To view the origin, hover over the two perpendicular axes for the X and Y coordinates (with extension
lines).
 When you select an origin, its size increases and all valid origin positions display as red origin points.
These origin points remain visible until you begin to drag the origin to a different position. As you drag
the origin, the X and/or Y coordinates data in the Hole Table immediately updates to provide a preview
of X and Y coordinates data for the various origin positions.
 When you release an origin to set the new location, the origin points no longer display, and the Hole
Table updates to reflect the X and Y coordinate position of the new origin location. When moved close
enough to another valid origin position, the X and Y coordinate display in the new position, and the
origin snaps to the new location. as shown below:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To format font text properties for Hole table elements
You can use the Font options in the Font group of the Design tab to format the font text properties of the
X/Y labels and all hole labels, as shown in the image set below. For example, you might prefer text to
display in a non-default font, or a Microsoft Windows 3.1 font, such as Modern, Roman, or Script. You can
also change font text properties of hole tables that display for either single or multiple faces.
1. Select and an origin axis or extension line.

2. Click the Detail tab, and, from the Font group, choose your Font options.
The axis or line font changes automatically to update to your selection.
The images below show samples of hole tables with different fonts used for hole labels and X and Y axis
coordinates:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Working with hole tables
 Use the pull handles on the table or chart to size as needed. Use the round handle at the top of the
table to rotate the table or chart.
 Just like a regular table, you can change the values in the Rows and Columns cells in the Properties
panel to adjust the number, width, or height of a table element.
 You can change individual axis label text and text properties (text is a single line). For example, you
could have X-A coordinates instead of X-Y.
 If you make changes to your design, select the table ( or X or Y axis) and use the RMB to:
 Show Hole Chart to create another chart.
 Show Hole Table to create an updated table.
 Save Table As a Web (.htm, .html) or XML file.
 When you change the size of a hole, the values in the table update, and the table re-orders and re-
classifies the holes and rows of the table.
 When you copy and paste a hole, the table updates to display a new row with the hole’s X, Y, and
Description values.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 After you drag a label to another position on the design, the table updates to the size and position of
the new hole. To display your changes in a new table, right-mouse click and select Show Hole Table.
 To remove a table or chart, select the table, right-mouse click, and select Cut.
Balloons
Use the Balloon tool to add BOM balloon notes. The content of the balloon updates when changes are
made to the BOM table.
The document must contain a BOM table for the Balloon tool to be enabled.
To add BOM balloon notes
1. From the drop-down menu on the Bill of Materials tool in the Annotation ribbon group, select a
type:
 Item number
 Part number
 Item number and quantity
2. Click a face or edge in the drawing sheet or Design window to attach a balloon to the object.
3. Click again to place the balloon.
To automatically add BOM balloon notes to a view
1. Right-click a view.
2. Select Autoballoon and then Item Number, Part Number, or Item Number and Quantity.
These menu options are only available when a view has a BOM.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Bolt circles
Use the Bolt Circle tool from the Annotation ribbon group in the Detail tab to view information
about diameter, angular, and radial dimensions for a circular pattern, as shown below:
To create a Bolt circle
1. Select the Bolt Circle tool from the Annotation ribbon group in the Detail tab.
2. In your circular pattern design, click the face of your design that holds the pattern member to
create a datum plane on which to place your Bolt circle.
SpaceClaim creates a datum plane for the Bolt circle.

SpaceClaim automatically adds dimension call outs, arrows, and lines to the annotation plane. You can
click on an arrow or line to view or modify each dimension's values in the Properties panel.
Working with Bolt circles

 You can create a Bolt circle for either one- or two-dimension circular patterns.
 A Bolt circle displays in the Structure tree as an Annotation Plane. You can deselect the Annotation
Plane checkbox to hide the Bolt circle.
 Bolt circle information does not update if you modify the options for your pattern, such as Circular
count or Angle.
 The count and angular dimension are separate and can be deleted individually.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Adding hyperlinks to annotations
Hyperlinks allow access to more content in your notes and dimensions. Some examples are:
 Images
 Web pages
 Word documents
 .scdocs
Once a Hyperlink is established, you can hover over the annotation text to display the link in the status
bar and Ctrl+Click to go to the link.
To add a Hyperlink to a note:

1. Highlight the annotation text.
2. RMB click
3. Select the Hyperlink option.
4. The Insert Hyperlink dialog box opens.
5. Enter an existing file path or web page link. You can also click the Browse for File button or
Browse the Web button.
6. Click the OK button.
To edit a Hyperlink:
2. RMB click
3. Select the Edit Hyperlink option.
4. Edit the link in the Edit Hyperlink dialog box.
To open a Hyperlink:
2. RMB click
3. Select the Open Hyperlink option.
4. The link opens in the appropriate media.
 You can also hover over the annotation text and Ctrl+Click to open the link in the appropriate media.
To remove a Hyperlink:
2. RMB click
3. Select the Remove Hyperlink option.
 You can also edit the Hyperlink and click the Remove Hyperlink button in the dialog box.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Drawing sheets
SpaceClaim helps you create drawing sheets. When you add a new drawing sheet to a design, views of the
design are created for you automatically. You can then add, remove, and edit these views, as well as drag
them to move them around on the sheet. Drawing sheets are saved within your design.
Normally, you will create the drawing sheet, set up the sheet, apply a format, add and modify views, then
annotate the views.
Drawing sheets and their views appear in the Structure tree. You can place drawing sheet views on layers.
You can edit a design directly while viewing the drawing sheet using the tools on the Design tab.
To create a new drawing sheet
Select New > New Drawing Sheet from the application menu.
A drawing sheet containing top, front, and right-side views appears in the Design window, and the
Drawing Sheet appears in the Structure tree. The Detailing tab is displayed. You do not need to create a
design before creating a drawing sheet. SpaceClaim allows you to create and edit geometry within the
drawing sheet itself. When you create a new drawing sheet for an empty design, the sheet contains the
view outlines, with handles you can use to control the size and position of the view. You can delete the
handles and move the view using the outline.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you began a design from an empty drawing sheet, you can right-click a design on the drawing sheet
and select Open Component to display the design in a new Design window.
Modifying one view changes the related views as appropriate.
To display a drawing sheet in the Design window
Right-click the sheet in the Structure tree and select Open Sheet from the context menu.
To delete a drawing sheet
Right-click the sheet in the Structure tree and select Delete from the context menu.
The drawing sheet window closes. If the drawing sheet is no longer referenced by any other open design
document, it is removed from active memory. It is not deleted from other documents that reference the
drawing sheet.
To change the visual orientation of a drawing sheet
You can orient a drawing sheet using the normal mouse + keyboard combinations and menu commands.
For example, you can press the middle mouse button and drag to spin the drawing sheet. See Orienting.
Right-click anywhere in the drawing sheet and select View > Flat View from the context menu to view
the sheet head-on.
Drawing sheets have separate named views in the Views tab. These are the views used to orient your
sheet in the design area. The default named views are
 Home: Changes the view to head-on by default. Can be set to a different view.
 Plan View: Changes the view to head-on based on the face you have selected. If nothing is selected,
the sheet is oriented to the drawing window.
 Flat View: Changes the view to head-on for the drawing sheet.
See Customizing views.
To edit design annotations
Right-click the annotation plane in the Structure tree and select Show all dimensions to display any
design annotations on that plane. Click an annotation to edit it. Changes made on the drawing sheet will
also appear in the design.
To control the visibility of objects in a drawing sheet
The Structure tree in a drawing displays the design components under each drawing. You can:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Hide or show a view: Check or uncheck the box next to the view in the Structure tree. You can also
right-click the view in the drawing sheet and select Hide from the context menu.
 Hide or show a component in all views: Right-click the component in the Structure tree and select
Hide in all views or Show in all views from the context menu.
 Hide or show a component in a particular view: Check or uncheck the box next to the component in
the Structure tree.
 Hide or show an object in all views: Right-click the object in the Structure tree and select Hide in all
views or Show in all views from the context menu.
 Hide or show an object in a particular view: Right-click the object in the drawing sheet and select
Hide in Selected View from the context menu. Check the box in the Structure tree to restore visibility.
 Isolate a solid in a view: Right-click the solid in the Structure tree and select Isolate in selected view
from the context menu. You can also right-click a face of the body in the drawing sheet. All geometry
in the view disappears except the selected object. This option is not available for components.
 Hide an individual curve in a component instance: Right-click the curve and select Hide from the
context menu. You can also check or uncheck the box next to the curve in the Structure tree.
The Structure tree displays a mixed visibility state for any objects hidden in a view, as shown in the figure
below.
Visibility in a drawing sheet is independent from the visibility of the model in the design window.
If you insert a model into a new document, the model appears with the visibility saved in the document.
After the model is inserted, the visibility of objects is independent of the saved document.
When you create a new view (general view, projected view, cross section, or detailed view) in a drawing
sheet from an existing view in your drawing sheet, the visibility of objects is copied to the new view.
To open a root part in the design document
Right click a root node in the Structure panel of a drawing sheet and select Open Root Part.
In a drawing sheet opened from a component-only design document, right-click the component root
node and select this option to display the design document for the full assembly. In a drawing sheet
without any views, right-click the Drawing Sheets root node and select this option to display the design
document for the assembly.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Setting up a drawing sheet
You can format the drawing sheet using a template, orient the page, and select a paper size for the sheet.
When you select the format and size of the drawing sheet, SpaceClaim automatically sets the scale, but
you can modify it.
Use the following tools in the Sheet Setup group to change a drawing sheet:
Format: Select a default or custom format, or remove the formatting from the drawing sheet with
the Format tool.
Orientation: Select a portrait or landscape orientation for the page from the Orientation drop-
down list.
Size: Select the page size from the Size drop-down list.
Scale Scale: Select a scale or type a ratio in the Scale field. For example, enter 1:1 to display views of
your design at actual size. The values listed are the two most common ratios that are smaller and
larger than the current scale ratio.
Formatting a drawing sheet
You can apply SpaceClaim formats to your drawing sheet or create your own custom formats. You can
show or hide the format lines on the sheet.
You can use different sheet size formats in a single document. The Format, Orientation, and Size tools
now have a Apply to All Sheets option that, when selected, applies your changes to all sheets in the
document. When not selected, the change is only applied to the sheet displayed in the Design window.
The option is only available when the document contains more than one drawing sheet.
To change the format of a drawing sheet
1. Click Format in the Sheet Setup group on the Detail tab.

2. Select a format from the list.
3. (Optional) If you want to use a custom format,
1. Click More Formats near the bottom of the format list.
2. Select Use a specific sheet of the format if you want to use only the format from one
sheet in the drawing file.
3. Navigate to the SCDOC file containing the format and click Open.
4. (Optional) Deselect Apply to All Sheets to apply the format to only the current drawing sheet.
To remove the formatting from the drawing sheet
Select Remove Current Format from Format tool drop-down.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Create a custom drawing sheet format
1. Create a new drawing sheet.

2. Set the orientation, size, and scale of the drawing sheet.
3. Draw on the drawing sheet using the Sketching and Annotation tools.
Tip If you insert fields based on document properties into annotations on the drawing sheet, you
can create a drawing sheet format that automatically updates when it is applied to a drawing
sheet in a design.
4. Save the drawing sheet into a support directory.
The drawing sheet appears as a format within the Format tool's drop-down list.
To create a custom drawing sheet by inserting an AutoCAD file
1. Create a new drawing sheet.

3. Select AutoCAD files for the Files of Type.
4. Select the Import onto drawing sheet option.
5. Browse to locate the AutoCAD file, then click Open.
Editing on a drawing sheet
You can edit your design directly while viewing the drawing sheet using the tools on the Design tab.
When sketching on a drawing sheet, you can:
 Click within the view boundary with a sketch tool to display a sketch grid.
 Right-click a view and select Use Last Sketch Plane from the context menu.
 Turn the mouse wheel to select a face of a solid in the drawing sheet when only the edge is displayed.
 Override colors for solids and surfaces. Changing the colors on the drawing sheet does not affect the
colors in the design.
To sketch in the active view only
Select Create curves shown only in current view in the Sketch options panel.
Sketched curves appear only in the active view. This function is useful if you want to show multiple design
possibilities using the views on your drawing sheet. If you want to work with the sketch curves as design
elements, make them visible in your design document.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Working with drawing sheet views
You can add and remove views from the drawing sheet, move them around the sheet, and modify their
properties. You can create general views, projected views, cross-section views, and detail views. These
views are all related to the view used to create them, and inherit properties from that view.
To add a view to the drawing sheet
1. Select one of the following tools from the Views ribbon group on the Detailing tab:
 General View tool to add a new, independent view.
Projected View tool to create a view projected from one of the other views on the drawing
sheet.
 Cross Section tool to create a cross-section view using one of the other views on the
drawing sheet.
 Detail View tool to create an enlarged view of a particular area.
2. Click to place the view on the drawing sheet.
3. Press Esc or S to exit the tool.
To select a view on the drawing sheet
1. Press S to activate the Select tool.
If you are in another tool, press Esc to cancel the current action, then press Esc again to exit the
tool and activate the Select tool.
2. Mouse just outside the view on the drawing sheet, or scroll over the design shown in the view
until a dashed box around the view is displayed.
3. Click the box to select the view.
To move a view on the drawing sheet
1. Select the view.

2. Drag the view with the Select tool to move it or click the Move tool and move it with the Move
handle.
Projected and cross-section views move together as a group.
To orient the design shown in a view
1. Select the component shown in the view.

2. Select the Move tool on the Design tab.
3. Use the Move handle to orient the component within the view.
Views related to the current view also change their orientation.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To modify a view
1. Select the view.
You can select multiple views to modify the properties they have in common.
2. Modify the view's properties in the Properties panel or right-click and modify the view using the
mini-toolbar.
3. Control the visibility of the view in the Structure tree.
To rename a view
1. Right-click a view in the Structure tree and select Rename.
The Rename drawing view labels dialog opens.
2. Change the following:

 Name: The name of a view. By default, the name of a view is a number or letter.
 Show prefix label: Display a descriptive prefix before the view name, such as Detail, Top View,
or Front View.
 Structure tree name override: Use the text in the area below this option instead of the name
and prefix.
The combination of user input and checkboxes are shown in a preview of the view name in the
box at the bottom of the dialog.
General views
Use the General View tool to add a new, independent view.
You can create views of multiple components and assemblies. You can move the view of a component
from one drawing sheet to another by dragging the view in the Structure panel. When using the Bill of
Materials tool, you can select the component on the Options panel to create a BOM for just that
component.
To add a new, independent view
1. Click the General View tool .

2. Click the drawing sheet to add the view at that location.
External model views
You place views of models that are not present in the Design document attached to the drawing sheet.
This allows you to do the following:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Create a new empty drawing sheet without an associated design model.

 Save an .scdoc containing only a drawing sheet.
 Add views of any external part or assembly to an empty drawing sheet.
 Add multiple external part or assembly to an empty drawing sheet.
To add a view of an external model

1. Click the General View tool .
2. Click the Browse button in the Options panel.
3. Locate the desired model
4. Select the model and drag it into the empty drawing sheet.
Some details about external views:
 The design window associated with the drawing sheet does not contain any geometry.
 The Structure tree of the associated design window contains only the drawing sheet. Hover over each
view to display the file name of the external document.
 Changes made to models in the drawing sheet update the external .scdoc once the drawing is saved.
Opening these models in a new design window shows the changes.
 Geometry created in the associated design window can be placed in the drawing sheet with the
external views of other models.
To modify a general view
1. Select the view.

2. Modify the values in the Properties panel, or right-click and select a style from the mini-toolbar.
Change the:
 Orientation to change the orientation of the view to isometric, trimetric, or any side. If you
change the orientation of a general view from which projected views were created, the
orientation of the projected views also change.
 Rendering mode to change the graphics style for the view. Select Inherit if you want to link
the graphics style to the drawing sheet.
 Scale to magnify or shrink the view. When you change the scale, the Type property changes to
Independent from sheet. You can select Linked to sheet to set the scale to be the same as
the scale used for the drawing sheet.
3. You can also adjust the appearance of your design on the drawing sheet by using the:
 Snap View tool to correctly position the design.
 Move tool to position the design more accurately.
When you modify the orientation of a general view, any views dependent on the general view are
oriented simultaneously. Other general views do not change.
To create a view of a component on a drawing sheet
1. Select the General View tool .

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Select the component from the Options panel.
As you move your cursor over the drawing sheet to place the view, the model you selected is
previewed at the cursor location.
3. Click to place the view of the selected component on the drawing sheet.
The component is repeated in the Structure tree as a root node. You can place multiple internal
components.
To create a view of an assembly on a drawing sheet
1. Select the General View tool .

2. Select the assembly from the Options panel.
As you move your cursor over the drawing sheet to place the view, the model you selected is
previewed at the cursor location.
3. Click to place the view of the selected assembly on the drawing sheet.
The assembly appears in the Structure tree as a root node
To create an exploded assembly view on a drawing sheet
1. Add a General view of the assembly.

2. RMB click on the new General View in the Structure Tree and select the Convert to Exploded
View option.
3. Move the components around as needed to create the exploded view.
This is a separate view in the drawing sheet, with component positions independent of any other
views. With independent positions, the components can be moved freely within the view without affecting
any other views.
Projected views
Projected views show another side of the model.
You can drag drawing views to different sheets in the Structure tree. When you drag a projected or
auxiliary view to a different sheet from its parent, its alignment is changed to independent. The two views
will be linked again if you drag it back to the same sheet and align it with the parent view.
You can place a projected or auxiliary view independent of the parent view. Select the view, then select
Independent or Aligned to View for Alignment in the Properties panel.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To create an orthogonal projected view
1. Click the Projected View tool on the Detailing tab's Views ribbon group.
2. Click within the view you want to use to create the projected view. Do not click a highlighted
edge.
If dotted gray lines do not appear around the view, it is not selected. If this occurs, press Esc and
try again.
3. Move your mouse to preview the projected view.
Orthogonal views are created as you move toward the top, bottom, left, and right of the current
view.

To create an auxiliary projected view
1. Click the Projected View tool on the Detailing tab's Views ribbon group.
2. Mouse over the view until the edge you want to use to create an auxiliary projected view is
highlighted, then click.
try again.
3. Move your mouse to preview the projected auxiliary view.
Auxiliary views are created as you move the mouse perpendicular to the highlighted edge.

To modify a projected view
1. Select the view.

Change the:
 Orientation Type to change the projected view to a General view. This makes the selected
view independent of the view used to create it.
the graphics style to the parent view.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Cross-section views
Planar cross-section views show interior details of your design. You locate a plane through the details of
interest and SpaceClaim creates the view.
To create a cross-section view, you must already have at least one view. You can add a cross-section to
any view type.
In some cases, you may want to only show the geometry that lies in the section plane. This is called an
Area section. In other cases, you may want to see the geometry behind the plane as well. This is called a
Total section. Both types are illustrated in the image below.
The Detail section of SpaceClaim Options also has settings for Cross Sections. Refer to the View Options
and Line Style Options.
Planar cross section views can be created in the following ways:
 As a new view projected from an existing view.

 By converting an existing view to a cross section.
To create a new planar cross-section view
1. Click the Cross Section View tool in the Detailing tab Views group.
2. Click the Select Reference Geometry Inside Drawing View tool guide.
3. Set the following options in the Options panel before you position the view:
 Create a Total Cross-Section
 Uncheck the option to set the property to Area.
 Check the option to set the property to Area.
 Arrow Orientation
 Horizontal
 Vertical
 Through Selected Geometry to orient the arrows based on the highlighted object, which
can be sketched geometry.
 Placement
 Create as General View to place the view in any location on the drawing sheet.
 Create as Auxiliary View to link the orientation of the cross-section view to the view
containing the arrows.
4. Drag and place the section line on an existing view. If you chose Through Selected Geometry,
the section line will snap to highlighted objects and orient accordingly.
5. The new view is created and attached to the cursor for placement.
6. Click to position the new section view in your drawing sheet.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 For an Auxiliary view, drag parallel to the section arrows to place the view.
 A general view can be placed anywhere in the sheet.
Alternate workflow
1. Sketch a single line in a drawing sheet view.
2. Select the single line.
3. Enter the Cross Section tool.
4. Move your mouse to place the planar cross section view.
In addition to Planar sections, you can also create Offset cross sections and Aligned cross sections.
To convert an existing view to a cross-section view
1. Click the Cross Section View tool on the Detailing tab's Views ribbon group.
2. Click the Select Section View tool guide and select the view you want to convert to a cross-
section.
try again.
3. Set the Create a Total Cross-Section option to set the view's section type property to Total.
Uncheck the option to set the property to Area. See examples in the image above.
4. Mouse over a related view to display the cross-section indicator and preview the cross-section.
The indicator line snaps to geometry in the view. Geometry in front of the cutting plane is not
displayed.
5. Click to place the cross-section indicator and create the cross-section view.
The view is labeled automatically.
To modify a cross-section view
1. Move the cross-section indicator to change the cutting plane.

2. Select the cross-section view.
Change the value in:
 Orientation Type to change the cross-section view to a General view. This makes the selected
view independent of the view used to create it.
the graphics style to the parent view.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Scale to magnify or shrink the view. When you change the scale, the Type property changes to
 Section Type to create a total or area cross-section. Select Total to display 3D geometry not
on the cross section plane. Select Area to display only the geometry on the cross-section
plane. You can select None to turn the view into a General view.
4. Select a region within the cross-section view.
5. Modify the values in the Properties panel. Change the value in the following Cross hatching
properties:
 Exclude from sectioning to remove the selected region from the cross-section view.
 Fill styles to add or removing hatching from the region.
 Angle to modify the angle at which the hatching lines are drawn.
 Spacing to modify the space between hatching lines.
 Offset to modify the start point of the first hatching line.
To reverse the direction of a cross-section view
Right-click the cross-section arrow and select Flip Viewing Direction.
To publish a cross-section view to 3D
1. Right-click the cross-section view on the drawing sheet or in the Structure tree.
2. Select Publish to 3D from the context menu. This option is not available for offset sections.
A published section appears as a root node in the Structure tree.
You can right-click the published cross-section in a Design window and select Clip with
Plane. You can also use the Move tool to move a published cross-section.
Examples
Selecting a published cross-section to clip with plane.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Using the Move tool to move a published cross-section.
Working with cross sections
 When you select and drag an individual section line segment, the segment you are dragging will snap
to and merge with other sections as it moves across other segments on the drawing sheet.
 You can create an offset section from inside the tool. To view the cross-section cut indicator (red
diamond), select the Cut Existing Sections tool guide, then click a section line.
 To create a cross-section from inside the tool, click the Cross Section tool, and then within the drawing
sheet, select a view. Use the Select Reference Geometry Inside Drawing View tool guide to place the
section line.
 You can only divide a section on segments that are perpendicular to the principal direction; at your
cursor location you can right-click on a section line segment and select Split Section. This right-click
option is no longer available for segments that are parallel to the section direction.
 To view a dotted-line preview of the principal direction of a cross section, scroll with the mouse wheel
onto the entire section line.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Offset cross-sections
Offset sections allow you to show interior details that lie on different section planes in one view.
Offset cross section views can be created in the following ways:

Once a cross section view is created, you can reverse the viewing direction.
1. Right-click on a section line or arrow.

2. Select Flip Viewing Direction.
To create an offset section from an existing cross section

1. Create a cross section view.
2. Select the Create Offset Section tool guide.
3. Click the section line at a point where you want to create an offset.
4. Drag the side of the section line you want to have pass through a different detail.
5. Continue until you establish all necessary offsets.
When you select and drag individual section line segments, the segment you are dragging will snap to
and merge with other sections.
Alternate workflow
1. Create a cross section view.
2. Right-click on the section line.
3. Select Split Section.
4. SpaceClaim creates a default offset.
5. Drag individual section line segments to the desired locations.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
When you select and drag individual section line segments, the segment you are dragging will
snap to and merge with other sections.
You can only divide segments that are perpendicular to the principal direction.
6. Continue until you establish all necessary offsets.
To create an offset section as a new cross section view

1. Sketch a chain of lines in a drawing sheet view.
2. Select a line segment.
3. Enter the Cross Section tool.
4. Move your mouse to place the planar cross section view.
The new view will be projected perpendicular to the selected line segment, which can be slanted.
SpaceClaim will find the other connected segments to create the view.
If the tool cannot find an unambiguous chain of lines, a planar section will be created.
Aligned cross-sections
Aligned cross sections are similar to Offset cross sections but the segments are rotated about a pivot
point to be parallel to the sheet. So, the width of the section view will be greater than the width of the
parent view.
Planar cross section views can be created in the following ways:

Once a cross section view is created, you can reverse the viewing direction.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Right-click on a section line or arrow.

2. Select Flip Viewing Direction.
You can modify an aligned section by selecting and dragging individual section line segments, the
segment you are dragging will snap to and merge with other sections.
Segments can be deleted. If all segments are deleted, the section reverts to Planar.
To create an aligned section with a single pivot point

1. Create a cross section view and exit the tool.
2. Select the Cross Section tool.
3. Click the Set Pivot for Aligned Sections tool guide.
4. Click somewhere on the section line to set the pivot point.
5. The Create Aligned Section tool guide activates.
6. Click somewhere on the section line to set a cutter point.
7. Drag to move that portion of the section line.
8. An arc is created to show how the linear sections connect. The arc has no length in the section
view.
To create an aligned section with multiple cutter points

1. Create a cross section view and exit the tool.
2. Select the Cross Section tool.
3. Click the Create Aligned Sections tool guide.
4. Click somewhere on the section line to set the pivot point, which also sets the cutter point.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6. Repeat to set additional cutter points.
To add aligned section pieces to an existing cross section

1. Right click on a section line.
2. Select Split Aligned Section.
3. Click somewhere on the section line to set the pivot point, which also sets the cutter point.
4. The tool creates a default pivot.
6. Repeat to set additional points.
Detail views
Detail views allow you to magnify a portion of another view to show more detail. To create a detail view,
you must already have at least one view on your drawing sheet.
If a detail view does not display correctly, make sure that you loaded any lightweight components shown
in the view.
You can change several options for detail views in the Detailing options, such as line weights and note
options.
To create a new detail view
1. Click the Detail View tool on the Detail tab's Views ribbon group.
2. Select one of the following options:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Create Detail of Selected View to create a new detail view with the boundary drawn on an
existing view.
 Convert Selected View to Partial to convert an existing view into the detail view.
3. Select the Sketch Boundary Type (circle, rectangle, or spline) from the Options panel.
4. (Optional) Enter the Scale on the Options panel.
5. Click on the view that will create the detail to set the anchor point for scaling.
Usually, you will create an anchor point very close to the detail that you want to show in the view.
6. Click to set the center of a boundary circle, a corner of a rectangle, or the first point of a closed
spline.
7. Click again to define the boundary circle or rectangle, or click multiple times to define the
boundary spline.
The detail view is displayed.
8. Click to place the detail view on the drawing sheet.

To modify a detail view
If you created a circular or rectangular boundary, you can drag the boundary to expand or shrink it.
Modify the values in the Properties panel, or right-click and select a style from the mini-toolbar. Change
the value in:
 Rendering mode to change the graphics style for the view. Select Inherit if you want to link the
graphics style to the parent view.
Independent from sheet. You can select Linked to sheet to set the scale to be the same as the scale
used for the drawing sheet.
 Orientation type to change the detail view to a General view.
You can drag drawing views to different sheets in the Structure tree. When you drag a detail view to
another sheet it remains linked with its parent view.
Displaying a modular grid
The modular grid is a coordinate system used to locate objects relative to an origin in 3D space. You can
display the modular grid on any view that is parallel to the world origin axes.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To toggle the display of the modular grid for a view
Right-click the view and select Show Modular Grid.
To adjust the size of the modular grid
Click on the grid labels (or end points if labels are not displayed) and drag.
To display grid information for a cross-section view
Select the cross-section view reference plane and set Show Modular Grid Description in the Properties
panel to True.
Change Modular grid description label to change text displayed before the coordinates in the label.
You can move the reference plane by changing the value of its label.
To customize a grid
1. Select the grid by clicking on a grid label or end point.

2. Drag the handles to expand or shrink the grid dynamically.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Modify the following values in the Modular grid section of the Properties panel:
 Color: The color of the grid, labels, and the legend axis.
 Font: The font and text height used for grid labels. Type the complete name for a font,
followed by a comma and the font height in units (mm, in, etc.). You can also click the ... button
and select a font and a size in points; the size will be converted to the current units.
 Grid interval: The distance between grid lines.
 Horizontal text location: Show labels for the bottom of grid lines, the top of grid lines, both,
or neither.
 Intervals per grid line: The number of rows between each grid line.
 Show balloons around grid labels: Show circles around grid labels.
 Show origin: Show the legend axis on the lower left corner of the view.
 Show when at least one direction is parallel to the sheet: Select True to
automatically display the grid if the X, Y, or Z axis in the view is parallel to the drawing sheet.
Select False if you want to hide the grid in this case.
 Vertical text location: Show labels for the left end of grid lines, the right end of grid lines,
both, or neither.
 Axis labels: Override X, Y, or Z with your own labels.
 Negative and positive prefixes: A prefix shown before the distance on a grid label.
 Negative, positive, and zero suffixes: A suffix shown after the distance on a grid label.
You can set the defaults for these values by changing the Modular grid options.
Modular grid properties are based on the sheet defaults and are not inherited by child views.
3D markup
SpaceClaim allows you to create 3D markup slides so that you can highlight and communicate the
differences between versions of a design. 3D Markup slides display by name, such as Slide1, as
Slides can be exported in PowerPoint and XPS formats.
Markup ribbon group
The Markup ribbon group contains the following tools:
Create a new 3D markup slide for the current design with the New Slide tool.
Display the dimensions of the previous version and the current version with the Original
Dimension Values tool.
Apply colors to the design that indicate the type of change that occurred with the Color Changed
Faces tool.
To create a 3D markup
1. Open the design you want to mark up in the Design window.

2. Select Save As New Version from the Application menu to create a new version of your design.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The new version is saved with a version number appended to the file name, and becomes the
active Design window.
3. Make changes to the new version of the design.

4. Select New > 3D Markup from the Application menu to create the first 3D markup slide.
The slide is shown in the 3D Markup panel, the design window, and the Structure tree. In the
Structure tree, the version you created in step 2 is labeled Reference Design.
5. Select the Insert tool from the Design tab and insert a previous version or the original version of
the design into the slide.
The design appears in the Structure tree, labeled either Alternate Version or Original Version. In
the Design window, the previous version of the design is displayed in the wireframe transparent
style and is placed directly on top of the new version. The Move tool is active.
6. (Optional) Move the alternate version to a new location by clicking on a Move handle axis and
dragging.
7. Customize the slide using the tools in the Markup ribbon group in the Detailing tab.
You can document the dimension changes with dimension annotations, color the faces based on
the type of changes made, and apply any other annotations using the tools in the Annotation
ribbon group in the Detailing tab. You can right-click a lightweight component and select Load
Component to load it.
8. Create as many slides as you need to effectively communicate your changes.
You can right-click a slide in the Structure tree and select Open Slide to display the slide.
9. Select Save As XPS or Save As PowerPoint from the Application menu to export the 3D markup
slides to a separate document.
To delete a 3D markup slide

1. Select the slide in the Structure tree.
2. Right-click and select Delete to remove the slide.
Because a slide is a component, when you delete a slide from the Structure tree you also delete all of that
slide’s objects. This feature allows you to organize your 3D Markup slides as you work towards creating a
design or finished assembly.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
The Structure tree shows contents of each slide. 3D Markup panel shows two slides in the slide show. The
Design window shows reference and original versions compared with dimensions and coloring for
changed faces.
Creating 3D markup slides
Use the New Slide tool in the Markup ribbon group on the Detailing tab to create a new 3D markup slide.
To create a 3D markup slide
1. Select the New Slide tool or right-click in the 3D Markup panel and select New Slide from
the context menu.
A new 3D markup slide appears in the 3D Markup panel containing the reference design. (The
reference design is the design that was active when you first created the 3D Markup document.
2. Insert a previous version of the design for comparison.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Displaying changed dimensions
Use the Display Original Dimension Values tool to create dimension annotations for the current and
original dimensions in the 3D markup slide.
To display changes to dimensions
Create dimension annotations on the new version with the Dimension tool.
The original dimension appears as a "Was" value alongside the current one, if that dimension changed
between the two versions.
To edit a change dimension
Click within the dimension and edit the text or formatting.
You can copy and paste the dimensions into a note or table.
You can also delete either the original or new value. If you delete the original dimension, and then want to
restore the change dimension, select the annotation and click the Original Dimension Values tool from
the Markup ribbon panel on the Detailing tab. To restore the change dimension to all annotations, click
the Original Dimension Values tool with no annotations selected.
Coloring changed faces
Use the Color Changed Faces tool in the Markup ribbon group on the Detail tab to automatically color
the faces that changed from one version to another based on the nature of the change.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
We recommend creating a legend on your slide similar to the following to help communicate the
meaning of each color:
New faces are colored green. Green faces did not exist in the previous
version and will appear only on the modified version of the design.
New topology is colored blue. Blue faces have changes to both the face
and its edges, but the face existed in the previous design.
Deleted faces are colored red. Red faces will appear only on the previous
version of the design.
Faces with changed edges are colored pink. Pink faces are in the same
spatial location, but are bounded differently because their edges have
changed.
Faces with a changed spatial location are colored yellow. The edges of
yellow faces have not changed from the previous version.
If you want to manually color the faces, you can apply colors to the individual faces on your 3D Markup
slide.
To temporarily color changed faces
Click the Color Changed Faces tool . Click again to remove the colors.
The colors are shown on the current slide.
Custom symbols
A custom symbol is a two dimensional collection of sketch curves and text grouped together as one
selectable entity. You can insert a custom symbol multiple times in the same document and each instance
of the symbol can be scaled, rotated, and transformed independent of the others.
Custom symbols can include:
 Any set of sketch curves that you can draw using the tools in the Sketch group.
 Fixed text that always remains the same.
 Editable text that you can change independent of other instances of the symbol.
 Leader attachment points that allow you to add note leaders at one or more points on the symbol.
 Other symbols.
Custom symbols can be attached to geometry. Symbols attached to geometry move with that geometry
as it changes.
Custom symbols are saved with the document, and can be imported from saved documents.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Creating a custom symbol
A custom symbol is a two dimensional collection of sketch curves and text grouped together as one
selectable and editable entity. Your symbols can include anything drawn with Sketch tools and text made
with the Note tool.
To create a custom symbol
1. Draw the symbol using Sketch tools and use the Note tool to add text, as needed.
2. Click Create in the Symbols group on the Detail tab.
The Symbol tab will open in the ribbon bar.
3. Use the following tools in the Symbol tab to build your custom symbol:
 Select: This tool is active by default. Use it to select sketch curves and text to include in your
symbol.
 Editable Text: Use this tool to select notes that will be editable when you use the symbol.
Notes you select with the Select tool cannot be edited in the finished symbol.
 Remove: Use this tool to remove elements from the symbol.
 Leader Attachment: Use the Horizontal or Vertical tools to add note leader attachment
points to the symbol. Click to add a note leader, then drag the leader into position. You can
drag the white circle or the red diamond to adjust the leader's length.
You will be able to create note leaders that are attached at these positions. The line segment
between the white circle and the red diamond is fixed; the line segment after the red diamond
is adjusted when you add the leader.
 Use original style in inserts: Use the original text height for inserted symbols.
 Scale symbol to text height: Select this option if you want to set the reference text height
that is used if you scale the symbol based on text height when it is inserted. The ratio between
the current window text height and the symbol reference text height determines the scale of
the symbol. If you select this option you can also change the Reference text height.
 Symbol Space: These options determine how the symbol is scaled in your design.
 Model space: Select this option if you want the symbol to remain the same size when you
change the scale (in the Sheet Setup group on the Detail tab).
 View space: Select this option if you want the symbol to be resized when you change the
scale.
The example below shows two symbols scaled at 1:1, 4:1, and 10:1. The rectangular symbol
was set to Model space and the round symbol was set to View space.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. If you want the symbol to be attachable, move the origin handle (shown below) to set the origin
of the symbol and then select one or more Placement options to determine how the symbol will
be scaled in your design:
 Allow attaching placements to geometry: Attaches the origin point of the symbol to 3D
edges and curves. You must select this option to create an attachable symbol.
 Orient placements normal to geometry: Orients the symbol perpendicular to the selected
curve or face.
 Maintain an upward orientation for placements: Automatically positions a symbol oriented
normal to geometry so that it is never upside down. This option is useful for annotation
symbols, such as surface finishes, that should be perpendicular to their reference geometry and
also right side up relative to the reading direction of the model.
When you select the first two options, the symbol is automatically oriented perpendicular to
the reference.
5. Click Complete to finish editing and save the custom symbol in the current document.
or
Click Close Symbol Tools to exit the Symbol tab without saving the symbol.
To edit a symbol
1. Insert a symbol if you haven't already.

2. Select the symbol.
3. Click Edit in the Symbols group on the Detail tab or right-click a symbol and select Edit.
4. Use the tools in the Symbol tab to edit your symbol. Refer to the instructions above for
information about each tool or option.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Using custom symbols
You can insert a custom symbol multiple times in the same document and each instance of the symbol
can be scaled, rotated, and transformed independent of the others. You can copy and paste inserted
symbols within the same drawing sheet. Symbols are saved with the document, and can be imported from
saved documents.
You can add and remove symbol libraries in Support files.
To insert a custom symbol into your design
1. Click Insert in the Symbols group on the Detail tab.
The icon for this tool will change to the symbol thumbnail after you insert a symbol.
2. Select a symbol from the list of available symbols.

3. Place the symbol:
 Click anywhere in your design to place the symbol
 Click highlighted geometry to attach an attachable symbol to that geometry.
If you want to attach the symbol to the intersection of two curves, click the first curve to attach
the symbol to it, and then Alt+click the second curve to move the symbol to the intersection of
the two curves. You can also select the Attach to Intersection tool guide, then click the
second curve to move the symbol to the intersection.
The symbol is attached to the geometry and will move with that geometry as it changes.
4. If editable text was defined in the symbol, you can change the text now.
To import custom symbols from another document
1. Click Insert in the Symbols group on the Detail tab.

2. Click Add Symbol Library.
3. Browse to select one or more SCDOC files that contain the symbols you want to use.
4. Click Open.
The symbols from the file are available in a new tab in the symbol library. Symbols are saved in
the current document only when they are used.
5. If a conflict is found between the imported symbols and symbols already in the open file, then a
dialog will open with the following options:
 Copy and replace: Replace the local version with the imported version everywhere it is used in
the current document.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Don't copy: Leave the current version of the symbol unchanged and don't import the external
version.
 Copy and keep both versions: Import a second copy of the external symbol and make both
available in the current document.
To scale or rotate an inserted custom symbol

2. Select the symbol you want to change.
3. Use the size handles to resize the symbol, like this:
4. Use the rotation handle to rotate the symbol, like this:
To attach note leaders to an inserted custom symbol
1. Click Note Leader in the Annotation group on the Detailing tab.

2. Move your mouse over the symbol and the possible attachment points will appear as white
circles.
3. Click on an attachment point.
4. For a segmented line, click to set each point of the note leader line.
5. End the note leader by clicking a vertex, edge, or face to attach the end of the note leader, or
double-click to end the note leader at any point.
The end of the note leader is an arrow unless you attach it to a face.
To convert a custom symbol to sketch curves
Right-click the symbol and select Explode.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This only affects the selected instance of the symbol and not the master symbol in the library.
To change custom symbol properties

2. Select the symbol you want to change.
3. Change the following properties, as desired:
 Attachment method: An unattached symbol is set to Free Placement. If you want the symbol
to be attachable, set this property to Attach to geometry, Set normal to geometry, or Place
normal and upward to geometry.
 Flipped: Set this property to True to flip the symbol in its plane, like this:
For an attachable symbol, set this property to True to flip an attached symbol to the opposite
side of the selected geometry.
 Rotation: Use this property to rotate the symbol counterclockwise in the plane where it was
placed.
 Scale: The size of the symbol is multiplied by the scale value. For example, if you set this
property to 5, then the symbol size is multiplied by 5.
 Text height: If you selected the Scale symbol to text height option when you created the
symbol, you can set this property to change the text height that is used to scale this instance of
the symbol.
 Use original symbol style: The original scale and size are used for the symbol.
Examples
Attaching a note leader to a custom symbol
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Custom symbols Same symbols with Attaching symbols to

Same symbols moving
attached Flipped property set the intersection of two
with changed geometry
to geometry to True curves
Measuring and analyzing
The Analysis tab contains the tools you use for measuring, displaying interference, and analyzing quality
in your design.
The analysis tools are grouped into the following ribbon groups:
Tools for displaying measurements of the edges, faces, and

Measure
solids in your design.
Tools for displaying edges where solids intersect each other
Interference or volumes created by the intersection of solids, surfaces,
and components in your design.
Tools for detecting anomalies or discontinuities in surfaces
Quality
that shading cannot show.
Checking clearance
The Clearance tool helps you easily find small gaps between faces. Once you locate gaps, you can use the
Gaps tool to repair between faces.
To find gaps between faces
1. Click Clearance in the Inspect group on the Measure tab.

2. Type a distance for the Maximum distance in the Options panel.
If the Clearance tool cannot locate gaps between faces for the setting you entered, an Information
alert displays to inform you that no areas were found. Enter a new setting to locate existing
gaps. If you enter a distance that does not exist in your design, an alert displays to inform you
that the distance setting you entered is invalid. When you enter a valid maximum distance, gaps
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
between faces that are equal or less than this distance are automatically detected and
highlighted, as shown below.
3. Use the Pull or Move tools to adjust any gaps as needed.
Options
 Maximum distance: The maximum distance to detect for near faces.
Displaying interference
Use the Curves tool to display the edges where solids intersect each other, as shown in the example
below.
Use the Volumes tool to display volumes created by the intersection of solids, surfaces, and
components in your design, as shown in the example below.
To display the edges of intersection
1. Click Curves in the Interference group on the Analysis tab.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Select intersecting objects to see their edges of intersection.
To display volumes of intersection
1. Click Volumes in Interference group on the Analysis tab.

2. Select objects to display their intersection in green.
You can also select multiple faces by box-selecting or selecting in the Structure tree.
Interference with thread intersections are not reported.
3. (Optional) Click the Create Volume tool guide and select an area of interference to create a new
solid from the volume.
Tool guides
Within the Volumes tool, there are several tool guides that help guide the behavior of the tool:
The Select Targets tool guide allows you to select the objects for which interference will be shown.
The Create Volume tool guide allows you to select an area of interference and create a new solid
from the volume.
Options
The following options are available:
 Collapse to parent component: All of the component’s subcomponents are treated as part of a single
solid when performing the volume interference calculation. Select this option to optimize performance.
Measuring
Select a tool from the Measure ribbon group to display measurements for the edges, faces, and solids in
your design.
Measure ribbon group
The Measure ribbon group contains the following tools:
Use the Mass tool to display volume information for the objects in your design.
Use the Measure tool to display measurements of the edges and faces in your design. Select from
this tool's menu to display edges and volumes of intersection.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Quick measurements
A simple measurement is displayed in the status bar when you select a single object or a pair of objects.
This measurement is displayed using the units and precision set in Units options for the current
document. The Measure tool also has a Units option to switch units for the measured values without
changing units for the document.
If the text in the quick measure area is cut off, move your mouse over the text area to show all of the text.
To measure: Select:
Distance between two  Two parallel linear objects (lines, edges, axes)
objects
 Two parallel planar objects (faces, surfaces, planes)
 Two points or vertices
 One point or vertex and one curve or edge (curved or linear) - displays
the shortest distance from the point to the curve or edge
 One point and one analytic face, edge, or curve - displays the projected
distance of point onto face, edge, or curve
 Two parallel, but not concentric, cylindrical faces - displays the distance
between the axes
 Two non-concentric circular edges or arcs - displays the distance
between the centers
Length of an object  A linear object (line, edge)
Radius of an object  A circular object (circular edge or curve, cylinder, sphere)
Angle between two objects  Two non-parallel linear objects (lines, edges, axes)
 Two non-parallel planar objects (faces, surfaces, planes)
 Two analytic curves that share an end point - displays the angle
between the curves at the point where they meet
Offset  Two concentric cylindrical faces
 Two circular edges that are in the same plane
X, Y, Z coordinates from  A point or vertex
the world origin
Displaying mass
Use the Mass tool to display volume information for the solids and surfaces in your design.
If you use the tool on a surface, it will display the total surface area. If there are multiple surfaces on the
same plane, the tool displays the total surface area for all the surfaces. To display the surfaces’ individual
surface areas, use the Measure tool.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To view mass properties of a solid
1. Click Mass in the Inspect group on the Measure tab.
Click a solid in the Structure tree or by triple-clicking it in the Design window to display its
volume, center of mass, and principle moments and axes.
2. A small origin appears at the center of volume with its axes oriented in the direction of the
principle axes. To calculate the principle moments and axes for another point, Ctrl+click an origin
to add it to your selection.
To calculate the actual moment of inertia, multiply the moment measurement by the density of
the solid.
The axis is indicated with x, y, z values; in the figure above, these values are (0, -1, 0). The first
number is the red axis of the origin, the second is the green axis, and the third is the blue axis.
To measure the projected area of an object or objects

2. Click the Select datum plane tool guide.
3. Select the objects you want to measure.
You can also hold Alt and select the object without using the tool guide.
The projected area and estimated precision is displayed in the Design window.
Displaying measurements
Use the Measure tool to display measurements of the edges and faces in your design. Any values
displayed on screen are automatically copied into the Clipboard and can be pasted into another
document.
The Measure tool is accessible in the Ribbon and from within the Pull and Move tools. Measurement
values are selectable only when the tool is invoked within Pull or Move.
You can select units for measurement in the SpaceClaim Units options. You can also modify the Precision
and Angular Precision values in the Measure Tool options.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The document origin is displayed by default. You can hold Alt and select the origin or its axes as reference
objects, and the distance in that direction (or all three) is displayed.
If you hold Alt and select an origin, then you will see a preview of the X, Y, and Z distance from the origin.
This preview changes as you move your mouse over objects in the Design window. If you hold Alt and
select any plane, then the preview shows the distance from the point under the mouse to the plane. If you
hold Alt and select a line or axis, then the preview shows the distance from the point under the mouse to
the line. Clicking on an object sets the dimensions in the results box.
Negative values are displayed for the results when you select an origin and the measurement is negative
in the direction of one or more axes.
To view a measurement
1. Click Measure in the Inspect group on the Measure tab.
Mouse over your design to preview the faces and edges eligible for measurement.
2. Select points, curves, edges, or faces to display measurement information.
Ctrl + Selecting multiple objects displays measurements between them as appropriate. The value
Min. distance between objects displays an exact measurement of the minimum distance
between the objects you selected.
Selecting multiple faces displays their total area.
Triple-click on a body to display its total surface area.
3. (Optional) Hold Alt and select a reference object.
The reference can be a point, curve, edge, face, plane, axis, or origin.
You can measure to an axis of an origin object.
Tool guides
The Select objects to measure tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select
the object you want to measure.
The Select plane or origin tool guide allows you to set the measurement directions by selecting an
origin, origin axis, line, or plane. You can hold Alt and select the origin to display the X, Y, and Z
coordinates from the origin to the object being measured or between the objects if you select two
objects. You can select a plane or origin in the Structure tree or the Design window.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Measuring between two points.
Measuring between two points, with a reference face Alt+selected, so the projected distance is appended
to the measurement.
Measuring between two points, but the origin is Alt+selected as a reference, so the X, Y, and Z distances
are shown.
Measuring the distance between two sketch points
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Measuring the angle between a sketch curve and a face. The sketch curve is extended until it intersects
the face. Angle to surface normal is the angle between the extended curve and a line that is
perpendicular to the surface at the intersection point. Angle to surface is the angle between the
extended curve and a plane tangent to the surface at the intersection point.
Measure a projected area
You can measure the projected area of one or more objects. The objects are projected onto a plane, and
the area of their silhouette is measured.
To measure the projected area of an object or objects

2. Select the objects you want to measure.
3. Select Show projected area in the Options panel to see a shadow of the projected area.
4. Click the Select Datum Plane tool guide or hold Alt and select the plane you want the objects'
silhouette projected on.
The projected area and estimated precision is displayed in the Design window.
Analyzing quality
The tools in the Quality ribbon group allow you to detect any anomalies or discontinuities in a surface
that shading cannot show.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Quality ribbon group
The Quality ribbon group contains the following tools:
Use the Normal tool to display the normal direction ("inside" or "outside") of faces or
surfaces.
Use the Curvature tool to display a fringe graph of the curvature along curves or edges.
Use the Draft tool to display a fringe graph of the selected surfaces, where each value is an
angle measurement.
Use the Grid tool to display the curves that define any face or surface in your design.
Use the Dihedral tool to display a fringe graph of the angle between two faces along the
selected edges.
Use the Stripes tool to reflect a virtual 3D cube "room" on the selected faces.
Displaying normal direction
This tool will display the normal direction of faces or surfaces in your design. The normal direction is the
"outside" of the face or surface. The normal can be flipped when you import models. Use this tool to
check and fix face normal directions.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To display normal directions for faces
1. Click Normal in the Quality group on the Measure tab.

2. Select an object, face, or surface. Ctrl+click to select multiple faces and surfaces, or select an
object in the Structure tree.
The normal direction of each face or surface at the point where you click is displayed.
3. If you find an incorrect normal, right-click the face or surface and select Reverse Face Normal.
Options
The following options are available with the Normal analysis tool:
Show face
normal using Display the normal direction using an arrow.
Arrow
Show face Display the normal direction using colors. Select colors for the front ("outside") and
normal using back ("inside") using the drop-down menus. Use contrasting colors to make it easier to
Color see which faces were incorrectly reversed on import.
Example
Displaying face normals using arrows
Displaying face normals using colors
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Displaying curvature
Use this tool to show curvature values along faces or edges. You can use this analysis to identify areas
with very tight curves that can be difficult to offset or turn into thin solids.
You can also use the visualization to evaluate curvature continuity along a set of faces or edges. Curvature
continuity is when the curvature values change in a smooth, continuous manner. You can see continuous
curves because the data points will gradually change length or the transition between face coloring is
even and smooth. Sudden changes in the length of the data points or color on a face indicates non-
continuous curvature.
To display edge curvature
1. Click Curvature in the Quality group on the Measure tab.

2. Select a line, curve, or edges. Ctrl+click to select multiple lines or edges, or select an object in the
Structure tree.
You can change the shading colors in the options panel.
You can change the color, scale, and density of the data points in the options panel.
Tip Select Edges in the selection filter, then box select to select all the edges in your design.
The visualization for edges shows lines at data points along the edge. The greater the curve's
radius, the longer the data point. Straight edges won't show any data points because they don't
have curvature.
To display face curvature
1. Click Curvature in the Quality group on the Measure tab.

2. Select a face or Ctrl+click to select multiple faces.
You can change the shading colors in the options panel.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
In addition to the face curvature display, the absolute values for minimum and maximum
curvature are displayed in the Properties panel.
The curvature with the smallest radius is shown in the maximum color (red is the default). The
curvature with the smallest radius, or no radius, is shown in the minimum color (gray is the
default).
Each line length of the fringe graph represents a curvature value C = absolute value (1/r) when a
surface or body is selected.
Options
The following options are available with the Curvature analysis tool:
Show edge curvature using
Color Select a color for the fringe graph from the drop-down menu.
Scale Slide the scale or click + or - to increase or decrease the relative size of the fringe graph.
Slide the scale or click + or - to increase or decrease the density of sampling (the number of
Density
lines created along the edge).
Select Shading to display face curvature using color. Select colors for Min and Max from the
Shading
drop-down menus.
Examples
Displaying face curvature using color
Displaying draft angles
This tool will help you identify the amount of draft and direction on each face in a design.
You can use this tool to analyze parts that will be molded. Faces shown in red (the default color for a
negative draft angle) may not release properly from a mold. You should input the draft angle you
consider necessary for proper release. The draft angle may depend on a number of factors, including
material choice and design constraints.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To display draft
1. Click Draft in the Quality group on the Measure tab.

2. Click the Draft Direction tool guide and select a face or surface to set the draft direction.
If you don’t first set the draft direction, the angle is measured with respect to the Z axis.
3. Set the Angle in the options panel.
The face highlight color is based on the angle you specify. A face will be highlighted in the
positive color if the angle of the face is greater than the Angle value and the negative color if its
angle is smaller in the direction you specify. You can change these colors in the Options panel.
4. Click the Draft Select tool guide and select a face to check its draft angle. You can also Ctrl+click
to select solids and surfaces, box-select or select objects in the Structure tree.
A color graph of the selected surfaces is displayed. Each value is an angle measurement between
the surface and the selected plane.
Tool guides
Within the Draft tool, there are several tool guides that help guide the behavior of the Draft tool:
The Draft Select tool guide is active by default. Use it to select the face(s) for which you want to
display draft angles.
Use the Draft Direction tool guide or Alt+click to select an alternate reference for the draft
direction.
Use the Draft Curve tool guide to select a temporary curve (created by the faces selected, draft
direction, and angle of one or both sides) to create the curve in the Structure tree. Curves appear in
the current layer color.
Options
The following options are available with the Draft analysis tool:
Direction Select One or Both to display the draft angle in one or both directions.
Angle Slide the scale or click - or + to set the minimum angle to display.
Color Select colors from the drop-down menus to indicate positive and negative draft
angles.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Color Transition Slide the scale or click - or + to adjust the color transition between sharp and smooth.
The higher this setting, the more gradual the transition between positive and negative
faces.
Create shadow Display shadow lines where the angle of the face is the same as the draft angle.
lines
Examples
Draft analysis with color transition low (sharp)
Draft analysis with color transition set to high (smooth)
The shadow line on these examples show where the angle of the curved face is the same as the draft
angle. The example on the left is shown with the Color Transition option set low, and the example on the
right shows the Color Transition set high.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Display a face (UV) grid
Use the Grid tool to display the curves that define any face or surface in your design. This tool displays a
visual representation of the mathematical expression of the surface. The grid lines represent the
mathematical expression used to generate the surface. You can use it to identify a low quality surface. For
example, a face may look fine, but the underlying mathematical representation is unnecessarily
complicated or poorly parameterized. You would have problems changing the face using other tools.
If you find a face with underlying problems, you can delete the face, then use the Fill tool with the Patch
Blend option or the Replace tool to generate a new face.
To view a face or surface grid
1. Click Grid in the Quality group on the Measure tab.

2. Select a face or surface. Ctrl+click to display the grid on multiple faces and surfaces.
Click in an empty area in the Design window to hide the grid.
Options
The following option is available with the Grid analysis tool:
Select Grid or Checker from the Texture menu. Use this option to increase
Shading
performance with large or complex designs.
Wire Slide the scale or click - or + to set the scale of the grid.
Examples
Face grids with grid shading, checker shading, and wire
Face grids displayed on a blended face and on a sphere
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Displaying a dihedral graph
This tool can be used to visualize tangency (or lack of tangency) between two faces. You won't see any
data points if you select an edge between two tangent faces. Non-tangent faces will show data points
because the angle is more than 0. The larger the angle between the faces, the longer the fringe lines will
be at each test point.
You can use the Repair dihedral tool guide to make the faces tangent. You should only use this tool guide
if the faces are already close to tangent. Neighboring edges are not modified to be tangent as well, so the
results can be unexpected if the faces are not close to tangent.
To display a dihedral graph
1. Click Dihedral in the Quality group on the Measure tab.

2. Select a dihedral edge. You can Ctrl+click to select multiple edges.
Data points show the angle between the faces along the edge. Longer data points are shown for
larger angles, or, variable dihedral angles
The Analysis section of the Properties panel displays both minimum and maximum edge dihedral
angle values.
Tool guides
Use the Repair dihedral tool guide to make the faces along the measured edge tangent. The tool
guide will slightly modify the two faces to create an edge whose dihedral angle is close to zero. You
should only use this tool guide for faces that are close to tangent.
Options
The following options are available with the Dihedral analysis tool:
Color Select a color from the drop-down menu.

Scale Slide the scale or click - or + to decrease or increase the relative size of the fringe graph.
Density Slide the scale or click - or + to decrease or increase the number of points along the edge
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
where the angle is measured and displayed.
Displaying stripes
This tool will reflect an infinite striped plane on the selected faces (or on all the faces of the selected
solid). This tool is useful to show how the smoothness of a surface.
Use this tool to visualize and check tangency and curvature continuity between faces. For example, two
surfaces may appear to have a smooth transition, but the Stripes tool will reveal an irregularity.
In the example above, the area marked with A has good continuity. The stripes line up almost perfectly
across the edge. The area marked with B does not have good continuity. The stripes do not quite line up
at the edge.
If you find irregularities in your design, you can repair them using the following tools:
 Tangency (on the Prepare tab)

 Merge Faces (on the Prepare tab)
 Fill with the Patch Blend option (on the Design tab)
To display stripes
1. Click Stripes in the Quality group on the Measure tab.

2. Select the face that you want to appear striped. Ctrl+click to select multiple faces or select an
object in the Structure tree.
Options
The following options are available with the Stripes analysis tool:
Color Select light and dark colors for the pattern from the drop-down menu.
Slide the scale or click + or - to increase or decrease the stripe density (the number of lines in
Density
the pattern).
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Repairing problems
SpaceClaim can import a variety of native and neutral CAD formats, but you may need to clean up and
repair this data for use in SpaceClaim and for CAE. The Repair tab includes tools you can use to repair
imported models and prepare your designs for export and analysis.
Tools in the Solidify group fix problems that may exist in imported data.
Use the Stitch tool to combine surface part faces that are touching at their edges.
Use the Gaps tool to repair gaps between faces.
Use the Missing Faces tool to fill missing faces.
Tools in the Fix group fix problems that may exist in imported data.
Use the Split Edges tool to remove extraneous points on edges.

Use the Inexact Edges tool to repair edges that do not fit together precisely.
Use the Duplicates tool to detect and fix duplicate faces.
Use the Extra Edges tool to detect and remove edges that are not needed to define the model.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Tools in the Fix Curves group fix problems that may exist in imported data.
Use the Curve Gaps tool to detect and fix gaps between curves.
Use the Small Curves tool to detect and remove small curves and fix the resulting gaps.
Use the Duplicate Curves tool to detect and remove duplicate curves.
Use the Fit Curves tool to improve selected curves by replacing them with lines, arcs, or splines.
Tools in the Adjust group help you modify characteristics of your design that will affect analysis.
Use the Merge Faces tool to combine two or more faces into a single face.
Use the Small Faces tool to remove small faces from your design.
Use the Simplify tool to simplify complex faces and curves.
Use the Tangency tool to change nearly tangent faces so they are tangent.
Navigate through the issues
The Navigate ribbon group allows you to quickly jump through all the problems identified by a tool on
this tab.
To navigate identified issues
Click the Next or Back buttons to view each problem.
Select Zoom to Fit to zoom in on each problem when you click next or back.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Stitch adjacent faces
The Stitch tool combines surface part faces that are touching at their edges. When the merged faces form
a closed surface, a solid is automatically created. You can use this tool to repair multiple surface parts that
are in separate components. Coincident faces are detected and removed before Stitch merges surfaces
into a single body.
To stitch faces together
1. (Optional) Select one or more surface parts or components.
Selecting objects before starting the tool will limit the tool's results to those objects.
If you select a component, all surface parts in the component that have touching faces will be
merged.
2. Click Stitch in the Solidify group on the Repair tab.
The edges of faces that can be merged are highlighted.
3. (Optional) Change the Maximum distance in the Options panel to adjust the distance between
parts that are automatically detected.
4. Select the Check for coincidence checkbox to find any edges or planes that are coincidental to
each other.
5. Click the highlighted faces that you want to merge.
The faces are merged when you click on them.
6. (Optional) Click the Select Geometry tool guide to select faces that were not automatically
detected.
7. Click Complete to merge all highlighted faces.
Tool guides
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select and fix
problem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select faces that were not automatically found. Hold
Ctrl to select multiple objects or box select in the design area.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
The Complete tool guide merges the highlighted faces.
Options
The following options are available:
Maximum distance The maximum distance between faces that is automatically detected by the tool.
Repair gaps
The Gaps tool removes gaps between faces. These gaps are usually found on parts imported from other
CAD systems when the native format allows faces to fit together loosely.
This tool only works for edges that are paired. Paired edges are edges that are within the maximum
distance along their length or that share an end point and are within the maximum angle you set in the
tool’s options. Use the Missing Faces tool if you need to repair a part with edges that are not paired.
When a gap is adjacent to a larger hole, this tool only repairs the gap and not the hole.
To remove gaps
1. Click Gaps in the Solidify group on the Repair tab.
The tool will automatically detect and highlight gaps in an object, as shown in the image above.
2. Select the object(s) you want to change:

 Use the Select Problem tool guide to select highlighted areas that you want to change. The
cursor will change to a hand when you move the mouse over a problem area. This tool guide is
active by default.
 Use the Select Geometry tool guide to select edges that were not automatically detected.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Maximum Angle: The maximum angle between any neighboring edge pairs in the potential
missing face edge loop.
 Maximum Distance: The maximum distance between any pair of edges in the potential
4. Use the controls in the Navigate ribbon group to view each problem one at a time before you fix
it.
 Click Next or Previous to step through and highlight each identified problem.
 Select Zoom to Fit if you want to automatically zoom in on the problem in the design area
when you click Next or Previous.
SpaceClaim adjusts neighboring faces to remove the highlighted gaps.
Tool guides
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select problem
areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select edges that were not automatically found. Hold
Ctrl to select multiple edges or box select in the design area.
The Complete tool guide fills faces between all highlighted edges.
Options
Maximum The maximum angle between any neighboring edge pairs in the potential missing face
angle edge loop.
Maximum The maximum distance between any pair of edges in the potential missing face edge
distance loop.
Find and correct missing faces
The Missing Faces tool automatically detects and fills missing faces on an object. This tool should be
used to find missing faces on imported designs.
Use the Fill tool to fill faces when you know where the edges of the new face should be. Use the Missing
Faces tool to identify missing faces and fill them automatically or choose which missing faces you want
created.
As a precaution, if your design includes any open edge loops, first be certain that the loop(s) are not
simply imported parts that may have been designed as a surface body with open regions.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To find missing faces
1. Click Missing Faces in the Solidify group on the Repair tab.
The tool will automatically detect and highlight missing faces, as shown in the image above.

Use the Select Problem tool guide to select highlighted areas that you want to change. The
active by default.
 Use the Select Geometry tool guide to select edge loops that were not automatically
detected.
 Minimum Angle: The minimum angle between all neighboring edge pairs in the potential
 Minimum Distance: The minimum distance between all of edges in the potential missing face
edge loop.
The tool looks for missing faces that meet both of the minimum measurements.
 Fill: Fix the missing face by extending neighboring faces until they intersect.
 Patch: Fix the missing face by creating a new face through the bounding edges of neighboring
faces. To repair edge loops, select Patch and insert a new blended face. This new face will
include each relevant tangent neighboring face, enabling you to close any selected edge loops
with the smoothest possible inside surface, thereby creating a more realistic design..
 Try both: Fix the missing face by extending neighboring faces. If that does not
work, SpaceClaim will attempt to fill by creating a patch.
 Allow multiple faces: Fix a hole in the surface with two or more missing faces.
4. Use the controls in the Navigate ribbon group to view each problem one at a time before you fix it.
SpaceClaim creates a new face using the method you selected in the Options panel.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Tool guides
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select edges between faces that were not
automatically found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple edges or box select in the design area.
The Complete tool guide creates new faces in areas that are highlighted.
Options
Minimum The minimum angle between all neighboring edge pairs in the potential missing face
angle edge loop.
Minimum The minimum distance between all of edges in the potential missing face edge loop.
distance
Fill Fix the missing face by extending neighboring faces until they intersect.
Patch Fix the missing face by creating a new face through the bounding edges of neighboring
faces.
Faces with a high level of detail on a boundary may have one or more short edges. To
make a smooth patch on a boundary, short edges are automatically removed when
patching.
Try both Fix the missing face by extending neighboring faces. If that does not work, SpaceClaim
will attempt to fill by creating a patch.
Allow multiple Fix a hole in the surface with two or more missing faces.
faces
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Repair split edges
The Split Edges tool detects and merges coincident edges that do not mark the boundaries of new faces.
To consolidate split edges
1. Click Split Edges in the Fix group on the Repair tab.
The tool will automatically detect and highlight split edges, as shown in the image above.

active by default.
it.
SpaceClaim consolidates the highlighted areas.
Tool guides
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select points that were not automatically found. Hold
Ctrl to select multiple points or box select in the design area.
The Complete tool guide consolidates all highlighted areas.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Repair inexact edges
The Inexact Edges tool finds and repairs edges that have been inaccurately defined and do not meet
precisely. These types of edges are usually found in designs imported from other CAD systems,
particularly from conceptual design systems.
To repair inexact edges
1. Click Inexact Edges in the Fix group on the Repair tab.
The tool will automatically detect and highlight gaps in an object, as shown in the image above.

active by default.
it.
SpaceClaim redefines the edges so they meet precisely.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the editing process:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Complete tool guide recalculates all the highlighted edges to increase the precision between
faces or surfaces.
Extra edges
The Extra Edges tool works like Merge Faces but operates on edges. Instead of merging two faces
by selecting the faces, you select the edges between faces to remove the extra edge and merge the faces.
You should only merge faces that are tangent or close to tangent; otherwise, the results may not be what
you expect.
The Extra Edges tool is only intended to be used as preparation for analysis. Merging faces simplifies
the model by removing edges and makes the model more difficult to modify.
Tool guides
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Complete tool guide merges the highlighted faces.
To remove edges
1. Open a model which needs edges removed.

2. Click the Extra Edges tool.
3. Edges which can be removed are highlighted.
4. Click the Complete tool guide to remove all edges at once.
5. You can also select areas to be excluded from fixing.
SpaceClaim removes the edges and merges the faces.
Duplicates
The Duplicates tool detects and fixes duplicate faces. SpaceClaim highlights the duplicates and will
remove them all, or you can select duplicates to exclude from being fixed.
Tool guides
The Complete tool guide removes the highlighted faces.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To find and fix duplicate faces
1. Open a model which needs faces removed.

2. Click the Duplicates tool.
3. Duplicate faces which can be removed are highlighted.
4. Click the Complete tool guide to remove all duplicates at once.
5. You can also select areas to be excluded from fixing.
SpaceClaim removes the duplicate faces.
Merge faces
The Merge Faces tool replaces two or more neighboring faces with a single new face that closely fits the
original faces. Use this tool to simplify a model before you export it for analysis. Merging faces can result
in a smoother mesh on the solid.
You should only merge faces that are tangent or close to tangent; otherwise, the results may not be what
you expect.
You can't select edges when using the Merge Faces tool. You should use the Fill tool on the Design tab
when you need to select an edge and a face to fill in a missing face. The Missing Faces and Gaps tools on
the Prepare tab also perform this function.
The merge faces tool is only intended to be used as preparation for analysis. Merging faces simplifies
the model by removing edges and makes the model more difficult to modify.
To merge faces
1. Click Merge Faces in the Adjust group on the Repair tab.

2. Select two or more faces you want to merge.
3. If you want to retain tangency between the new face and an existing face, click on the Maintain
Tangency tool guide and select the face with which you want to retain tangency.
SpaceClaim replaces the selected faces with a new face.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Tool guides
The Select tool guide is active by default. You can also select by drawing a box in the design
window.
The Maintain Tangency tool guide allows you to select faces with which you want to retain
tangency. The new face will be tangent to the face(s) you select. You can also use Alt+click to select
faces for tangency.
The Complete tool guide replaces the selected faces with a single face.
Simplify a design
This tool examines a design and simplifies complex faces and curves into planes, cones, cylinders, lines,
arcs, etc. This automates the one-by-one Simplify capability found in the Replace tool.
To simplify a design
1. (Optional) Select the faces you want to simplify.
You may want to pre-select faces on large designs because it can be easier to simplify a region at
a time.
2. Click Simplify in the Adjust group on the Repair tab.

3. (Optional) Click the Select Geometry tool guide to select faces to simplify that aren't
automatically detected.
4. Click the Select Problem tool guide and click on a highlighted face to simplify the face or click
the Complete tool guide to simplify all highlighted faces.
Tool guides
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select faces and curves that were not automatically
found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple objects or box select in the design area.
The Complete tool guide replaces all the highlighted objects with simplified faces and curves.
Remove small faces
The Small Faces tool detects and removes small and sliver faces in your design. You may want to remove
these faces before you export the design for analysis if they will have a negligible impact on the analysis
accuracy but a significant impact on its speed.
If the small face is tangent to a neighboring face, the tool will merge the small face with the neighboring
face. If no neighboring face is tangent, the tool will extend neighboring faces to remove the small face.
To remove small and sliver faces
1. Click Small Faces in the Adjust group on the Repair tab.
The tool automatically finds small faces in the active component and highlights them in the
design area, as shown in the image above.

Use the Select Problem tool guide to select highlighted areas that you want to adjust. The
active by default.
 Use the Select Geometry tool guide to select faces that were not automatically detected.
3. Set the Maximum area and Maximum width in the Options panel. Faces that are smaller than
the maximum area and thinner than the maximum width will be found and highlighted for
adjustment.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
it.
SpaceClaim will remove the Selected faces.
Tool guides
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. You must select objects that you want to adjust
in the Structure tree while this tool is active.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select small and sliver faces that were not
automatically detected. The face will only be removed if it is smaller than the maximum area and/or
width in the Options panel.
The Complete tool guide removes all the faces that are highlighted.
Options
Maximum area Faces that are smaller than the maximum or area will be found and highlighted for
adjustment.
Maximum Faces that are thinner than the maximum width will be found and highlighted for
width adjustment.
Examples
Filling neighboring faces that are both selected at the same time, because they cannot be removed
individually
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Adjust tangency
The Tangency tool detects edges between faces that are close to tangent and adjusts the faces so they
are tangent.
If a faces is near tangent with more than one neighboring face, you will get the best results if you make all
the edges tangent at the same time.
To adjust tangency between faces
1. Click Tangency in the Adjust group on the Repair tab.
The tool automatically finds near-tangent faces in the active component and highlight their edges
in the design area, as shown in the image above.

Use the Select Problem tool guide to select highlighted areas that you want to change. The
active by default.
 Use the Select Geometry tool guide to select edges between faces that were not
automatically detected.
3. Set the Maximum angle in the Options panel.
The tool will automatically detect near-tangent faces again when you change this value. For best
results, keep this angle as small as possible.
it.
SpaceClaim adjusts the highlighted edges so their adjacent faces are tangent.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Tool guides
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select edges between faces that were not
automatically found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple edges or box select in the design area. When you
hover over an edge, you can see the two faces that would be affected by the change.
The Complete tool guide makes all highlighted edges tangent.
Options
Maximum The maximum angle to detect for tangency. For best results, keep this angle as small as
angle possible.
Curve gaps
The Curve Gaps tool finds any gaps between curves and closes them. It can extend and/or move lines to
close the gaps.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Tool guides
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select geometry that were not automatically found.
Hold Ctrl to select multiple objects or box select in the design area.
The Complete tool repairs the gaps.
To fix curve gaps
1. Click the Curve Gaps tool in the Repair tab Fix Curves group.
2. Set the Maximum distance option or keep the default value
3. Gaps within the maximum distance tolerance are highlighted.
4. Click on problem areas to fix them or click the Complete tool guide.
Small curves
The Small Curves tool finds any curves smaller than a specified length.
Tool guides
The Complete tool removes the small curves and repairs the gaps they leave.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To find small curves
1. Click the Small Curves tool in the Repair tab Fix Curves group.
2. Set the Maximum length option or keep the default value.
3. Curves within the maximum length tolerance are highlighted.
4. Click the problem areas to fix them or click the Complete tool guide.
Duplicate curves
The Duplicate Curves tool finds any overlapping curves and deletes any extra curves.
Tool guides
The Complete tool removes the duplicate curves.
To fix duplicate curves
1. Click the Duplicate Curves tool in the Repair tab Fix Curves group.
2. Duplicate curves are highlighted.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Fit curves
The Fit Curves tool attempts to create fewer and better curves to replace selected curves which may
not be continuous or tangent. You can also replace a curve with simple line segments as in the example
above.
Tool guides
The Complete tool fixes the curves.
To fix and replace small curves
1. Click the FitCurves tool in the Repair tab Fix Curves group.
2. Select or box-select the curves you want to fix.
3. Set the Maximum distance option to determine the curves that will be found and how closely new
curves will follow old curves.
4. Choose Fix Options to set the types of replacement curves to use.
 Lines
 Arcs
 Splines
5. Small curves are highlighted and new curve start and end points are indicated.
Preparing designs for analysis
Use the tools in the Define group to create or subdivide bodies for analysis.
Use the Volume Extract tool to create a solid based on an enclosed region within a part.
Use the Midsurface tool to create a surface midway between two offset faces.
Use the Split by Plane tool to split a part based on a plane.
Use the Spot Weld tool to define points on two faces that represent weld points.
Use the Imprint tool to imprint coincident faces.
Tools in the Remove group help you easily remove elements to simplify your designs.
Use the Rounds tool to remove rounded edges from a design.
Use the Faces tool to remove features from a design.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Use the Interference tool to merge parts that clash.
Create and edit beam objects with the tools in the Beams group.
Use the Profiles tool to select a profile for a beam object.
Use the Create tool to define a beam using a profile from the library.
Use the Extract tool to define a beam and profile from a solid.
Use the Orient tool to change the orientation or axis of the beam.
Use the Display tool to change how beams are displayed.
Extracting volume
Use the Volume Extract tool in the Define group on the Prepare tab to create a solid based on the
volume enclosed by a single body or set of bodies. A solid named Volume is created in the Structure tree,
and the bodies used to generate the volume are temporarily transparent when the volume is created.
If a surface intersects all of the edges you select to enclose the region, it will be used to cap the created
volume. You can create cleaner caps by placing surfaces at each of the edges you use to define the
enclosed region.
If an edge will be removed when you use the Volume Extract tool, that edge will flash red and you will
receive a warning message. This can happen when you select a capping edge that will be removed
when it is merged with the rest of the model. The highlight identifies the problem so you can pick a
different edge.
To create a volume body
1. Click the Volume Extract tool in the Define group on the Prepare tab.
2. Click the Select Edges tool guide to select the edge loops that enclose the volume of the area.
You can double-click to select more than one contiguous edge. You can also click a selected edge
to deselect it. Select edge loops only that you intended to use to enclose the volume area. If you
hover over a face that contains internal edge loops, the edge loops are highlighted. Click the face
to select the highlighted edge loops.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. If necessary, click the Select Cap Faces tool guide to cap a face.
4. (Optional): Select the Preview inside faces checkbox to activate the Preview slider. Your model
immediately updates to paint a preview of the inner faces shown in red at 100%. Move the slider
to the left and right to preview the faces, and see a progression of how the faces were captured.
When previewing the faces, all Select tools and context menu Select tools, as well as all Volume
Extract tool guides, are disabled until the Preview checkbox is turned off.
5. Click the Select Seed Face tool guide and select a face inside the volume area. The Select Seed
Face tool guide is used to select a face to determine the inside of the enclosed volume. You only
need to use this tool guide if the Volume Extract tool fails to correctly identify the inside of the
volume.
SpaceClaim creates a surface part based on the volume you defined.
To update the volume body
Right-click the volume part (named Volume by default) in the Structure tree. Select one of the following
commands:
 Regenerate Volume Body as Created updates the volume body based on objects that were visible
when the volume was created (regardless of their current visibility). Use this option for simple
regeneration.
 Regenerate Volume Body in Context updates the volume body based on objects that are currently
visible in the design area. Use this option to remove bodies from the volume calculation.
Tool guides
The Select Edges tool guide selects edge loops that enclose a region. Edges are used to stop the
propagation of face selection, emanating face-wise outward, starting at the selected seeds.
The Select Faces tool guide activates by default when you select the Volume Extract tool, and
selects faces whose edges seal an enclosed region. This is a shortcut to selecting all the edges that
are detected in a face. You can Ctrl+ Select multiple seed faces, and then choose to click on a
different tool guide. Once you create a volume, the Select Faces tool guide resets by default.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Select Cap Faces tool guide selects optional capping faces. This is important when an internal
edge loop is either not simply fillable, or when you want some non-standard fill geometry to be
created.
The Select Seed Face tool guide selects a face that lies within the volume you want to enclose. If
this is not chosen, then SpaceClaim chooses an arbitrary face to start from, and test whether any
bounded volumes are created. If they are not, another face will automatically be selected and the
algorithm will re-start. Select a face here to save this iteration time.
The Complete tool guide creates the volume solid based on the edges and seed face you select.
Creating midsurface faces
This tool creates a surface midway between two offset faces. The midsurface faces are automatically
extended or trimmed to adjacent faces, and the distance between the faces is stored as a thickness
property. You can use these surfaces for FE analysis.
Color highlighting shows you face pairs that have been selected, as shown below. The midsurface face will
be offset from the cyan faces. Green indicates that a face is paired with a cyan face. Unselected faces and
faces without offsets are shown in the original color.
The thickness of the original model face offsets are stored as a property named Thickness in the
Midsurface section of the Properties panel. This is a face property, so you must select the face in the
Design window rather than in the Structure tree, even if it is a single face. You can change this property,
and it is included in the ANSYS data when it is sent out to ANSYS via the SpaceClaim add-in.
The Midsurface tool detects and removes small faces of midsurfaces that are created when an edge is
equal to half of the part thickness.
If the Midsurface tool finds missing faces because neither side can be offset, you will receive an error
message in the error box that lists the faces. If the tool fails to create midsurface parts, the problem faces
or edges are highlighted.
Midsurfaces inherit the material properties of their parent components, but you can change the material
properties for the midsurface object.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To create midsurface faces by selecting offset pairs
1. Click Midsurface in the Define group on the Prepare tab.

2. Select the Use selected faces option in the Options panel.
This option automatically detects all offset face pairs on a body with one or more offset distances.
3. Click on a face for which you want to create a midsurface.

4. Click on a second face that makes an offset pair with the first face. All face pairs that have the
same offset distance will be added to the selection.
5. Click detected face pairs to remove them or click undetected face pairs to add them.
Two faces may be detected as a pair because they have the same offset distance as the face pairs
to be midsurfaced. Click on the blue face to remove the pair from selection.
A face pair that should be midsurfaced may not be detected because its offset pair is not a
perfect offset of the first face. Click on the face you want offset to add it to the selection. Its
midsurface will be offset using the thickness of neighboring detected face pairs.
6. (Optional) Click the Select Faces tool guide or hold the Ctrl key and select additional face pairs
with a different offset distance.
When you add face pairs, all face pairs with the same offset distance will be added to the
selection.
7. Click the Complete tool guide when you are finished selecting faces.
When you successfully create a midsurface, the solid will become semi-transparent and the
surface will be opaque until you select a different tool or clear your selection.
Midsurface bodies are created in a component in the Structure tree, and are named using the
name of the original object and appended with MidsurfaceN, where N is a unique number.
To create midsurface faces based on an offset range

2. Select Use range in the Options panel.
The face pairs with offset distances within the range are automatically detected. If you have face
pairs selected, the range will automatically change to include the offset distance.
3. Click the body for which you want to detect offset face pairs.
4. Change the Minimum thickness and Maximum thickness values in the Options panel as
needed.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Face pairs within this range will be selected; face pairs outside this range will be removed from
the selection.
5. Click the Complete tool guide when you are finished selecting faces.
To add or remove faces from selection
 To add or remove a detected face pair, click either face in the pair.
 The midsurface distance will be offset from this face the same distance as adjacent faces, regardless of
any potential offset pair for this face.
 If the face has an offset pair that was previously selected, the pair will be deselected.
 You may need to remove a face from selection if it is paired incorrectly.
To change the thickness of a midsurface face
1. Select the midsurface face in the Design window.

2. Change the Thickness property in the Properties panel.
To make a midsurface body from a regular open surface body
1. Select the surface in the Structure tree.

2. Change the Thickness property in the Properties panel.
Tool guides
The Select Faces tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select a pair of
offset faces, and all other face pairs with the same offset distance are automatically detected.
The Add/Remove Faces tool guide allows you to select additional faces to offset or remove
detected face pairs from the selection.
The Swap Sides tool guide allows you to switch the face pairs. You may need to do this when
you detect pairs with more than one offset distance, and the offset relationships are incorrectly
detected.
The Complete tool guide creates the midsurface faces.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Options
Use selected faces Select this option to create midsurfaces for only the faces you select.
Use range Select this option to create midsurfaces on all faces in the specified thickness range.
Thickness tolerance Change the value of this option to detect offset spline faces with an offset value
within the tolerance amount.
Create midsurfaces Select Same component to create the midsurfaces in the same component as the
in part you selected for midsurfacing. Select Active component to create the
midsurfaces in the active component.
Group midsurfaces Select this option to create midsurfaces in a new sub-component. Deselect the
option to create the midsurface objects in the component you select in the option
above (same component or active component).
Examples
Selecting an additional face pair with the Use selected faces option and the Select Faces tool guide. All
face pairs with the same offset are added to the selection.
Removing a face that was automatically detected but not desired as a midsurface pair
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The structure created for midsurface parts
Defining weld points
The Spot Weld tool creates points on two faces that represent weld points. Each spot weld consists of two
points: one on each face that is to be welded together. Each point must lie on a face or edge. For export
to ANSYS, each point must lie on a different solid or surface part.
When spot weld points are found on another body, the set does not include points with mates within the
same body, as shown below. Weld points in a set that have mates are blue and points that do not have
mates are gray
Spot welds are updated with changes to the guiding edges or base faces.
 If a guiding edge disappears, the points created along it are removed.

 If a mate face moves out of the search range the weld point, the pairs to that mate face will disappear.
 If the mate face moves back into the range, the point pairs will reappear.
 If pairs cannot be found for all of the points on the base face, the spot weld is marked in the Structure
tree with an error icon showing that it is no longer valid.
Dimensions for spot weld point patterns are displayed in the Design window. These dimensions look the
same as dimensions for other patterns.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Exporting to ANSYS
Spot welds defined for the design can be exported to ANSYS. ANSYS Design Modeler and ANSYS
Workbench recognize the weld points with the following limitations:
 Only points with mates can be used for simulation.

 You may place weld points between multi-body parts if the two bodies belong to different parts. Spot
welds defined between bodies in the same part are not transferred to simulation.
 You can approximate seam welds by placing weld points on the guiding edge with an offset of zero, if
no mating face is found on either side of the base face.
 SpaceClaim supports spot welds of more than two weld points (more than two components are welded
together at one location), but Simulation does not; Simulation ignores any weld points after the first
two supplied.
If a spot weld joint in SpaceClaim contains a spot weld with more than two weld points, then a chain of
pairs of weld points is transferred to Simulation as separate spot welds, and each two-point spot weld
is listed separately under the Connections node. For example, if a single SpaceClaim spot weld
connects parts A-B-C-D, this is transferred as three separate spots welds: A-B, B-C, and C-D.
To define weld points
1. Click Spot Weld in the Define group on the Prepare tab.

2. Select base face.
This is the face or faces on which the weld points will be defined. You should select a single face
or a chain of tangent faces.
3. Click the Select guiding edges tool guide and select an edge.
This is the edge along which the weld points will be defined. The tool searches for mating edges
in the following directions:
1. The surface normal.

2. The opposite direction of the surface normal.
3. If no match is found for a or b, then the direction perpendicular to both the surface
normal and edge tangent is searched.
You can hold Ctrl and double-click to select a chain of edges.
4. (Optional) If you want to define a different mating face, click the Select mating faces tool guide
and select a mating face.
You can select more than one face. Clicking on a mating face removes all previously selected
faces and holding Ctrl adds a face.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Start offset: The distance of weld points from the beginning of the guiding edge.
 Edge offset: The distance of weld points from the guiding edge.
 End offset: The distance of weld points from the end of the guiding edge.
 Number of points: The number of weld points to define for each edge chain.
 Increment: The distance between weld points.
You can set either the number of points or the increment. The last value you enter will be used.
For example, if you change the number of points, the increment will automatically update. If
you then change the increment, the number of points will change.
 Search range: The distance to search for mating faces from the guiding edge.
6. Click the Create spot weld tool guide to define the spot welds.
To redetect mating faces
1. Right-click a face with spot welds.

2. Select Redetect Mating Faces.
Spot welds will be placed on any new nearby faces.
Tool guides
Use the Select Base Faces tool guide to select the face or faces on which the weld points will be
defined. You should select a single face or a chain of tangent faces.
Use the Select Guiding Edges tool guide to define the edge along which the weld points will be
defined.
Use the Select Mating Faces tool guide to change the mating face from the face that is
automatically detected. You can select more than one face. Clicking on a mating face removes all
previously selected faces and holding Ctrl adds a face.
The Complete tool guide completes the spot weld definition.
Options
Start offset The distance of weld points from the beginning of the guiding edge.
Edge offset The distance of weld points from the guiding edge.
End offset The distance of weld points from the end of the guiding edge.
Number of The number of weld points to define for each edge chain.
points
Increment The distance between weld points. You can set either the number of points or the
increment. The last value you enter will be used. For example, if you change the
number of points, the increment will automatically update. If you then change the
increment, the number of points will change.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Search range The distance to search for mating faces from the guiding edge.
Examples
Spot welds that cross over multiple nearby welded parts
Creating enclosures
An enclosure is a solid around a body or bodies that has a cushion around the enclosed solid(s). The
enclosure can be a box, cylinder, or sphere, as shown below.
Enclosures are used by analysis tools to simulate fluid.
To create an enclosure
1. Click Enclosure in the Define section on the Prepare tab.

2. Select a solid or solids in the Design window or Structure tree.
These solids will be inside the enclosure.
3. Set the Default cushion amount.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This is a percentage of the minimum enclosure size, and determines the initial distance between
the enclosed object(s) and the closest point of the enclosure to the objects. You can adjust the
distances by typing in the fields in the Design window.
4. Select the shape of the enclosure in the Options panel: Box, Cylinder, Sphere, or Custom shape.
If you select Custom shape, you must use the Custom Shape tool guide to select a solid to use
as the enclosure shape.
5. (Optional) Click the Set Orientation tool guide and select a line, axis, or origin to change the
orientation of the enclosure.
The enclosure is oriented with the world origin by default.
6. (Optional) Deselect the Symmetric dimensions option to set the cushion distance different for
dimsions that are opposite each other.
7. (Optional) Type a value to adjust the cushion values, if necessary.
Press Tab to move among the cushion values.
8. Click the Complete tool guide when you are finished.
The enclosure is created in a subcomponent of the active part.
Tool guides
Use the Select Bodies tool guide to select the bodies that will be enclosed.
Use the Set Orientation tool guide to change the orientation of the enclosure relative to your
design or the axis of a coordinate system.
Use the Custom Shape tool guide to select a solid to use as the custom shape when you set the
enclosure type to Custom in the Options panel.
Click the Complete tool guide when you are finished.
Options
Default cushion This is a percentage of the minimum enclosure size, and determines the distance
between the enclosed object(s) and the closest point of the enclosure to the objects. You
can change adjust the distances by typing in the fields in the Design window.
Enclosure type Select an enclosure shape from the list. If you select Custom shape, you must use the
Custom Shape tool guide to select a solid to use as the enclosure shape.
Symmetric Forces the dimensions to remain symmetric. Deselect this option if you want to enter
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
dimensions values for dimensions and you don't want the opposite dimensions changed.
Examples
Changing the cushion by typing in the field doesn't change the size of the opposite cushion. The
Symmetric dimensions option must be disabled.
Changing the orientation of the enclosure so it is aligned with the edge highlighted in yellow aligns the
enclosure with that edge.
Splitting by plane
The Split by Plane tool splits parts based on a plane. It is intended to be used to split symmetrical parts for
analysis. This tool is similar to Split Solid, except Split by Plane allows you to select an axis, point, or edge,
to use as splitting plane locations which are not allowed by Split Solid.
The part below has been split along the length of its handle. The purple and green parts are symmetrical,
and can be analyzed faster than the whole part.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To split by plane
1. Click Split by Plane in the Define group on the Prepare tab.

2. Select the object(s) you want to split.
3. Select a plane to split the object:
 To split the part on the same plane as a face, edge, or point, click Select Cutter and select a
reference face, edge, or point.
 To define a temporary plane based on design elements, click Build Cutting Plane and select
faces, edges, or points to define the plane. You can select more than one face, edge, or point,
and the cutting plane will be created that bisects the elements. The wrench in the image above
is tapered. Using the Build Cutting Plane tool guide, you can select the top and bottom of the
wrench to create a plane that bisects the wrench along its plane of symmetry.
4. To delete objects created by the split, click the Select Regions tool guide and mouse over the
parts created by the split. The regions will be highlighted. Click to delete the region.
SpaceClaim splits the solid along the plane.
Tool guides
The Select Target tool guide is active by default. Use this tool guide to select the object that will be
split.
Use the Select Cutter tool guide to select a reference face, edge, or point with which to cut the part.
Use Ctrl to select more than one object. The plane is previewed in gray before you select the
reference object.
Use the Build Cutting Plane too guide to select faces, edges, or points to create a temporary plane
with which to cut the object. The temporary plane(s) are shown with a dashed line. Select a
temporary plane to complete the split.
Use the Select Regions tool guide to select regions that will be removed. You can move your
mouse over regions that were created and highlight them before you click to delete.
Options
Merge when Select this option to merge all touching solids or surfaces when you exit the tool. Hidden
done objects are not merged. This saves you the extra step of selecting all the cut-up regions
after you are done and manually merging them all back together.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Extend adjacent faces
Use this tool to extend or trim surfaces and merge them with nearby parts, or to extend or trim sketch
curves. The tool automatically detects faces that can be extended or trimmed and highlights them, as
shown below. Click on a highlighted area to perform the extension or trimming. You can also select a
surface that wasn't automatically detected and attempt to extend or trim it. This tool only works with
surface parts and sketch curves.
To extend or trim adjacent surfaces
1. Click Extend in the Define group on the Prepare tab.
The edges of surface parts or sketch curves that can be extended or trimmed are highlighted.
Chains of tangent faces are automatically grouped to offset them together.
2. Change the following options:

 Maximum distance: The maximum distance between surfaces. The tool will search for
adjacent faces again if you change this value.
 Trim surfaces: Controls whether or not surfaces may be trimmed in addition to extended.
 Partial intersections: Controls whether or not faces that partially intersect are detected.
 Same body: Allows a surface to be trimmed or extended by a face or edge on the same body.
 Merge after extend or trim: Merges bodies, if possible, when you trim or extend an edge on
one surface body up to a face or edge on another body.
3. If you want to extend or trim only some of the surfaces or sketch curves, click the highlighted
spots.
Hold Ctrl to select multiple edges.
The surfaces or sketch curves are extended or trimmed when you click on them.
4. Click Complete if you want to extend or trim all highlighted surfaces.
Press Esc to cancel the operation.
Tool guides
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Complete tool guide merges or trims the highlighted surfaces.
Options
Maximum The maximum distance between parts. The tool will search for adjacent faces again if
distance you change this value.
Trim surfaces Controls whether or not surfaces may be trimmed in addition to extended.
Partial Controls whether or not faces that partially intersect are detected.
intersections
Same body Allows a surface to be trimmed or extended by a face or edge on the same body.
Extend to Finds surfaces to extend to curves when the curve is in the same plane as the surface.
curves
Merge after Merges bodies, if possible, when you trim or extend an edge on one surface body up to
extend or trim a face or edge on another body.
Examples
Curves are extended from endpoint to endpoint.
The edges of separate surfaces are merged when you select the Merge after extend or trim option.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can extend curves to surfaces and surfaces to curves when you select the Extend to curves option.
Imprinting
The Imprint tool detects coincident edges (edges from one body that lies in the face of another body) and
imprints them onto the coincident face. The contact regions will be the same shape, and the resulting
mesh on each face will be similar. This can be helpful when analyzing stress between two parts.
To imprint a part
1. Click Imprint in the Define group of the Prepare tab. The tool will automatically detect and
highlight coincident edges, as shown in the image above.
active by default.
 Use the Select Geometry tool guide to select edges that were not automatically detected. You
can use box, lasso, and paint select modes.
it.
SpaceClaim imprints the selected edges of the coincident faces.
Tool guides
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select problem areas
that are automatically found by the tool.
The Complete tool guide imprints all the highlighted edges.
Show contact
Use this tool in the CAE group on the Prepare tab to display a preview of topology sharing (those parts in
a model that have Share Topology set to True). Show Contact lets you see – before sending to ANSYS –
exactly what topology would be shared.
To Show Contact between objects

1. Click on the top level assembly component in the Structure Tree and change Shared Topology to
True in the properties menu.
2. Click the Show Contact button in the CAE group on the Prepare tab. Any shared topology
displays on the model with blue lines.
To further define your share topology, and to help you identify any failed or missing connections or parts,
you can use the Edges and Vertices toggle check boxes in the Options panel to hide or show edge
junctions, laminar edges, free beams, and beam junctions and ends. This allows you to get an isolated
preview of the model’s face, edge, and vertex connections.
Display
Show Contact settings in the Options Panel
color
Edges>Show Edge Junctions Vertices>Show Beam Junctions Blue
Edges>Show Laminar Edges Red
Edges>Show Free Beams Vertices>Show Beam Ends Orange
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Using the Rounds tool to remove rounds
The Rounds tool provides a quick and easy way to remove rounds from an object. It is similar to the
Fill tool, except with the Rounds tool, you can only select rounded edges.
The image below shows an example of well-formed rounds, on the left and poorly formed rounds on the
right:
Before you begin:

 You will have a greater chance of success if you remove only a few rounds at a time. If you spend
a lot of time removing rounds, you may want to review SpaceClaim's tutorials or technical support
information, online at SpaceClaim.com, for advanced techniques you can use when removing
rounds.
 Closely inspect your model from various angles and zoom levels, so you can best determine the
areas of rounds you want to remove. Each area of a model is unique, and different areas may
require different approaches to round removal.
 Select the round's or round group's shortest edge first.
To ensure accurate and complete round removal, remove the rounds in the reverse order in which
they were created, as shown in the example below of a model with colored rounds:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To remove rounds
To split and partially remove a round:
1. Click Rounds from the Remove group on the Prepare tab.
Avoid splitting into a round. Instead, split on either side of it. You may need to split and partially
remove one or more rounds before adjacent rounds can be removed, especially when two or
more rounded faces meet along an edge or vertex. The rounded face is split and filled in the
middle. To select faces or capping faces, use the Faces tool.
2. Hover over one tangent edge of the rounded face to display the rounds' split lines. These lines
show you a visual indication of where the round will split, as shown below. You can move the split
lines by moving your mouse.
If necessary, from the Options panel, change the Cap width option to adjust the percentage of the round
face that is removed.
 Click on the edge to split the rounded face.

 Select the rounds you want to remove:
 Click an object in the Structure tree to select all rounds on the object.
 Select a round face in the design area. You can hold Ctrl and select faces or draw a box to select
multiple faces.
 Ctrl+click to deselect a face.
 From the context menu choose Select > Using Box. Move your mouse over the area you want to
remove to identify the parts you want to select. Draw the selection box around the area. You can only
select round faces while this tool is active.
To select faces or capping faces, use the Faces tool.
SpaceClaim removes the rounded faces you selected and replaces them with a sharp edge.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Tool guides
The Select Rounds to Remove tool guide is active by default. You can also select by drawing a box in
the design window. You can only select round faces while this tool is active.
The Complete tool guide finishes the operation. F or Enter are shortcuts for removing the rounds.
Options
 Auto-shrink fill area: Select this option to split round faces where they can't be removed when you
select a chain of rounds and it cannot be filled in its entirety. The rounds will be partially removed.
 Cap width: The percentage of the width of a round that is removed when you click on an edge of an
existing round. The splits are previewed as the cursor is moved along the round tangent edges.
Examples
Splitting and partially removing a round
Using other tools to remove rounds

 As an option, when removing rounds, you can also use the Replace tool from the Edit group on the
Design tab, to replace one face with another. You can replace multiple faces with a single face, replace
a single face with multiple faces, or replace multiple faces with multiple other faces.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Full round replaced with a face
Progression using a face to remove a round
 Try using the Sphere tool from the Insert group on the Design tab. Using this tool, you can create a
round sphere and place it at difficult geometry junctions. Once in place you can use the sphere to split
the junction in order to remove the round. In some cases, you may want to create a chain of two or
more spheres to help with removing larger or more complex rounds areas.
 To avoid trouble with removing spheres, it's good practice to fill the sphere immediately after you
remove the rounds on either side of a sphere or sphere chain.
Using the Sphere tool to split and partially remove a round
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Remove faces
The Faces tool allows you to quickly remove faces from your design. Use it to simplify your design by
removing holes, protrusions, etc.
To remove faces from an object
1. Click Faces in the Remove group on the Prepare tab.

2. Select the faces you want to remove. Hold the Ctrl key to select more than one face.
SpaceClaim attempts to remove the selected faces by extending neighboring faces.
Tool guides
The Select Faces to Remove tool guide is active by default. You can also select by drawing a box in
the design window. You can only select faces while this tool is active. Edges and vertices will not be
selected.
The Complete tool guide finishes the operation.
Remove interference
The Interference tool detects and removes interference from clashing bodies. The interference is
removed from the body with the most faces.
The tool searches all visible bodies for interference. Bodies that are hidden (turned off in the Structure
tree) are ignored.
If you want to remove an interfering region from one of the bodies, use the Interference Volumes tool on
the Measure tab to create a solid of the interfering region. You can then use the Combine tool to remove
this solid from one of the parts.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To remove interference
1. Click Interference in the Remove group on the Prepare tab.
The tool will automatically detect and highlight interference, as shown in the image above.

active by default.
SpaceClaim removes the interference by merging the bodies into one part.
Tool guides
The Complete tool guide merges the clashing objects.
Beams
A beam is a long, thin object with a constant cross-section. Defining objects as beams, rather than
modeling them as solid geometry, simplifies the model and analysis.
To create a beam
1. Create objects to define the beam path
One or more of the following methods can be used in the same design:
 Sketch curves: Use any of SpaceClaim's sketching tools to create straight or curved segments
and then assign beam profiles to them. These sketch curve beams can then be modified just
like any curve in SpaceClaim using the Move, Pull, Select, Scale, Bend, Extend, and Trim tools.
This method is a straightforward, lightweight way to create beam structures.
 Edges of a solid or surface: Use this method when you have solid geometry that you want to
reference for the beams. For example, to create a simple rectangular cage of beams, sketch a
rectangle, pull it into a solid, and assign beams to all of the edges. If you change the solid, then
the beams will dynamically update to match the location and length of the edges. Any of
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
SpaceClaim's modeling tools can be used to create sophisticated geometry changes that drive
changes to the beam structure.
For example, beams are assigned to the edges of the rectangular part shown below, and then
the edges are bent. The beams are automatically updated when the solid is changed.
 Two points or midpoints in a model: You can use any two points in a model to define a
straight beam segment. Planes can be used to create "stages" or additional locations for
defining beams to or from. A beam can be created to the intersection point of any plane with
any edge. When a defining plane is moved, any associated beams dynamically update their
locations. You can create sophisticated tower and truss structures using this method, and the
structures will be easily adaptable to unforeseen design changes.
In the example below, one end of each diagonal beam was created at the intersection of the
plane and the solid. The beams change when the plane is moved.
2. Click Profiles in the Beams group on the Prepare tab.
This tool enables you to add a profile to your structure.
3. Select a profile from the library or click More Profiles to load a profile that is saved as an SCDOC
file.
See Changing beam profiles.
More than one beam can reference the same profile, so the characteristics of all beams that use that
profile will change if you edit the profile.
4. Click Create in the Beams group on the Prepare tab.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Create tool is enabled when you select a profile, which adds the profile to your design
document. This tool enables you to create the beam path.
5. Select edges or points to define the path:

 Click the Select Point Chain tool guide and then select an edge or curve, or click on a series
of points to create the path.
 Click the Select Point Pairs tool guide and then select a beginning and end point for the path.
You can use intersection points and midpoints on edges and other beams. Click on the small
triangles on the ends and midpoint when you hover over an edge or beam.
6. See Creating a beam.
A Beams folder is created for the beams and a Beam Profiles folder is created for the profiles in the
Structure tree:
The profile name is displayed in parenthesis after the beam name in the Structure tree.
Extracting beams from solids
If you have already modeled the beam you can convert it to a beam object. See Extracting a beam from
a solid.
Beams and ANSYS
If you send a design with beams to ANSYS, the following is sent for each beam object:
 Profile and path

 Beam properties
 Profile properties
 Material properties
You can import groups from a beam profile into your design document, which makes them available to
drive changes within ANSYS. The groups are named based on the profile name, as <profile
name>_<group name>.
Beams and shared topology
Beams can share topology with surfaces when
 The end point of the beam lies on the surface:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 The path of the beam lies in the surface.

 The beam intersects a surface at a point.
The beams and surfaces must be in the same component, the component must be set to share, and the
mixed import option in Workbench must be set to lines and surfaces. See Shared topology in ANSYS for
more information about shared topology.
Beam highlighting
The following table shows how beams, sketch lines, and edges look when they are highlighted and
selected:
Highlighted Selected Selected and highlighted

Beam
Sketch
Edge
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Creating a beam
The library of standard profiles includes several basic beam profiles. You can use these profiles and edit
them to your own dimensions.
Create a beam
1. Click Create in the Beams group on the Prepare tab.
The Create tool won't be active until you select a profile, which adds the profile to your design
document.
2. Select edges or points to define the beam path:

 Click the Select Point Chain tool guide and then select an edge or curve, or click on a series of
points to create the path.
 Click the Select Point Pairs tool guide and then select a beginning and end point for the path.
 You can use intersection points and midpoints on edges and other beams. Click on the small
triangles on the ends and midpoint when you hover over an edge or beam.
The beam object is defined, and the Beams and Beam Profiles folders are created in the Structure tree.
The profile name is displayed in parenthesis after the beam name in the Structure tree.
Tool guides
Use the Select Point Chain tool guide to create a beam along an edge or a series of points that
you select.
Use the Select Point Pairs tool guide to create a beam between two points.
Extracting a beam from a solid
Use this method to convert an existing 3D solid into a beam.
To extract a beam from a solid
1. Click Extract in the Beams group on the Prepare tab.

2. Select a solid in the Design window.
The beam object is defined, and the Beams and Beam Profiles folders are created in the Structure
tree.
If you select faces on multiple bodies, then beams will be extracted for each body.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Similar profiles are detected when you extract beams from 3D geometry. The resulting beams are
linked to the same profile, so multiple profiles with the same shape are not created.
Beam properties
Select a beam in the Beams folder and you can change the following properties, which are found in the
Beam section of the Properties panel:
 Profile Name
 Orientation: The angle of the profile relative to the path.
 Reversed: Changing this property flips the profile.
 Section Anchor: Select the location where the profile intersects with the path of the beam: Area
Centroid, Shear Center, or Location. If you select Location, then you can enter the X and Y
coordinates of the anchor location. Area Centroid is the default.
 Location: Correspond with the orientation arrows in the beam Orient tool.
To rename a beam in the Structure tree, right-click and select Rename.
You can edit the Beam Section properties by highlighting values and changing them accordingly. This
allows you to create beams that have different geometry characteristics from their profile sketches.
Beams can also have material properties just like other objects.
See Changing beam profiles for information about beam profile properties.
Formulas used for Beam Section properties
The following beam cross-section properties are calculated by SpaceClaim and transferred to ANSYS.
The area of section:
The X coordinate of the centroid:
The Y coordinate of the centroid:
Moment of inertia about the X axis:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Moment of inertia about the Y axis:
Product of inertia:
The warping constant, shear center and torsional constants are calculated from the warping function. The
warping function is the solution to the St. Venant boundary value problem for pure torsion:
Using the Trefftz definition, the shear center and warping constant are calculated purely as a property of
the section:
X coordinate of shear center:
Y coordinate of shear center:
Warping constant:
with
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Changing beam profiles
Profiles are found in the Beam Profiles folder in the Structure tree.
To change the profile for a beam
1. Select the beam in the Structure tree or Design window.

3. Select a profile from the list or the library.
The name of the beam in the Beams folder changes to the name of the profile, and the new
profile is added to your Beam Profiles folder.
To view beam profile properties
Select a beam profile in the Beam Profiles folder in the Structure tree.
The profile properties are displayed in the Properties panel. These properties are read-only and cannot be
changed.
See Beam properties.
To edit a profile
1. Right-click the profile on the Structure tree.

2. Select Edit Beam Profile.
The profile will open as a sketch in a new Design window.
3. Change the profile like you would a sketch.
Each profile has driving dimensions set up in the Groups panel, and each annotation dimension is
labeled to show you which group it corresponds with. You can change these dimensions to alter
the profile. See Working with groups.
To set the default profile
1. Clear your selection by clicking in empty space in the Design window.

3. Select a profile from the list or from the profile library.
New beams you create during this session will use this profile by default.
The default profile is not persistent and will be cleared when you restart SpaceClaim.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To remove a profile from the Beam Profiles folder
1. Select the profile in the Structure tree.

3. Click Remove Profile.
Examples
The labels of the annotation dimensions on a beam profile correspond with the group names.
Changing beam orientation
Use this tool to change the direction of a beam, rotate it around its anchor point, and offset it from its
anchor point.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To change a beam's orientation
1. Click Orient in the Beams group on the Prepare tab.

2. Select a beam in the Structure tree or Design window.
You can click Display in the Beams group and change the display mode to Solid Beams while the
Orient tool is active. You may want to do this so you can see the beam.
3. (Optional) Click the Orient to Object tool guide or hold the Alt key and select a reference object,
and the beam will be oriented to the projected Z direction of the plane of the selected object.
4. Use the blue arrows to change the beam's orientation:
 Click the straight blue arrow (X axis) to reverse the beam's direction.
 Drag the curved blue arrow to rotate the beam around its anchor point.
 Double-click the curved blue arrow to rotate the beam 90°.
 Drag the red or green arrows (Y and Z axes) to offset the beam.
Tool guides
The Select tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select the beam object
that you want to reorient.
The Orient to Object tool guide allows you to select a face, edge, or axis and orient the beam in
that direction.
Examples
Offsetting a beam along the Y axis
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Moving beams
You can use the Move tool to move beams. The Move tool has a special Keep beam fixed option for
beams. This option causes the beam (shown in dark green) to be offset while the profile (shown as a
green semi-transparent 3D object) remains fixed.
When you move more than one beam at a time and select the Keep beam fixed option, the beam
profiles moving along a trajectory that can be reversed (normal to the trajectory) are moved and the
beam profiles that can't be reversed (along the trajectory) remain fixed. The beam is offset with equal and
opposite changes to the Location property and the location of the beam's section is maintained. You can
see this in the preview geometry for the beam.
Moving the beams without the Keep beam fixed option moves all beams and profiles:
Moving the beams with the option selected moves the two beams that are normal to the trajectory, but
the two beams that aren't normal to the trajectory are offset:
Changing beam display style
You can display the beam as a wireframe or as a lightweight model.
To change the beam display
1. Click Display in the Beams group on the Prepare tab.

2. Select a display type:
 Wire Beams displays the beam as a wire or a thin line in the Design window.
 Solid Beams displays the beam as a lightweight solid, so it is displayed as a semi-transparent
3D object.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Creating a new beam profile
You can create your own beam profiles and save them as files.
To use these profiles, click Profiles, select More Profiles, and then browse to locate the SCDOC file.
To create a profile without creating a beam
1. Sketch the profile.

3. Pull to extrude the profile into a solid.
4. Change the color of the face you want to use as the profile.
You can change this face to any color, as long as it overrides the color of the solid. Only one face
can have a color override, otherwise SpaceClaim won't know which face is used for the profile.
5. Insert an origin at the location where the profile should intersect with the path of the beam.
6. Save the design as an SCDOC file.
To create a profile based on an extracted beam
1. Sketch the profile.

3. Pull to extrude the profile into a solid.
4. Click Extract in the Beams group on the Prepare tab.
5. Select the solid you created in the previous steps.
6. Right-click the profile in the Beam Profiles folder and select Save beam profile.
7. Browse to the folder where you want to save the profile, type a file name, and click Save.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Working with sheet metal
You can use SpaceClaim to create sheet metal designs and components.
SpaceClaim recognizes a component as sheet metal if it consists of only planar, cylindrical, and conical
faces, and when faces are offsets of the same size.
Sheet metal parts are displayed in azure (blue) by default. Unfolded parts are displayed in purple, as
shown in the image below.
Unfolded parts have the following default layers:
 Dimension
 Bend Lines Up
 Bend Lines Down
 Bend Dimensions
 Forms
Creating and editing sheet metal
Create a new sheet metal design using the tools on the Sheet Metal tab. See Converting a design to
sheet metal if you have already modeled the part.
To create a new sheet metal design
1. Click on the Sheet Metal tab.

2. Select a tool in the Sketch group.
3. Sketch the first wall of your sheet metal part:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can see a preview of the wall's thickness as you sketch.
See Sketching sheet metal parts for detailed information and instructions.
4. Click Pull on the Sheet Metal tab.

5. Select an edge or edges and pull side walls on your part:
Junctions, corner reliefs, and bends are automatically created as needed.
See Pulling sheet metal parts for detailed information and instructions.
To highlight objects in a sheet metal design
Select options in the Highlight ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab.
You can toggle highlighting on and off for junctions, reliefs, notches, and other sheet metal objects. You
can customize the highlighting colors in the SpaceClaim Sheet Metal Options.
Converting a design to sheet metal
Use the Convert tool in the Import ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab to convert an existing
design to sheet metal within SpaceClaim. You may need to convert if you imported regular geometry or if
you moved a part to another component.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
When you click the Convert tool and select a surface body of a design, the surface body automatically
thickens into a sheet metal body at the default sheet metal thickness. This enhancement eliminates the
need to redo a surface you may have sketched prior to converting the design to sheet metal. After you
convert the body, you can use the Identify tool to call out forms, joggles, hems, etc.
Walls, bends, junctions (only created, default-sized junctions, not imported junctions), and forms that were
made in Sheet Metal are identified by color: Faces are blue, junctions are purple, forms are orange, partial
bends are yellow, and edges of end faces that are not square are red. Identification is important because it
allows the element to be unbent or flattened when you unfold the part.
See Converting a solid to a sheet metal part tutorial for a hands-on example with additional steps you
may need to perform when you convert a part, such as adding reliefs and junctions.
To convert a solid to sheet metal
1. Click Convert in the Import group on the Sheet Metal tab.
The Select Bodies tool guide is enabled by default.
2. Select the body you want to convert.
You can Ctrl-click to select multiple bodies.
Walls, bends, and junctions (only default-sized junctions you created as sheet metal, not imported
junctions) are automatically detected and identified by color. Faces that are not separated by the
default thickness are not highlighted. Edges shown in red indicate end faces that are not square,
as shown in the following figure.
3. Click the Assign Objects tool guide.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Convert hard edges to junctions:

1. Select an option from the Junction tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Select the hard edges that you want to convert to the current junction type.
Clicking an edge shown in red creates a junction or squares up a sharp face. The edge
you click to square a face determines the final length of the sheet metal wall.
Example
Converting a sheet metal design with bends automatically detected.
Tool guides
Use the Select Bodies tool guide to select the part(s) you want to convert to sheet metal.
Use the Assign Objects tool guide to assign or change the junction types, reliefs, and notches. You
can only select geometry that is appropriate for the tool guide.
Identifying sheet metal
When you use the Convert tool to convert a body to sheet metal, or, are working with an existing sheet
metal body, only the sheet metal faces that are separated by the default sheet metal thickness are shown
in blue, but sheet metal that varies in thickness from the default, as shown in the image below, does not
display in blue:
After you have converted a design to sheet metal, you can use the Identify tool in the Import
ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab to call out sheet metal geometry such as forms, hems, joggles,
beads, notches, and gussets.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can also use Select>Using Box to identify sheet metal geometry. Box selecting selects front and back
faces of the pre-identified sheet metal geometry.
Some geometry is automatically identified and other geometry must be manually assigned. As the
geometry is identified, the highlighting color changes to indicate the sheet metal object.
Objects in a converted sheet metal part must be identified before they can be unfolded.
To identify sheet metal geometry
1. Click the Identify tool in the Import group on the Sheet Metal tab.
Geometry that can be identified is highlighted in red.
2. Identify each of the following tool guides as needed:

 Form: Click the Forms tool guide, select the detail to identify as a form, and click the
Complete tool guide.
 Hem: Click the Hems tool guide, select an option from the Hem tool, select the bend to
identify as a hem, and click the Complete tool guide.
 Joggle: Click the Joggles tool guide, select two bends to identify as a joggle, and click the
 Bead: Click the Beads tool guide, select the face to identify as a bead, and click the Complete
tool guide.
 Notch: Click the Notches tool guide, select an option from the Notch tool, select the vertex or
thickness edge to assign as a notch, and click the Complete tool guide.
 Gusset: Click the Gussets tool guide, select one of the faces to identify a gusset, and click the
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Do it faster
Ctrl-click to identify multiple objects.
Press Enter or double-click an object to complete the identification.
Select All, or some of the options, from the Highlight drop down in the Show group on the Sheet Metal
tab, as shown in the image below:
Examples
Automatically
identifying forms.
Automatically
identifying a hem.
Selecting two bends to

identify a joggle.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Selecting the front faces

and back faces to
identify a bead.
Selecting the thickness

edges to identify a
notch.
Automatically
identifying gussets.
Unfolding a sheet metal

design after identifying
the geometry.
Tool guides
Use the Forms tool guide to find and identify formed sheet metal details on a part.
Use the Hems tool guide to find and identify hems.
Use the Joggles tool guide to find and identify joggles.
Use the Beads tool guide to find and identify beads.
Use the Notches tool guide to find and identify notches.
Use the Gussets tool guide
Use the Complete tool guide to complete each identification.
Changing sheet metal part properties
You can modify the thickness, inner radius, and K-factor of sheet metal components in the Properties
panel. Modifying the component's properties affects all the objects in the component. Modified property
values appear in bold. You can set the default values for sheet metal components by setting sheet metal
options. Delete a modified property value to return it to the default value.
The thickness of sheet metal is maintained with an offset relationship. A sheet metal component retains its
properties when you move it into a non-sheet metal component.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To change sheet metal part properties
1. Select the sheet metal component in the Structure tree.

2. Change the following in the Properties panel:
 Bend Table: The bend table to use for this sheet metal part.
 Flatten Form: How forms should be represented in the unfolded part. You can choose from
the following values:
 No flatten: The form is shown as-is in the unfolded part.
 Outline: A dotted line is shown for the extents curve and center cross-hair. The outline is
added to the Bends layer on the unfolded part, which is hidden by default. This is the
default value.
 Remove: The form is not shown on the unfolded part.
 Inner Radius: How the inside radius of a bend is calculated. This field shows you what you
have set in the two fields below.
 Radius: The radius of a bend.
 Type: Select Thickness Ratio or Absolute.
When the Bend Radius in Sheet Metal options is set to Thickness ratio and you change the sheet
metal part thickness for the part, the value for the Inner Radius now changes in the Properties panel.
In other words, changing the part thickness property will not change all the bend radii, but the
displayed bend radius changes to show that there is a problem for you to fix. You can fix them by
selecting the desired bends and changing their properties manually.
 K-Factor: The K-Factor is used to calculate the bend radius, and is determined by the material,
the type of bend, and the ratio of the bend radius to the thickness of the metal.
 Material: You can set the gage for a material used in a sheet metal part. Assigning a gage
enables you to control the thickness of a sheet metal part at a more granular level. Gage, or,
‘gauge’, is the thickness of the metal organized by numbers: the smaller the number the
thinner the metal. A sheet metal design or component of a design must be assigned a material
in order for the gage drop down to display. You cannot select a gage for designs or
components that are assigned the ‘Unknown Material’ option.
To assign a material, from the Structure tree select the design at the top level, or select the
component for which you want to assign a material, and then click the Material Name drop
down from the Material group in the Properties panel. From the Thickness group in the
Properties panel, click the gage drop down, and select a gage.
 Sheet Metal: True or false; determines whether or not the component is a sheet metal part. All
sheet metal properties and parameters are removed from a part when you turn off the Sheet
Metal property in the Properties panel. This includes things like junctions, reliefs, forms, etc.
 Thickness: The thickness of the sheet metal part.
You may need to change the inside radius of bends, change the bend or corner reliefs, or alter
the geometry after you change the thickness.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Changing the thickness of parts caused the S junctions to become no-overlap junctions because the
radius was too small for the new thickness. You would need to change the inside radius to convert the
junctions back to S junctions on these parts.
Correcting a sheet metal component
SpaceClaim’s sheet metal functionality can be used to fix components that are intended to be made from
sheet metal but which do not conform to the sheet metal standards required for production. There are a
number of typical errors in sheet metal creation that can be easily remedied in SpaceClaim.
To correct a sheet metal component
1. Fix joints that are not bendable.
Select the edge of an improper joint, click Junction, and select a junction type. Once a proper joint
has been created, it will update with changes to part thickness, bend radius, and K-factor as well
as show the joint’s bend allowance on the unfolded design. An example of this change is shown
below.
2. Fill in extraneous geometry.
A sheet metal component often has a number of details (such as punches, louvers, and vents) that
may not be relevant to each person involved in the manufacturing process. SpaceClaim allows
these details to be quickly and easily filled in order to simplify parts and retain focus on only the
elements necessary for each step of the manufacturing process.
To fill in geometry, use Select to box select desired features and then Fill to remove them. An
example is shown below.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To identify problems when unfolding parts
If an unfolded component has conflicting geometry, the conflicting geometry is made a separate surface
in the Structure tree and highlighted in red, as shown in the figure below. The edge that prevents the
unfold is also highlighted.
Sketching sheet metal parts
The tools in the Sketch group on the Sheet Metal tab are a little different from normal sketch tools:
Rectangles, circles, polygons, and ellipses are automatically extruded to the thickness of a sheet metal wall
as you sketch. See Sheet metal options to change the default wall thickness. Lines, splines, and arcs are
extruded when they form a closed profile.
Sketching in empty space creates new walls.
A preview is displayed as you sketch that shows you the wall thickness for each sketch curve:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Sketching perpendicular to an existing wall creates a new wall with a bend between the walls with corner
or rip reliefs where needed. The bend radius is created inside when the sketch is connected to the top
edge and outside when the sketch is connected to the bottom edge:
Sketching on an existing wall creates sketch curves on the wall that you can use with the Bend and Split
tools.
Sketching adjacent to or overlapping an existing wall adds material to the wall and may imprint the
overlapping curves on the wall:
In addition, you can use the Sheet metal options to create a wall that is perpendicular to the sketch
plane as you sketch:
Sheet Metal sketch tools

Lines Rectangles Circles Polygons
Tangent lines Three-point rectangles Three-point circles Splines
Tangent arcs Ellipses Sweep arcs Three-point arcs
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Sheet Metal options
The following Sheet Metal sketch options allow you to choose between sketching a flat wall or a wall that
is perpendicular to the sketch plane:
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created. When
Auto
sketching a closed profile (square, circle, etc.), a flat wall is created.
Flat Any closed sketch creates a flat wall.
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created. When
Profile
sketching a closed profile (square, circle, etc.), a flat wall is created.
Use the starting location of the sketch to determine whether the inside or the outside of
Automaticthe sheet is maintained when bending.
Inside Maintains the length of the sheet's inside surface when bending.
Outside Maintains the length of the sheet's outside surface when bending.
The following Bend Options are available for all Sheet Metal sketch and Pull tools:
Create Bend Create a bend.
Create Joggle Create a joggle.
Create Bead Create a bead along a set of curves on a face.
Common sketch options
The following options are available for every sketch tool:
 Cartesian dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian dimensions
from the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the point you select. If you
don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from the origin.
 Polar dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions from
the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select. If you don't
have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the origin.
 Snap to grid: Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap to the
minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and 0.125in for
Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
 Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap
to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap options to
change the angular increment used for snapping.
 Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design to a
drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves checkbox again in
the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves on the drawing sheet.
See Layout Curves.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Lines (Sheet Metal)
The Sheet Metal Line tool is primarily used to sketch freeform shapes and to draw lines that will become
bends. See Bending a sheet metal wall.
Lines, splines, and arcs are extruded to the thickness of a sheet metal wall when they form a closed
profile. You can change the default wall thickness in the Sheet metal properties.
plane as you sketch.
To draw a line

3. (Optional) Click a Sheet metal option if you want to create walls as you sketch.
5. Click to set the next points of the line.
If you want any section of the line to be an arc, right-click and select Switch to Arc, then click to
set the radius. Right-click and select Switch to Line to return to drawing straight lines between
points. You must create at least one line segment before using this option.
6. End the line:
 Press Esc.
Do it faster
Click and drag to draw one straight line.
Example
Sketching a polyline using the Profile Sheet metal option
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Tangent lines (Sheet Metal)
Use the Sheet Metal Tangent Line tool to sketch lines that are tangent to curves in your design.
Lines, splines, and arcs are extruded to the thickness of a sheet metal wall when they form a closed
profile. You can change the default wall thickness in the sheet metal properties.
In addition, you can use the Sheet metal options to create a wall that is perpendicular to the sketch plane
as you sketch.
To sketch a tangent line in sheet metal

Curves are highlighted as you move your mouse over them, and the tangency indicator appears
at your cursor location. If there are no curves in your design, this tool is disabled; you must add a
curve to create a tangent line.
4. Click the curve you want to draw tangent to.
As you move the mouse, the start point moves so that the line remains tangent to the curve.
5. (Optional) Dimension the line with a length.
You cannot dimension from another sketch object when creating a tangent line.
If you move your mouse over another curve, the line snaps so that it is tangent to the second
curve. Hold Alt to stop your cursor from snapping to curves.
Rectangles (Sheet Metal)
The Sheet Metal Rectangle tool is most often used to draw the base of a sheet metal part. After you
sketch a base, you can use the Pull tool to create walls perpendicular to the rectangle.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
as you sketch. You can change the default wall thickness in the sheet metal properties.
as you sketch.
To sketch a rectangle in sheet metal

2. Click Rectangle in the Sketch group or press R.
5. Click to set the first corner.
6. Click to set the opposite corner of the rectangle.
Options
 Define rectangle from center: Select this option to sketch rectangles from their centers. Click to
define the center of the rectangle, then click again to set the length of the sides. You can also drag to
draw the rectangle. Hold the Alt key while drawing a rectangle to toggle this option on-the-fly.
Three-point rectangles (Sheet Metal)
The Sheet Metal Three-Point Rectangle tool is used to draw a rectangle at any angle on the sketch plane.
as you sketch. You can change the default wall thickness in the sheet metal properties.
as you sketch.
To sketch a three-point rectangle in sheet metal

2. Click Three-Point Rectangle in the Sketch group.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Click to set the first corner of the rectangle.
6. Click to set the length of the second side.
Click and drag to draw the first side, then click to set the length of the second side.
Options
 Define rectangle from center: Select this option to sketch rectangles from their centers. Click to
define the center of the rectangle, then click again to set the length of the sides. You can also drag to
draw the rectangle. Hold the Alt key while drawing a rectangle to toggle this option on-the-fly.
Polygons (Sheet Metal)
Use the Sheet Metal Polygon tool to draw a polygon with between 3 and 64 sides.
as you sketch. You can change the default wall thickness in the Sheet metal properties.
To draw a polygon in sheet metal

2. Click Polygon in the Sketch group.
3. (Optional) Select Use internal radius in the Options panel to dimension the polygon based on
the diameter of a circle inscribed within the polygon. Uncheck the option to dimension the polygon
based on a circumscribed circle.
5. Click to set the center of the polygon.
6. Drag the mouse to draw the polygon and change its orientation.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The orientation is the polygon's angle relative to the X and Y axis.
You can press Tab and type a number to change the diameter, orientation, or number of sides.
7. Click to complete the polygon.
The sides of the polygon are all related, and act as one object. When pulled in 3D, the edges and
faces of the polygonal solid will also maintain this relationship.
Tip If you trim a polygon sketch with the Trim Away tool, you can drag the original sides of the
polygon with the Select tool to recreate the polygon.
Options
 Use internal radius: Select this option to dimension the polygon based on the diameter of a circle
inscribed within the polygon. Uncheck the option to dimension the polygon based on a circumscribed
circle. In the image below, the blue circle is inscribed within the polygon and the orange circle is
circumscribed around it.
Circles (Sheet Metal)
Use the Sheet Metal Circle tool to draw circles in sheet metal.
To sketch a circle in sheet metal

2. Click Circle in the Sketch group or press C.
4. Click to set the circle’s center.
5. Click to set the circle's diameter.

6. The circle will snap to existing sketches or determined circles and arcs in the plane of the sketch.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Three-point circles (Sheet Metal)
Use the Sheet Metal Three-Point Circle tool to draw circles when you know the location of the edge of the
circle but you don't know the location for its center, or when you want to draw a circle that is tangent to
two objects.
To sketch a three-point circle in sheet metal

2. Click Three-Point Circle in the Sketch group.
3. (Optional) Select Three-point circle segment in the Options panel to create an arc that is a
segment of a three-point circle.
5. Click to set the first point on the circle’s edge.
If you click a curve or line, the circle will be drawn tangent to the curve or line, unless you click the
midpoint or vertex.
6. Click to set the second point on the circle’s edge.
If the circle disappears as you move your mouse over the sketch grid, then the cursor location
cannot be included in any circle drawn through the first two points and the current point. If you
click a curve or line, the circle will be drawn tangent to the curve or line unless you click the
midpoint or vertex.
7. Click to set the last point on the circle’s edge.
Options
 Three-point circle segment: Check this option to create an arc that is a segment of a three-point
circle. To create an arc with this option, click to set the first point, click to set the second point, then
enter the diameter or click to set the final point.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Three-point arcs (Sheet Metal)
Use the Sheet Metal Three-Point Arc tool to sketch an arc when you know its chord angle and the location
of its start and end points.
Lines, splines, and arcs are extruded to the thickness of a sheet metal wall when they form a closed profile.
You can change the default wall thickness in the Sheet metal properties.
To draw a three-point arc

2. Click Three-Point Arc in the Sketch group.
4. Click to set the start point of the arc.
5. If the start point is on another line, arc, or spline, then the arc will initially be drawn tangent to
that line, arc, or spline.

7. Click to set the arc's radius.
You can dimension the chord angle or radius.
The arc will snap to tangent objects.
Sweep arcs (Sheet Metal)
Use the Sheet Metal Sweep Arc tool to sketch an arc when you know the location of its center and end
points.
To draw a sweep arc

2. Click Sweep Arc in the Sketch group.
3. Click to set the center of the arc.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Click to set the start point and radius of the sweep circle.
You can dimension the chord angle or offset the angular dimension.
Tangent arcs (Sheet Metal)
Use the Sheet Metal Tangent Arc tool to sketch an arc that is tangent to a curve or line in your design.
You can change the default wall thickness in the sheet metal properties.
as you sketch.
To draw a tangent arc

4. Click the line or curve you want to draw tangent to.
This is usually done at the end point of a line, arc, or spline, but it can be on the line. If two lines
share an end point, use the scroll wheel to set tangency to the other line.
5. (Optional) Dimension the radius and chord angle.

The arc cannot end on its start point to make a circle or end on the same line as its start point.
Ellipses (Sheet Metal)
Use the Sheet Metal Ellipse tool to draw ellipses in sheet metal.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To sketch an ellipse in sheet metal

2. Click Ellipse in the Sketch group.
4. Click to set the center of the ellipse.
 Click to set the overall length and angular orientation of the first axis.
 Click to set the length of the second axis.
Splines (Sheet Metal)
Use the Sheet Metal Spline tool to draw curvy lines in sheet metal.
To draw a spline

5. Click to set the next points of the spline.
You can Dimension spline points by entering the coordinate distance from the start point to each
point, or dimension each point relative to another sketch object.
6. End the spline:

 Double-click to set the end point of the spline.
 Right-click and select Finish Spline.
 Press Esc.
 Click any other tool (except the Clipboard and Orient tools).
To create a closed spine
You can create a closed spline in the following ways:
 When drawing a spline, end it on the start point.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 When editing the spline, drag one end point on top of the other point.
Once you have created a closed spline, you cannot edit it into an open spline.
Selecting sheet metal objects
The Select tool on the Sheet Metal tab works much like the standard Select tool, with the following
differences:
 The tools on the Sheet Metal tab recognize junctions, bends, bend reliefs, and forms first, then edges
and points when you scroll the mouse wheel to select the underlying entities.
 Your selection is now automatically converted from faces to junctions, bend reliefs, or forms when you
switch to the Sheet Metal tab and the Pull, Select, or Move tool is active. The selection is converted
back to faces when you switch to a different tab.
 You can box-select sheet metal objects. For example, to select a corner relief, box-select all of the faces
in the corner relief. If you box-select any of the faces from right to left, the entire sheet metal object is
also selected, even if you have not fully enclosed the object within the selection box.
 Only the tool guides and options that are appropriate for sheet metal are displayed.
Shortcut keys work for all of the tools on both tabs. For example, you can press S to activate the Select
tool from either the Design tab or the Sheet Metal tab.
Pulling sheet metal parts
Use the Pull tool in the Edit ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab to change sheet metal parts.
Pulling an edge creates a new wall, as shown below.
Junctions and bend reliefs are automatically created and are determined by the current settings of the
Junction and Relief tools. Pulling an edge on an inside contour creates a wall with a gap on both sides if a
circular or square bend relief is chosen at the standard bend relief width. If a Rip relief type is selected,
then the gap is equal to the rip width.
You can select an edge loop to pull multiple walls simultaneously, as shown below.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
When you pull walls up on a design, the side edges of the new wall will follow the angles of its neighbors.
This angle is usually 90°, but can be almost any angle. If the neighboring walls are obtuse angles, the
neighbor wall must be less than 135° for the new wall to follow along the neighbors.
Shortcut keys work for all of the tools on both tabs. For example, you can press P to activate the Pull tool
from either the Design tab or the Sheet Metal tab.
To pull sheet metal parts
1. Click the Pull tool in the Edit group on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Change the Junction and Relief tool settings in the Modify group, if necessary.
The settings of these tools are used when you pull. For example, if the Junction tool is set to
Sharp, then a sharp edge is created when you pull. The tools' icons change to represent their
current settings, so you can see them at a glance.
3. (Optional) Change the bend behavior in the Options panel:
The bend options control where bend radii are created in relation to adjacent walls.
 Use Edge Location: When you pull a sheet metal edge, the location of the bend radius
depends on the edge you select and the direction you pull.
When you pull away from the other edge (1), the selected edge becomes an inside corner.
When you pull across the other edge (2), the selected edge becomes an outside corner.
 Inside: The length of the inside surface of the wall is maintained, like 1 in the
illustration above.
 Outside: The length of the outside surface of the wall is maintained, like 2 in the
illustration above.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Offset: The amount of space to allow for the bend when pulling.
 Bend angle: The angle between the two walls.
 Bend radius: The inside radius of the bend.
 An edge to create a new wall with the default sheet thickness.
 A thickness face to extend an existing wall.
 A wall face to offset (or move) the wall in the direction of the Pull arrow.
 A thickness edge to round or chamfer the edge. You cannot create a hem on a non-thickness
edge.
5. (Optional) Click the Pull Direction tool guide or hold Alt and select a reference element to set
the direction of the pull.
6. (Optional) Click the Up To tool guide or press U and select a face, edge, or point to pull up to.
7. Click a yellow Pull arrow and drag in the direction of the arrow.
Examples
Pulling a wall with an adjacent wall creates a matching angle in the end of the new wall.
Pulling one side of a wall moves the wall and changes adjacent walls.
Moving walls using the Up To tool guide.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pulling a wall up to an angled wall. The wall merges to the walls from which it extends. The extension and
angled wall do not merge—a small gap is maintained.
Creating swept sheet metal walls by selecting a tangent chain of edges and pulling them perpendicular to
the chain (left). Swept sheet metal walls can be unfolded (right).
Pulling the edge of an inner loop to create a flange form. Edge reliefs are created automatically and can
be unfolded. (Reliefs are not highlighted in the figure because they are not yet classified as edge reliefs).
Pulling an angled sheet metal wall. The neighboring wall is modified so that it does not maintain the
junction.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Using the Revolve tool guide to make an angled end face
To pull a partial wall

2. Change the Relief tool setting in the Create group, if necessary.
3. Select an edge on the wall.
4. Drag one or both of the yellow balls to the desired width.
Type a number to dimension the location from the end of the edge.
6. Reliefs are created as necessary. The shape and size of the relief is determined by the Edge Relief
tool and your Sheet metal options.
To pull a wall between two parallel walls
1. Click Pull in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab.

2. Select an edge on the first wall.
3. Click the Up To tool guide or press U.
4. Select an edge on the second wall.
The Pull handle previews the direction of the pull direction when you move your mouse over an
edge.
Bends are automatically added as needed.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To control the bend angle of a pull
Enter a value in the Bend angle option before pulling.
The angle is measured from the flat state of the sheet. The following image shows a 10° (left) and 170°
(right) bend
To create a round or chamfer

2. Select one or more thickness edges.
3. Click Round or Chamfer in the Pull options panel.
You can also select Round or Chamfer from the mini-toolbar.
To create a jog or S junction
1. Click the Pull tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Select the edge of a sheet metal wall.
3. Select a Bend option in the Sheet Metal Options panel.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Pull along the direction of the wall.
The wall will jog up one wall thickness and continue in the same direction, as shown below. The
bend faces become joggles.
Tool guides
The following tool guides are available for this tool:
The Select tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select an object to pull.
The Revolve tool guide allows you to revolve instead of pulling in a direction.
The Pull Direction tool guide allows you to set the direction to pull.
The Up To tool guide pulls the object up to another object.
When using the Up To tool guide to move a face, form, or bead to a new location on a part, such
as an edge or face, select a direction with a Move tool handle and click the Up To tool to move the
face, form, or bead to the new location. You can also use this tool guide with a sheet metal model in
flattened mode.
Sheet metal options
The following options are available for this tool:
 Use Edge Location: When you pull a sheet metal edge, the location of the bend radius depends on
the edge you select and the direction you pull.
When you pull away from the other edge (1), the selected edge becomes an inside corner.
When you pull across the other edge (2), the selected edge becomes an outside corner.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Inside: The length of the inside surface of the wall is maintained, like 1 in the
illustration above.
 Outside: The length of the outside surface of the wall is maintained, like 2 in the
illustration above.
 Offset: The amount of space to allow for the bend when pulling.
 Bend angle: The angle between the two walls.
 Bend radius: Inside radius of the bend.
Pull options
 Add: Only add material when you pull. If you pull in a subtractive direction, no change will occur. You
can combine this option with other Pull options.
 Cut: Only remove material when you pull. If you pull in an additive direction, no change will occur. You
can combine this option with other Pull options.
 No merge: Pulls without merging into other objects even when the object pulled intersects with an
existing object.
 Round: Create a rounded corner (fillet) on a thickness edge while pulling.
 Chamfer: Create a chamfer on a thickness edge while pulling.
Moving sheet metal objects
The Move tool on the Sheet Metal tab is similar to the standard Move tool, with the following
differences:
 The tools on the Sheet Metal tab recognize junctions, bends, bend reliefs, and forms first, then edges
and points when you scroll the mouse wheel to select the underlying entities.
 You can select a form with one click and move or rotate the form using the Sheet Metal Move tool. The
2D Move handle is displayed for a form, and it is lined up with the frame of the form.
 Your selection is automatically converted from faces to junctions, bend reliefs, or forms when you
switch to the Sheet Metal tab and the Pull, Select, or Move tool is active. The selection is converted
back to faces when you switch to a different tab.
 Only the tool guides and options that are appropriate for sheet metal are displayed.
 The side of the wall you select determines how a bend changes when you rotate a wall. See Rotating
sheet metal walls. When you move a wall, any associated sheet metal objects associated with that
wall, such as junctions, edges, reliefs, corner reliefs, and bends, also move with the wall.
Shortcut keys work for all of the tools on both tabs. For example, you can press M to activate the Move
tool from either the Design tab or the Sheet Metal tab.
Faces which have beads can be moved with the Move tool.
To move an edge relief
1. Click the Move tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Select the edge relief.

3. Click an axis and drag in that direction.
To move a wall between joggles

2. Select a wall between joggles.
3. Click an axis and drag in that direction.
The wall is translated between the joggles.
You can move a joggle along a bend. If you have trouble moving a joggle, use the sheet metal Select
tool to select the joggle, then use the Move tool in the Edit ribbon group of the Design tab to move it.
Example
Translating a wall between four joggles
Rotating sheet metal walls
Select one face of the sheet metal wall and rotate it with the Move handle. If you select the inside of a
face to rotate around the inside bend center, or select the outside face to rotate around its outer mold
line
A default junction to rotate around is chosen based on which junction causes the smaller portion of the
part to rotate. To rotate around the other junction, drag the Move handle anchor (the center ball) to an
edge on the other junction.
To rotate a sheet metal wall

2. Select a face of the wall you want to rotate.
The face you select determines the rotation point:
Select the inner face to rotate around the inside of the bend:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Select the outer face to rotate around the outside of the bend (the outer mold line):
When a wall is rotated around the outer mold line, the size of the walls change. This type of
rotation is useful because the mold line is a measurable point for inspection.
If the face is connected to more than one junction, then the junction closest to the point where
you click is selected:
3. Select the blue rotation axis and rotate the wall.
The Move tool will stop when the wall touches another wall.
The bend will reverse direction if you rotate the wall so its angle is greater than 180°.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Example
Rotating the inside wall so the bend is reversed
Rotating walls that are split on an edge around a bend junction and then translating the base face shared
by the split walls.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Modifying sheet metal parts
SpaceClaim automatically creates reliefs, junctions, and other sheet metal features as you create a sheet
metal design or convert a design to sheet metal.
Use the following tools in the Modify ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab to change the type of existing
sheet metal features or to create additional features.
Modify ribbon group
The Modify ribbon group contains the following tools:
Junction
Edge relief
Corner relief
Notch
Hem
Changing junction types
Use the Junction option tool to set the default junction type and to change the junction type of an
existing junction. The junction type can be changed for junctions with or without reliefs.
The icon on the Junction option tool changes to reflect the junction type. This setting is saved until you
close SpaceClaim. The junction type can also be found in the Sheet Metal section of the Properties panel
when you select a junction.
Select Junctions in the Highlight group to highlight all junctions in your sheet metal design.
To change the junction type
Select an option from the Junction tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab:
A traditional, circular bend between two sheet

Bend
metal walls.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Full Overlap One wall overlaps the other.
Partial One wall overlaps the other halfway.

Overlap
No Overlap The walls meet but do not overlap.
Sharp Removes rips and bends from the geometry and

returns it to a shell, where there is no inside or
outside radii. (You can also rotate a 180° "hem"
to create a 90° flange.)
Flange One side of the junction is bent and the other is
straight. Use Reverse to change the bent and
straight sides.
None The junction will no longer be recognized by

SpaceClaim.
The junction type you select is saved as the default for the session, so any junctions created by Pull will be
this junction type.
To change a junction on a sheet metal design
1. Select an edge or face of a junction.
You can Ctrl+click to select multiple junctions.
2. Select an option from the Junction tool.
You can also select an option from the mini-toolbar or change the Junction type value in the
Sheet Metal section in the Properties panel.
Examples
Selecting an edge to change an S Bend junction to a No Overlap junction
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Selecting the edge of a corner junction to change the junction type from No Overlap to Full Overlap
Changing a Bend to a Full Overlap junction
Using the junction mini-toolbar to change a junction type when Select and Pull tools are active
To remove a junction
1. Select an edge or face that belongs to one or more Full overlap, Partial overlap, or No overlap
bend junctions.
2. Ctrl+click to elect multiple edges.
3. Select the None option from the Junction option tool.
You can also right-click the edge or face and click in the junction mini-toolbar or
select None as the Junction type in the Sheet Metal section of the Properties panel.
The geometry at the junction will not change, but the junction will no longer be recognized by
SpaceClaim. You may need to do this when you want to make changes that can't be made to a
recognized junction, such as creating a partial flange.
To reverse an overlap junction
Right-click a partial overlap or full overlap junction and select Reverse from the context menu.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Creating and changing edge reliefs
Edge reliefs are automatically created when you pull a partial wall.
The edge relief type is determined by the Edge Relief option tool in the Modify group on the Sheet
Metal tab. The default is round, but you can change it to another type. The icon on the Edge Relief tool
changes to reflect the relief type. This setting is saved until you close SpaceClaim.
The shape of the end of a partial split is also determined by the relief type you have set for the Edge Relief
tool. See Splitting a sheet metal face.
The dimensions of a relief are determined by the relief settings in Sheet metal options.
Dragging a yellow ball end point to pull a partial wall creates an edge relief.
A message appears in the status bar if a relief cannot be created, such as when it is too close to the side.
After you create a bend that has an edge relief, you can select the relief and change the type using the
Edge Relief tool, or you can change the type, depth, and width in the Properties panel. You can also move
an edge relief along a sheet metal wall.
Edge relief type Icon

Round
Square
Rip
Circular
Smooth
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To change an edge relief type and dimensions
1. Select an edge or face of a relief.
You can Ctrl-click to select multiple reliefs.
2. Select an option from the Edge Relief tool in the Modify ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab.
You can also select a relief type from the mini-toolbar or modify the Bend Relief Type in the
Sheet Metal section in the Properties panel. Depending on the relief type, you can also modify :
 Bend Relief Width: The width of the relief is A in the images below.
 Bend Relief Depth: The depth of the relief is B in the images below.
Creating and changing corner reliefs
Corner reliefs are created automatically when you create a sheet metal design or convert a design to
sheet metal.
The corner relief type is determined by the Corner Relief option tool in the Modify group on the Sheet
Metal tab. The default type is square, but you can change it to another type. The icon on the Corner Relief
option tool changes to reflect the corner relief type. This setting is saved until you close SpaceClaim.
You can select a corner relief and view its properties in the Sheet Metal section of the Properties panel.
You may need to create a corner relief on a sheet metal part, for example, when you import a shelled
part that doesn't have any reliefs, or when you want to convert a watertight corner to a regular corner.
When you change a sharp edge to another junction type or when you split a wall at a corner, corner
reliefs are automatically added.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To change the type of a corner relief

1. Select one or more corner reliefs by clicking any face in the corner relief.
2. Select an option from the Corner Relief tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab:
Corner relief type Icon Application

Default Any corner
Filled Any corner
Smooth Corners between bends or angles
Square Any corner
Circular Any corner
Triangular Any corner
Rectangular Any corner
Oblong Any corner
Diagonal Corners between bends of unequal radius or angles
Laser Edge Any corner
Laser Symmetric Any corner
None Any corner
3. You can also select a corner relief type from the mini-toolbar or modify the following values in the
Sheet Metal section of the Properties panel:
 Relief Type: Select a corner relief type.
 Reference: Select Corner or Middle based on how you want the corner to be positioned.
 Diameter, Offset, Width, Height: Enter values for the selected relief type.
You may wish to rotate a wall. To achieve a solid rotation and retain correct geometry, before rotating
a sheet metal wall face, you can automatically convert the corner reliefs to a default corner relief
(which is purposely a bit over-sized). When finished with the rotation, the corner reliefs will
automatically restore to their original relief type.
Examples
Changing a corner relief type to

Laser symmetric.
Selecting the Smooth option

from the Corner Relief tool for
unequal radius bends.
Selecting the Smooth

option for a non-90-degree
corner.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The following examples show the effect of the Reference corner relief property in an unfolded sheet metal
part.
Corner relief type: Circular
Reference: Corner
Reference: Middle
Corner relief type: Square
Reference: Corner
Reference: Middle
To add a corner relief
1. Select an option from the Corner Relief tool in the Modify group on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Select one or more points where you want a corner relief added.
Example
Adding a corner relief to a shelled part that was previously converted to sheet metal. This part will need
junctions and split faces before it can be unfolded.
To change a corner relief type back to default

1. Select one or more corner reliefs.
You can select a Filled corner by selecting the vertex where the corner relief would be.
2. Select the Default option from the Corner Relief tool.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can also modify the Relief Type value in the Sheet Metal section of the Properties panel.
To create a smooth corner relief between equal bends
1. Ctrl + click to select equal bends neighboring a corner relief.

2. Select the Smooth option from the Corner Relief tool.
To remove a corner relief

To remove but leave the geometry

2. Select None from the Corner Relief tool in the Modify group on the Sheet Metal tab or from
the mini-toolbar.
The corner relief object is removed. The geometry remains.
To remove by filling

2. Click the Fill tool in the Edit section of the Design tab.
Creating and changing notches
Use the Notch option tool in the Modify ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab to create a notch in an
edge of a sheet metal wall. The notch type is also determined by this tool. The icon on the Notch tool
changes to reflect the type.
Click the Notches option in the Highlight group to highlight all the notches in your sheet metal design.
When you convert a part that includes a notch, and then click the Identify tool and select the Notches
tool guide, notches are clearly identified by the cyan color in the sheet metal part.
To create a notch
1. Select a vertex or thickness edge.

2. Select an option from the Notch tool in the Create ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab to create
the notch.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Notch type Icon

Square
Rectangular
45-Degree Bevel
XY Bevel
Radius
To modify a notch
1. Select one or more notches.
2. Select an option from the Notch tool.
You can also select a notch type from the mini-toolbar or modify the Notch Type in the Sheet
Metal section in the Properties panel. Depending which Notch Type you select, you can modify
the Width, L1, L2, and Radius values.
To remove a notch
To remove but leave the geometry
1. Select the notch.

2. Select None from the Notch tool in the Modify group on the Sheet Metal tab or from the
mini-toolbar.
The notch object is removed. Highlighting Notches no longer highlights the object.
The geometry remains and can now be manipulated.
To remove by filling
1. Select the notch.

Creating and changing hems
Use the Hem option tool in the Modify ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab to create a hem in
a sheet metal wall. The hem type is determined by this tool. The icon on the Hem tool changes to reflect
the type.
If you move a wall with a hem, the hem moves with the wall.
Click the Hems option in the Highlight group to highlight all the hems in your sheet metal design.
To create a hem on a sheet metal edge

1. Select an option from the Hem tool in the Modify ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Option Icon
Simple
U-Bend
Teardrop
Rolled
None
2. Pull the edge back along the wall.
You can only create Hems on straight edges that have squared straight thickness edges. You
cannot create hems on non-thickness edges, such as those created with chamfers.
The hem is offset by one wall thickness.
To create a partial hem

1. Select an option from the Hem tool.
2. Click an edge with the Pull tool.
3. Adjust the edge points.
4. Tab between the arrows to select the direction.
5. Pull the edge back along the wall.to create the partial hem.
To change the partial hem’s values, modify the hem parameters in the Properties panel.
To create a hem using the Move tool
1. Click Move in the Edit group on the Sheet Metal tab.

2. Select the inside wall of the bend.
Turn the mouse wheel to select a face that is hidden by another face, if necessary.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Rotate the wall back on its neighboring face, as shown below.
A 0.0001 mm gap is created automatically.
To modify a hem
1. Select one or more hems.
2. Select an option from the Hem tool.
You can also select a hem type from the mini-toolbar or modify the Hem Type in the Sheet Metal
section in the Properties panel. Depending which hem type you select, you can modify
the Length, Height, Gap, and Diameter values.
With a hem selected, you can also modify the hem’s Inner Radius, Bend Steps, Bend Allowance (BA) and
Bend Deduction (BD) parameters in the Sheet Metal section of the Properties panel. When you change a
hem’s BA, the BD parameter also automatically updates, depending on the hem’s other parameters, such
as Inner Radius, Height, or Angle.
To remove a hem object but leave the geometry
1. Select the hem.

2. Select None from the Hem tool in the Modify group on the Sheet Metal tab or from the mini-
toolbar.
The hem object is removed. Highlighting Hems no longer highlights the object. The geometry
remains and can now be manipulated.
To remove a hem, you can also select Fill from the Edit group in the Design tab, or right-click and select
Delete from the context menu.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Making watertight corners
Watertight corners are sheet metal corners that don't have reliefs, so to make them you simply remove
the reliefs. Parts with watertight corners can be unfolded and modified just like any other sheet metal
part.
To make a corner watertight
1. Select the faces of the corner, like this:
The corner is now watertight:
To convert a watertight corner to a corner with reliefs
1. Select the edge or point where the bends meet, as shown below.
or
2. Click the Corner relief tool in the Modify group on the Sheet Metal tab.
The corner now has a relief:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Creating a partial flange junction
The part shown below has partial flange junctions on the front and back corners:
To create a partial flange
1. Select an edge or face that belongs to a junction.

2. Change the junction type to No Overlap, if necessary.
3. Change the Junction type parameter in the Sheet Metal section of the Properties panel to None.
4. Click Pull in the Edit group on the Sheet Metal tab.

5. Select the outside edge of one wall of the junction.
6. Drag the yellow balls in to the points where you want the flange to end, as shown below.
7. Pull in the direction that is parallel with the adjacent wall, as shown below.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can unfold a sheet metal design and changes appear simultaneously in the unfolded component and
in the original design.
Adding sheet metal forms
Use the Forms tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab to choose from a gallery of standard
formed sheet metal details. Forms can be placed on any sheet metal face and can be placed on the edge
of a face.
Select Forms in the Highlight group on the Sheet Metal tab to highlight all forms in your sheet metal
design.
To add a form to your design
1. Click Forms in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab.

2. Select a form in the gallery that opens below the tool icon.
3. Change the form parameters in the Options panel.
Hover over the illustration thumbnail in the Options panel to see a larger illustration with each
dimension or value.
These parameters will be saved as properties for the form.
4. Change the Rotation angle in the Options panel, if available.

5. Click on a face to place the form.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If you want to dimension the position of the form, click the Place the form using a grid tool
guide and select a face to place a sketch grid. You can then snap to the grid or hold the mouse
over an edge and press Shift for dimensions to lines, points, and intersections
An outline of the form will be shown on the face. You can click again to reposition the form.
6. Click the Complete tool guide to create the form or double-click to place and complete the form
in one step.
To add a countersink or special form
1. Click Forms in the Forms group on the Sheet Metal tab.

2. Hover over the illustration thumbnail in the Options panel to see a larger illustration with each
dimension or value.
3. Click to select a form from the Countersink or Special gallery.
4. The Options panel updates to display specific parameters for the form type you selected. These
parameters will be saved as properties for the form.
5. Select the face to use as the form shape.
6. Click the Complete tool guide to create the form or double-click to select the face and complete
the form in one step.
To add a user-defined punch, knockout, extrusion, or cup form

2. Select a user-defined form in the punch, knockout, extrusion, or cup sections of the gallery that
opens below the tool icon.
3. If you are adding an extrusion or cup form, you can change the form parameters in the Options
panel.
Hover over the illustration thumbnail in the Options panel to see a larger illustration with each
dimension or value.
These parameters will be saved as properties for the form.
4. Select the face to use as the form shape.

To add a custom embossed form to your design

2. Click Emboss in the Custom Tools section at the bottom of the gallery.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Click on the arrow at the bottom of the gallery to scroll down if you don't see the Custom Tools
section.
3. Set the following parameters in the Options panel:

 Distance: The distance that the section of wall will be offset.
 Round radius: All edges that are created are automatically rounded to this radius. Set the
option to 0 if you don't want the edges to be rounded.
 Draft angle: The angle of the inside wall of the embossed area. Set this value to 0 or hold Alt
and select the edges of the sketch area to prevent a draft. The draft is angled inward from the
profile you select.
 Shift faces or Offset faces: In the illustration below, the embossed area on the left was done
with the Shift method and the embossed area on the right was done with the Offset method.
 Remove top face: The top face is removed and the end faces are squared up.
 Chamfer holes: Creates a chamfer on the top edge of inside holes.
4. Select a sketched region to use as the form shape.
Closed sketches inside the region you select will become holes, as shown in the example below.
The Chamfer holes option has been selected in this example:
5. (Optional) Use the Select Edges tool guide and select sides that you want open, like this:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To add a custom punch form to your design

2. Click Punch in the Custom Tools section at the bottom of the gallery.
Click on the arrow at the bottom of the gallery to scroll down if you don't see the Custom Tools
section.
3. Set the following parameters in the Options panel:

 Through: The hole will go all the way through the sheet metal wall.
 Partial: The hole will go only to the depth that you set in the Depth field.
 Depth: How deep the punched hole should go into the sheet metal wall.
 Countersink: The sides of the punched area are drafted at a 45° angle. The draft angle is
measures across the hole and made so that its extents are outside of the sketched area.
 Full: If you select Countersink, the inside walls of the hole are angled from the top of the
hole to the bottom.
 Partial: If you select Countersink, the inside walls of the hole are angled from D1 to D2 in
the illustration below.
 Diameter: The smaller diameter of a partial countersink is labeled as D2 in the illustration

above. Only used if you select Partial.
To remove a form from your design
1. Click on the form to select it.
All faces that belong to the form are selected by default. You can scroll your mouse wheel if you
need to select a single face of the form.
To change form properties
1. Click on the form to select it.

2. Change the parameters in the Sheet Metal section of the Properties panel.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The parameters in the Properties panel are the same as the parameters in the Options panel when
you created the form. No parameters are shown for forms that can't be rotated or that don't have
parameters.
You can also change the Flatten Form property for the component to change how the form is
treated when the sheet metal part is unfolded. See Changing sheet metal part properties.
Tool guides
The Place the form tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to place a form on
any sheet metal face.
The Place the form using a grid tool guide allows you to select a face for a sketch plane, and then
you can place the form on the plane using the grid. You may want to use this tool guide to help
accurately position your form. You can use any dimensioning methods normally available for a
sketch grid.
The Select a face tool guide allows you to select the face that will become the form when you
create a user-defined form.
The Complete tool guide creates the form and allows you to place more forms until you exit the
tool.
Options
Each form has its own options for the form's dimensions. These dimensions are shown in the thumbnail
illustration in the Options panel. Hover over the thumbnail with your mouse to see the full-size image.
Most forms have the following options:
 Rotation angle: Use this option to turn the form on the face where it is placed.
 Create rounds: Use this option to round the edges of the form.
Examples
Creating a user-defined punch form on the edge of a face removes material from the edge.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can create a pattern of forms, and the forms are recognized by the Convert tool.
Adding a cross break
Cross breaks are a cost effective method for strengthening a thin piece of sheet metal. Typically, this is
done in an X shape, however two lines crossing at most angles will add strength.
To add a cross break to your design
1. Enter the Bend tool.
2. In the Options panel, click Create Cross Break.

3. Select Cutter Point is the default tool guide. When you mouse over an edge, you see a preview
of the bend line and its location. Click anywhere along the edge to place a bend line
perpendicular to the edge across the entire face.
4. The Select Two Cutter Points tool guide lets you select both bend line endpoints to produce
different angles.
5. Click Complete once you have created two crossing bend lines.
6. SpaceClaim shows the cross break as triangular shaded areas on the face.
Splitting a sheet metal face
Use the Split tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab to divide sheet metal faces and create
partial rips.
You can use the Split tool and the Select Two Cutter Points tool guide and select a corner for either or
both points to make a miter junction, as shown below. Corner reliefs are automatically created where
needed.
You can only select a face—not a thickness edge—with this tool. You cannot split a bend face.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
When creating multiple splits along a sheet metal part, regardless of whether you use one or two cutter
points or bend direction, the resulting bend spans the length of the sheet metal part across all splits, and,
on both sides of the split(s):
The Split face gap option in Sheet Metal options controls the width of a gap when you use the Split
tool.
To create a partial split or rip
1. Click Split in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab.

2. Select the Select Two Cutter Points tool guide.
3. Change the selection for the Relief tool, if necessary.
The shape of the end of a partial split is determined by the type of relief selected for the Relief
tool. The Relief tool is set to Square in the example below.

5. You can enter a dimension for the percentage of the distance along the edge or the distance from
the end of the edge.
The yellow ball turns green when the endpoint snaps to a point.
6. Click the point for the end of the split or rip.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To split using an imprinted edge or sketch curve
Click Split and then select an imprinted edge or sketch curve.
Tool guides
The Select Cutter Point tool guide is active by default. This tool guide splits a face perpendicular to
an edge at the point you select.
The Select Two Cutter Points tool guide allows you to select two points and a split is made
between the points. The snap radius from SpaceClaim Options > Snap is used.
Adding a sheet metal bead
Use the Bead tool in the Create ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab to create a bead on a face of a
sheet metal part.
You can create a bead using a line, spline, arc, tangent curve chain, layout curve, imprinted edge, or other
curve on a face. The curve must be completely on the face and must not self-intersect. The curve can
extend from an edge of the face or it can extend from edge to edge to create a full bead.
A dotted line previews the bead. If the preview extends beyond the edge of the face, or if the curve is too
tight, the bead will not be created. Faces which have beads can be moved with the Move tool.
The bead unfolds in the same way as a form unfolds.
Select Bead in the Highlight group on the Sheet Metal tab to highlight all the beads in your sheet metal
design.
To relocate beads on a face, select the Move tool.
To add a bead to your design
1. Click the Bead tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab.
The Select Path tool guide enables.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Select one or more curves to use to create the bead.

2. (Optional) Modify the Bead radius value in the Options panel.
3. (Optional) Modify the Round radius value in the Options panel.
4. Click the Create Bead tool guide.
Do it faster
Select the curve then click the Bead tool.
You can also create a bead using the sheet metal Bend tool.
Options
Bead radius The radius of the bead, which is also the height of the bead. The minimum
bead radius is 0.25xT (sheet metal thickness).
Round radius Radius of the round at the base of the bead where it intersects with the
surface.
Examples
Create a bead from a line on a sheet metal face.
Creating a bead using a line that extends across a face
Bending a sheet metal wall
The Sheet Metal Bend tool works similar to Split Face, and is used to create bends in a sheet metal flat or
unfolded part. You can bend along a sketch curve on the sheet metal face, bend perpendicular to an
edge, or bend between two points.
You can also place multiple bend lines along a surface. Existing in-progress bends, that are not yet bent
(flipped) remain de-selected as you place one or more new, additional bend lines along the sheet metal
surface.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To bend along a line
1. Click the Bend tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab.
The Create Bend option is enabled in the Bend Options panel.
2. (Optional) Modify the following values in the Bend Options panel:

 Bend angle: The angle of the bend.
When selecting on an edge to create a bend angle, modifying the Bend Angle option
propagates to the pull edge handles immediately.
 Bend radius: The inner radius of the bend.

 Die width: The width of the die.
 Bend Allowance: Value to use for calculating the flat length of the bend.
 Bend Deduction: Value to use for calculating the flat length of the bend.
3. Click on a sketch curve on the sheet metal face. The bend will be made across the full length of
the face, regardless of the length of the sketch curve.
4. Click the Complete tool guide to create the bend.
To reverse bend direction
Click the bend line to cycle through bending up and bending down.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To remove bend segments
Clicking a bend segment until the bend line turns red removes the segment from the bend.
The dashed lines to either side of the bend line show the extents of the bend allowance area, based on
the radius set by default or overridden by the user in the options area.
If necessary, you can click an empty location in the Design window while a tool guide is active to clear the
bend line and activate the Select Cutter Point tool guide.
Tool guides
Select Cutter Point: Click a point on an
edge to create a bend that is
perpendicular to the edge at the
point. Press Tab to enter a value for the
percentage or distance from the bend to
the endpoint along the edge.
Select Two Cutter Points: Click a point
on one edge and a point on another edge
to create a bend between the points. You
can see a preview of the line as it extends
to the second edge before you click on it.
Press Tab to enter a value for the
percentage or distance from the bend to
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
the endpoint along the edge.
Select Anchor Point: Select the face you

want to remain fixed when the body is
bent:
Select Curves: Select curves to be

wrapped around bends.
To add bend steps

1. Select a bend.
2. Modify the Bend Steps value in the Sheet Metal section of the Properties panel.
Adding bend steps creates a bumped bend, which instructs the operator and machine to create a large
radius bend by bumping instead of "rolling" smoothly. The bend is hit with a sharp tool, creating closely
spaced sharp bends that form a large bend.
To display the bend steps and bend dimension properties of the bend in an unfolded sheet metal part,
turn on the visibility in the Bends and Bend Dimensions layers in the Layers panel or in the Style ribbon
group on the Display tab.
To create a joggle
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Select the Create Joggle option in the Bend Options panel.

 Bend angle: the angle for both bends of the joggle
 Bend radius: the inside radius for both bends of the joggle
 Joggle height: the measurement between the top of the sheet going into the bottom bend
and the top of the sheet coming out of the top bend.
 Bend Allowance: Value to use for calculating the flat length of the joggle.
 Bend Deduction: Value to use for calculating the flat length of the joggle.
4. Use the Select Cutter Point or Select Two Cutter Points tool guide to create the bottom bend
of the joggle.
5. Click to select the second bend of the joggle, which is previewed as you mouse over the sheet
metal face, as shown below.
If necessary, you can click an empty space in the Design window to clear your selections and
activate the Select Cutter Point tool guide.
6. Use the Select Anchor Point tool guide to select the face to remain fixed when the rest of the
body is bent to create the joggle.
7. Click the Complete tool guide to create the joggle.
You can move the walls between joggles.
To create a joggle from existing bends
1. Select two bends with a face between them.

2. Right-click and select Create Joggle From Bends from the context menu.
The face between the two bends is added to the joggle. The highlighting color changes to
indicate the joggle.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To return a joggle to independent bends
Right-click the joggle and select Explode Joggle from the context menu.
The independent bends remain selected. If you want to return the bends to a joggle, right-click and select
Create Joggle From Bends.
Examples
Joggles created using the Bend tool
To create a bead using the Bend tool

2. Select the Create Bead option in the Bend Options panel.
 Bead radius: The radius of the bead, which is also the height of the bead. The minimum bead
radius is 0.25xT (sheet metal thickness).
 Round radius: Radius of the round at the base of the bead that intersects with the surface.
4. Click on a curve on the sheet metal face, or select a tool guide and select bend points based on
the tool guide you use.
5. Click the Bend tool guide to complete the bead.
You can also create a bead using the Bead tool.
Tool guides
The Select Cutter Point tool guide is active by default. This tool guide creates a bend that is
perpendicular to the edge at the point you select.
The Select Two Cutter Points tool guide allows you to select a point on one edge and a point on
another edge to create a bend between the points.
The Select Anchor Point tool guide allows you to select the face that will be fixed when the body is
bent.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Click the Complete tool guide to create the bend.
Bend Options
Use the Create Bend option to bend a sheet metal face along a line.
Use the Create Joggle option to create a joggle bend in a face.

Use the Create Bead option to create a bead along a curve on a face.
Adding a sheet metal marker
Use the Marker tool to create one or more blue ‘cross-hair’ placeholder markers on planar sheets or
side walls (flat surfaces) of your sheet metal design.
To create a marker
1. Click Marker in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab.

2. Select the Place the marker tool guide to activate the tool. The tool remains active, enabling you
to place multiple markers.
3. Move your cursor over the face where you want to place a marker.
4. Click to place the marker.
To move a marker
When moving a marker, the only Move handles that display are those that allow you to move the marker
along the design's grid. Markers move along with the walls on which they are initially placed.

2. Click the marker that you want to move.
Hold Ctrl and click to select multiple markers. Markers you select with Ctrl will move as a group.
You can also select one marker, then right-click and choose Select All to select all markers. To
move a marker, you can also enter a new location value.
3. Move the marker to its new position.

Markers that are added to a sheet metal part remain in place if you bend the part. When you unfold a
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
sheet metal part, markers that appeared on the part will also display on the unfolded part.
Creating a double wall
Use the Double wall tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab to create a folded full or partial
double wall in your sheet metal design, for example, in use with creating pipes, ducts and fittings.
To create a double wall
1. Click Double wall in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Select the Select faces tool guide to activate the tool.
3. Click on the face where you want to place the double wall.
4. Click the Select Edges tool guide, and click the edge where you want to place the bend.
5. Click the Complete tool guide to create the double wall.
Examples
You can not only rotate double walls around a bend axis, but you can also click anywhere on the model,
such as a face, and rotate the double wall to change the model’s geometry. How the double wall rotates
depends on which face is selected, as shown in the examples below:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
When you move a double wall, the wall and any objects associated with it, such as junctions and
reliefs, also move.
Creating a sheet metal gusset
Use the Gusset tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab tool to create gussets in your
design. A gusset is a section of the metal inside a bend which is not bent, but rather forced into the bend
in order to reinforce or stiffen the piece. You can create flat or cylindrical gussets. Both types are shown in
the image set below:
To create a gusset
1. Click Gusset in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. From the Options panel, select a gusset type (Flat or Cylindrical), and then choose Angle, Depth,
Width, and Round radius values for the gusset.
3. Click on the bend where you want to place the gusset. A blue outline of the gusset appears to
indicate where the gusset will be located on the bend.
4. Click to set the gusset.
To move a gusset
When moving a gusset, the only Move handle that displays is simply the handle that allows you to move
the gussets along the bend axis on which the gusset is defined.

2. Select the gusset that you want to move.
3. Move the gusset along the bend axis to relocate the gusset to a new position.
You can also enter a new location value for the gusset.
When you use the Fill tool to fill a gusset, the bend geometry on which the gusset is defined remains
intact.
Creating a tab
Use the Tab tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab to create tabs in your design. You can
create a tab on a sheet metal junction, such as a bend or split.
To create a tab
1. In your design, select the junction where you want to place the tab.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Click the Tab tool in the Sheet Metal tab Create group. The Select Edges tool guide activates.
The tab highlights in preview mode (blue) so you can see the tab's values and placement.
3. (Optional): Modify the options in the Options panel
 Length
 Spacing
 Clearance
 Height
 Edge options:
 Sharp Edges
 Rounds
 Chamfers)
 Flip: Checkbox to alternate the tabs in the opposite direction along the edge used to create
the hem.
4. Click Complete to create the tab.
With a Hem feature selected, the RMB has two Hem menu options.
 Flip: Alternate the tabs in the opposite direction along the edge used to create the hem.
 Reverse: Switches the edge to the other body to create the hem.
To create a single tab

1. In your design, select the junction where you want to place the tab.
2. Click the Tab tool in the Sheet Metal tab Create group.
3. Click the Select Points tool guide.
4. (Optional): Modify the options in the Options panel.
 Clearance
 Height
 Edge options:
 Sharp Edges
 Rounds
 Chamfers
5. Hover over the edge you want for the tab.
6. Click once to locate the first point. Dimensions display to enter an exact location.
7. Click the edge a second time to locate the end of the tab. Dimensions display to enter an exact
tab length.
8. Click Complete to create the tab.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Tabs created on a sheet metal junction.
Tabs created on a split sheet metal partial edge.
Tabs created at a T junction where one sheet is perpendicular to another.
Creating a hinge
Use the Hinge tool in the Sheet Metal tab Create to create hinges at junctions between sheet metal
parts.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To create a hinge
1. Create one of the three overlap junctions, or create a split across a flat wall.
2. Select the junction where you want to place the hinge.
3. Click Hinge in the Sheet Metal tab Create group.
4. The Select Edges tool guide activates and the hinge highlights in preview mode to show the
hinge's placement and size.
5. (Optional): Modify the Hinge options in the Options panel:
 Pin diameter
 Pitch
 Knuckle length
 End play
 Paint clearance
 Hinge direction can be flipped using the Flip checkbox.
6. Click Complete to create the hinge.
Adding engraved or cut-out text in sheet metal
A note is text that is engraved or cut out of the sheet metal part when it is fabricated. The special sheet
metal note can only be created, edited, moved, or deleted in the flattened state, but you can see it in the
folded state. The text can cross bends, as shown in the example below.
You can only create lightweight notes, which means they are rendered simply and don't require as many
resources as normal rendering. Their faces cannot be edited directly; you can only change the text by
changing the note.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To add engraved or cut-out text to your design
1. Unfold the sheet metal part.
2. Click Note in the Annotation group on the Detail tab.

3. Click on the face where you want to place the note.
4. Click again to place the note.
5. Type the note text.
6. Right-click the note text and select Convert To Lightweight > Cutout or Engraving.
You can change the note text like a normal annotation note. See Formatting note text.
To convert a sheet metal note to a regular annotation note
Right-click the note text and select Convert To Note.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Creating a lightweight pattern
Lightweight patterns allow you to create patterns in sheet metal that contain hundreds of thousands of
members. They are displayed nearly as fast as one member because only the original member's graphics
facets are calculated and then translated into graphics according to the pattern dimensions.
You can't select the graphics-only members. All changes are driven from the pattern leader and all pattern
members move when you move the leader.
When you toggle from a real to a lightweight pattern, the hole that is selected as the pattern leader
remains selected. This allows you to convert a lightweight pattern to a regular pattern, change the center
of modification or the leader position, then convert the pattern back to lightweight for speed purposes.
Lightweight patterns are automatically converted to regular patterns when you export a sheet metal
design.
You can only make a lightweight pattern using a pattern of holes.
To make a lightweight pattern
1. Follow the instructions in Creating a pattern to create a pattern of holes.
You can make any type of pattern, including linear, circular, radial, etc.
2. Right-click the pattern leader and select Toggle Lightweight Pattern.
To convert a lightweight pattern to a normal pattern
Right-click the pattern leader and select Toggle Lightweight Pattern.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Unfolding sheet metal components
You can unfold a sheet metal design and changes appear simultaneously in the unfolded component and
in the original design.
The Unfold button enable when you select a single face of a sheet metal part.
Unfolded parts are not exported with the solid when you export a sheet metal part; however, you can
explicitly export the unfolded part.
You can unfold the following types of walls, but you must right-click a planar face and not a cylinder or a
cone:
 Planar walls
 Cylindrical walls, including large diameter cylinders (roll bends)
 Most conical walls, such as a part with variable radius round between arcs that was shelled and
converted to a sheet metal part. Parts that are made with blends between radii also unfold reliably.
 Z bends and S bends, even when they neighbor a cylindrical or conical wall.
 Walls that includes holes that touch a bend or are included in an object that includes a bend.
 Double-walled parts that include a complex unbending edge.
To unfold a sheet metal component
1. Select a face of a sheet metal component with at least one bend junction.
The selected face sets the orientation of the unfolded design. When you select a single face of a
sheet metal part, the Unfold button enables. You can also right-click and select Unfold Part from
the context menu.
2. Click Unfold in the Flat group on the Sheet Metal tab.
An unfolded version of the component is displayed in a new Design window as a top view with its
overall dimensions, as shown in the figure below. It also appears in the Structure tree as an
unfolded part . The visibility of the unfolded part in the original design is initially set to Off in
the Structure tree. The unfolded part is saved as part of your design.
Overall dimensions on an unfolded part are measured based on the orientation of the sketch grid.
The inside angle of a bend is used to calculate dimensions. The two flat extent dimensions are
automatically displayed.
Bends are listed as objects in the Structure tree for the unfolded part. Bend lines and bend
dimensions are placed on a Bends layer with the visibility off. Turn the visibility on in the Layers
panel to view the bend lines.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If a chamfer is recognized as a form, it unfolds based on the Flatten form as value in the Sheet
Metal section of the Properties panel for the design.
If an unfolded component has conflicting geometry, the conflicting geometry is made a separate
surface in the Structure tree and highlighted in red, as shown in the figure below. The edge that
prevents the unfold is also highlighted.
If you save an unfolded sheet metal part within a component, opening that component in an
assembly displays a checkbox and icon for the unfolded part in the Structure tree. You can toggle
the visibility of the unfolded sheet metal part in the unfolded part design window.
Examples
Unfolding a form
Outlines are shown on the unfolded part on the side on which they were placed. Only the topmost
outlines of forms are displayed. Form outlines are on the Bends layer, which is hidden by default.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Unfolding a flange form
To work simultaneously on the folded and unfolded view of a design
The unfolded view of a sheet metal part can be placed next to the folded view in order to work
simultaneously on both views. Changes made to the part in one view updates in the other view.
You can use the Pull tool to make the following changes, and the change will be reflected in the unfolded
view:
 Punch holes in planar and cylindrical walls

 Pull walls to change their height or width, or pull to change the dimensions of a hole
 Use the annotation dimensions that are automatically created with an unfolded part to change the
height or width of a wall (see the animated example below)
To place views next to each other, click and drag the tab for a Design window and drop it next to another
view.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Examples
Using the Pull tool and annotation dimensions to change the height of a wall on the unfolded part (on
top); the changes are reflected in the folded part (on the bottom).
Using the Pull tool to put a hole in an unfolded cylinder also creates the hole in the folded part.
To create a view of an unfolded part in a drawing sheet
1. Unfold the sheet metal part in the drawing sheet.
Move the mouse to preview the unfolded part.
2. Click the drawing sheet to place a general view at that location.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To add bend dimensions to an unfolded view

1. Select the view.
2. RMB > Show Bend Dimensions
3. Make sure the Bend Dimensions layer is turned on.
With this option enabled, any changes made to the model will automatically update the drawing sheet
bend dimensions.
To export an unfolded part as .dxf

1. Place the desired dimensions and notes on the unfolded view using the tools in the Detailing tab.
2. Set the Graphics Style in the Display tab to Wireframe.
This step prepares the model for dxf export and shows you what the resulting image will look like.
3. Select Save As from the SpaceClaim menu and specify AutoCAD files (*.dxf) as the export type.
The unfolded model is saved as a 2D dxf file with the included annotations and can be used in
manufacturing.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Calculating unfolded lengths
SpaceClaim can use sheet metal bend deduction to calculate unfolded lengths. You can set the default
Sheet Metal Options in the SpaceClaim Options window.
You can change the default bend properties for a specific component or bend by selecting the
component or bend and modifying the values in the Properties panel:
 The Bend Allowance property contains the length of the arc through the bend at the neutral axis of
the sheet metal wall being bent. Adding the Bend Allowance and the lengths of the two sides give the
unfolded length.
 The Bend Deduction value for the selected bend represents 2 times the Outside Set Back
(OSSB) minus the bend allowance.
Bend Allowance (BA) and Bend Deduction (BD) are linked. Modifying one value causes the other to be
automatically recalculated as follows.
BD = 2 x OSSB - BA
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Bend allowances
Bend allowance calculations use what is known as a K-factor. This is the ratio of the location of the
neutral line (t in the image below) to the material thickness (T). When metal is bent, the material at the
inside radius is put in a compressive state while the material at the outside radius is put in tension. The
neutral line is the point of zero stress where the material transitions from compression to tension.
K-factor = t/T
The K-factor is a geometric calculation and does not take into account physical factors for a given bend
process (material type, bend operation type, tools, etc.). Because of this, the only way to know the actual
K-factor for a given setup is to do a reverse calculation from an actual bend. In other words, bend the
metal, measure the result, and calculate the K-factor.
SpaceClaim determines the correct K-factor curve so you have a more accurate result, without changing
the K-factor or frequently change bend tables. The default bend allowance produces an accurate result for
normal bends made with normal tools and a normal press brake. For basic parts, you should use the
default allowances. For special cases, you can use a bend allowance table.
The curve for the default values used in SpaceClaim is shown below.
The graph shows three segments: red, blue and green.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 The red segment represents bend radii less than the material thickness. Because of the physical limit of
the steel compressibility, it is difficult to obtain bends with a radius less than the thickness in an air
bend process.
 The blue segment shows that, as the inner radius increases, the K factor is not constant. It increases up
to approximately 0.5 when the inner radius is about four times the material thickness. It does not
increase beyond that because the material is no longer stretched. A K-factor greater than 0.5 is not
possible.
 The green segment is constant at 0.5, which is the neutral axis for bends with a radius greater than four
times material thickness.
The point where the red and blue segments meet is important. It represents a bend radius equal to the
material thickness. For normal bends, a reverse calculation finds the K-factor to be:
K = (4-PI) / PI = 0.27324
This can be confirmed by press brake manufacturers. It is correct for normal bends because it is based on
the actual physical result.
You can build bend allowance tables for your materials and processes. When your tables are filled (which
is a one-time task), you can unfold with the tables, or use the default value.
With a sheet metal design selected at the top level of the Structure tree, the K-Factor Type option
displays in the Sheet Metal group of the Properties panel. By default, the K-factor type is set to Variable,
but you can also set a constant K-factor.
The Constant K-Factor type option allows you to enter a numerical value for the part. Using this option,
you can map the design to other mainstream CAD functionality, or, adjust the design to a manufacturer’s
unique standards or tolerance levels to achieve various unfolding results.
You should only change the K-factor so it corresponds to the working properties of the metal.
Using a bend deduction table
Bend deduction tables are used to calculate flat pattern layouts. The tables are based on the Bend
Deduction (BD) formula, which calculates the flat line length to produce a specific bend angle.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
In the above image, D is the Outside Set Back, which is the distance from the tangent point of the radius
to the apex of the outside of the bend.
For a 90 degree bend:
D = BR + T
and
BD = 2(BR + T) - BA
Where BA is the Bend Allowance that equals the arc length of the bend along the neutral line. The neutral
line is the radius where the material transitions from compressive stress (inside) to tensile stress (outside).
Ninety degrees, however, is a special case. The more general form of the equation can be derived from
bend angles other than 90 degrees (second and third images above).
For angles other than 90 degrees:
D = Tan(A/2) x (BR + T)
and
BD = 2Tan(A/2) x (BR + T) - BA
For 90 degrees:
A/2 = 45 and Tan(45) = 1, so:
BD = 2(BR + T) - BA
If a bend table is not assigned to a part, the bend allowance is calculated from the default K-factor found
in the Sheet Metal options. If you enter values in the Properties panel for a sheet metal parameter, it will
override the bend deduction from the bend table.
You can set the bend deduction to a negative value to correctly calculate the bend deduction from the
bend allowance.
To use a sheet metal bend table to calculate unfolded lengths
1. Copy a CSV file to the SpaceClaim Library/Bends folder or into a SpaceClaim Support File
directory.
2. Set the bend table for a sheet metal component by selecting the component in the Structure tree
and selecting the bend table from the Bend Table property.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
All values may then be obtained from the bend table instead of being calculated. Any values not obtained
from the bend table may result in an error when you unfold the design. You can clear the sheet metal
bend table assignment from a component by selecting the blank value from the Bend Table property
drop-down.
The table below shows a simple bend table as it would appear in a spreadsheet editor. Keywords are
shown in bold.
When you unfold a sheet metal design, the thickness, inner bend radius, and angle from the design are
used to determine the value in the selected table.
Once you select a bend table, you can edit the Vee Die Width property in the Properties panel. Vee die
width sets the width of the tooling that produces the bend.
Comma-separated value file
Bend table files are stored as comma-separated value (CSV) files, which can be edited. The file below
shows the same data as in the previous table, but as it appears when stored in the comma-separated
value file.
Keyword description parameters for bend tables
Keyword Description Parameters

Version,<version- Specifies the file format The file format version number is provided. The
number> version. current version is 2.00. Version 1.00 is also
supported.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Type,<type-name> The type of data A single string representing the type of data
contained in the file. contained in the tables. Supported values are file
format version dependent.
 Version 1.0
 Bend Allowance
 BendDeduction: Outside setback is
measured from the bend outside mold line
for all bend angles.
 Version 2.0
 Bend Allowance
 BendDeductionOml: Outside setback is
measured from the bend outside mold line
for all bend angles.
 BendDeductionTangent:
Outside setback is bend angle dependent:
Bend angle < 90 degrees: outside setback is

measured from the bend outside mold line.
Bend angle >= 90 degrees: outside setback is

measured from tangent plane to bend.
Units,<units-type> The default units are used Must be in, mm, or cm.
for numeric values which
do not have units
provided explicitly.
Thickness,<value> Begins a bend table A single parameter specifying the thickness for
definition. which the bend deductions in the table are
defined.
VeeDieWidth,<value> Optional. Specifies an A single parameter specifying the width of the
optional tooling die tool.
parameter, allowing
multiple sets of bend
deduction values for a
given thickness.
Must occur after a

Thickness keyword.
AngleValues,,<value>,… Defines the columns of A list of angles, specified in degrees.
the bend deduction table.
Note the extra empty cell

to aid in table alignment.
The values defined by the

table are associated with
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
the preceding Thickness

and VeeDieWidth
keywords.
Radius,<radius>, Defines the body of the The first parameter (radius) provides the inner
bend deduction table. bend radius for the table row. The following
<deduction-value>,… parameters all provide the deduction values for
Individual deduction each combination of angle and radius.
values may be omitted.
The total number of

deduction values
provided cannot exceed
the number of values
provided above for the
AngleValues keyword.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Customizing SpaceClaim
You can customize SpaceClaim to best suit your working style. Most customization is done on the
SpaceClaim options window, accessible from the Application menu.
To customize SpaceClaim
1. Select SpaceClaim Options from the Application menu to display the SpaceClaim Options
window.
2. Click the type of option you want to set from the navigation panel on the left.
You can use the up and down arrow keys to navigate the left panel.
3. Modify the options on the page.

4. Click OK to save all your changes and close the window.
If you try to enter a value that is out of the allowed range in the Options panel or the SpaceClaim
Options dialog, you will see a red exclamation mark icon next to the field. You can hover over the icon
to see a tooltip that will explain the valid values for the option.
Option types
You can set the following option types:
Popular Change your application color scheme, set file options for importing and exporting, grid
size, application performance (speed vs. graphics quality), and customize the tools that are
displayed while you are working in the Design window.
Detailing Change options for annotations and drawing sheets.
Color Change the color of the SpaceClaim application window.
Snap Change the objects snapped to while you are sketching and editing solids.
Units Set the units for dimensions, the sketch grid, and text height.
Support Set the search path for support files, such as standard thread size tables.
Files
Sheet Metal Set the thickness, bend, and relief defaults for sheet metal components.
Advanced Modify how your design changes are displayed in the Design window, whether tools and
hints are displayed, enable background loading, change the language, customize the Spin,
Select, and Undo tools, reset the layout of the panels, and adjust the license warning.
Customize Add or remove tools and commands from the Quick Access toolbar.
Navigation Change the keyboard/mouse actions used for common navigation tasks.
Add-Ins Include or remove SpaceClaim add-ins.
License View and activate SpaceClaim licenses.
Resources Download sample designs, check for updates, contact SpaceClaim, or view information
about this version of SpaceClaim.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Popular options
Set the startup options, interface, application performance (speed vs. graphics quality), and customize the
tools that are displayed while you are working with your design.
To customize popular options
window.
2. Click Color in the navigation panel on the left.
Graphics performance options
Rendering quality: Select a value from 1 to 7, where 1 is the lowest quality and 7 is the highest quality.
Select a low number to increase the speed of the application; select a high number to increase the quality
of the graphics. Increasing graphics quality may lower the SpaceClaim's responsiveness to actions in the
Design window. If you notice a delay when working with your design, modify this option to increase
application speed.
Anti-aliasing: The amount of smoothing applied to text, edges, and face boundaries in the Design
window. This option appears only if your graphics card supports anti-aliasing.
Recalculate Rendering: Click this button to update the 3D display in the Design window. This allows you
to see the affects of any changes you made in the settings dialog.
Startup options
Show splash screen: Select this option to display the splash screen when you start SpaceClaim.
Show welcome screen: Select this option to display the Welcome window with links to tutorials, training
videos, and other support resources when you start SpaceClaim.
Check for software updates: Select this option to use your internet connection to check for updates each
time you start SpaceClaim.
Interface options
Show tooltips: Select this option to display hints when you hover over tools, tool guides, and other icons.
They briefly explain what will happen when you select the tool and provide some hints on how to use the
tool.
Show popup messages in status bar: ON by default. Select this option to display popup messages in the
status bar area (the lower left corner of the SpaceClaim window). These messages provide hints and
feedback while you work in SpaceClaim.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Show popup progress messages: ON by default. Select this option to display progress
messages when importing files or using the Volume Extract tool.
Show tool KeyTips: Select this option to enable keyboard shortcuts. Pressing and releasing the Alt will
display shortcuts that can be used to access the Quick Access toolbar, the Ribbon groups, and the tools in
the Ribbon groups.
Show Journal tab in the Ribbon: Select this option to enable Journal tools, which you can use to save
and play back a record of actions used to create a design.
Control options
Tool Guide position: Select Left, Right, Top, Bottom, or Not Shown.
Show view orientation in design window: Default is OFF. When selected, this option displays a view
orientation gizmo, as shown below, in the design window. You can click a linear gizmo arrow to rotate the
design to a new orientation in 3D, or a rotational arrow to rotate the design in 90-degree increments in
the plane of the screen.
Show mini-toolbar on selection: Select this option to display a small toolbar near your cursor when you
right-click. The contents of the mini-toolbar depend on the tool you are using. You can click or scroll the
middle mouse button to hide the mini-toolbar, and it fades as you move the mouse away from it. The
mini-toolbar is shown in the image below.
Show radial menu: Allows you to use the radial menu to change select modes while other tools are
active, and gives you quick access to the Pull, Move, Fill, and Combine tools. If you select this option, you
can select one or both of the following methods to open the radial menu:
 Show after holding left mouse button for N ms

 Show after clicking right mouse button, while holding left mouse button down
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Show cursor arrows: Select this option to display arrows next to your cursor that indicate the directions
in which you can move your mouse to edit the selected object. The arrows also convey the change in size
that will occur if you pull in that direction.
Arrow transparency: Adjust the slider to control the transparency of the cursor arrows. Move the slider to
the right to make the arrows more opaque; move it to the right to make them more transparent. The
arrows are set to opaque in the image below.
Move handle size: Move the slider to increase or decrease the size of the Move handle relative to the
size of the Design window, as shown in the image below.
Grid guide: Change the position and size of the small toolbar displayed for the sketch grid. It is shown in
its default position (corner) and size (small) in the image below. When a multitouch device is detected,
this setting defaults to large size and bottom position.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Setting general detailing options
You can customize the style of your annotations in a single design or set a custom style as the default for
all designs. You can quickly customize the style to conform to ASME or ISO/JIS standards, or you can
create a style by customizing note leaders, dimensions, and geometric tolerances.
To change detailing options
1. Select SpaceClaim Options from the Application menu and click Detailing or click in the
Annotation ribbon group on the Detailing tab.
2. Set the options for Defaults:
 New window font: Choose from any font installed on your system. This font will be used as
the default font for all new windows. When a new window is created for an old or new
document, this font will be used. It will also be used for new SpaceClaim sessions.
 Default drawing graphics style: The default graphics style used for new drawings.
3. Select one of the following from the Detailing options for drop-down list:
 All New Documents to create a default detailing style for all your designs. These settings will
not affect any currently open documents.
 This Document to set options for the current design only.
4. To reset all options to predefined defaults, click one of the Reset to <standard> Default buttons
to set all document options to the default.
5. Set the remaining options.
View options
Default view projection:
 First Angle to label the view by the direction you are looking. For example, if you are looking front,
you see the back of an object. Therefore, the back of the object is the "Front view."
 Third Angle to label the view by the object. For example, the front of the object is the "Front view."
Default front view position:
 Top left to place the front view at the top left corner of the drawing sheet. This is the ISO standard.
 Top right to place the front view at the top right corner of the drawing sheet
 Bottom left to place the front view at the bottom left corner of the drawing sheet. This is the ASME
and JIS standard.
 Bottom right to place the front view at the bottom right corner of the drawing sheet. If you use third
angle projection, ISO standards also allow this position.
Detail view options
 Detail view name text height ratio - Set the ratio of a character's height to width. For example, a
value of 1.4 sets the character height to 140% of its width.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Default view note layout - Select One Line to display the detail name and scale on one line. Select
Two Lines to display the scale below the detail name.
 Default detail name note prefix - Select how you want the detail label to appear on the drawing
sheet.
 Default view scale note prefix - Select how you want the scale label to appear on the drawing sheet.
 Detail view boundary note placement - Select how you want the detail name and scale information
to be positioned relative to the detail boundary.
Threaded surface options
Select a value from the Cosmetic thread display standard drop-down.
ASME Simplified is the same as ISO and JIS Conventional display standards.
Annotation options
 Default text height - Enter the height of the annotation text.

 Leader circle size - Enter the size of the circle that connects note leaders to faces.
 Leader arrow length - Enter the length of the arrow on note leaders.
 Leader arrow width - Enter the size of the arrowhead on note leaders.
 Leader shoulder length - Enter the length of the line from the note text to the note leader arrow.
 Leader textbox gap - Enter the size of the margin between the note text and the beginning of the
note leader.
 Center line extend- Enter the length that a center line will extend past the edge of the object.
 Default arrow fill style - Select the style you want to use for the arrowheads on note leaders from the
drop-down list.
 Default dimension text location - Select how you want to align the note leader text with the note
leader line from the drop-down list.
 Default GTOL font name - Select the font you want to use for geometric tolerance symbols from the
drop-down list. The two fonts in this drop-down list contain all the geometric tolerance symbols
necessary. These symbols will be used as necessary in annotations, even when you select a different
font for the annotation text.
 Virtual sharps rendering style - Select the symbol you want to use to indicate the virtual sharp.
 Datum symbol frame - Select the frame style for datum symbols.
 Datum symbol attachment - Select the attachment style for datum symbols.
 Show thread designation in thread diameter - Choose whether thread designations are shown
instead of thread diameters:
 Never: Show the diameter and not the thread designation.
 Always: Show the thread designation instead of the diameter.
 Per thread table: Use the value for ShowThreadDesignationInDiameterDimensions in the
thread table XML file. The value can be set to true or false.
 If units match: Show the thread designation if the system units match the units from the thread
table.
 Per thread table if units match: Show the thread designation if the units match and if the
ShowThreadDesignationInDiameterDimensions value is true.
 Datum Callout text height ratio: Controls how many times larger the callout circle should be
compared to the text height.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Datum Target default point size: Controls the point size used by datum target points, lines, and
circles. Default point size can be overridden on a per object basis.
 Datum Target area default hatch spacing: Controls the hatch spacing for circular and rectangular
datum targets. Default spacing can be overridden on a per object basis.
 Datum Target area default hatch angle: Controls the hatch angle for circular and rectangular datum
targets. The default angle can be overridden on a per object basis.
 Datum callout leader arrow shape: Controls the arrow shape of leaders connected to datum targets.
 Enforce dimension line - Check the box to use the European standard of keeping the dimension line
when the extension lines are shown.
 Tight gap between dimension line and text - Check the box to shrink the gap between the
dimension text and witness lines.
 Horizontal dimension text - Check the box to keep all annotation text oriented horizontally.
 Override layer color for annotations - Check the box to set all annotation text to the color selected
shown in the Annotation color control. If you choose to override the layer color, select the color used
for the override from the Annotation color control.
 Extension line gap - Enter the size of the margin between geometry and the end of dimension lines.
 Extension line extend - Enter the length that the dimension lines cross each other.
 Dimension line extend - Enter the length of the arrow that appears outside the dimension lines.
 Dimension text offset - Enter the distance between the dimension text and its leader line.
 Show zero value for base ordinate dimension - Display the baseline dimension as a 0.
 Show common dimension line for ordinate dimensions - Display all dimensions along the same
line. Check Rotate text if you want the dimensions to be displayed along the line instead of
perpendicular to the line.
Linestyle options
 Default thick lineweight - Enter the default width for thick lines.
 Default thin lineweight - Enter the default width for thin lines.
 Type of object - From the drop-down, select an object type, then select the Line style and Thickness
for that object.
 Only a Thickness option is available for Cross hatching.
 Options for Detail view clipping edges apply to all clipping edges of partial views. You can also set
a Color for the clipping edges.
 Only a Thickness option is available for Area cross section border lines.
 Only a Thickness option is available for Cross section arrow tips.
 Line style: Select a line style for the object. For example, when working with Wireframe, Hidden Line,
or Hidden Line Removed visibility modes, you can now select a line style to show the edge(s) of a
design’s partial view. This feature enables you to easily identify which parts of the model are cut by the
partial clipping boundary. Non-solid line styles can help to differentiate a detail view with clipped
edges when in wireframe mode,
 To enable the display to view while working with your design:
 Select Lineweight in the Show group in the Display tab
 Select Hidden Line, Hidden Line Removed or Wireframe from the Graphics drop down in the
Style group in the Display tab
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 The values in the Trim back section control the line weight for side offset handles.
Thick-Empty-Thick lines look like this:
Thick-Thin-Thick lines look like this:
Drawing sheet size and format options
The drawing sheet size and format options allow you to choose a drawing sheet layout.
 To use a pre-defined drawing format that has been saved as an .scdoc file, select Use external format
and select a format from the list or click Browse to choose a file.
 To create drawings without a format, select No format and select a size and orientation, or set a
custom width and height.
 Deselect Show SpaceClaim-provided default formats in the user interface if you don't want to list
drawing sheet formats that were installed with SpaceClaim in the external formats selection list.
Modular grid options
Modular grid options allow you to change how modular grids appear by default in your drawings. When
you change these options, all new modular grids will use these settings; existing grids in your drawings
will not change.
Most of these options are also found in the properties for a grid. To change one instance of a modular
grid, see Displaying a modular grid.
To change modular grid options

1. Select SpaceClaim Options from the Application menu and click Detailing > Modular Grid.
2. Set the defaults for the following options:
 Color: The color of the grid, labels, and the legend axis.
 Grid text height: The height of all text labels for the grid.
 Font: The font and text height used for grid labels. Type the complete name for a font,
followed by a comma and the font height in units (mm, in, etc.). You can also click the ... button
and select a font and a size in points; the size will be converted to the current units.
 Grid interval: The distance between grid lines.
 Intervals per grid line: The number of rows between each grid line.
 Line style: The type of line used for grid lines.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Thickness: The thickness of grid lines.

 Horizontal text location: Show labels for the bottom of grid lines, the top of grid lines, both,
or neither.
 Vertical text location: Show labels for the left end of grid lines, the right end of grid lines,
both, or neither.
 Axis labels: Override X, Y, or Z with your own labels.
 Negative and positive prefixes: A prefix shown before the distance on a grid label.
 Negative, positive, and zero suffixes: A suffix shown after the distance on a grid label.
 Modular grid description label: A label shown next to the section line when you show a
modular grid on a cross section view.
 Automatic creation for new views: Select an option for displaying modular grids for all new
views in drawing sheets.
 Automatically show modular grid when two grid directions are parallel to the sheet:
Two of the X, Y, or Z axes in the view must be parallel to the drawing sheet to display the
modular grid.
 Automatically show modular grid when at least one grid directions are parallel to the
sheet: The X, Y, or Z axis in the view must be parallel to the drawing sheet to display the
modular grid.
 Do not automatically show the modular grid
 Automatically show modular grid description: If selected, then the description label is
displayed next to the section line for a cross section view.
 Show balloons around grid labels: Show circles around grid labels.
 Automatically show origin: Show the legend axis on the lower left corner of the view.
3. Click OK to save your changes.
File Import and export options
You can open and insert files from many other modeling applications into SpaceClaim for editing, and
save your SpaceClaim designs as many different file types. If you work frequently with non-SpaceClaim
files, we recommend that you set your file options to optimize the importing and exporting process for
your needs.
To customize import and export options
window.
2. Click File Options in the navigation panel on the left.
3. Select a file type in the panel on the left to change options for just that type of file.
Descriptions of all options are listed below.
4. Click OK to save all your changes and close the SpaceClaim Options dialog.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To set general file options
1. Click General in the panel on the left.

2. Check:
 Use SpaceClaim color tones when importing to use the SpaceClaim color scheme for layers.
This option is enabled by default to avoid fully saturated colors, on which highlighting is less
visible. Faces of imported data will retain their original color tones if this option is turned off.
 Create multiple documents when importing assemblies to open or insert a non-SpaceClaim
assembly as multiple documents. When you save your design, click References to adjust where
the documents are saved.
 Use matching SpaceClaim documents for faster import if a design contains an external
component that was previously imported and converted to the SpaceClaim .scdoc format and
you want to re-use that previously imported file.
 Automatically save imported documents to immediately save an opened or inserted non-
SpaceClaim file to an SCDOC file. (If you do not select this option, then opened or inserted files
are not saved until you save the design.)
 Improve imported data to improve a file when it is opened or inserted. You can choose to
have SpaceClaim Clean and simplify geometry, Stitch nearby surfaces together, and Find
coincident surfaces within a tolerance that you specify. De-selecting this option imports the
file without improvements so the file appears more quickly, but you may have to perform the
improvements manually.
 Load model in background to orient large designs while they are loading.
 Check Use lightweight assemblies to display a graphics-only representation of SpaceClaim
files in the Design window. These files become components when loaded, opened, or inserted.
When you import a non-SpaceClaim file as a lightweight assembly, you can save the unloaded
lightweight component as an SCDOC file with only rendering data (that is, without geometry
data). You can then open this SCDOC file in a new design and load it normally to include the
geometry data.
 Use lightweight assemblies for SpaceClaim documents: If you open a SpaceClaim
document with external components, the external components will be opened as lightweight.
 Use lightweight assemblies for imported documents: If you select this option, then you can
select one of the following load methods:
 Save imported document and load as lightweight: When this option is selected, the
imported file will be opened in memory. An SCDOC file will be created for each part in the
file, saved, and then loaded as lightweight, which frees the heavyweight data from memory.
You will see an entirely lightweight assembly. If you then right-click on one of the
lightweight components and select Load Component, then the part will be fully loaded
very quickly. Also, this method displays the color of imported parts. The methods below do
not. PMI information cannot be imported with a lightweight model.
 Lightweight assembly structure and geometry: This method imports the document just
like in the above option, creating lightweight parts in SpaceClaim, but no SCDOC files are
created or saved. As a result, this option uses less memory than the above method when
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
importing the document; however, if you use Load Component on one of the lightweight
components, the entire document must be re-imported in order to get all of the data for
the component. Loading the component can be very slow. This method is recommended if
you intend only to use the lightweight facets and not the heavyweight geometry or if you
are working with smaller imported documents.
 Assembly structure only: Only the component name and hierarchy is created. No
lightweight facets are created.
 Allow import of hidden components and geometry to open or insert hidden components
within CATIA v5, Parasolid, SolidWorks, and SketchUp files, and turn off their visibility in the
Structure tree.
 Objects to be imported has checkboxes for:
 Free curves
 Points
 Planes
 Axes
 Coordinate systems
 Object names
 Improve data on export to improve a file when it is exported. This allows you to turn off the
behavior if you don't want to merge faces and edges before a model is exported, such as
exporting to Rhino.
 Allow export of hidden components and geometry to save components that have their
visibility turned off in your design as hidden components when you save them as any other file
type. This option is supported for ACIS, Rhino, SketchUp, and SAT/SAB formats.
 Select Import object names to import CATIA files with object names.
 Select Export object names to export CATIA files with object names.
To set ACIS file options
1. Select ACIS in the panel on the left.

 Convert ACIS bodies to SpaceClaim components to create components and use the name of
the ACIS bodies for the components. If you deselect this option, then the ACIS structure is used
in the Structure tree.
 Split body name by the following characters to insert the character between the part name
and the body name, when the names are different. For example, with the character set to a
period, the name would be part.body. If you deselect this option, then the component name of
imported components and solids are the same in the Structure tree.
 Version to set the format of exported designs.
To set AutoCAD file options
 Select AutoCAD in the panel on the left.

 Set the Import options:
 Insert polyface mesh, 3DFace and Solid entities into 3D as: Select how you want to import these
entities as 3D into SpaceClaim.
 Insert polyface mesh, 3DFace and Solid entities onto drawing sheets as: Select how you want to
import these entities onto drawings sheets.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Insert hatch identities as: Select the behavior for hatch identities.

 Set the Export options:
 Version: Select the AutoCAD version to set the format of exported designs.
 Save as Black and White: Remove color information from exported designs.
 Associate Dimensions to Geometry: Select dimensions to associate with adjacent geometry.
 Include Drawing Format: On by default.
 Scale Output 1:1: Off by default. Set the output of your AutoCAD files to a 1:1 ratio.
When saving a drawing as a DWG or DXF file, you can also access the last two Export options by
choosing Save As from the Application menu; from the Save As dialog box, click the Options button.
 Set the DWG options for import and export:

 Teigha (Associated Dimensions) to use Teigha 3.4.0 libraries.
 Autodesk Real DWG to use Autodesk's translator. Import supports associated dimensions in your
design. Use this option to import DWG files with 3D bodies. For export it will disconnect dimensions
from the geometry in your design.
To set CATIA file options
1. Select CATIA in the panel on the left.

2. Set the Import options:
 Check Import part manufacturing information to include product manufacturing
information when you open or insert CATIA designs.
If you select this option, and you previously selected Import assembly structure only in the
General file options, that option will be deselected.
Deselect Trim control points outside face boundaries if you do not want to perform surface
optimization on CATIA files when they are imported. This option is on by default.
3. Set the Export options:
 Select the CATIA version to set the format of exported designs.
Whether you import or export CATIA files, XYZ locations of point objects will scale as expected.
To set IGES file options
1. Select IGES in the panel on the left.

2. Select an Import Method:
 Use facewise connections to attempt to stitch everything together and make a solid if
possible. With this option selected, the import may fail if the model is corrupt.
 Import faces independently to import models as a collection of individual surfaces, skipping
only the surfaces that are corrupt.
3. Select an Export SpaceClaim body option:
 Manifold Solid B-Rep Object (MSBO - Type 186): MSBO defines a manifold body with all the
necessary topology information like shells, faces, loops, edges and vertices.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Trimmed surfaces (Type 144): The boundaries of these surfaces will be represented by Curve
on a Parametric Surface Entity (Type 142).
 Bounded surfaces (Type 143): The boundaries of these surfaces will be represented by
Boundary Entity (Type 141). The boundary entity will refer to model space curves and surface
parametric curves, with preference set to model space curves.
To set JT Open file options

1. Select JT Open in the panel on the left.
2. Select your settings:
 Import part manufacturing information: Imports JT PMI (Product and Manufacturing
Information) files with datum labels, text notes, dimension measurements, and GTOLs
(geometric distance and tolerance information, also called GD&T).
 Coarse, Medium, Fine to use the deviation and angle preset values.
 Custom to use the Deviation and Angle sliders to set a custom resolution.
Resolution indicates the number of sides of a polygon used to represent a circle. The deviation
is the difference in distance between the circle’s radius and the polygon’s radius. The angle is
the angle between the edge of the polygon and a tangent drawn through the circle at the
same point.
 Default to use the system setting.

 Use JT Open Toolkit configuration file to import/export JT files, which allows you to control
common translation parameters using a standard configuration file, the format of which is
defined by JT Open Toolkit. Using the toolkit also ensures 100% data compatibility and allows
you to have more control over the number of LODs (Levels of Detail) and tessellation
parameters for each LOD in an exported JT file.
To set OBJ file options

1. Select OBJ in the panel on the left.
2. Select Override quality to change the faceting setting for exported files so it is different from the
graphics facetting setting.
 Custom to use the Deviation and Angle sliders to set a custom resolution.
Resolution indicates the number of sides of a polygon used to represent a circle. The deviation
is the difference in distance between the circle’s radius and the polygon’s radius. The angle is
the angle between the edge of the polygon and a tangent drawn through the circle at the
same point.
To set Parasolid file options
1. Select Parasolid in the panel on the left.

2. Select the Parasolid version to set the format of exported designs.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To set PDF file options
1. Select PDF in the panel on the left.

2. Select Geometry (PRC B-Rep) to save the geometry of the design, such as equations for
surfaces, edges, etc.
3. Select Facets only (Universal 3D) to save only the triangles that make up the rendering of the
solids (that is, an approximation).
To set Pro/ENGINEER options
1. Select Pro/ENGINEER in the panel on the left.

2. Select Allow import of Quilts if you want to import quilts. A Quilt in Pro/ENGINEER is a
collection of individual surface bodies.
To set Rhino file options
1. Select Rhino.
2. Select Convert Rhino layers to SpaceClaim layers on import to import layers.
3. Select Convert SpaceClaim layers to Rhino layers on export to export layers.
To set SketchUp options
1. Select SketchUp in the panel on the left.

2. Select Display to show or not show hidden geometry.
3. Choose to Import as Solid or Mesh.
4. Choose a Version to export to.
To set STEP file options
1. Select STEP in the panel on the left.

2. Select an Import Method:
 Use facewise connections to attempt to stitch everything together and make a solid if
possible. With this option selected, the import may fail if the model is corrupt.
 Import faces independently to import models as a collection of individual surfaces, skipping
only the surfaces that are corrupt.
3. Select the STEP protocol to use to format exported designs.
To set STL file options

1. Select STL in the panel on the left.
2. Select an Import option: Select the Import as solid checkbox to import a file that includes one or
more planar areas. Upon import, these areas merge into one planar face. Select the Merge faces
checkbox to seamlessly merge one or more faces.
3. Select an Export option: Format and File.
When exporting STL files, the output is set to Binary by default.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Select a Resolution option:

 Custom to use the Deviation and Angle sliders to set the resolution.
Deviation is the distance between a chord drawn through a curved cross-section of the model
and the curve’s most distal point. The angle is the angle that the chord line makes with a line
tangent to the cross-section curve.
 Facet maximum aspect ratio to change the triangle faceting ratio when you export an STL
file.
 Facet maximum edge length to enter a desired edge length. The value you specify is the
maximum value for the edges, however smaller edge lengths may be created. The ACIS
modeler attempts to meet your desired edge length setting, but in some design scenarios, may
create an edge length that is less than what you specify as your facet maximum edge length
setting, to best accommodate the design.
To set VRML file options

1. Select VRML in the panel on the left.
2. Select Override quality to change the print resolution options and tolerances.
 Custom to use the Deviation and Angle sliders to set the resolution of the VRML mesh.
Deviation is the distance between a chord drawn through a curved cross-section of the model
and the curve’s most distal point. The angle is the angle that the chord line makes with a line
tangent to the cross-section curve.
 Facet Aspect Ratio to change the triangle faceting ratio when you export a VRML file.
Appearance options
You can adjust SpaceClaim's appearance, such as its menu bar style and color schemes. This options page
also contains placeholder elements for future color customization options.
To set color options
window.
2. Click Appearance in the navigation panel on the left.
Skin
Ribbon style: Choose between Fluent (Office 2007) or Scenic (Office 2010) style ribbon bar styles. With
the Scenic style, the File menu provides a Recent menu item, which displays Recent Documents (lists the
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
name and location of all recently opened files) and Recent Places (lists a history of all recently visited
folders).
Color scheme: Select Silver, Blue, Black, or Custom Color from the menu.
Reset Docking Layout: Click this button to return the layout of the docking panels and SpaceClaim
windows to their original locations.
General
Design color scheme: Select a color scheme from the menu. This option controls the color scheme used
in the Design window. You can choose between two pre-set color schemes: White Background or Black
Background. Elements displayed in the design area will change to colors that work well for the
background color.
You can change the colors for other elements. Click the color next to an individual element and choose a
new color from the drop-down. Select colors from the Custom, Web, or System palettes.
Click Reset to change all the colors back to the SpaceClaim defaults.
Highlight and Select scheme: Select a scheme from the drop-down menu. Classic and Default cannot be
modified. Custom allows you to modify color options to create your own scheme. Use Ctrl+Shift+H to
toggle through schemes in the following order: Classic; Default; Custom.
Snap options
You can set snapping options for sketching and editing solids. Units for snap options are set by your Units
options for all new documents.
To customize snap options
window.
2. Click Snap from the navigation panel on the left.
To set incremental options for sketching on the sketch grid
1. Check Angular snap to snap to objects while sketching.

2. Enter the angle increment you want to snap to when you select the Snap to angle option in
Select, Move, and Sketch tools.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To enable snapping to objects when sketching on the sketch grid
1. Check Enable snapping in sketches to snap to objects while sketching.
While you sketch, objects you can snap to are highlighted. The points to which the sketch tools
are snapping appear as messages in the status bar.
2. Check the box next to each item in the list to determine which objects you can snap to while
sketching:
 Line - Snap points along lines (at intersections with sketch grid) indicated by rectangles
 End point - Snap points at all end points indicated by squares
 Midpoint - Snap point at center of lines indicated by triangles
 Arc/circle center - Snap points at center of arcs and circles indicated by circles
 Tangent from end point - Snap points at tangent angle to end points indicated by tangent
guides
 Perpendicular from end point - Snap points perpendicular angle to end points indicated by
perpendicular guides
 Tangent/perpendicular from line - Snap points at tangent and perpendicular angles along lines
indicated by tangent and perpendicular guides
 Parallel to line - Lines parallel to the sketched line indicated by highlighting
 Parallel to grid - Snap enabled parallel to the grid when snap to grid is disabled
 Grid - Snap enabled to the grid
To set incremental options for editing solids
1. Check Linear snap to snap to constrain to a linear increment and set the linear interval for tool
movements in the Incremental area.
For example, if you set the Linear increment to 1 mm, you will pull to whole millimeters instead
of fractions of millimeters.
2. Check Angular snap to snap to constrain to an angle increment and set the degree interval for
tool movements in the Incremental area.
For example, if you set the Angular increment to 5 degrees, you will move in larger increments
than if set to 1 degree.
To set snapping options for editing solids
1. Check Enable snapping to solids with the Shift key to snap when you press and hold Shift
using any tool.
2. Check the box next to each situation or object in the list to determine when a tool will snap while
editing solids:
 Face parallel - Snap to a parallel face
 Rotate parallel to face - Snap to a parallel face when rotating
 Rotate perpendicular to face - Snap to a perpendicular face when rotating
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Edge - Snap to any edge

 Cylinder radius - Snap to the radius of a cylinder
 Round radius - When creating a round, snap its radius the radii of existing rounds on the
component
To set the nudge options
You can change the values for Distance or Angle:
 Normal - The nudge increment when you press Alt and an arrow key.
 Small - The nudge increment when you press Alt + Ctrl and an arrow key.
 Big - The nudge increment when you press Alt + Shift and an arrow key.
Examples
Snapping to the midpoint of a line
Editing a solid with angular snap set to 15 degrees
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Snapping to a round radius
Units options
You can set the units for dimensions, the sketch grid, and text height.
To customize units
window.
2. Click Units from the navigation panel on the left.
3. Select one of the following from the Units settings for drop-down list:
 All New Documents to create a default detailing style for all your designs. These settings will
not affect any currently open documents.
 This Document to set options for the current design only.
Units
Type: Select Metric or Imperial from the menu.
Length: Select the default units used for length. Angles are always shown in degrees.
Decimal/fraction: If you use Imperial units, you can select Decimal or Fraction to display distance
measurements that are less than 1 unit.
Angle: Select from the following options.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Degrees
 Degrees/Minutes/Seconds
 Degrees/Minutes
Mass: Select the default units used for mass.
Density: Select Independent to specify the density units from the density fields or Derived to calculate
the units from your selections for length and mass.
Symbol: Select the abbreviation you want displayed for unit type you selected for Length.
Primary precision: The number of decimal places you want displayed for distance measurements for the
primary units.
Use tight tolerances: When this option is selected, tolerances are rounded to a value that gives a tighter
tolerance when you have dual dimensions or when a dimension from the design window is shown in the
drawing window with a different unit setting than the design window. The purpose is to not lose any
precision when converting from one unit system to another. When this option is not selected, the values
are rounded according to method A in ISO 370-1975 (E). When selected, values are rounded according to
method B.
Show symbol in user interface: Select this option to display the units abbreviation in SpaceClaim. The
abbreviation will appear in measurement fields, such as a distance field when you pull a face.
Show symbol in annotations: Select this option to display the units abbreviation after the measurement
in annotation dimensions.
Show trailing zero: Select this option to display trailing zeros in decimal measurements.
Show "-" separator: Select this option to display a hyphen between whole values and fractions.
Dual dimensions: Select this option to display annotation dimensions in both Metric and Imperial. The
unit type you have selected is displayed first and the other is displayed in square brackets. You can see a
preview of the display below this option category.
Secondary precision: The number of decimal places you want displayed for distance measurements for
the secondary units.
Grid
Reset to Defaults: Click this button to reset the grid settings to the SpaceClaim defaults.
Minor grid spacing: Type the distance you want between the smallest grid lines.
Number of grid lines per major: Type the number of smaller grid lines between larger, darker grid lines.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Text
Text height units: Select a unit type for note text.
To convert an existing solid or surface from millimeters to inches
1. Change the units to inches as described above.

2. Select the Pull tool in the Edit ribbon group on the Design tab.
3. Select the object you want to convert.
4. Scale the object by 25.4.
Support file options
You can specify the directories in which you store support files, such as drawing sheet formats or thread
size tables. Drawing sheets contained in these directories are displayed within the Format tool.
To set the location of support files
window.
2. Click Support Files from the navigation panel on the left.
3. Click Add or Browse and navigate to the file or directory you want to include. (You can also select
the path and click Remove to remove it.)
4. Select a path and click Move Up or Move Down to order the file paths.
5. Click OK.
To change the file location display

 Drag nodes to reorder the search paths, which determines the order in which files are searched.
 Right-click on the top level (or root) node and select Add to add a new search path.
 Right-click a node and select Browse, Remove, Move Up, and Move Down.
File backup settings
Check the Backup every checkbox to enable the Autosave feature. With Backup, you can save your files
automatically, helping to reduce the risk or impact of data loss in case of a crash or freeze.The default
Backup time interval is 10 minutes, but you can select a time interval from 1 to 100 minutes. Once you
select a time interval, you can enter or click the Browse button to select a location for the Backup files on
your computer. By default, SpaceClaim stores Backup files on your C: drive in your Users folder. If you
save your file before your session ends, your Backup files are purged. You can click the Clear Backup Files
button to manually purge your Backup files at any time.
When you re-launch SpaceClaim after a crash or freeze, an information box displays to notify you that
Backup files are available. To recover them, click Recover from the Application menu and select the file
you want to open.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Keep Backup files for ^ days: Use the scroll box to select the number of days (0-100) that you want to
store your Backup files. By default, SpaceClaim sets the number of days at 7.
To use a template for new designs
To create a design template, do the following:
1. Create some geometry (or set some parameters) you wish to use as a template for new designs
2. Save the document as a SpaceClaim Template File (*.scdot)
3. In Support Files options, check the Use template for new designs checkbox and specify a path
to the template files.
File Locations
Check the Initialize Open dialog to the following directory checkbox and specify a path. When you
choose to open an existing design, the Open dialog opens and displays files in this directory.
Check the Initialize Save dialog to the following directory checkbox and specify a path. When you
choose to save your design, the Save dialog opens and displays files in this directory.
Sheet metal options
You can set the wall thickness, bend, and relief defaults for sheet metal components. These defaults can
be changed for each component or bend by selecting the component or bend and modifying the
property values in the Properties panel. Units for sheet metal options are set by your Units options for all
new documents.
Options in the Basic Defaults section apply to all new designs, and persist after you close SpaceClaim.
Options in the Relief Defaults section apply only to new designs in the current session.
To customize sheet metal options
window.
2. Click Sheet Metal in the navigation panel on the left.
Basic Defaults
Thickness: Type a value for the default wall thickness of sheet metal parts.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
K-Factor (for R=T): Type a value for the K-factor. The K-factor is a value between .25 and .50 that is used
to calculate the bend radius. K-factor is a percentage of the metal thickness and depends on factors such
as the material and type of bending operation.
Bend radius: Type a value for the default bend radius. The value is a Thickness ratio by default, but you
can select Value to enter an absolute value.
When the Bend Radius is set to Thickness ratio and you change the sheet metal part thickness for the
part, the value for the Inner Radius now changes in the Sheet Metal Properties panel. In other
words, changing the part thickness property will not change all the bend radii, but the displayed bend
radius changes to show that there is a problem for you to fix. You can fix them by selecting the desired
bends and changing their properties manually.
Relief Defaults
Bend Relief: These values are the defaults used when you create a bend. Select the default Type, Width,
and Depth from their menus. You can change this type for an individual bend relief by selecting the bend
relief with the Pull tool and clicking a different option in the Options panel.
In the images below, A is the width and B is the depth of the bend relief.
Square relief Rounded relief
Split face gap: Set the default gap created when you bend a split face, which is shown as C in the image
below.
Corner relief: Set the default depth of corner reliefs, which is shown as D in the image below.
If you change the width or depth for these option you can select:
 Thickness ratio to change the relief width and depth based on the thickness of the wall.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Value to specify the exact width and depth of the bend relief.
Export
Round all sharp corners at DXF export: Select this option to round all the edges in your design whose
neighboring faces are not co-planar when you export a DXF file. You can set the round radius values if
you select this option.
Colors
Select highlighting colors to use on sheet metal designs. To distinguish between corner reliefs and edge
reliefs, select two different colors. Colors on designs will appear more saturated than the colors shown in
the sheet metal options.
Click Reset Colors to restore the default colors.
Unfold Layers
Assign default layer colors and line style for:
 Bend Lines-Up
 Bend Lines-Down
 Forms
 Overall Dimensions (color only)
 Bend Dimensions (color only)
Advanced options
Modify how your design changes are displayed in the Design window, whether tools and hints are
displayed, enable background loading, change the language, customize the Spin, Select, and Undo tools,
reset the layout of the panels, and adjust the license warning.
To set advanced options
window.
2. Click Advanced in the navigation panel on the left.
You can click Reset all user settings to adjust all settings back to their default states. You may
need to restart SpaceClaim.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
General
Animate changes to view projection: Select this option to animate the steps when you select a view.
Show previous selections with pre-highlight hint: Select this option to highlight all the geometry you
last acted on that includes the selected vertex, edge, or face. If you click again with the Select tool, the
previously selected group will be selected for you with that one click.
Auto-extrude/revolve sketches in Section mode: Select this option to automatically extrude or revolve
in section mode. As you sketch in Section mode, lines that begin on an existing edge are extruded to form
surfaces, and closed surfaces form solids. If the line begins on a solid, the line is finished automatically
when you click another point on the solid.
Maximum undo steps: Type the number of actions you want available for undo. We recommend that this
value be set to at least 50. To enable your changes, you must restart SpaceClaim.
Language: Select a language from the menu. The SpaceClaim user interface and online help display in the
selected language.
Reset All User Settings: Reset all modifiable user settings to a default state. To apply the updated
settings, you must restart SpaceClaim.
Export User Settings: Export a SpaceClaim user.config file (XML format) for editing and/or future
import.
Import User Settings: Apply non-default, customized selections that are unique to an individual user. A
valid SpaceClaim user.config file (XML format) must be available for import. User.config file
location can vary depending on SpaceClaim installation, but generally, this file type is stored in your local
AppData directory. Once you locate the user.config file you want to import, or, enter the name of the
user.config file in the File Name text box, click Open to import the file.
Universal User Settings:
You may add a centrally-located custom configuration file which overrides any individual user
settings/options. It is read instead of any local config file. More precisely, it replaces (i.e. is copied over)
the local config file. A configuration file can be used to ensure that every employee in the company has
the same default user settings.
How to create a universal user settings file
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Create an environment variable called SPACECLAIM_ADMIN_CONFIG. It should point to a fully

qualified file name which may be on the network, for example:
SPACECLAIM_ADMIN_CONFIG=\\dell_server\shared\rob\admin.config
2. Begin by creating your own user.config file as described below.
 Open SpaceClaim and go to the Options menu.
 Change the settings any way you want.
 Click the Export User Settings button in the Advanced options page.
 Save as "user.config" or any other name you want withe the ".config" extension.
 Place in the location which your Environment variable points to.
3. Test that your settings have exported correctly as follows.
 Close out SpaceClaim.
 Locate your user.config file.
 Go to Computer>Local Disk
 Click in the Path panel at the top of the window
 Type: %APPDATA%
 Double click Local
 Double click SpaceClaim
 Select all the settings folders and delete them
4. Open a new SpaceClaim session and see the results of your user.config file.
Notes about the universal settings file

 The name can be anything - 'admin.config' is just an example.
 This file will be used by SpaceClaim instead of the local user configuration file.
 To use the settings you created, make sure you clear out your local settings before you start
SpaceClaim. You should only need to do this once.
 Users may need to delete local settings to get SpaceClaim to use the central config file the first time.
This is because SpaceClaim checks the file dates and uses the newest of the two files.
 After the first time, you should not need to delete local settings again.
 When you do a new install on a machine with the Environment variable set, the admin user settings will
be used without needing to delete the local settings.
 Once a user has a specified central config file, any changes they make will persist. However, settings
within tabs restricted by 'panel.config' cannot be overridden.
Restricting access to specific user settings
You can prevent some tabs in the SpaceClaim Options panel from being overridden by a user. This is done
with the 'panel.config' file that specifies which tabs to disable.
There is an example panel.config file in the following directory:
C:\Program Files\SpaceClaim\
This file is simply an example to work from and currently does nothing.
Unlike the 'admin.config' file, which can be named anything, 'panel.config' should not be renamed.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
How to create a 'panel.config' file
This example will disable the 'Popular', 'Snap', and 'File->CATIA' options.
<PanelsToDisable>
<PanelName>Popular</PanelName>
<PanelName>Snap</PanelName>
<PanelName>FileOptions_CATIA</PanelName>
</PanelsToDisable>
All of the option panel names are listed below. Use them to customize panel.config as you like. Place the
file in the same location as the admin.config where your Environment variable points.
Popular
Detailing_General
Detailing_SizeAndFormat
Detailing_ModularGrid
Appearance
Snap
Units
SheetMetal
Navigation
Advanced
FileOptions_General
FileOptions_ACIS
FileOptions_AutoCAD
FileOptions_CATIA
FileOptions_IGES
FileOptions_JTOpen
FileOptions_OBJ
FileOptions_Parasolid
FileOptions_PDF
FileOptions_ProEngineer
FileOptions_Rhino
FileOptions_SketchUp
FileOptions_STEP
FileOptions_STL
FileOptions_VRML
SupportFiles
Customize
AddIns
License
Resources
SpaceClaimLabs
Selection
Hit radius: Type the number of pixels your cursor can be from the object you want to select.
Select edge loops using mouse scroll wheel: This option is ON if you are connected to a multitouch
monitor. Pre-highlights the selection as you scroll through edge loop choices. You can click a pre-
highlighted edge loop to select it. With the option enabled, if you are using a multitouch machine, you
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
can select edge loops by double-clicking OR double-tapping the first edge of the edge loop you want to
select.
Automatically calculate Power Selection results: Select this option to automatically display objects in
the Selection panel. You do not need to click to search when power selecting. Objects similar to the
selected object are automatically displayed in the Related list. This option is on by default.
Power Selection relative tolerance: Type a percentage to change the relative tolerance used when
searching in the Selection panel. Enter a non-zero percentage to find objects with similar, but not exactly
the same dimensions when power selecting. For example, if you enter 10% in this option field, select a 10
mm radius round in your design, then click in the Selection panel, rounds with a radius between 9 mm
and 11 mm will be returned in the All rounds equal to 10 mm results list. The default is 1%. Adjust this
value to 0% to detect perfect rounds exactly or increase it to find imported rounds.
Pull Tool
Default extrude behavior: Select Automatic, Add, Cut, or No Merge to set the initial state of Pull. The
Automatic option selects by default.
Animate Full Pull: Select this option to animate all the steps when you select the Full Pull option to
revolve, sweep, or blend your design.
Behavior
Preview before modifying: Select when you want interim calculations performed when modifying solids
from the menu. If this option is turned on, the preview of a change is displayed as a rough wireframe
model rather than a rendered, 3D model. If you work with very large designs, a wireframe preview can be
faster than doing the calculations necessary to render the change as a shaded 3D model. Select:
 Auto to allow SpaceClaim to determine when to render the preview based on the size of the
component and the capabilities of your graphics card.
 On to always display changes as rough wireframe previews rather than rendered previews.
 Off to always render the preview instead of displaying it as a wireframe model.
Enable geometry convergence: Select this option if you want SpaceClaim to help you when you are
moving solids together so that the edges (such as rounds) converge perfectly. If this option is enabled,
when you are moving solids together, SpaceClaim will display a progress bar as it performs the
convergence steps.
Show cross sections in sketch: Select this option to display cross sections of solids with hatching. You
might want to disable this option if you are working with complicated cross-sections.
Show coaxial face groups: Display faces that share an axis with blue shading.
Fill cross section: Controls the visualization of a cross-sectioned solid in Section mode. If this option is on
and you view a section through a body, the body is filled with color.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Show arc centers: Select this option to display small crosses on the sketch grid at the center of circles,
ellipses, polygons, and arcs.
Offset edges by geodesic calculation: With this option selected, all the points on the offset edge are the
same distance from the initial edge. In the examples below, the original edge is highlighted in green, the
regular offset is shown in orange, and the geodesic offset is shown in blue.
Top view direction: Allows you to change the top view to Z or Y. This setting is saved with the document
and only applies to new documents. You may want to change this setting when you import drawings from
other CAD applications that use a different upward direction. This option is automatically set to Y when
you run SpaceClaim with an ANSYS license. This gives your design the same orientation in SpaceClaim
and ANSYS.
Examples
Extruding while sketching in Section mode
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Quick Access toolbar options
The Quick Access toolbar (QAT) is located on the title bar. The Ribbon is the menu bar that contains all
the tools in groups. You can add or remove tools from this toolbar and control the placement and display
of the Ribbon.
To customize the Quick Access toolbar
1. Click next to the Quick Access toolbar.

2. Select any items you want to appear in the toolbar.
3. Select Place Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon to create a separate toolbar on the
SpaceClaim interface.
4. Select Customize Quick Access Toolbar to display the SpaceClaim options window. (Any
changes you made in the previous steps are saved automatically.)
You can also select SpaceClaim Options from the Application menu and click Customize.
5. Select the ribbon group that contains the tool you want to include in the QAT from the Choose
commands from drop-down menu.
6. Click the tool you want to include and click Add.
Select a tool and click Remove to remove it from the QAT.
7. Click OK.
To temporarily minimize the ribbon bar
Double-click the name of the active tab or press Ctrl-F1. Double-click a tab or press Ctrl-F1 again to
restore the ribbon bar.
To keep the ribbon bar minimized
1. Click next to the Customize Quick Access toolbar.

2. Select Minimize the Ribbon to hide the ribbon when you are working in the Design window.
To use the ribbon while it is minimized, click a tab to display the ribbon bar temporarily.
To restore the ribbon bar
1. Click next to the Customize Quick Access toolbar.

2. Select Maximize the Ribbon.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Navigation options
SpaceClaim allows you to customize how you spin, pan, and zoom. You can customize which mouse
button/keypress combinations are used as shortcuts for these tools, or you can select a theme to match
another CAD application you are familiar with.
To set navigation options
window.
2. Click Navigation in the navigation panel on the left.
3. Select the default SpaceClaim theme, select an alternative theme, or create a custom theme. See
below for more information.
4. Select an option in the Zoom group to set how turning the mouse wheel zooms the design:
 In Zoom mode: Turning the mouse wheel only zooms while the Zoom tool on the Orient
group on the Design tab is active.
 In Spin/Pan/Zoom mode: Turning the mouse wheel zooms when any of the Spin, Pan, and
Zoom tools are active.
 Always (hold Ctrl to Query Select): The mouse wheel always zooms in any tool.
5. Select a spin method in the Spin group:
 Arcball: Rotates the view using the spot where you start dragging as the rotation axis. Imagine
the axis running straight up and down from your mouse position and perpendicular to your
current view. Navigation in most 3D CAD systems works like this.
 Turntable: Rotates the view using the top of your design as the up direction and the location
of your mouse as the rotation axis. This is the spin method commonly used in architectural
CAD packages.
6. Select Show spin center to display the axis about which you are spinning the design.
7. Select Rotate about pre-selected object to spin the design around the highlighted edge.
You may want to uncheck this box if you are working with large or complicated designs.
8. Select your Clip with Volume, or, ClipView options:

Preview color: Select a ClipView preview color to set the preview color of the sphere
representing your selected ClipView.
 Clip selection: Trims the visible and selected surfaces inside a Clip Volume by the Clip Volume
boundary. If you select this option, you are working in Clip Selection mode, and you can toggle
Clip selection and Zoom to fit from the Misc section of the Properties panel. If you do not
select this option, you are working in Clip Interactive mode. In this mode, you cannot modify
options from the Misc section of the Properties panel. When you select a face within the
boundary, the entire face (unclipped) displays.
 Zoom to fit: Changes the behavior of the ClipView>Locate function. If this option is selected,
then the Clip Volume is moved to the center of the graphics window and is magnified for the
user; when Zoom to Fit is chosen. If it is not set, then the Clip Volume is only centered, and
not magnified.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Alternative navigation themes
The following table shows CAD applications matched to alternative themes.
CAD Application Navigation theme (closest

match)
SpaceClaim Default
Pro/ENGINEER® Default
Solid Edge® Default
CATIA® Alternative 1
Rhino® Alternative 2
ANYSYS® Alternative 3
SolidWorks® Alternative 3
ALGOR® Alternative 3
KeyCreator® Alternative 3
Inventor® Alternative 4
To create a custom theme
Modify the key and mouse shortcuts shown in the Theme list for any theme. Custom is displayed as the
selected Theme. Your changes are saved immediately.
Modify the Spin, Pan, and Zoom settings to set the mouse and key shortcuts used for those actions. You
can also change the Zoom-in drag direction and the Zoom-in wheel direction to Upward (turning the
mouse wheel away from you zooms in) or Downward (turning the mouse wheel towards you zooms in).
To delete a custom theme
Click Reset All to delete the custom theme and select the Default theme.
License options
You can view and activate SpaceClaim licenses. If you have questions about licensing, please
contact SpaceClaim customer support.
To view and set license options
window.
2. Click License in the navigation panel on the left.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To change the expiration warning
License expiration warning: Enter the number of days you want to be warned when your SpaceClaim
license is about to expire.
To change add-ins
The licensed add-ins that are available to you are listed. Select an add-in to activate the license. When you
try to activate an add-in, and a license is not available, you will receive a warning message.
To switch to a different license type
Click New License to reconfigure the SpaceClaim license.
Your Windows login must be set up as an administrator.
Reconfiguring allows you to change from an evaluation to a customer license.
Flex Licensing
If flex licensing is available for you, your license is stored on a server. You can check out a flex license on a
specific computer, and then go off the network and continue to use the borrowed license. You borrow the
license for a specified period of time, after which it is returned to the server on the date and time you
specify.
To borrow the license

 Check Specific Borrow Length and enter the number of days you want to borrow the license.
The maximum number of days is determined when SpaceClaim is purchased.
 Check Specify return date/time and enter the exact date and time.
Use this option if the borrow time is shorter than one day.
2. Select the Translator licenses to borrow.

3. Click Borrow License.
When the license if successfully borrowed, Borrow License is disabled (grayed out) and title bar
shows the expiration date or the time remaining.
To return the license
Click Return License and click OK. Restart SpaceClaim to complete the return.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
SpaceClaim has Dynamic CATIA licensing for certain customer Flex licenses. With this special licensing in
place, a CATIA license is consumed during CATIA file import and then released after two minutes. You can
change the two minute wait time as you wish. The License section in the Options menu displays the new
option.
Node-locked Licensing
A node-locked license is intended to prevent unauthorized (repeated) use of the SpaceClaim application,
and requires that a serial number only works on a single machine. In SpaceClaim, node-locked licenses
can include, for example, Data Exchange Package I, Data Exchange Package II, JT Open, TraceParts, and
CATIA V5.
To use the same serial number on another machine, you must first deactivate the license on the first
machine. To do this, select the Deactivate License button in the License Options dialog box. The
Deactivate License button displays only if you have a node-locked serial number license, and is not visible
to Flex customers, or most serial number customers.
Multitouch options
The Multitouch options page is only visible if a multi-touch device is connected to your computer.
To set multitouch options
window.
2. Click Multitouch in the navigation panel on the left.
General
Enable multitouch: Enable or disable multi-touch functionality in SpaceClaim.
Use style: Select either of the following, then set the options in the Settings section.
 Timing-based: This mode automatically chooses touch functions based on the amount of time a touch
signal is maintained. For example, using two fingers moving together to immediately drag invokes
panning, while holding two fingers down for a while, then moving them, invokes what are normally
right-mouse-button drag mouse gestures.
 Gizmo-based: Existing mouse buttons and popular keyboard buttons are placed in an on-screen
gizmo, to clearly map existing functions onto the touch interface. This mode is intended to transition
existing SpaceClaim users to the touch interface.
See Using a multitouch screen for more information about multitouch styles.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Show touch spots: Displays a red filled circle at the location of the recognized pen or touch locations on
the screen. This was added to facilitate online demos, so the viewer can see where fingers are touching on
the remote screen.
Settings
The options in this section change depending on your Use style setting.
If you select Timing-based, then you can set Query next direction: Set the direction of flick-based query.
The default is up.
If you select Gizmo-based, then you can set Gizmo configuration: Select Switch buttons to reverse the
direction of the gizmo. The default gizmo is configured for right-handed use and the reversed gizmo is
configured for left-handed use.
Configuring windows
SpaceClaim has several docking windows that are initially docked along the left side of the application.
You can minimize these panels, detach them, or dock them to different sides of the application. You can
also dock and detach your design windows.
To minimize a panel
Click the thumbtack icon to minimize the docked panel. Mousing over a minimized panel expands the
panel while the cursor is over it. Once the cursor leaves the expanded panel, it returns to its minimized
state.
To maximize a panel
Click the thumbtack icon to "stick" the panel to the application window.
To detach a panel or window
Drag a panel by its title bar to detach it. Drag a design window by its tab to detach it.
To dock a panel or window
Drag a panel or window by its title bar or tab. As you move the panel or window over the application,
icons indicate possible docking positions.
Mouse over an icon to preview the docked location. Release the mouse button to dock the panel at that
location.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To return docked panels to their default layout
1. Select SpaceClaim Options from the Application menu and select Appearance.
2. Click Reset Docking Layout.
3. Click OK.
Customizing the Welcome window
The layout and contents of the SpaceClaim Welcome window can be customized by editing a single XML
file. You can add or remove buttons, edit the icon for a button, control the layout of buttons, and
determine the action executed when a button is pressed.
The following button actions are supported:
 Launch a video – any media format that the operating system of the computer displaying the Welcome
window can play
 Launch a Web page – uses the default browser
 Launch a SpaceClaim Help page – opens SpaceClaim’s html-based help to a specific page of its
contents
 Load a SpaceClaim model – from any file format that SpaceClaim opens in the running instance of
SpaceClaim that the Welcome screen is attached to
 Launch any other executable that the operating system can handle
The XML file: Welcome.xml
The XML file Welcome.xml consists of a list of tags that contain the information for displaying and
executing the buttons in the dialog. In the following example, a new group named “Getting Started” is
created, with one button named “Introduction” in it.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
XML Elements
The following tags are used in Welcome.xml to specify the content and behavior of the Welcome screen:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
File structure and versioning
When the Welcome screen launches, it looks first for the Welcome.xml file and uses that file to set the
layout and behavior of the buttons. It looks first in the %APPDATA%\SpaceClaim\Welcome directory
(typically C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\SpaceClaim\Welcome\) and
then in SpaceclaimInstallDirectory\Library\Welcome\ for the xml file.
The paths to files (example: <DocumentPath>folder\intro.scdoc</DocumentPath>) used in

Welcome.xml should be relative paths from the location of welcome.xml. This means that in order to
create a custom Welcome screen, the Welcome.xml file should be placed in either of these locations
with the supporting files and images.
Once the Welcome screen has loaded, it checks the SpaceClaim server (if connected to the internet) to see
if a newer version of Welcome.xml exists. If it does, it automatically downloads it and replaces the
current Welcome screen display. This means that if a user wishes to have a custom Welcome screen
created and used by SpaceClaim, they should assign a large version number in the <Version> tag in
Welcome.xml so that SpaceClaim will not download and overwrite the custom version with a newer
version.
Lastly, in order to minimize the size of files included with a SpaceClaim install, the Welcome screen need
not have the files referenced in the Welcome.xml . For example, if the xml file uses the link
<Link>Videos\intro.wmv</Link> (to a possibly large video file) and the video file is not present on
the user’s machine, when the button is pressed to watch the video (and only when the button is pressed)
the user will be prompted to download the video from the SpaceClaim server (if it exists). This way large
videos can be stored on a server and only accessed if and when the user tries to watch them.
Additional notes
 The <Link> tag can be used to open any executable or windows document.
 The preferred button image type is .png with a transparent background. This approach produces the
best highlighted appearance when the button is pressed.
 The <Tooltip>, <Link>, <HelpId>, and <DocumentPath> tags are optional.
 The <Name> tag for an item must be unique. This tag is used internally to identify buttons so that they
can use different translated text.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
SpaceClaim add-ins
The following add-ins are currently available for SpaceClaim:
 ANSYS Launcher - Pass designs back and forth between SpaceClaim and ANSYS. See ANSYS add-in.
 Conversion - Batch convert files to the SpaceClaim format.
 TraceParts - Insert a component from an expansive library of standard parts.
You must install and activate each add-in before you can use it. You will receive a warning message if you
try to activate an add-in and a license is not available. If you want to use an add-in, but it is not available,
contact SpaceClaim Customer Support.
To activate an add-in
1. Select SpaceClaim Options from the Application menu then click Add-Ins.
2. Check the box next to the add-in to activate it.
3. Click OK.
4. Exit SpaceClaim and restart it.
To insert a Trace Part
1. Select Insert from Trace Parts from the Insert tool on the Design tab.
2. Select the part you want to insert.
3. Click OK.
The selected part appears as a new component in your design.
SpaceClaim API
The SpaceClaim Application Programming Interface (API) allows you to create add-in applications that
extend the functionality of SpaceClaim. An add-in application is a managed code DLL that uses
Microsoft® .NET Framework 3.0 and the SpaceClaim API.
Information about the SpaceClaim API can be found in help files in a sub-folder in the SpaceClaim
installation folder. The sub-folder has a name of the form "SpaceClaim.Api.Vx", where "Vx" refers to the
version of the API. For example, information about API V4 can be found in the "SpaceClaim.Api.V4" sub-
folder.
The following documents are provided:
 SpaceClaim_API.chm - the Developer's Guide to writing an add-in.

 API_Class_Library.chm - documentation for classes, structs, methods, and properties in the API.
 API Overview.pdf - an overview of the SpaceClaim API and its concepts.
These documents are written by developers for developers, and are available only in English.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
ANSYS add-in
SpaceClaim and ANSYS provide a combined solution that you can use to simplify CAD models for analysis.
With this add-in, you can send a model that was imported or created in SpaceClaim to ANSYS
Workbench, ANSYS Mechanical, ANSYS Design Modeler, or any other integrated ANSYS products. The
geometry is sent into ANSYS along with any driving parameters or analysis specific attributes (spot welds,
midsurfaces thicknesses, etc.) that you have defined. Driving parameters can be edited within ANSYS to
run sets of iterative analyses.
The basic process is simple:
1. Import a CAD model into SpaceClaim.

2. Simplify and modify the model for analysis.
3. Define parameters and named selections that you can use in ANSYS.
4. Send data to ANSYS:
 ANSYS 11.0, 12.0, and 12.1: Launch ANSYS from SpaceClaim, and then set up analysis
conditions and constraints using the powerful simulation tools in ANSYS.
 ANSYS 13.0: Start ANSYS Workbench and create a geometry cell:
 To work with an existing design, click Import Geometry in ANSYS and choose an existing
SCDOC file, then use Edit Geometry to launch SpaceClaim with that document loaded.
 To start a new design, click New SpaceClaim Geometry in ANSYS to launch SpaceClaim
with an empty design.
5. Modify and send data between SpaceClaim and ANSYS, and rerun the tests as often as necessary.
6. Return the validated design options or recommended changes to the designer when testing is
complete.
Data you can send to ANSYS
You can transfer the active model to ANSYS, even if it has not been saved. You can also send data from a
document that is open in SpaceClaim or from a saved SpaceClaim document.
Only visible objects are sent to ANSYS; hidden objects are not sent.
The following data is transferred to ANSYS:
 Geometry
 Solids
 Surfaces
 Line bodies (Beams)
 Origins
 Named Selections (groups)
 Driving dimensions (groups)
 Ruler dimensions
 Pattern count
 Driving annotation dimensions
 Shell thickness
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 Midsurface thickness values on surfaces

 Spot welds
 Material properties
ANSYS demos and tutorials
The following tutorials provide in-depth and hands-on examples to help you get started:
 Spot welds tutorial

 Midsurface tutorial
 Shared topology tutorial
 Using groups and dimensions in ANSYS tutorial
Spot welds tutorial
This tutorial will teach you how to define spot welds on a part and analyze them in ANSYS Mechanical.
Open the document
1. Click on the following link and save the file on your computer:
spotweld.scdoc.
2. Open the document in SpaceClaim.
The design looks like this:
Now you can define the first set of spot welds in the design.
You should read Defining weld points to become familiar with the Spot Weld tool before you continue.
The four tool guides for the Spot Welds tool are:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Select Base Faces tool guide selects the face or faces on which the weld points will be defined.
You should select a single face or a chain of tangent faces.
Select Guiding Edges tool guide defines the edge along which the weld points will be defined.
Select Mating Faces tool guide changes the mating face from the face that is automatically
detected. You can select more than one face. Clicking on a mating face removes all previously
selected faces and holding Ctrl adds a face.
Complete tool guide completes the spot weld definition.
Define spot welds

2. Select the base face. This is the face or faces on which the weld points will be defined. You should
select a single face or a chain of tangent faces.
1. The Select base face tool guide should be active.
2. Move your mouse over the red face shown here:
3. Scroll the mouse wheel forward to select the bottom face:
Note: If the navigation options located in the Application menu have been changed, then
you will need to hold Ctrl as you turn the scroll wheel.
This is the face or faces on which the weld points will be defined. You should select a
single face or a chain of tangent faces.
3. Select the guiding edge. This is the edge along which the weld points will be defined. The tool
searches for mating edges.
1. The Select guiding edges tool guide should be active.
2. Select the forward edge of the base face:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The spot welds will be placed along this edge:
Spot weld options control how the spot welds are applied in relation to the guiding edge. The values are
displayed in the Options panel when the Spot Weld tool is active and in the Design window when you
select a weld joint. You can change the values in the Options panel or in the Design window by tabbing
between the boxes.
The Options panel looks like this:
Change spot weld options
Change the Start offset, Edge offset, and End offset to 2.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The placement of the spot welds changes accordingly.
You can select another base face to simultaneously create another spot weld on that face.
Add another face
1. Click the Select base faces tool guide.

2. Select the lower face of the red part toward the back of the design:
3. Click the Select guiding edges tool guide.

4. Select the far edge of the base face:
An identical pattern of weld points is added to the second base face, using the same options as
the first base face.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Complete the spot weld definition
1. Click the Complete tool guide to complete the spot weld.
The spot welds are displayed as light blue dots in the Design window:
The spot weld joint is also added in the Structure tree:
Define a spot weld joint for multiple mating faces

2. Select this face as the base:
3. Select this edge as the guiding edge:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The weld joint will look like this:
The blue and black dots represent node pairs and the grey dots represent missing nodes.
You should also see another spot weld joint in the Structure tree.
5. Next we want to make a pattern of the yellow component to see how ANSYS handles instances:

2. Select Create patterns in the Options panel.
3. Select the component named wall in the Structure tree.
4. Move the component up by dragging the blue axis of the Move handle.
5. Press the spacebar and type 4 to set the pattern count, like this:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Press Tab and type 20 to set the distance, like this:
Now you have a pattern of components. Each member of the pattern is an instance, so a
change to one will change all of the copies in the pattern.
The spot weld joint for the yellow component is out-of-date. Let's update it and redefine the mating face.
Update spot welds and mating faces

1. Update the spot welds:
1. Find the spot weld joint with a warning icon in the Structure tree:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Right-click the spot weld joint and select Detect Mating Faces.
The spot weld has detected all parallel faces within the search range. The search range is
found in the Properties panel when you select the spot weld joint in the Structure tree.
2. We only want the bottom face on the bottom part defined as the mating face, so let's change it:
2. Select the second spot weld in the Structure tree.
Now we can edit this spot weld joint.
3. Click the Select mating faces tool guide. This tool guide allows us to choose the mating
face, rather than accepting the mating face that is selected automatically.
4. Rotate the design and select the lower face of the lowest part in the pattern, like this:
You can simulate seam welds by creating a spot weld joint with closely-spaced spot welds.
Define a seam weld

2. Select the face shown here:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Select the three edges shown in blue here:
You normally must hold Ctrl to select multiple edges; however, you can select multiple edges
without Ctrl when the Select guiding edge tool guide is active.
4. Change the Start offset, Edge offset, and End offset values to 0.
5. Change the Number of points value to 16.
The seam weld is just a series of spot welds, like this:
6. Increase the number of points to 32:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The more points you make, the closer the joint will be to a continuous weld. The number can be
chosen at your discretion depending on your simulation.
Your design is ready to send to ANSYS for analysis. It should look like this:
There are some limitations on sending spot welds to ANSYS Workbench:
 Only points with mates can be used for simulation.

 You may place weld points between multi-body parts if the two bodies belong to different parts. Spot
welds defined between bodies in the same part are not transferred to simulation.
 You can approximate seam welds by placing weld points on the guiding edge with an offset of zero, if
no mating face is found on either side of the base face.
Start ANSYS Workbench and send your design
1. Click ANSYS Workbench on the ANSYS tab.
ANSYS should open and your design should be loaded.
2. Expand the structure tree in ANSYS and you will see the spot welds under the Connections node,
like this:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Go back to SpaceClaim and change one of the spot weld joints.

4. In ANSYS Workbench, right-click the Geometry node and select
Your design should now be up-to-date in SpaceClaim and ANSYS.
In this tutorial you learned how to
 Define spot weld joints

 Change spot weld joints
 Launch ANSYS Workbench from SpaceClaim
 Send designs to ANSYS Workbench
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Midsurface tutorial
This tutorial will teach you how to define midsurfaces.
Open the document
1. Click on the following link and save the file on your computer: w8872.scdoc.
We will use this design to show basic midsurface creation.
Define the midsurface
First you will define the midsurface by selecting offset face pairs.
You should read Creating midsurface faces to become familiar with the Midsurface tool before you
continue.
The four tool guides for Midsurface are:
Select Faces tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select a pair of offset
faces, and all other face pairs with the same offset distance are automatically detected.
Add/Remove Faces tool guide allows you to select additional faces to offset or remove detected
face pairs from the selection.
Swap Sides tool guide allows you to switch the face pairs. You may need to do this when the
sets of detected colored faces are not grouped cleanly.
Complete tool guide creates the midsurface faces.
Define midsurface faces
The Select Faces tool guide is active by default.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
After you select the first face, SpaceClaim will filter the selection and will only allow you to click on
parallel faces, or faces that produce an offset.
3. Select the offset face, shown here:
This is the only face you can select.
All surfaces with the same thickness will be identified on the part and highlighted in blue:
As you can see, one round does not have the same thickness and is not identified as an offset
pair. Faces that look like offset pairs might not be identified as a midsurface because of errors in
translation, or when the part was not modeled with an offset face.
4. Click the Add/Remove Faces tool guide if it is not already active (it should be).
5. Select the round face:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This face will now be included when the midsurface is created.
Note: Faces only need to be identified on one side of the model.
Now you can finish defining the midsurface.
Complete the midsurface
The solid is temporarily transparent so you can see the newly-created midsurface.
2. For a better view of the midsurface, hide the solid and expand the Midsurface component in the
Structure tree, like this:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Another example
Now let's try a more complicated example.
1. Click on the following link and save the file on your computer: Midsurfacing.scdoc.

5. Now select its offset pair:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. The outer faces of the part will be identified as offset pairs:
The base side of an offset pair is highlighted in blue and the offset side is highlighted in green.
Midsurfaces are generated from the blue, or base, faces.
The inside ribs have a different thickness or offset from the outside walls, so we have to add them to the
selection. We can do this using the Select Faces tool guide.
Add face pairs
1. Click the Select Faces tool guide.
You can also hold Ctrl and this tool guide will become active.
2. Select one of the inner ribs:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. And select its offset pair:
Most of the inside faces are now highlighted:
4. Continue selecting face pairs until your design looks like this:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Although we now have all of the face pairs selected, there is a more efficient way to select the offset face
pairs in designs like this.
Change the range option
1. Click in white space in the Design window to clear your selection.

2. Select Use range in the Options panel and make sure the minimum and maximum thickness
values are set like this:
3. Click on the solid:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
All face pairs with offsets between the minimum and maximum thickness are selected.
If you zoom in, you'll notice that the base and offset sides on the ribs are not highlighted correctly. You
can use the Swap Sides tool guide to change the base and offset sides. This is important because the
midsurfaces are created from the base (blue) face. The offset face (green) is only highlighted so you can
see it as you define midsurfaces.
Swap sides
1. Click the Swap Sides tool guide.

2. Select the first incorrect face:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Its highlighting changes from blue to green.
3. Select the other incorrect face:
Now all inner faces are highlighted correctly as base and offset faces.
4. Click the Complete tool guide to finish defining the midsurfaces.
Notice that the midsurfaces are created in a new component in the Structure tree:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
In addition to normal face properties, a midsurface has a thickness property that is sent to ANSYS and
applied to the shell element.
View midsurface properties
1. Hide the solid in the Structure tree.

2. Select a midsurface face:
The Properties panel displays the properties for the face:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Thickness property is in the Midsurface section of the panel.
The midsurfaces are ready for analysis in ANSYS Workbench.
Launch ANSYS
1. Click the ANSYS Workbench button in the ribbon bar to send the current model in SpaceClaim to
a new project in Workbench.
Everything that is visible in the Design window will be sent, so hide the solid so it will not be sent
to ANSYS.
2. Go to Workbench and click on one of the midsurfaces under Geometry in the project:
3. Look in the Properties panel (below the structure tree) and you will see that a thickness is
assigned to the midsurface. This is the thickness from the original solid in SpaceClaim.
4. Generate a mesh:
1. Right click Mesh under the project and select Generate Mesh.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Workbench will use the thickness property assigned to it to give the model the proper
mesh.
Midsurface tutorial: Conclusion
In this tutorial you learned how to
 Create a midsurface in SpaceClaim

 Add faces to the midsurface selection
 Automatically detect offset faces within a range
 Swap the sides of midsurface faces
 View midsurface properties in SpaceClaim and ANSYS
 Generate a mesh that uses the midsurface thickness property
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Shared topology tutorial
ANSYS utilizes shared topology when bodies are grouped into multi-body parts and the solid(s) and
surface(s) are touching or intersecting. A component in SpaceClaim becomes a multi-body part in ANSYS.
See Shared topology in ANSYS for more information.
Open the document
1. Click on the following link and save the file on your computer: Top_Level_Assy.scdoc.
You should see six solids and two components in the Structure tree:
Solids under the same component will be sent to ANSYS as a multi-body part if the Shared Topology
property is set to true. In this case the solids are at the top level, and two midsurfaces are also in their own
components. See Shared topology in ANSYS for detailed information about how shared topology
propagates through the structure for designs sent to ANSYS 11.0 vs. ANSYS 12.0 and 12.1.
Only visible objects are sent to ANSYS; hidden objects are not sent.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Hide and unhide components
1. Right-click the blue solid and select Hide:
As you can see, the smaller parts that share the component with the blue part are not imprinted.
You do not need to imprint edges from one body to another to have a multi-body part. It will be
created automatically if the solids are in the same component.
2. Click the box next to Top_Level_Assy twice to hide and then unhide all of the objects in the
Design window.
All objects should now be visible.
3. Click ANSYS Workbench on the ANSYS tab to launch Workbench and send the design.
Generate a mesh to see how ANSYS Workbench handles multi-body parts.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Generate a mesh
1. Switch to ANSYS Workbench.

2. Expand the design in the structure tree.
All of the solids are in the same component so they will be recognized as a multi-body part and
use shared topology.
3. Right click Mesh and select Generate Mesh.
4. The solids should now be meshed. Take some time to view the mesh. Notice how it looks around
all of the components.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Now let's take a closer look at the mesh.
Hide a body and look at the mesh
1. Select the center solid and right click to hide the body.
2. Notice that the mesh has been formed around the solids that used to be there.
Also notice that the top face has been split into regions in order to use shared topology. No
imprinting of edges needs to be done in SpaceClaim to make this occur. Overlapping parts also
create shared topology.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
For ANSYS 11.0, there are two methods to prevent multi-body parts:
 Put the solid or surface in its own component.

 Set the Shared Topology property on the component.
For ANSYS 12.0 and 12.1, you must make sure the top level component has its Shared Topology property
set to False, and then change the property for each component as desired. Keep in mind that the property
is applied to everything below a component, including its sub-components.
In this exercise we will put the solids in sub-components and set the Shared Topology property because
this method works for all supported versions of ANSYS.
Prevent multi-body parts in ANSYS Workbench
1. Go back to SpaceClaim.
2. Right-click the blue solid that we hid in Step 2 and select Move to New Component.
3. Name the component bearing.
4. Put the remaining solids in a component:

1. Select the solids in the Structure tree.
2. Right-click and select Move to New Component.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Select Component1 and change its Shared Topology property to true.

6. Go back to Workbench and select the model in the structure tree.
7. Click Update: Use Geometry Parameter Values.
This will update the geometry in Workbench from SpaceClaim, so your change will be sent over.
8. Notice that the bearing component is now in the structure tree in Workbench.
9. Right-click Mesh and select Generate Mesh.
Spend some time looking at the mesh and how it was created for the multi-body parts.
Inspect the mesh
1. Hide the bearings and notice that the small components are no longer split.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Hide the plug on top of the design to see that the solids that are still under the same component
are still using the same topology. This includes the midsurfaces.
Note: To make a multi-body part, the solids need to exist in the same component and the Shared
Topology property for the component must be set to True.
Shared topology tutorial: Conclusion
In this tutorial you learned
 Shared topology is passed from SpaceClaim to ANSYS automatically—you don't have to set any
options; however, you can change the Shared Topology property on components.
 For ANSYS 11.0, the Shared Topology property on a component only applies to that component and
not its children.
 For ANSYS 12.0 and 12.1, the Shared Topology property applies to the component and its children
when it is set to true. In this case, the Shared Topology property of components lower in the structure
are ignored, so you can't use them to create sharing exceptions.
 Only visible objects are sent to ANSYS; hidden objects are not sent.
 Solids or surfaces in the same component will be treated as a multi-body part and will use shared
topology.
 To prevent shared topology, place solids in their own components or set the Shared Topology to false
for a component.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Using groups and dimensions in ANSYS tutorial
This tutorial will teach you how to create groups in SpaceClaim to drive changes in ANSYS Workbench.
Open the document
1. Click on the following link and save the file on your computer: keychain.scdoc.
You can find the Groups tab in the same panel as the Structure tree, on the left side of the SpaceClaim
window. See Working with groups for more information about groups and the Groups panel.
Groups can include driving dimensions and named selections. You can use both of these types of groups
in ANSYS Workbench.
A named selection group allows you to quickly select a group of faces or edges in SpaceClaim or ANSYS
Workbench.
Create named selections
1. Select the two cylindrical holes on the right side of the model:
2. Click Create Group in the Groups panel or press Ctrl+G.
Group1 appears in the Groups panel under Named Selections.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Named selections are sent to ANSYS and the faces can be used for supports or loads.
3. Select several surfaces on the green solid:
Group2 appears in the panel under Named Selections.
5. Right-click the groups and rename Group1 to holes and Group2 to support:
These names will make it easier to identify the groups when you are working with the design in
ANSYS.
Driving dimension groups can be used in ANSYS to change your design, without going back to
SpaceClaim and transferring the changes to ANSYS.
Create driving dimensions
1. Select the round on the left side of the model:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Click Create Group in the Groups panel.
A driving dimension was created instead of a named selection. This driving dimension can be
used to change the radius of the round. This is because the face selected is a round, which has a
dimension property that can be controlled from the property panel.

4. Select the hole on the right side of the model:
Notice that there is a dimension on the screen. When a dimension is showing and you create a
group, you will usually create a driving dimension.
A group is created in the Driving Dimensions folder in the Groups panel.
6. Select the top face of the blue part:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This time a named selection was created. This is because the face you selected doesn't have a
dimension showing when the Pull tool is active, and there is not a dimension to be saved with the
group.
8. Delete the group created in the previous step because we won't use it later.
9. Select the top face of the blue part again, and then click the ruler icon in the mini-toolbar or in
the Options panel:
10. Select the opposite end of the model to make a ruler dimension that controls the total length of
the design:
A group is created under Driving Dimensions.
12. Rename the groups so their uses will be easier to recognize in ANSYS:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Now let's send the design to ANSYS and work with the groups.
Launch ANSYS Workbench
1. Click ANSYS Workbench on the ANSYS tab.

2. Open the default geometry options dialog in ANSYS. See Configuring SpaceClaim and ANSYS
11 or Configuring SpaceClaim and ANSYS 12 and 12.1 for instructions.
The Default Geometry Options control how the named selections and parameters are transferred
to ANSYS and are located in different places in ANSYS versions 11 and 12.
3. You must delete the NS and DS prefixes so all of your parameters and named selections are sent
to ANSYS.
4. Expand the Named Selections in the Workbench structure tree to view the named selection
groups sent over from SpaceClaim.
The faces stored in the named selection are highlighted in red.
5. Click Geometry in the structure tree.
The driving dimensions groups are sent to ANSYS Workbench as properties. You can find these
properties in the lower left corner of the ANSYS window, in the CAD Parameters section of the
properties panel.
When you change the values of a driving dimension, you can send the changes back to SpaceClaim.
Change a driving dimension
1. Change the values of the following CAD parameters:

 round from 1 to 2
 hole radius from 1.4 to 1
 length from 35 to 38
 In ANSYS 11, change the values directly in the properties panel.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
 In ANSYS 12, click each parameter you want to drive. A letter P should appear next to each
parameter. Go back to Workbench and edit the parameter values using the parameter group
that appears in a new cell.
2. Send the changes back to SpaceClaim by clicking Update: Use Simulation Parameter Values.
This will change the model in ANSYS and in SpaceClaim.
Before: After:
Also notice that when you click on the groups in the Groups panel, you see the dimensions
specified in ANSYS.
You can also use annotation dimensions to drive changes in ANSYS.
Driving changes with annotation dimensions
1. In SpaceClaim, click the box next to the annotation plane so it is visible.

3. Select Inner_tube_pushed_in_position in the Structure tree.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Click the red axis of the move handle:
You must select an axis on the Move handle before you can use the dimensions to drive changes.
Clicking a handle tells the Move tool which direction the change will be made. The sparks appear
only after an axis is selected.
5. Click the spark next to the 38mm dimension and change it to 40:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
A new driving dimension is created from the annotation dimension and Move tool. Changing this
driving dimension is like using the Move tool to change the dimension.
7. Go back to ANSYS and click Update: Use Geometry Parameter Value.
The model will update and the new parameter will be passed over. Now you can change the
length of the model by changing the location of the part or by stretching the model.
Using groups and dimensions in ANSYS tutorial: Conclusion
In this tutorial, you have learned
 Parameters and named selections can be passed into ANSYS by creating them in the Groups panel.
 Driving dimensions are created when there is s dimension on screen or a dimension in the properties
panel.
 Parameters can be edited in ANSYS which will change the geometry in ANSYS and also change the
geometry in SpaceClaim.
SpaceClaim parts and properties in ANSYS
Workbench applications only support flat (single-level) assemblies. An ANSYS part is created for each
SpaceClaim part, at any level in the assembly. This part contains bodies that are visible and match the user
import filters set in ANSYS. The filters are Import Solid Bodies, Import Surface Bodies, and Import Line
Bodies.
In ANSYS Design Modeler, multi-bodied parts are parts (components) that contain more than one body
(solid, surface, or line body). For example, for two surface or two solids to share topology, they must be
placed in a multi-bodied part.
ANSYS Mechanical allows a maximum of two assembly levels. You can have components inside
components, but nothing deeper.
If you send a component with two or more bodies into ANSYS Mechanical, then it shows up as a part with
multiple bodies in it (multi-bodied part).
If you send a component with two or more bodies into ANSYS Design Modeler, then everything becomes
flat.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
When you send a SpaceClaim assembly to ANSYS mechanical, it also gets flattened to 2 levels.
SpaceClaim: ANSYS Mechanical: ANSYS Design Modeler:
SpaceClaim part and body names in ANSYS
In Simulation, the Geometry node represents the assembly, and nodes immediately beneath that
represent parts. If a part has more than one body, then child nodes are shown for each body, but if there
is only one body, no child nodes are shown. This is based on the number of bodies transferred, which is
subject to visibility and filters.
For a multi-body part ANSYS Mechanical displays the part name on the part node and the body name on
the body node, but for a single-body part ANSYS displays a combined name on the part node, in the form
<Part name> (<body name>). For example, Wheel (Solid).
The image above shows an assembly in SpaceClaim on the left and the same assembly in ANSYS on the
right. Component 1 is displayed as a single-body part in ANSYS and component 3 is moved to the root
level.
Component instance names are not transferred.
Mass properties
ANSYS will calculate the volume, center of gravity, and moments of inertia of the part if these values are
not supplied. SpaceClaim supplies the volume and allows ANSYS to calculate the center of gravity and
moment of inertia.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Using groups to drive changes in ANSYS
SpaceClaim and ANSYS have full round-trip associativity. This means that changes to the model can be
sent back and forth between SpaceClaim and ANSYS.
You can define groups to use as parameters and named selections. If the objects in the group are similar
or related, then a property is created that can be used to change a parameter in ANSYS. For example, you
could create a group of all faces that have the same offset and use this group to change the offset in
ANSYS.
See Using groups and dimensions in ANSYS tutorial for hands-on examples.
Updating group parameters in ANSYS 13.0
In ANSYS 13.0, groups are instantly added to the Parameters group in Workbench. Changes to the group
in SpaceClaim, such as renaming and deleting the group, are also immediately reflected in WorkBench.
However, if you edit the dimension of a group parameter in SpaceClaim, the new value is not
automatically updated in WorkBench. You must click Update Parameters in the ANSYS group to push the
change to WorkBench. You can also send the change by saving the project or closing SpaceClaim. This
means that if SpaceClaim is not running, you know that the parameters are up-to-date.
Using driving dimensions in ANSYS
You can create driving dimension groups in SpaceClaim and use them to change key dimensions in
ANSYS. Just click on the part in the structure tree in ANSYS and find the CAD Parameters section in the
Details panel. Change a value and run the analysis again to see its affect. You can use Update to send the
new values back to SpaceClaim.
 Creating a driving dimension with Pull (offset)

 Creating a driving dimension with Move (translation or rotation)
 Creating a driving dimension with the Select tool (round radius and distance between offset faces)
Using named selections in ANSYS
You can create named selections in the SpaceClaim Groups panel and then use these groups as named
selections in ANSYS.
See Using groups to drive changes in ANSYS for information about using groups to make changes to
the design in ANSYS.
To create a named selection
1. Select the objects you want to include in the group.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
You can use the Selection panel to select objects in the same part that are similar or related to
the object that is currently selected.
If you are using ANSYS 13.0, the new group is automatically added to the Parameters group in
Workbench.
3. (Optional) Rename the group.
It is helpful to rename the groups with a prefix that tells you the group's type, because named
selections and driving dimensions are grouped together in the structure in ANSYS.
4. Send your change to ANSYS:

 If you are using ANSYS 13.0, click Update Parameters in the ANSYS group on the Prepare tab.
 If you are using an earlier version of ANSYS, send the design to ANSYS.
Shared topology in ANSYS
SpaceClaim can share topology (face, edge, and vertex connections) between touching or intersecting
bodies in designs that are transferred to ANSYS.
Shared topology is the only way to achieve a conformal mesh where bodies meet, and is the only way to
be certain that the intersection of bodies is meshed perfectly.
To create a group of parts that share topology, create a component and set the Share Topology property
to true in the properties panel on the component. Place any solids, surfaces, beams, or components that
you want to share topology into this component.
For ANSYS 12.0, 12.1, and 13.0, if a component has the Shared Topology property set to true, then that
component and all components beneath it become a share group. The Shared Topology property of
components lower in the structure is ignored, so you can't use them to create sharing exceptions. For
example, if you set Shared Topology to true for the root component, then the entire model will be one
share group. The name of the component node is the name of the component from which recursive
sharing starts. The bodies under this node are listed with full path names through the assembly, such as
Axle Sub-Assy (Front)\Wheel (Left)\Solid, using component names in parentheses if they are present. You
can have multiple distinct share groups, but a body can only belong to one group.
See the Shared topology tutorial for hands-on experience with shared topology. See ANSYS online help
for detailed information about how ANSYS handles multi-body parts and shared topology.
To set shared topology for ANSYS
ANSYS 11.0: Put the bodies directly under a component (and not in a sub-component) and set the
Shared Topology property on the component to true.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
ANSYS 12.0, 12.1, and 13.0: Put the bodies anywhere under a component that has its Shared Topology
property set to true, including a sub-assembly (regardless of the sub-assembly's Shared Topology setting).
This property can be found in the properties panel when you select one or more components in the
Structure tree.
The Shared Topology property on Parent component is set to true, so the solids inside the shaded area are
shared.
To prevent shared topology in ANSYS
ANSYS 11.0: Place solids in their own components or set the component's Shared Topology property to
False.
ANSYS 12.0, 12.1, and 13.0: Place solids in a component whose Shared Topology property is set to
False, and whose parent components also have this property set to False.
Examples
ANSYS meshes two blocks with shared topology. The blue block will gain a new imprinted face which will
be shared between the green and blue blocks. Notice how the nodes of the mesh line up along the
bottom of the smaller block.
ANSYS creates separate meshes for two parts because they are in different components and the root part
has Shared Topology set to False.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The mesh for shared topology is not the same as merged geometry. Here the boxes are merged, and you
can see that the mesh is different than it is for two bodies with shared topology.
ANSYS Workbench settings
There are many user preferences in Workbench that control geometry transfer. The settings supported by
SpaceClaim are explained below.
Workbench setting Description

Parameter Processing The following parameters are transferred:
 Part parameters: Only includes the sheet metal parameters for

thickness, inner radius, and kFactor if the part is a sheet metal part.
These are transferred with the names, Sheet.Thickness,
Sheet.InnerRadius, and Sheet.kFactor.
 Assembly parameters: Groups for the active window (belonging to
the root part) that have a dimension.
If you have more than one part occurrence for the same part master in
SpaceClaim (for example, 4 wheels in a car assembly), then part
parameters are only transferred for the first occurrence. We do not
transfer the parameters for each part node because Simulation allows
you to set contradictory parameters on different nodes, even if they
share the same geometry.
The Parameter Processing option also controls whether parameters are

applied if they have been changed in Simulation and then the Update:
Use Simulation Parameter Values command has been executed.
New assembly parameters are applied in the order that dimension

groups are listed in the Groups panel in SpaceClaim. You can change
this order by dragging a group to a new location in the list.
Personal Parameter Key The Personal Parameter Key is a string that can match the start or the
end of the parameter name. You can specify more than one key
separated by semicolons. By default, SpaceClaim groups have no
parameter prefixes.
Named Selection Processing SpaceClaim does not transfer vertex members because we do not
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
support CAD Associativity for vertices at this time.
Named Selection Prefixes Supported by SpaceClaim.

Materials Property Transfer Supported by SpaceClaim.
CAD Associativity This option may slow things down, which is why there is a preference to
turn it off. With SpaceClaim, the performance difference should be
negligible, so you should keep it enabled.
Import Coordinate Systems Coordinate systems belonging to the root part are transferred.
Import Using Instances Simulation allows parts to share a brep, which means transfer is faster
and the brep only needs to be meshed once. Because spot weld points
must be defined in terms of special vertices created in the brep (for
example, a vertex in a face requires a degenerate loop containing a
single vertex), breps can only be shared if they are identical in the spot
welds that they have. SpaceClaim compares spot weld points and create
instances that share a brep for those part occurrences that have the
same spot weld requirements.
We recommend that you leave this option turned on.

Do Smart Update Smart update will only re-transfer parts that have changed, which can
save a lot of time with a large assembly. Unfortunately, what constitutes
a change in this case is an all-or-nothing consideration, which means a
part will need to be re-transferred, along with any other parts that would
share its brep, if any of the following have changed:
 The placement of the part occurrence in the overall assembly has

changed.
 Bodies have changed geometry, or been added/removed, or been
made visible/invisible, or the user filters have selected different
bodies.
 The name of the part or any of the bodies has changed.
 Named selection members for this part occurrence have changed.
 Spot weld points for this part occurrence have changed.
 Parameters (currently only sheet metal parameters) for this part have
changed.
If you save your work in Simulation as a "dsdb" file, the timestamps used
for smart update are saved with it, which means smart update continues
to work in the next session.
Attach File Via Temp File Attach is what ANSYS calls a transfer. This preference uses a file for data
transfer rather than reading data streams directly. This may be faster for
large assemblies.
Analysis Type If this is set to 2D, then only surface bodies lying in the XY plane are
transferred.
Mixed Import Resolution Simulation does not support bodies of mixed dimensionality in a multi-
body part. They will transfer successfully, but they will fail to mesh.
Mixtures of surface and line bodies are supported, but mixtures of solid-
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
surface or solid-line are not. Therefore, if a part contains a mixture of

solid and surface bodies, which is quite common in SpaceClaim, Mixed
Import Resolution can be used to specify whether solids bodies or
surface bodies should be used.
If Mixed Import Resolution is set to None, a mixture of solid bodies

and surface bodies could be transferred, and as already mentioned, the
part will fail to mesh. The default setting is None, since most CAD
systems do not support mixtures of solids and surface bodies, but this
setting should be set to Solid or Surface with SpaceClaim.
Settings not supported by SpaceClaim
The following settings are not supported by SpaceClaim:
 CAD Attribute Transfer

 Reader Save Part File
 Enclosure and Symmetry Processing
 Work points (construction points)
Working in ANSYS 12 and 12.1

Configuring SpaceClaim and ANSYS 12 and 12.1
To set the add-in transfer options in SpaceClaim
1. Click in the lower right corner of the ANSYS 12 group on the Prepare tab.
The Options dialog opens.

 Use tolerant stitching: Stitch the edges of nearby surfaces together when they are sent to
Workbench. Set the tolerance value to control the maximum size of the gap between edges
that will be made into a single connected edge. A larger tolerance value will be more
aggressive in stitching nearby edges together.
3. Click OK.
To set the Workbench geometry import options
In order to transfer geometry, parameters, and named selections from SpaceClaim to ANSYS Workbench,
the correct import options must be set within Workbench. To set the import options in ANSYS
Workbench,
1. Click Tools > Options in the ANSYS Workbench menu.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Click Geometry Import in the left panel of the Options dialog.

3. Select 3D for the Analysis Type.
4. Make sure there are no prefix values to filter for in the Parameters or Named Selections fields.
5. The following options should not be selected: Reader Save Part File, and Smart Update.
All other options should be selected.
6. Select None for Mixed Import Resolution.

7. Restart Workbench for the changes to take effect.
Connecting to ANSYS 12 and 12.1
To launch Workbench from SpaceClaim
If you have the ANSYS add-in installed in SpaceClaim and ANSYS installed on your computer, then you
will see a new ANSYS 12 group on the Prepare tab. Click the ANSYS Workbench button to send the
current model in SpaceClaim to a new project in Workbench.
To connect to SpaceClaim from ANSYS Workbench
Right-click on a geometry cell in ANSYS Workbench and select an active SpaceClaim document or browse
for a saved document.
After you select a SpaceClaim document to attach to, the geometry cell will display a SpaceClaim icon.
Updating data with ANSYS 12 and 12.1

When you transfer geometry to ANSYS, only surface bodies are stitched. Other bodies are fused, and a
warning is issued if shared topology fails.
To send updates from ANSYS Workbench to SpaceClaim
Right-click a geometry cell and select:
 Update to send parameters that have been modified in Workbench to SpaceClaim.
This step sends parameters that have been modified in Workbench to SpaceClaim. SpaceClaim makes
the modifications to the geometry using the values of the new parameters and sends the resulting
model back to Workbench.
 Update From CAD to send the current version of the model in SpaceClaim to Workbench.
This step sends the current version of the model in SpaceClaim to Workbench so the data is up-to-date
in both.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
To send updates from ANSYS Mechanical to SpaceClaim
When a model is loaded into ANSYS Mechanical (the simulation environment), changes made to the
model in SpaceClaim can be passed into the simulation at any time.
1. Right-click the geometry node in the Project tree in ANSYS Mechanical.

2. Select Refresh Geometry.
The current version of the model in SpaceClaim will be transferred into the simulation.
Working with ANSYS 11

Configuring SpaceClaim and ANSYS 11

3. Click OK.
the correct import options must be set within Workbench. You can find these options in the Options
panel on the left side of the Workbench window.
To set the default import options,

2. Enable Parameters and Named selections and delete the prefix values in the fields to the right
of these options.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Connecting to ANSYS 11
current model in SpaceClaim to a new project in Workbench.
In the Link to Geometry File section, click Browse and locate the SCDOC file. This attaches the
SpaceClaim design to the workbench project.
Updating data with ANSYS 11

To send updates from ANSYS Workbench to SpaceClaim
Right-click a geometry cell and select:
 Update to send parameters that have been modified in Workbench to SpaceClaim.
This step sends parameters that have been modified in Workbench to SpaceClaim. SpaceClaim makes
the modifications to the geometry using the values of the new parameters and sends the resulting
model back to Workbench.
 Update From CAD to send the current version of the model in SpaceClaim to Workbench.
This step sends the current version of the model in SpaceClaim to Workbench so the data is up-to-date
in both.
To send updates from ANSYS Mechanical to SpaceClaim
 Update: Use Simulation Parameter Values to send parameter changes from Workbench to
SpaceClaim.
 Update: Use Geometry Parameter Values to send the current version of the model in SpaceClaim to
Workbench.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Working with ANSYS 13

Configuring SpaceClaim and ANSYS 13

3. Click OK.
the correct import options must be set within Workbench. To set the import options in ANSYS
Workbench,

2. Click Geometry Import in the left panel of the Options dialog.
3. Select 3D for the Analysis Type.
4. Make sure there are no prefix values to filter for in the Parameters or Named Selections fields.
5. The following options should not be selected: Reader Save Part File, and Smart Update.
All other options should be selected.
6. Select None for Mixed Import Resolution.

7. Select SpaceClaim for the Preferred Geometry Editor.
8. Restart Workbench for the changes to take effect.
Connecting to ANSYS 13
current model in SpaceClaim to a new project in Workbench. A new geometry cell will be created
automatically.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Start ANSYS Workbench and create a geometry cell:
 To work with an existing design, click Import Geometry in ANSYS and choose an existing SCDOC file,
then use Edit Geometry to launch SpaceClaim with that document loaded.
 To start a new design, click New SpaceClaim Geometry in ANSYS to launch SpaceClaim with an empty
design.
Updating data with ANSYS 13
SpaceClaim is a recognized geometry editor in ANSYS 13.0.
The SpaceClaim title bar now shows the system ID for the WorkBench project and the system name as a
prefix, as in: A:Geometry - <remainder of title>. Document tabs for the corresponding geometry cells
display a yellow ANSYS icon and the unique system name from ANSYS to make them easy to find.
To edit SpaceClaim data from ANSYS
 To work with an existing design, click Import Geometry in ANSYS and choose an existing SCDOC file,
then use Edit Geometry in SpaceClaim to launch SpaceClaim with that document loaded.
 To start a new design, click New SpaceClaim Geometry in ANSYS to launch SpaceClaim with an empty
design.
 To edit a design that is used in a simulation, open the WorkBench project and click Edit Geometry in
SpaceClaim.
 Click Reset in the geometry cell to disconnect the cell and clear its contents.
To initiate changes from SpaceClaim
 Click the Application menu and select Save Project to save the WorkBench project.
This is the same as clicking Save in Workbench. The entire project schematic is saved, including any
geometry cells, and design.wbpj and design_files folder are created, where design is the name of your
design. The .scdoc file for each geometry cell is saved in this folder.
You cannot currently save a WorkBench project that is linked to an .scdoc file that contains external
documents. WorkBench moves the .scdoc file, so the links to external files are broken.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Glossary
3D markup
SpaceClaim document that enables you to annotate and compare different versions of a design.
Absolute coordinates
See Coordinates
ACIS
Modeling engine by Spatial Corporation. SpaceClaim can import and export ACIS files (.sat and .sab).
Alignment axis
Axis around which you can rotate a component using the Orient tool.
Anchor
Move tool - The center ball of the Move handle. You can drag the center ball or use the Anchor tool guide
to place the anchor on a solid, face, edge, vertex, or origin.
Patterns - A member of a linear or rotational pattern that does not move with the pattern. You can anchor
one or more pattern members using the Fulcrum tool guide.
Detail view - A point used as the starting point for scaling.
Anchor point
See Anchor
Angular reference
Starting point for dimensioning an angle.
Angular ruler dimension
See Ruler dimensions
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Annotation
Information you can add to a drawing, such as notes, dimensions, geometric tolerances, center marks, and
Bills of Materials.
Annotation plane
Plane on which you can annotate designs, drawing sheets, and 3D markups. Use the Create Note tool to
select an annotation plane and enter text onto the plane.
Arc
Curved line of constant radius; part of a circle.
See Sweep arc, Three point arc, Tangent arc
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers standards for engineering drawing practices. You can
customize the style of your annotations to conform to ASME standards.
See ISO, JIS
Aspect ratio
Ratio of the length to width of a rectangle or the height to width of an image. When resizing images, it
can be important to maintain the aspect ratio to avoid distortion.
Assembly
Hierarchy of components and subcomponents showing relationship within a design, as shown in the
Structure tree. In manufacturing, a unit fitted together from manufactured parts.
See Assembly tool, Component
Assembly tool
Use the Assembly tools to specify how components are aligned with each other, that is, create a mating
condition. You can Align, Center, and Orient components.
Association
Relationship between objects that enables you to edit them together. For example, when you pull a
polygon into 3D, the faces acquire a polygon relationship. If you act on one face or edge, it affects all the
faces in the polygon. Another example of an association is a mirror plane between two faces.
See Mirror, Remove associations

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
AutoCAD
Software application for 2D and 3D design and drafting by Autodesk, Inc. AutoCAD's native file format is
DWG, its interchange file format is DXF, and its format for publishing CAD data is DWF.
Axial face
Face of a 3D object through which an axis extends. The axis displays when you move the cursor over the
axial face.
Axis
Straight line that an object rotates around or that objects are regularly arranged around.
See Alignment axis
Balloon
Annotation consisting of content from the Bill of Materials. Balloon notes update when changes are made
to the BOM table.
Baseline faces
See Offset baseline faces
Bend allowance
Amount of material added to compensate for changes caused by bending sheet metal. Allowance is
required to correct for the change in length caused by bending a flat sheet.
Bend deduction
Value used to calculate unfolded lengths of sheet metal. Bend Deduction is twice the distance from the
outside mold line to the beginning of the bend (set back) minus the bend allowance.
Bend deduction table
CSV (comma-separated value) file used to calculate the developed lengths for unfolded or flat patterns to
be machined.
Bill of Materials (BOM)
Table of components, sub-components, parts, and materials needed to manufacture a finished product.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Blend
Smooth and tangent transition between faces or edges; created using the Pull tool.
Blend plane
Sections that appears when you edit a face as a blend using the Edit as Blend tool. You can create, move,
and orient blend planes.
Blend surface
Faces you can edit using the Edit as Blend tool. If the face was originally created as a blend, the original
blend surfaces are available for editing. If the face is not blended, the tool first converts the face to a
blended surface.
Blended face
Face created by blending between two edges.
Body
A solid or surface.
Bounded line
Segment of a line bounded by one of more intersections with lines or edges. Use the Trim Away tool to
delete a bounded line.
CATIA
Modeling engine by Dassault Systèmes. SpaceClaim can import and export CATIA files.
Chamfer
Sloping corner between two edges created using the Pull tool; angle with equal setback; bevel.
Chord
Straight line with both end points on a circle.
Chord angle
Degrees of a circle delineated by a chord. In a Swept arc, the starting point and end point of the arc
define the chord.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Clip
Hide all geometry in a design above or below the grid or selected plane.
Closed lines
Intersecting lines that enclose an area to form a region when you sketch shapes in 2D. The regions will
become solids and the lines become edges when you pull your sketch into 3D.
Closed loop
Contiguous sketched lines or edges. Can be selected by double-clicking one of the edges or lines.
Coaxial
Relationship between faces that share the same center of rotation. If you check the Coaxial Face Groups
box in the Display tab, faces that share an axis are indicated with blue shading.
Combine
SpaceClaim tool used to cut or glue geometry together.
Component
Object in a design, including the top-level design component. Each component consists of any number of
objects, such as solids and surfaces, and can contain sub-components. You can think of a component as a
"part."
Components can be saved as a separate file. An external component is another design inserted as a
component of your design. Making the component independent prevents changes from being made to
the external component file. You can also create an external component by saving a component as a
separate file.
See Lightweight components, Assembly
Constant-radius round
Default configuration for a fillet. The radius of the rounded corner is uniform across the length of the line
or edge.
See Fillet, Variable radius round
Construction line
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Shape drawn with a Sketch tool to help you create an accurate sketch. Construction lines become axes in
3D. They are also useful for creating mirrors.
Context menu
In the SpaceClaim user interface, a list of functions specific to the operation that you are performing.
Access the context menu by right-clicking in the design window.
Converging lines
Non-parallel lines. With the Dimension tool, you can annotate converging lines at a virtual sharp.
Coordinates
Method of inputting points based on distance and angle.
 Absolute coordinates are measured from the origin (x and y for 2D and x, y, z for 3D).
 Relative coordinates are measured from the selected point (x and y for 2D and x, y, z for 3D).
 Polar coordinates are measured by entering values for distance and angle.
Corner
See Fillet (interior corner) or Round (exterior corner)
Cross-section mode
Mode used to edit solids by working with their edges and vertices in cross-section. In this mode, pulling a
line pulls a face, and pulling a vertex pulls an edge.
To create a cross-section view, you select the face that will be used to set the cross-section plane.
Hatching is used to show the intersection of the cross-section plane and a solid.
Cross-section view
One of the view selections for drawing sheets. Cross-section view shows a cross-section through your
design. You create a cross-section view from one of the other views on the drawing sheet.
See General view, Projected view, and Detail view
Curvature
Analysis tool that displays a fringe graph or color shading to represent the curvature along curves or
edges. Values indicate how curvy or "swoopy" the curve or surface is at each point.
Curve
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
In 3D, any line in space.
Curve center
A small cross that appears on the sketch grid at the center of a circle, ellipse, polygon, or arc.
Curved slot
A slot created by pulling a hole along the axis of a driving cylinder. A 360 degree curved slot is a round
cut.
See Radial slot
Cutter object
When using the Combine tool to split a solid or surface, the Cutter object is the solid or surface you use to
cut the target. Use the Select Cutter tool guide to select the Cutter object.
Cylindrical face
The surface of a cylinder, formed by points at a fixed distance from the axis of the cylinder.
Datum
Object that is assumed to be an exact size and shape, and be in an exact location, that is used to locate or
establish geometric relationship of other objects.
Datum symbol
Symbol attached to a point, axis, or plane that must be referenced for machining and inspection.
Design
2D or 3D model that contains at least one top-level component.
Design component
See component
Design window
Area in SpaceClaim user interface displaying your model or assembly. Also known as Workspace.
Detach
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Create separate surfaces from individual pieces of a sketch, or objects or faces in 3D. You can detach
protrusions to move them with the Move tool's Detach First option.
Detail
Aspects of a design incorporated to communicate with others or submit the design for review. Use the
tools on the Detailing tab to annotate designs, create drawing sheets, and review design changes. You can
customize detailing settings to conform to standards or create your own custom style.
Detail view
One of the view selections for drawing sheets. Detail view creates an enlarged view of a particular area,
magnifying a portion to show more detail. You create a detailed view from one of the other views on the
drawing sheet.
See General view, Projected view, and Cross-section view
Dimension
Annotation on a drawing showing measurement of an edge or face. Use the Dimension tool to add
measurements to your design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup.
Dimensional sketching
Precise sketching by entering measurement values for the current line or relative to other lines and points.
See Dimensions
Dimensions
Values or expressions you enter for precise control during the creation or modification of a design. You
can dimension every element, from lines in sketches to faces of solids.
See Ordinate dimensions, Progressive dimensions, Ruler dimension
Document
A SpaceClaim file (.scdoc) that may contain any combination of design versions, associated drawing
sheets, and 3D markup slides.
Draft
Angle or taper on an object that facilitates removal from a mold or die. You draft by pulling one or more
faces around about another face that you selected as the pivot. You can add or cut material as you pull.
Draft faces
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
See Draft
Driving cylinder
Shape used when pulling a hole to create a curved or radial slot. You select the face or axis of the driving
cylinder to guide the shape of the slot.
Driving dimension
Ruler dimension created with the Move, Pull, or Select tool and saved within a group.
Driving edge
Edge you select to drive the change when using the Pull tool. Select a driving edge for revolves, directed
extrusions, sweeps, and drafts. The driving edge is shown in blue.
Driving face
Face you select to drive the change when using the Pull tool. Select a driving face for revolves, directed
extrusions, sweeps, and drafts. The driving face is shown in blue.
DWG
AutoCAD native drawing format. SpaceClaim can open and insert drawings, parts, and assemblies.
Drawings can be inserted as layouts. SpaceClaim can export parts, assemblies, drawing sheets, and 3D
markup slides.
DXF
Drawing Interchange Format or Drawing Exchange Format. CAD data file format developed by Autodesk
for enabling data interoperability between AutoCAD and other programs.
SpaceClaim can open and insert drawings, parts, and assemblies. Drawings can be inserted as layouts.
SpaceClaim can export parts, assemblies, drawing sheets, and 3D markup slides.
Eccentric
Not sharing the same center.
Edge
3D object composed of a single outside boundary of a feature. A line sketched in 2D becomes an edge
when you pull your sketch into 3D.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Edge chain
Tangent chain; a continual series of edges that are connected edge-to-edge. Double-clicking an edge in
the chain selects the entire chain.
Edge loop
All of the edges around a face; a continual series of edges that are connected edge-to-edge forming a
closed loop. Double-clicking an edge in the loop selects the entire loop.
Edge tangency
When you blend between two faces, the blend surface begins tangent to the edges of the initial faces and
ends tangent to the edges of the end faces. By deciding which edges you do not want to use for
tangency, you can create a blend with or without the effects of the edges.
Edit faces as a blend
Using the Edit as Blend tool to move or orient blend planes to edit a face as a blend.
See Blend plane, Blend surface
Ellipse
Geometric shape described as a circle viewed at an angle; oval with two centers of equal radius.
Entity
Term used to refer to any object in a 2D sketch or 3D drawing.
Exploded assembly
View of components in which objects are shown along an axis line.
Extents
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The outer boundaries of the objects you have drawn.
Extrude
To pull a face along with its edges. The edges extend to bound the extruded face, creating a new section
defined by the edges.
Face
Side or other surface of a solid. Some examples are the inside surface of a hole or the six sides of a
rectangular solid.
See Surface
Face grid
Horizontal and vertical lines, displayed using the Face Grid tool, that define any face or surface you select
in your design.
Face styles
Modes you can select for displaying a solid or surface. You can set the display to be transparent, opaque,
or metallic.
See Graphics styles
Facet
Simple triangular face used to describe surface geometry in STL (stereolithography) file format.
Fade scene
Make the geometry under the sketch grid more transparent, by selecting Fade Scene Under Grid in
SpaceClaim options. Selecting this option enhances the visibility of your sketch.
Fill
Use the Fill tool to simplify or clean up geometry by extending surrounding faces to eliminate a selection.
The selected region is filled in or healed with the surrounding surface or solid.
Fillet
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Rounded corner at the intersection of two lines or edges; concave intersection between two surfaces. Fillet
refers to an interior corner; exterior corner is known as a round. You can draw a fillet using the Create
Rounded Corner tool or by selecting the Fillet (Constant radius round) option from the Pull options.
See Round
Filleted corner
See Fillet
Filter
See Selection filter
Flag note
See Note
Fulcrum
Hinge; pivot point. When using the Move tool, you can select an object and use the Fulcrum tool guide to
move other objects around it.
Full pull
Pull tool option that enables you to revolve 360 degrees or to the next face, sweep through the full
trajectory, or blend through selected faces.
General view
One of the view selections for drawing sheets. General view makes the selected view independent of the
view used to create it.
See Projected view, Cross-section view, and Detail view
Geometric tolerances
Annotation symbols used for dimensioning geometry in technical drawings; usage is guided by ASME,
ISO, and other standards.
Golden rectangle
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
A rectangle with ratio of side lengths (approximately 1:1.618) considered by artists and architects to be
aesthetically pleasing. As you sketch a rectangle, an indicator line appears when the shape has the
proportions of a square or golden rectangle.
Graphics styles
Modes you can select for displaying a design. You can display geometry as shaded, perspective shaded,
wireframe, wireframe with hidden lines displayed in light gray, and wireframe with hidden lines removed.
You can apply styles to your entire design or drawing sheet, to individual layers, or to individual views in
your drawing sheet.
See Face styles
Grid
See Sketch grid
Grid lines
See Face grid
Groups
Sets of objects that appear in the Groups tab. You create a group from any set of selected objects.
Information such as Selection, Alt+selection, move anchoring, axis, and ruler dimension is all stored with
the group.
GTOL
See Geometric tolerance
Guides
See Tool guides
Heal
See Fill
Helix
Pull tool option that revolves the selected shape around an axis to create a screw or drill shape. You
control the height, direction, pitch, and taper.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Home view
Tool used to return the view to the Home settings. You can customize the Home view tool so that it
displays your design with a specific orientation, location, and zoom level.
Imprinted edge
A line that does not define a corner. For example, you might create an imprinted edge on a face of a cube,
if you want to divide the face and pull different parts. Imprinted edges are often created when importing
designs.
Inking a line
See Project to sketch
Interference
Edges where solids intersect each other or volumes created by the intersection of solids, surfaces, and
components in your design; can be displayed using the Analysis tools.
Intersect
SpaceClaim tool used to split solids and faces.
Inverse selection
The inverse of the current selection in the active component. For example, if you select the top face of a
cylinder, right-click and select Select > Inverse Selection, the entire cylinder except the top face will be
selected.
ISO
International Organization for Standardization standards for architectural and engineering drawing,
including guidelines for dimensioning and tolerancing. You can customize the style of your annotations to
conform to ISO standards.
See ASME, JIS
Isometric view
3D view of surfaces and edges, oriented to show the top, front, and side faces of your design. The angles
between the projection of the x, y, and z axes are all equal at 120°.
See Trimetric view
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
JIS
Japanese Standards Association standards for technical drawings. You can customize the style of your
annotations to conform to JIS standards. JIS defaults are the same as ISO, except that JIS uses third-angle
views while ISO uses first-angle views.
See ASME, ISO
K-factor
Parameter of bends in a sheet metal part used to calculate the bend radius. K-factor is a percentage of the
metal thickness and depends on factors such as the material and type of bending operation.
Relates to the depth of the neutral axis; a line within the sheet where the length does not change when
the sheet is bent. The inside of the bend is under compression, the outside is under tension, and the
neutral axis occurs somewhere between the midpoint of the material (K-factor=0.50) and a point closer to
the inside of the bend (K-factor=0.25).
Layer
Grouping mechanism for visual characteristics such as visibility and color. You can group objects on layers
to organize your drawing. Layers are especially useful when you want to show or hide annotation planes.
Layout
2D drawing mode that is most useful when you have no immediate need to generate 3D objects from the
lines in the layout. If you try to pull layout lines to 3D, they do not behave the same way that sketched
lines do.
Think of a layout as a pencil drawing made on your design. When you are ready to use your layout to
create geometry, you must project the layout lines to a sketch. Projecting a layout line to a sketch is like
inking the line.
You can import a 2D AutoCAD DXF or DWG file as a layout.
Library
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Resource available for downloading from SpaceClaim options. Provides materials and properties
selections in the Properties panel. You can select from the Materials Library and add them to your Local
Materials.
Lightweight assembly
Graphics-only representation of a design. When inserting an external file into a design, select the Enable
lightweight assemblies option to load only the component's graphic information. This improves
performance of large and complex assemblies for quicker viewing. When you are ready to work with the
component in SpaceClaim, you can load the geometry information.
Lightweight component
See Lightweight assembly
Line
A straight line, arc, or spline drawn in Sketch mode or on a layout plane. Lines have length but no area.
When you pull a sketch into 3D with the Pull tool, lines become edges.
Local materials
See Library
Markup
Slides you can create to highlight and communicate the differences between versions of a design.
Mass
Analysis tool used to display mass properties, or volume information for the solids and surfaces in your
design.
Mass properties
See Mass
Material
Property that you can assign to an object, consisting of material name and attributes such as density and
tensile strength.
Materials library
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
See Library
Mating condition
Attribute of components that specifies how they are aligned with each other. You create mating
conditions with the Assembly tools.
Measure
Tools for displaying measurement properties of the edges, faces, and solids in your design.
Mesh object
Object created by importing an STL file lightweight (facets only). Mesh objects have the ability to snap to
the facets.
Mini-toolbar
Set of tool-specific options that appears when you right-click in the Design window. You can also access
the options in the Options panel.
Mirror
Associative relationship between two faces or planes mirrored about a centerline plane or planar face. The
second object is a copy of the original; if the geometry of the original is changed, the mirrored copy is
also updated.
Use the Mirror tool to designate a face or plane as a mirror, or to create a mirror plane between two faces.
Mode
Three ways of designing in SpaceClaim: Sketch, Cross-section, or 3D. You can switch between modes at
any time.
Mouse up
See Zoom box in
Move
SpaceClaim tool used to translate or rotate geometry.
Neutral plane
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pull tool: the plane, face or edge around which you want to pivot.
Sheet metal: the line within a sheet where the length does not change when the sheet is bent; axis.
Non-planar edges
Edges that do not lie in the same plane.
See Planar edges
Normal
The vector that is perpendicular to a flat plane at the selected point. In the case of a non-flat plane, the
vector that is perpendicular to the plane tangent to the surface at the selected point.
Note
Annotation placed on a design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup. Notes contain text or symbols that you
insert and can be connected to geometry by a note leader.
Object
Anything recognizable by SpaceClaim tools. 3D objects include vertices, edges, faces, surfaces, solids,
layouts, planes, axes, and origins. 2D objects include points and lines.
Offset
Distance an edge, segment, or curve is moved or copied.
Offset baseline faces
See Offset relationship
Offset relationship
A relationship between two faces that is maintained in the 2D and 3D editing tools.
Offset relationships are created when you
 Define a relationship using the Offset tool.

 Create a sheet metal part.
 Shell a solid.
Offsetting faces
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Pulling a face without selecting the edges. The pull extends the neighboring faces without creating an
edge. The neighboring faces extend to bound the offset face, creating a new section defined by the
adjacent geometry.
Offsetting lines
Using the Offset Line tool to create an offset of any line or spline in the grid plane. A new object is created
at a specified distance from the selected object.
Options panel
Area of SpaceClaim user interface that enables you to modify functions specific to tools.
Ordinate dimensions
X or Y distances that originate from a single location, which is usually the lower left corner of the object.
Also known as datum dimensioning or baseline dimensioning
Orientation angle
Property that you define when sketching a polygon. Orientation angle determines the polygon’s rotational
position.
Origin
Zero point in coordinate system. You can insert an origin at any location in your design where you can
anchor the Move tool, enabling you to dimension from the origin or quickly move the sketch grid to the
origin. You can also insert an origin at a solid's center of mass or volume.
Origin Axis
Axis through the origin.
Orthogonal view
Projection that is constrained to regular 90° angles (top, bottom, left, and right of the current view). When
you create a projected view from one of the other views on the drawing sheet, the available projections
are orthogonal (orthographic).
Pan
Move a drawing around by dragging the drawing area around your screen; move the viewpoint laterally
relative to the drawing.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Panel
Sections of the SpaceClaim user interface that initially appear along the left side of the application
window and include: Structure panel, Layers panel, Selection panel, Groups panel, Options panel, and
Properties panel. You can dock and detach these panels.
Parasolid
Parasolid geometric modeling kernel. SpaceClaim can open and insert parts and assemblies and export
parts and assemblies.
Parent component
A component upon which other components depend. For example, in a block with a hole, the block is the
parent and the hole is the child.
Patch blend
Fill tool option that uses the initial tangency of the neighboring faces to fill the selected edges. Faces are
blended into a smooth, single-face patch, instead of extending the faces attached to the edge until they
intersect. Deselecting the Tangent extension option ignores the tangency of the neighboring faces.
Periodic blend
Pull tool option used to go all the way around when blending faces.
Periodic face
A cylinder, cone, or other revolved surface.
Pitch
Unit of length that a helix face shifts per 360º rotation; distance from one point on a thread to the
corresponding point on the next thread.
Pivot line
Line around which a face is revolved using the Pull tool.
Plan view
Head-on view.
Planar edges
Two or more edges that lie in the same plane. You can select planar edges and select the Plane tool from
the Insert ribbon group to insert the plane defined by the edges.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Planar face
Face that lies within a plane.
Plane
Construction geometry consisting of a flat surface. Planes can be used for a 2D sketch, section view of a
model, a neutral plane in a draft feature.
PMI
Product Manufacturing Information. SpaceClaim can import PMI if you check the Import Part
Manufacturing Information box when importing CATIA files.
Point
Single location in the sketch grid. 2-D object that has no height, width, or length. The origin, an axis, and a
vertex are examples of points.
Use the Point tool to sketch a point on the sketch grid. Points are useful as a dimensional reference, for
splitting, and for creating a point on a line or curve through which you want to draw a three-point circle.
Polar coordinates
See coordinates
Polygon
Complex object composed of three or more straight lines in a closed figure. Use the Polygon tool to
sketch a polygon with up to 32 sides.
Power selection
Advanced selection tool available from the Selection tab. Enables you to search for and select all objects
with geometry similar to the currently selected object.
Profile
Line in space; outline of an object; used to describe objects when sweeping or blending.
Project to sketch
Tool used to convert 2D layout lines to a sketch so you can use the layout to create geometry.
Projected view
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
One of the view selections for drawing sheets. You create a projected view from one of the other views on
the drawing sheet to show another side of the model.
See General view, Cross-section view, and Detail view
Properties panel
Area of SpaceClaim user interface that displays editable details about the selected object(s). This panel is
initially displayed on the lower left side of the screen, but can be moved.
Pull
Tool used to distort or deform geometry. Use the Pull tool to offset, extrude, revolve, sweep, draft, and
blend faces; or to round, chamfer, or extrude edges.
When converting a sketch to 3D, pulling a line creates a surface and pulling a surface creates a solid.
Quality
SpaceClaim tools for detecting anomalies or discontinuities in surfaces.
Quick Access Toolbar
Tool icons that appear at the top of the SpaceClaim user interface, next to the Application menu, and
include common Windows commands such as Open, Save, and Undo. In SpaceClaim Options, you can
customize the toolbar so that it contains the file-related shortcuts you use most often.
Radial slot
A slot created by pulling a hole toward the axis of the driving cylinder.
See Curved slot
Radiused corner
See Fillet (interior corner) or Round (exterior corner)
Reference line
Line used as the starting point for dimensioning.
Region
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
When you sketch shapes in 2D using the sketch tools, regions are formed by closed or intersecting lines.
The regions will become solids and the lines become edges when you pull your sketch into 3D with the
Pull tool.
Regular face
An unblended face. The face must be converted to a blended face before you can edit the face as a blend.
See Blend surface
Relative coordinates
See Coordinates
Remove associations
Tool that removes an associative relationship. For example, removing a polygon relationship enables you
to make changes to only one face of the polygon solid without affecting the other faces.
See Associations
Rendering
Mode available from the Properties panel for a view on a drawing sheet. Use Rendering mode to change
the Graphics style for the view. Select Inherit if you want to link the graphics style to the parent view.
See Graphics styles
Revolve
Move in a path around an axis. Use the Pull tool to revolve faces, edges, or a helix around an axis. The axis
may be a straight line, axis, or edge.
See Subtractive revolve
Revolve axis
A straight line, axis, or edge around which you revolve a face, edge, or helix.
Rotate
Design: Using the Rotate tool to spin a design 90 degrees in the plane of the screen. You can rotate your
Object: Using the Move handle to spin an object around an axis.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Rotational blend
Pull tool option used when blending faces to create cylinders and cones whenever possible.
Round
Rounded corner at the intersection of two lines or edges. Round refers to an exterior corner; an interior
corner is known as a fillet. In SpaceClaim, rounds and fillets are both called rounds.
See Fillet, Constant-radius round, Variable-radius round
Round Group
Grouping that is created each time you fill a round. You can reattach a group of rounds as long as some
portion of the original edges (or faces that bordered the edges) still exists in your design.
See Group
Ruler dimension
Option used to enter precise dimensions when pulling or moving. Dimensions may be linear when moving
or pulling, or angular when rotating.
Scale
Solid or surface: Change the size of the selected object using the Pull tool. You can scale dynamically or
by entering a scale value.
Drawing sheet or cross-section views: Magnify or shrink the view by selecting a View in the Structure tree
and editing the Properties panel.
SCDOC file
File format for SpaceClaim files (.scdoc). Files comply with the Microsoft Open Packaging Convention,
which is also used by Microsoft Office 2007. These files are actually zip archives with a special structure,
the contents of which are primarily XML data.
Section
Design mode in which you edit solids by working with their edges and vertices in cross-section. View is
cut away to show interior detail.
Section mode
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
See Section
Selection filter
Drop-down control in the status bar that can be used to limit the selection of objects. Only object types
you check will be selected; for example, only faces and edges.
Selection tab
Area of SpaceClaim user interface where you can locate objects similar to the ones selected.
See Power selection
Shell
Solid or part that is hollowed out from a selected face, leaving a shell of designated thickness.
Shell relationship
Association that stays with a solid when it is moved to another component, unless the relationship would
link two components when it is moved.
See Shell
Silhouette edge
Edge that is rotated to conceal a 3D object and appears as a 2D line.
Sketch grid
Pattern of regularly spaced lines that guides you when sketching. The sketch grid makes aligning and
drawing objects easier.
You can adjust the units and spacing of the grid, as well as how solids are displayed when the grid
appears.
Sketch mode
Mode for drawing in two dimensions using the sketching tools on the sketch grid. A sketch is a collection
of lines and other 2D objects on a sketch grid.
Sketching creates regions that can be pulled into 3D. When you pull your sketch into 3D with the Pull tool,
regions formed by intersecting lines will become solids and lines will become edges.
SLA
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
See Stereo lithography
Snap
Constrain to objects, angular and linear increments, or grid points while you are sketching or editing
solids.
You can customize the snapping behavior in SpaceClaim options. Pressing Shift while dragging snaps the
tool based on your snap settings.
You can use the Snap to grid tool to constrain or lock all drawing to grid points only.
Snap view
Tool used to display the head-on view of a face. You can also use the tool to "throw" the highlighted face
to the top, bottom, right, or left.
Solid
Object that encloses volume. A surface becomes a solid if it encloses volume.
Spin
Tool used to re-orient your design in any direction, allowing you to view it from any angle.
Spin center
Axis about which you spin your design when you use the Spin tool.
Spline
A continuously curved line, without sharp boundaries (that is, without vertices). Create a spline by defining
a set of points using the Spline tool. A spline becomes an edge when you pull it with the Pull tool.
Split
Using the Combine tool to split solids or surfaces. You select a solid or surface to use as a Cutting tool to
cut the target.
See Cutter object
STEP
Standard for the Exchange of Product model data (ISO 10303). Defines a methodology for describing
product data. You can select the STEP protocol to use to format exported SpaceClaim designs.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Stereo lithography
Technology used for rapid prototyping, in which a laser hardens successive layers of a photopolymer to
create a part with a shape defined by a computer model.
Sticky tool guide
Tool guides that are sticky appear with a double outline when clicked. After you click it, the tool guide
remains selected so you can select multiple objects by clicking on each object.
STL file
File format native to the stereo lithography CAD software created by 3D Systems. SpaceClaim can export
parts and assemblies (.stl).See Stereo lithography.
Structure tree
Display in the Structure panel that shows you each of the objects in your design. You can expand or
collapse the nodes of the tree to view the objects. You can rename objects, create, modify, replace, and
delete objects, as well as work with components.
Subtractive
Manipulation (revolve, draft, pull, etc.) of a solid in which material is removed. In SpaceClaim, the cursor
changes to - to indicate that the edit is subtractive.
Surface
Two dimensional object that has no thickness (as opposed to a face, which is part of a three-dimensional
object). A surface has area but no volume.
See Face
Surface finish symbols
Annotation you can add to a drawing that provides instructions for material removal during
manufacturing.
Sweep
Pull a surface or face along a line or edge using the Pull tool. You can sweep faces and edges, and select
straight or curved lines or edges along which to sweep. Sweeping along a spline is a pulling technique for
creating a smooth, swoopy shape.
See Trajectory
Sweep arc
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Arc created by defining a center point and two end points; drawn using the Sweep Arc tool.
Sweep circle
The circular path followed by a Swept arc.
See Swept arc
Sweep trajectory
See Trajectory
Swept arc
See Sweep arc
Tangent
Line that touches a curve (arc or circle) at only one point, without crossing over, and is perpendicular to
the radius at the point of tangency. In SpaceClaim, you can sketch a line tangent to a curve or you can
sketch an arc tangent to a line or curve.
Tangent arc
Arc that is sketched using the Tangent Arc tool, using a point on a line or curve as the starting point.
Tangent chain
See Edge chain.
Tangent edges
Transition edge between rounded or filleted faces in hidden lines visible or hidden lines removed modes
in drawings.
Tangent extension
See Patch blend
Tangent faces
Faces created by rounds or when edges are drawn on a face.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Taper
Angle of a helix or threads made on a conical surface.
See Helix, Thread
Target
The object you want to cut, when using the Combine tool to split a solid or surface.
Tessellation
An approach for data exchange between CAD programs. Tessellation represents entities such as lines and
surfaces in a CAD system with tiny triangles (polygonal data representations). Data formats such as XML
and VRML are examples of tessellated data.
Theme
Set of view navigation options used for spin, pan, and zoom.
Thickness edge
Edge across the thickness of a sheet metal wall.
Thickness face
The end face of a sheet metal wall. The thickness face is shown highlighted in orange in the image below.
Thread
Texture created on the surface of a cylinder, cone, or hole using the Annotation tools.
Three point arc
Arc created by defining a starting point, an end point, and a radius; drawn using the Three-Point Arc tool.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Tool guides
Functions that are specific to the selected tool.
Torus
Donut-shaped object created using the Pull tool to sweep a sketched shape around an axis on a circular
path.
Trajectory
Straight or curved line or edge along which you sweep a face or an edge.
Translate
Move in a plane (x, y, or z).
Trim away
Delete a line portion bounded by an intersection with a line or edge.
Trimetric view
3D view of surfaces and edges, oriented to show the top, front, and side faces of your design. Compared
to isometric view, trimetric view angles the front face slightly towards you, shows less of the side face, and
less of the top. In SpaceClaim, this is the default Home view.
See Isometric view
UV grid
See Face Grid
U-V lines
See Face Grid
Variable radius round
Fillet created from a constant-radius round by selecting one edge of the round and pulling it to a new
radius.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
See Fillet, Constant-radius round
Vee die width
Sheet metal property; sets the width of the tooling that produces a bend.
Vertex
Point that terminates a line; point at which two or more lines or edges intersect. Vertices can be selected
for sketching, dimensioning, and other operations.
View
Orientation settings that you can apply to your design, including spin, pan, and zoom. You can adjust
these settings individually or you can apply one of the following preconfigured views: Trimetric, Isometric,
Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Right, Left. You can also select Snap View and click a face to view it head-on.
Virtual sharp
Point of intersection formed by extending converging lines.
Wall face
The side face of a sheet metal wall. The two perpendicular wall faces are highlighted in orange in the
image below.
Wireframe
View mode in which all edges of the part or assembly are displayed.
World origin
Axes that set the default orientation of the design in the Design window. Display the World origin by
checking the World Origin box on the Display tab.
Zoom box in
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Tool used to pan and zoom until the design fits within a selected area.
Zoom extents
Tool used to enlarge or contract the view so that the selected face, the selected edge, or the design fills
the Design window. If you are working with a drawing sheet, Zoom extents will fit the drawing sheet to
the Design window.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
© Copyright 2012 SpaceClaim Corporation. SpaceClaim and the SpaceClaim logo are trademarks of SpaceClaim Corporation. All other names mentioned herein are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

SpaceClaim2012 SP1 UsersGuide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SpaceClaim2012 SP1 UsersGuide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SpaceClaim2012 SP1 UsersGuide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SpaceClaim 2012

Copyright Information ...................................................................................................................................... 1

Display a head-on view of the sketch view ...................................................................................................................... 101

Circles .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 175

Moving symmetrically .............................................................................................................................................................. 280

Splitting bodies and surfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 384

Cross-section views ................................................................................................................................................................... 469

Preparing designs for analysis .................................................................................................................... 525

Creating and changing edge reliefs .................................................................................................................................... 595

Using groups and dimensions in ANSYS tutorial .......................................................................................................... 710

Contains SharpZipLib Copyright © 2009 C#Code

Anti-Grain Geometry Version 2.4 Copyright © 2002-2005 Maxim Shemanarev (McSeem).

CATIA is a registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes.

Portions of this software Copyright © 2010 Google. SketchUp is a trademark of Google.

Contains DotNetBar licensed from devcomponents.com.

KeyShot is a trademark of Luxion ApS.

MatWeb is a trademark of Automation Creations, Inc.

Portions of this software Copyright © 2005 Novell, Inc. (http://www.novell.com)

Pro/ENGINEER and PTC are registered trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation.

The following tutorials are available in the Online Help:

In this tutorial, you will

 Create a bracket using SpaceClaim's

In this tutorial, you will

 Create and shell a simple solid.

Self-paced training tutorials

 Gain access through a unique user name and password

Bracket and knob assembly tutorial

In this tutorial, you will:

 Create a bracket using SpaceClaim's sketching and 3D editing tools

The tutorial should take about an hour to complete.

Create a new design document

Spin, pan, and zoom

1. Experiment with the various methods for orienting the view:

Set your design preferences

1. Click SpaceClaim Options in the Application menu .

4. Select Decimal from the Decimal/fraction drop-down.

Create the bottom of the bracket

The grid indicates that you are in Sketch mode.

2. Pull the rectangle into 3D to create the bottom of the bracket.

You can also use the D key to quickly enter 3D mode.

1. Click on the rectangular surface to select it.

2. Drag to begin adding thickness to the rectangle.

3. Type .483 and press Enter.

Create the back of the bracket

1. Extrude an edge to form a surface.

2. Select the extrude edge option in the Options panel.

3. Drag the edge upward to begin creating a surface.

2. Pull the surface into a solid.

2. Enter .483 to match the thickness of your first solid.

3. Save your work.

Round the corners

1. Round the inside corner of the bracket.

2. Round the outside corner of the bracket.

Taper the end of the bracket (Part 1)

2. Click the Point tool in the Sketch ribbon group.

Press Tab if you need to switch dimension fields.

6. Press Enter to create the point.

2. Draw an angled line.

You can use the L key as a shortcut to the Line tool.